USER’S MANUAL

TempScan / MultiScan
High-Speed Temperature & Voltage Systems

TempScan / MultiScan
446-0901 rev 4.0*372189B-01*
372189B-01© Measurement Computing Corp.

Measurement Computing
10 Commerce Way
Norton, MA 02766(508) 946-5100
Fax: (508) 946-9500
info@mccdaq.com

www.mccdaq.com

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualWarranty Information

Contact Measurement Computing by phone, fax, or e-mail in regard to warranty-related issues:
Phone: (508) 946-5100, fax: (508) 946-9500, e-mail: info@mccdaq.com

Limitation of Liability

Measurement Computing cannot be held liable for any damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product.

Copyright, Trademark, and Licensing Notice

All Measurement Computing documentation, software, and hardware are copyright with all rights reserved. No part ofthis product may be copied, reproduced or transmitted by any mechanical, photographic, electronic, or other method
without Measurement Computing’s prior written consent. IOtech product names are trademarked; other product names, asapplicable, are trademarks of their respective holders. All supplied IOtech software (including miscellaneous support
files, drivers, and sample programs) may only be used on one installation. You may make archival backup copies.

CE Notice

Many Measurement Computing products carry the CE marker indicating they comply with the safety and emissions
standards of the European Community. When applicable these products have a Declaration of Conformity stating which
specifications and operating conditions apply. You can view the Declarations of Conformity at
www.mccdaq.com/legal.aspx (CE Information page).

Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and Tips

Refer all service to qualified personnel. This caution symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment damage
under noted conditions. Follow all safety standards of professional practice and the recommendations in this manual.
Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause equipment
damage.
This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electricalshock under noted conditions.

This ESD caution symbol urges proper handling of equipment or components sensitive to damage from electrostatic
discharge. Proper handling guidelines include the use of grounded anti-static mats and wrist straps, ESD-protective bags
and cartons, and related procedures.

This symbol indicates the message is important, but is not of a Warning or Caution category. These notes can be of great
benefit to the user, and should be read.
In this manual, the book symbol always precedes the words “Reference Note.” This type of note identifies the locationof additional information that may prove helpful. References may be made to other chapters or other documentation.
Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedure, or help to clarify an issue. Tips may include additionalreference.

Specifications and Calibration
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Significant changes will be addressed in an addendum or revision to
the manual. As applicable, the hardware is calibrated to published specifications. Periodic hardware calibration is notcovered under the warranty and must be performed by qualified personnel as specified in this manual. Improper
calibration procedures may void the warranty.

Your order was carefully inspected prior to shipment. When you receive your system, carefully
unpack all items from the shipping carton and check for physical signs of damage that may haveoccurred during shipment. Promptly report any damage to the shipping agent and your sales
representative. Retain all shipping materials in case the unit needs returned to the factory.

CAUTION
Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can cause
personal injury or equipment damage. Before setting up and using yourequipment, you should read all documentation that covers your system.
Pay special attention to Warnings and Cautions.
Note:

During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals will automaticallyinstall onto your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location is in the
Programs group, which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop. Initial navigation
is as follows:
Start [Desktop “Start” pull-down menu] Programs
 IOtech ChartView
You can also access the PDF documents directly from the data acquisition CD by using
the <View PDFs> button located on the opening screen.
Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualManual Layout
Note: For benefit of those who have not yet installed their TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200, thismanual begins with a copy of the installation guide that is shipped with those products. Use theguide to install the associated software, product support, and hardware.
TempScan / MultiScan Quick Start Guide (p/n 446-0940)
Chapter 1 - System Overview provides a detailed discussion of TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200,
their features, front and rear panel descriptions, and necessary hardware configurations. Both IEEE
488 and RS-232 interfaces are covered. Also provides detailed instructions on line-voltage selection
and fuse replacement, rack-mount and bench-top installation, as well as power-up activation.
Chapter 2 – Expansion Units provides a detailed discussion of the two-slot expansion unit, Exp/10A
Expansion Unit and the ten-slot expansion unit, Exp/11A Expansion Unit. This chapter covers, theirfeatures, front and rear panel descriptions, and necessary hardware configurations.
Chapter 3 – Scanning Cards discusses the three scanning card options available to the TempScan/1100
unit: The TempTC/32B thermocouple scanning card, the TempV/32B volts scanning card, and the
TempRTD/16B RTD scanning card. It also discusses the two scanning card options available to theMultiScan/1200 unit: The MTC/24 thermocouple/volt scanning card and the MHV/24 high-voltage
scanning card.
Chapter 4 - System Configuration discusses TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 memory allocation, therequired configuration of channels, scans, acquisitions, and triggers, as well as the additional
configuration of alarms, data format, and power-up.
Chapter 5 - System Operation discusses how the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 system operates.
This includes the operation of the acquisition buffer, the digital input/output, the High/Low/Last(HLL) Registers, the Status and Event Reporting Registers, as well as the channels.
Chapter 6 - System Calibration states how to access ChartView’s built-in automated calibration feature
and also discusses the manual calibration for the TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200 units, and fortheir respective scanning cards.
SoftwareChartView discusses the ready-to-use Windows-based data-logging software that features a strip-chartstyle graphical interface. The various windows, toolbar buttons and menu items are described andexplained.
ViewXL discusses the ViewXL Microsoft Excel Add-In. The application provides setup and dataacquisition for personal computers running 32-bit versions of Windows. The features of Excel andChartView combine seamlessly to form a powerful data acquisition tool.
Appendices
Appendix A - API Command Reference discusses the entire command set covering both the
TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200 units. The command syntax, interpretation, and reference areprovided. The description format of the individual API commands includes the command type,execution, syntax, description, and an example program excerpt.
Appendix B – IEEE 488, Serial, and ASCII - This appendix provides background information
concerning the IEEE 488 bus, the serial bus, and ASCII controls.
Appendix C - Program Examples in Quick Basic. This appendix is included as a reference for thoseindividuals who are interested in writing their own programs for use with MultiScan/1200 and/or
TempScan/1100.

Information which may have changed since the time of printing will be found in a README.TXT file ondisk, or in an addendum to the manual.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

879596v

vi

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualTable of Contents
TempScan/MultiScan Quick Start(p/n 446-0940)
1 - System Overview
Introduction ...... 1-1
TempScan/1100 ...... 1-1
MultiScan/1200 ...... 1-1
Front Panel Indicators ...... 1-2
Rear Panel Switches & Connectors ...... 1-3
TempScan/1100 & MultiScan/1200
Specifications ...... 1-4

Hardware Configuration ...... 1-7
IEEE 488 Configuration ...... 1-8
RS-232/422 Serial Configuration ...... 1-9
Calibration Protection Configuration ...... 1-13
Digital I/O Configuration ...... 1-13
TTL Output & Trigger Input
Configuration ...... 1-14
Expanded Memory Configuration ...... 1-15
Scanning Card & Channel Expansion ...... 1-16

Power Line & Fuse Configuration ...... 1-17
Introduction ...... 1-17
Line Voltage Selection ...... 1-18
Fuse Replacement ...... 1-20

Rack-Mount & Bench-Top Assembly ...... 1-21
Rack Mount ...... 1-21
Bench Top ...... 1-21

Power-Up Activation ...... 1-22

2 – Expansion Units
Exp/10A Expansion Unit ...... 2-1
Introduction ...... 2-1
Front Panel Indicators ...... 2-1
Rear Panel Switches & Connectors ...... 2-2
Exp/10A Specifications ...... 2-3

3 – Scanning Cards
TempScan Scanning Cards ...... 3-1
TempTC/32B Thermocouple Scanning
Card ...... 3-2
TempV/32B Voltage Scanning Card ...... 3-4
TempRTD/16B RTD Scanning Card ...... 3-6

MultiScan Scanning Cards ...... 3-7
MTC/24 Thermocouple/Volt Scanning
Card ...... 3-8
MHV/24 High-Voltage Scanning Card ...... 3-10

4 – System Configuration
Introduction …… 4-1
Memory Allocation …… 4-2
Measuring Modes(MultiScan/1200 Only) …… 4-2
Line-Cycle Integration / High-Speed MultiChannel Mode …… 4-3
Single-Channel High-Speed Burst Mode …… 4-5

Required Configuration …… 4-6
Channel Configuration …… 4-7
Scan Configuration …… 4-9
Acquisition Configuration …… 4-13
Trigger Configuration …… 4-16

Additional Configuration …… 4-18
Alarm Configuration …… 4-19
Stamp Configuration …… 4-22
Data Format Configuration …… 4-26
Power-Up Configuration …… 4-32

Exp/10A Hardware Configuration ...... 2-4
Master/Slave Connection ...... 2-4
Slave Configuration ...... 2-5
Channel Assignment ...... 2-5

Exp/11A Expansion Unit ...... 2-7
Introduction ...... 2-7
Front Panel Indicators ...... 2-7
Rear Panel Switches & Connectors ...... 2-7
Exp/11A Specifications ...... 2-8

Exp/11A Hardware Configuration ...... 2-9
Master/Slave Connection ...... 2-9
Slave Configuration ...... 2-10

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manualvii

5 – System Operation
Acquisition Buffer …… 5-1
Buffer Organization …… 5-2
Buffer Query Operation …… 5-4
Buffer Read Operations …… 5-5
Buffer Overrun …… 5-11

High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers …… 5-13
Contents of the HLL Registers …… 5-13
Access to the HLL Registers …… 5-14
Comparing Buffered Data to HLL Data …… 5-18

Status-Reporting & Mask Registers …… 5-18
Theory of Operation …… 5-21
Status-Reporting Registers …… 5-21
Mask Registers …… 5-28
Using Status-Reporting Registers …… 5-28

Additional Operation …… 5-28
Trigger Latency …… 5-28
Real-Time Clock …… 5-28
Open Thermocouple & Range Error
Checking …… 5-28
Software Digital Filtering(TempScan/1100 Only) …… 5-28

6 – System Calibration
Manual Calibration and
Software-Automated Calibration …… 6-1
Calibration Setup …… 6-2
Calibration Properties …… 6-2
Calibration Protection …… 6-2
Calibration Status …… 6-3
Calibration Password …… 6-3

Calibration of Master Chassis …… 6-4
Calibration of Scanning Cards …… 6-6
Calibration of Thermocouple Scanning
Cards …… 6-8
Calibration of Voltage Scanning Cards …… 6-12
Calibration of RTD Scanning Cards …… 6-13

SoftwareChartView Software Reference
ViewXL

viii

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualAppendix A - API Command Reference
Introduction …… A-2
Command Syntax …… A-2
Command Interpretation …… A-3
Command Summary …… A-6

Command Reference …… A-11
Command Description Format …… A-11
The Commands …… A-11
@ - Trigger On Command …… A-12
*B - Flush Acquisition Buffer …… A-13
*C - Clear Channel Configuration …… A-14
*F - Restore Factory Settings …… A-15
*G - Set RTD Gain Calibration Reference … A-16
*K - Change Calibration Keyword …… A-17
*P - Adjust Calibration Card Pots …… A-18
*R - Reset Power-On …… A-19
*S - Set Power-Up Configuration …… A-20
*T - Set Scan Time Stamping …… A-21
*W - Set Software Digital Filtering …… A-22
A - Assign Alarm Output …… A-23
A# - Set Scan Alarm Stamping …… A-24
C - Configure Channels …… A-25
C# - Select Cards …… A-28
D# - Set Relay Make Time …… A-29
E - End Calibration Mode …… A-30
E? - Query Error Status …… A-31
F - Set Data Format …… A-32
F# - Set Burst Mode Frequency …… A-34
G - Calibrate Channel Gain …… A-35
H - Calibrate Channel Offset …… A-36
I - Set Scan Interval …… A-37
I# - Set Digital Input Stamping …… A-38
J - Calibrate Cold Junction Offset …… A-39
K - Enter Calibration Mode …… A-40
L - Set Trigger Level …… A-41
L# - Set Scan Rate …… A-42
M - Set SRQ Mask …… A-43
M# - Set Measuring Mode …… A-44
N - Set Event Mask …… A-45
O - Set Digital Output …… A-46
P - Program Trigger Times …… A-47
Q - Set Query Terminator …… A-48
QC? - Query Card Data …… A-49
R - Read Buffered Data …… A-50
R# - Read Last Readings …… A-51
S - Set Real-Time Clocks …… A-52
T - Set Trigger Configuration …… A-53
U - User Status …… A-55
V - Set User Terminator …… A-58
W# - Set Averaging Weight …… A-59
X - Execute …… A-60
Y - Set Counts …… A-61
? - Query …… A-62

Appendix C – Program Examples
in Quick BasicIntroduction …… C-1
Reading HLL Status …… C-3
TempScan/1100 …… C-3
MultiScan/1200 …… C-4

Reading HLL Data from Thermocouple &Volts Cards …… C-5
TempScan/1100 …… C-5
MultiScan/1200 …… C-6

Acquiring Pre- & Post-Trigger Data at
Different Rates …… C-7
TempScan/1100 …… C-7
MultiScan/1200 …… C-9

Acquiring Pre- & Post-Trigger Data at theSame Rate …… C-11
TempScan/1100 …… C-11
MultiScan/1200 …… C-13

Operating Alarms …… C-15
TempScan/1100 …… C-15
MultiScan/1200 …… C-17

Using the IEEE 488 SRQ with
Alarms …… C-19
TempScan/1100 …… C-19
MultiScan/1200 …… C-21

Acquiring Buffer Data in Binary
Format …… C-23
TempScan/1100 …… C-23
MultiScan/1200 …… C-25

Acquiring HLL Data in Binary
Format …… C-27
TempScan/1100 …… C-27
MultiScan/1200 …… C-29

Using Auto Re-arm to Capture Multiple
Trigger Blocks …… C-31
TempScan/1100 …… C-31
MultiScan/1200 …… C-33

Acquiring Burst Mode Data (MultiScan/1200
Only) …… C-35

Appendix B – IEEE488, Serial, and ASCIIIEEE 488 Bus & Serial Bus Lines …… B-1
IEEE 488 Bus Commands …… B-2
ASCII Codes …… B-3
ASCII Code Summary …… B-3
ASCII Code Details …… B-5
Abbreviations …… B-10

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manualix

x

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualTempScan & MultiScan

Quick Start

High-Speed Temperature & Voltage Scanning Instruments
Before you get started

Verify that you have the following items.
TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
Data Acquisition CD (8.1.2 or higher)
Monitor: SVGA, 1024 x 768 screen resolution
Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP users:
PC with Intel™ Pentium [or equivalent]; 1 GHz
512 MB memory; 10 GB disk space
Windows Vista users:
PC must be Windows Vista Premium Ready

Step 1 - Install Software

IMPORTANT ! – Software must be installed first1.

Close all running applications on the host PC.

2.

Insert the Data Acquisition CD (8.1.2 or higher) into your CD-ROM drive and wait for the PC to auto-run. An Opening
Screen will appear. If AutoRun is disabled: (a) right click Windows Start menu, (b) select Explore; and (c) double-click
MasterSetup.exe. As an alternative to using the CD, you can download software from: www.mccdaq.com/software

3.

Click the <ENTER SETUP> button.
Note: If you are downloading software from our website, follow instructions provided there

4.

From the hardware selection screen [which follows a licensing agreement], select the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200, as
applicable; then follow the on-screen instructions.

NOTE: To enable all ChartView features: (a) From ChartView’s main window, open the File pull-down menu,(b) select Authorization, (c) enter C3523DFA6C0A in the dialog box and apply the code.

Step 2 – Check Hardware
1.
2.

Verify that the voltage stated on the sticker [near the power switch] matches the voltageof your intended AC power supply. If you need to change the voltage, refer to youruser’s manual.
Check the DIP switch, located on the rear panel. Your user’s manual discusses setting
options.

Step 3 - Connect to the Host PC
Prior to making a serial connection, make sure that the host PC’s serial(COM) port is available and properly configured to match the DIP
switch setting in Step 2. Do this by navigating from the Windows
Desktop, i. e., Control Panel
SystemDevice Manager tab, thenclicking on Ports (COM & LPT).
Using a serial communications cable, connect the TempScan [or MultiScan] to the host
PC by one (and only one) of the following methods:

USB

Requires an adapter kit. To connect the TempScan [or MultiScan] to a USB port you will need a RS-232 to
USB Interface Adapter Kit p/n CA-232-USB-KIT (available from MCC). Refer to the associated Quick Start
document (QS RS-232_to_USB_Interface.pdf) for a list of the kit’s contents and for RS-232 to USB conversion
instructions. The pdf is included on your Data Acquisition CD (rev 8.1.2 and higher).

RS-232Requires a DB9F to DB9F serial communication cable. Connect the cable from the TempScan [or MultiScan]
Serial Port to a RS-232 Serial Port on the host PC.

RS-422Requires a DB9F to DB25F serial communication cable. Connect the DB9F to the TempScan [or MultiScan]
Serial Port. Connect the DB25F to an RS-422 Serial Port on the host PC.

Note 1:

MCC offers a CA-47 three-connector serial communications cable. The single cable has two DB9F connectors and one DB25F
connector. Note that the CA-232-USB-KIT includes a CA-47 cable.

446-0940, rev 4.0

Use only
one ofthese 3connection
options.

324602C-01

Step 4 – Connect Input Signals
CAUTION! Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap, whenhandling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due toelectrostatic discharge.
Insert the appropriate wires into the selected screw-terminal sockets of your scanning card to make the channel input connections. Eachscanning card contains screw-terminal blocks for making quick input connections. Labeling is provided on the card for channel
identification. Note that tie-wraps can be used in conjunction with the card’s tie-down holes to provide strain relief and to keep thechannel wires organized.
When making differential voltage measurements, you should ensure that one of the common terminal blocks isconnected to the common of the unit being measured.
CAUTION! TempScan/1100 scanning cards are designed for and supported only by the TempScan/1100 master
unit. MultiScan/1200 scanning cards are designed for and supported only by the MultiScan/1200 master unit. Useof a wrong card can cause operating errors and possibly damage equipment.
Do not connect the power to any devices that are connected to the scanning card inputs until after the scanning
cards have been properly installed in the scan device.

1.
2.
3.
4.

When the channel input connections on the scanning card are ready, make sure that the POWER pushbutton on the scan
device (TempScan or MultiScan) is in the "OFF" position (extended out).
Plug the CA-1 power cable into the unit and then into the proper AC power outlet. Do not connect the power to any
devices that are connected to the scanning card inputs at this time.
Install the scanning card into the INPUT CARD slot of the unit.
After the scanning card is installed, connect the power lines to the devices that are connected to the scanning card inputs.
Then make other connections as applicable to your system.

Step 5 – Apply Power to the System
1.
2.
3.

Turn on the host PC.
Turn on the scan device (TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200) by pushing in the POWER pushbutton.
Turn on any applicable devices that are connected to the scanning card inputs.

Step 6 – Start ChartView, Configure the System, and Collect Data
1.

From Windows desktop, double-click on the ChartView icon.

2.

Choose the <Select Device> button.

3.

Select RS-232 and click <OK>. Click <OK> again.
Note: For changes from default, refer to the user’s manual.

4.

In the Automatic Chart Creation portion of the window, click <Create Charts> to automatically create a chart display configuration.
Note that a Channel and Alarm Setup dialog box will appear above the main window.

5.

Click the <Make All Channels Active> button to enable all channels.

6.

Click the <Enable SpreadSheet Reading> button. Click <OK>.

7.

Push the <Start Charts and Indicators> button. Charts will begin scrolling.

Reference Notes:
Documents are automatically installed onto your PC’s hard-drive as a part of product support at the time of software
installation. The default location is the Programs group. It can be accessed via the Windows Desktop Start Menu.
Documents can also be read directly from the data acquisition CD.

*324602C-01*
324602C-01

System Overview

1

Introduction ...... 1-1

TempScan/1100 ...... 1-1
MultiScan/1200 ...... 1-1
Front Panel Indicators ...... 1-2
Rear Panel Switches & Connectors ...... 1-3
TempScan/1100 & MultiScan/1200 Specifications ...... 1-4

Hardware Configuration ...... 1-7

IEEE 488 Configuration ...... 1-8
RS-232/422 Serial Configuration ...... 1-9
Calibration Protection Configuration ...... 1-13
Digital I/O Configuration ...... 1-13
TTL Output & Trigger Input Configuration ...... 1-14
Expanded Memory Configuration ...... 1-15
Scanning Card & Channel Expansion ...... 1-16

Power Line & Fuse Configuration ...... 1-17
Introduction ...... 1-17
Line Voltage Selection ...... 1-18
Fuse Replacement ...... 1-20

Rack-Mount & Bench-Top Assembly ...... 1-21
Rack Mount ...... 1-21
Bench Top ...... 1-21

Power-Up Activation ...... 1-22

Introduction
All TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200 components are carefully inspected prior to shipment.
When you receive your temperature-and-voltage measurement system, carefully unpack all items from theshipping carton and check for any damage which may have occurred during shipment. Promptly report thedamage to the shipping agent and your sales representative. Retain all shipping materials in case you must
return the unit to the factory. Refer to the QuickStart Guide at the front of this manual for installation
instructions.
The TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200 are high-speed, compact, rack-mountable instruments thatmeasure up to 992 or 744 channels of temperature or voltage, respectively. Because of their uniquearchitecture, both instruments offer unrivaled low cost per channel. They connect to a computer via
IEEE 488 or RS-232 interfaces, or via modem, and can be disconnected from the computer for
stand-alone operation.

TempScan/1100
The TempScan/1100 is well-suited for temperature and lower-voltage measurement because its solid-statescanning provides temperature readings at speeds up to 960 channels per second, an important feature inapplications that require monitoring of tens or hundreds of channels.

MultiScan/1200
The MultiScan/1200 is ideal for temperature and voltage measurements that require channel-to-channel
isolation. The unit provides 500 V of channel-to-channel isolation for voltage, and 200 V of channel-tochannel isolation for thermocouples. The MultiScan/1200 uses relays to provide isolation and to scanthermocouples and volts at up to 147 channels per second. The unit can also digitize waveforms ona single channel at up to 20 kHz.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-1

Front Panel Indicators

Ten (10) LED indicators on the front panel of either the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 display thestatus of the temperature-and-voltage measurement system:ALARM
TRIGGERSCAN
SEND
RECEIVETALK
LISTEN
SRQ
ERROR
POWER

1-2

System Overview

ON when an alarm has occurred. The indicator remains ON until the alarm condition
clears. OFF when no alarm condition exists.
Flashes when Armed and waiting for a Trigger; is ON continuously when triggered; is OFF
when data collection is finished. The Trigger is also turned OFF by IEEE DCL or SDC.
ON when the unit is storing a channel scan in its internal buffer.
(For RS-232 operation only) ON when transmitting data to the serial interface.
(For RS-232 operation only) ON when receiving data from the controlling computer.
(For IEEE 488 operation only) ON when the unit is in the Talker state, OFF when the unit isin the Idle or Listener state.
(For IEEE 488 operation only) ON when the unit is in the Listener state, OFF when the unit
is in the Idle or Talker state.
(For IEEE 488 operation only) ON when the unit has generated a Service Request (SRQ),
OFF when no SRQ is pending. For more information, see command Set SRQ Mask (M).
ON when an error has occurred, OFF when no error condition exists. For more
information, see command Query Error Status (E?).
ON when power is applied to the unit and the power switch on the back panel is in the ON
position (depressed). OFF if power is not present.

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualRear Panel Switches & Connectors

Two (2) switches, seven (7) connectors, one (1) grounding nut, and one (1) input card slot on the rear panelof either the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 provide power, IEEE 488 addressing, triggering, a single
point grounding node, and I/O connections.
Used to turn power to the unit ON and OFF. When the switch is in
the depressed position the power is ON. When in the extended
position, the power is OFF.
For IEEE 488: Used for selecting IEEE 488 communication and bus
address.
For RS-232: Used for selecting RS-232 serial
communication, handshaking, parity and baud rate.
Microswitch 9 is used to enable/disable the hardware
protected portion of NV-RAM.
Provides power for the unit. Internally configurable for either 105125 or 210-250 VAC, 50/60Hz, plus fuse circuit breaker.
Port for the IEEE 488 interface.
DB9 serial port for operation at remote distances from controllingcomputer supports 300 to 9,600 baud using RTS/CTS or XON/XOFF
handshaking (XON/XOFF for ASCII transmissions only).

Power Switch

DIP Switch

Power Connector
IEEE 488 Connector
RS-232C Connector

Note: With the optional RS-232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit (p/n CA-232USB-KIT) you can connect the RS-232 Serial Port to a USB Port on thehost PC. Refer to QS RS-232_to_USB_Interface.pdf (available on
your Data Acquisition CD, 8.1.2 and higher) for details.

TTL Output Connector

Trigger Input Connector
Alarms & Digital I/O Connector
Master/Slave Connector

Grounding Screw

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

BNC TTL scan output signal occurs for each channel scan; used forsynchronizing other equipment with TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 acquisition.
BNC trigger input for starting and/or stopping acquisition of the TTL
output signal.
DB50 port offers easy access to Alarms and Digital I/O(32 digital outputs and 8 digital inputs)
DB25 master/slave port connects to Exp/10A and/or Exp/11A
expansion slave units to support applications of up to 992 channels
with the TempScan/1100 master unit, or up to 744 channels with theMultiScan/1200 master unit.
An external single-point grounding node has been supplied for (butnot limited to) thermocouple shield termination.

949191

System Overview 1-3

TempScan/1100 & MultiScan/1200 Specifications
CAUTION
Please read this manual carefully! If equipment is used in any manner not
specified in this manual, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
Note:

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Channels
Number of Slots: One (1) slot
Number of Channels (TempScan/1100): Up to 32 differential thermocouple or voltage inputs, or up to
16 RTD inputs; accepts TempTC/32B, TempV/32B, or TempRTD/16B scanning modules
Number of Channels (MultiScan/1200): Up to 24 differential thermocouple or voltage inputs; accepts
MTC/24 or MHV/24 scanning modules.
Channel Attributes: High and low set points; hysteresis values for high and low set points.
Scan Sequence: Any combination of temperature and voltage channels may be scanned, but channels arescanned in ascending numerical order.
Scan Interval: Absolute time between scans (hh:mm:ss.s); min = 00:00:00.0, max = 99:59:59.9.
Note that specifying a value of 00:00:00.0 results in no delay between channel scans.
Scanning Modes (TempScan/1100): For thermocouples up to 500 feet: 960 channels/sec @ 60 Hz;
800 channels/sec @ 50 Hz; For thermocouples over 500 feet: 240 channels/sec @ 60 Hz,
200 channels/sec @ 50 Hz.
Scanning Modes (MultiScan/1200): For multi-channel scanning: 147 channels/sec @ 50 or 60 Hz;
For 32-point line-cycle averaging enabled: 44 channels/sec @ 60 Hz, 38.5 channels/sec @ 50 Hz;
For single-channel burst mode: 1 channel @ 20K samples/sec.
Triggers
Installation Category: For CE: Category 1.
Programmable Triggering: Temperature or Voltage level (above or below), absolute time of day, alarm
condition (on or off), IEEE GET, IEEE TALK, external TTL trigger (rising or falling), specified
number of readings.
Temperature-Level Trigger: Programmable value for any one channel. For MultiScan/1200: This trigger
not available when in single-channel burst mode.
TTL Trigger: Programmable for rising or falling edges.
Pre-Trigger Count: Programmable integer (< memory size -1).
Post-Trigger Count: Programmable integer.
Trigger Input Connector: External BNC connector
Trigger Output Connector: External BNC connector

1-4

System Overview

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualData Storage & Format
Storage: 128 K reading (256 Kbyte) standard; optional 500 K reading (1 Mbyte), 2 M reading (4 Mbyte), 4
M reading (8 Mbyte).
Data Formats: ASCII and binary; binary format returns a 16-bit compensated and linearized temperature
value (0.1°C/bit); user-programmable for hi/low byte or low/hi byte. Note that high speed DMA
transfers are binary format only.
Statistical Parameters: High, Low, and Last available per channel. For MultiScan/1200: Not available
when in single-channel burst mode.
Time Stamping: Available for each scan group and for each channel’s high, low, and last parameters.
For MultiScan/1200: Not available when in single-channel burst mode.
Time Format: Absolute Time/Date stamping (hh:mm:ss.mil,MM/DD/YY), relative Time/Date stamping(+hh:mm:ss.mil,DDDDDDD) and scan interval timebase (hh:mm:ss.t). For MultiScan/1200: Notavailable when in single-channel burst mode.
Alarm Stamp: Available for each scan group. For MultiScan/1200: Not available when in single-channel
burst mode.
Digital Input Stamp: Available for each scan group. For MultiScan/1200: Not available when in singlechannel burst mode.
IEEE 488 Interface

CAUTIONThe IEEE 488 terminal must only be used to control a non-isolated IEEE 488
system. The common mode voltage (cable shell to earth) must be zero.
Interface Use: Digital communication (as opposed to analog) for IEEE 488 compliant computer platforms,
as well as IEEE 488 compliant platform-independent configurations. Messages sent 1 byte (8 bits) ata time. Supports data rates up to 1 Mbyte/sec. Up to 15 devices can be connected to one bus.
Total bus length up to 20 meters. Allowable cable distance between devices is up to 2 meters.
Message transactions are hardware handshaked.
Installation Category: For CE: Category 1.
Implementation: SH1, AH1, T6, TE4, L4, LE4, SR1, PP0, RL0, DC1, DT1, C0, E1.
Programmable Parameters: Alarm set points, thermocouple type, temperature units, Trigger level,
Pre-Trigger and Post-Trigger scan interval, Trigger mode, SRQ mask, scan count, Pre-Trigger count,
digital input, digital output, real time settings, data output format, and terminators.
Data Transfer Speed: Up to >300 Kbytes/s.
Connector: Standard IEEE 488 connector with metric studs.
RS-232 Serial Interface

CAUTIONThe RS-232 terminal is only for connecting devices having signals at serial
communications levels.
Installation Category: For CE: Category 1.
Baud Rates: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 and 9600.
Data Bits: 8.
Stop Bits: 1.
Parity: Even, Odd, None.
Handshaking: RTS/CTS, XON/XOFF (for ASCII transmissions only).
Connector: Male DB-9.
Note: With the optional RS-232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit (p/n CA-232-USB-KIT) you can connect the RS-232 SerialPort to a USB Port on the host PC. Refer to QS RS-232_to_USB_Interface.pdf (available on your Data AcquisitionCD, 8.1.2 and higher) for details.
TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-5

Digital I/O Interface & Alarms
Installation Category: For CE: Category 1.
Number of Digital Inputs: 8 bits, TTL level compatible.
Number of Digital Outputs: 32 bits, TTL level compatible. Can be programmed as alarms. Note that the
32 TTL outputs can be set or cleared via program control.
Alarm Conditions: May be detected by SRQ or by software query (SPoll or U command).
Alarm Update Rate: Alarms are updated whenever a channel assigned to an alarm is measured.
Connector: Female DB50 50-pin (32 Alarms, 8 digital inputs, 10 ground pins), mating connector supplied.
GeneralInstallation Category: For CE: Category 2 for Line Voltage Input terminal. All other terminals are
Category 1.
Warm Up: 1 hour to rated accuracy.
Master/Slave Port: Female DB-25.
Chassis Ground Connection: Screw terminal.
Dimensions: 425 mm wide × 305 mm deep × 45 mm high (16.75” × 12” × 1.75”).
Weight: 3.62 kg. (8 lbs.).
Operating Environment: For standard: Indoor use, 0 to 50°C; 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) to 35°C;
linearly derate 3% RH/°C from 35 to 50°C; For CE: Indoor use at altitudes below 2000 m,
0 to 40C; 0 to 80% RH up to 31C decreasing linearly 4% RH/C to 40C.
Control Switches: Power Switch, IEEE 488 or RS-232, IEEE address, handshake, parity,
baud rate, calibration memory write enable/disable.
Front Panel Indicators: LED indicators for ALARM, TRIGGER and SCAN; for SEND and RECEIVE(serial interface); for TALK, LISTEN and SRQ (for IEEE 488 interface); and for ERROR and
POWER.
Power: 105-125 or 210-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 20 VA maximum (internal slide switch).

CAUTIONLine Voltage: The protective conductor terminal on the AC line connector must
be connected to an external protective earthing system. Failure to make such aconnection will impair protection from shock.

WARNING
Service: This product contains no operator serviceable parts. Service must be
performed by qualified personnel. All terminals, including the AC line andscanning cards, must be disconnected prior to opening the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 case. Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily
injury or death!
Fuse: 1/2A, 250 V, Slo Blo, 3AG (for 105-125V power line) or 1/4A, 250V, Slo Blo, 3AG (for 210-250V
power line).

CAUTION
Fuse Failure: Fuse failure indicates a possible problem within the device circuitry.
If a fuse blows, contact a qualified service representative. Replacement fuses areto be installed by qualified service personnel with the unit disconnected from thepower source and with all other terminals disconnected. If the line voltage selector
is changed, then the fuse designated for that line voltage must be used.

1-6

System Overview

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

Calibration
Calibration of cold junction sensor: Software control of calibrated thermocouple using ChartView’s builtin calibration feature. The automated calibration function is accessed from ChartView’ Device pulldown menu using “Select Status” and then selecting “Calibration.” Note that calibration is performed
for each card and chassis in the system.
Voltage Calibration: Software control of gain and offset.
Calibration Constants: Chassis constants stored in NV-RAM. Card constants stored in card’s on-board
EEPROM.

Hardware Configuration
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is equipped with a high-speed IEEE 488 interface and an
RS-232 interface. Its IEEE 488 interface is useful in laboratory applications and enables real-time transfersof acquired data to the host computer’s hard drive for inexpensive mass storage. Its RS-232 interface isideal in applications that require the placement of instrumentation at remote distances from the controllingcomputer, such as process and environmental control.
This unit can be set up with an IEEE 488 or a RS-232 interface configuration, as determined by the DIP
switch accessible from the rear panel. This DIP switch via its nine microswitches select which command set
is to be used – IEEE 488 or RS-232 – and the operating parameters for each. The table shows the options
for its nine microswitches. Additional DIP switch settings are shown in the following sections.
Rear Panel DIP Switch
Microswitch #Label

Setting

Description
IEEE 488

RS-232

1

COMM SELECT

0IEEE 488

(N/A)

1

(N/A)

RS-232

2,3

HANDSHAKE (H/S)

00

No Handshake

No Handshake01

Software Handshake only
(XON/XOFF) (See Note)
Hardware Handshake only
(RTS/CTS)
Both Hardware and Software
Handshake

Software Handshake only
(XON/XOFF) (See Note)
Hardware Handshake only
(RTS/CTS)
Both Hardware and Software
Handshake

10
11
4,5

6,7,8

9

Note:

IEEE ADDRESS or

00

Decimal value 0

No Parity

PARITY

01

Decimal value 8

Odd Parity

10

Decimal value 16

Even Parity

11

Decimal value 24(N/A)

IEEE ADDRESS or000

Decimal value 0

300 baud

BAUD RATE

001

Decimal value 1

600 baud

010

Decimal value 21200 baud011

Decimal value 3

2400 baud

100

Decimal value 44800 baud

101

Decimal value 59600 baud (See Note)110

Decimal value 6

(N/A)

111

Decimal value 7(N/A)

CHASSIS0

Disabled

Disabled

CALIBRATIONENABLE

1

EnabledEnabled(1) XON/XOFF handshaking is valid for ASCII transmissions only. (2) At 9600 baud,
hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking and possibly software (XON/XOFF) handshaking may berequired to maintain serial performance.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-7

The rear panel DIP switch is read only during power-on or reset and should be set before applying power.
To modify any of these defaults, change the microswitch settings using a small screwdriver. The enclosure
does not need to be opened to change these settings.

IEEE 488 Configuration

One way in which the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit can be controlled, is through its IEEE 488
port connector. Consequently, when configured as an IEEE 488 bus device, the unit must have an IEEE488 bus address.
DIP Switch

For IEEE 488 operation, the single microswitch labeled COMM SELECT should be down (0) on the rear
panel DIP switch . This down (0) position is the factory default. The up (1) position is reserved for
RS-232 serial communication. When IEEE 488 operation is enabled, the five microswitches labeledIEEE ADDRESS are used to configure the required IEEE 488 bus address.
The bus address can be set from 0 through 30 and is read only at power-on or reset. The address is selectedby simple binary weighting. The switch labeled 1 is the least significant bit (LSB); 16 is the mostsignificant bit (MSB). The factory default is bus address 7. Note that if address 31 is selected, it defaults toaddress 30 because the IEEE 488 standard has reserved address 31.
The rear panel DIP switch is read only during power-on or reset and should be set before applying power.
To modify any of these defaults, change the microswitch settings using a small screwdriver. The enclosure
does not need to be opened to change these settings.

1-8

System Overview

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

RS-232/RS-422 Serial Configuration
Note:

With the optional RS-232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit (p/n CA-232-USB-KIT) you can connect
the RS-232 Serial Port to a USB Port on the host PC. Refer to QS RS-232_to_USB_Interface.pdf(available on your Data Acquisition CD, 8.1.2 and higher) for details.

Alternatively, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit can be controlled through its serial port
connector. Complete serial port configuration is accomplished by using both internal jumpers and DIP
switch settings. The internal jumpers, located on the main board behind each serial connector, are used toconfigure the port with either RS-232 or RS-422 electrical characteristics. The DIP switch, located on therear panel, is used to determine handshaking, parity, and baud rate. Furthermore, the selection of an
RS-232 or RS-422 electrical configuration determines the serial port pattern of pin connector signals, as
discussed later.
Internal Jumpers
The jumpers within the unit configure the serial port electrically as either RS-232 or RS-422. To change theserial port configuration, it is necessary to perform the following steps:

WARNING
Never disassemble the case while it is connected to the AC power line!
Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

WARNING
Never disconnect the AC power line from the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
while its scanning cards are connected to an external device! Common mode
voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or 30 Vrms at the terminals, may exist which
could cause bodily injury or death!
Note:

If disassembly or disconnections are necessary, first turn off the power, then disconnect thescanning cards, next disconnect the AC power line, and then any other cables, prior to unit
disassembly.

To Change the Serial Configuration
1.

Turn off the power, disconnect the scanning cards, the power line cord, then all other cables from theunit. For more information, see section Disconnecting & Reconnecting the System During Setup on
page 1-6.

2.

Place the unit on a flat surface. Remove the six screws on top of the case. Remove the top cover.

3.

The serial port is capable of operating in RS-232 or RS-422 mode. This selection is done via a set of
hardware jumpers located on the main board behind the serial connector. A 12-position jumper plugmust be inserted in one of the two available positions for proper operation (across JP11 and JP12 for
RS-232, across JP12 and JP13 for RS-422). These jumpers are factory set for RS-232 as shown in the
figure. To reconfigure the serial port for RS-422 operation, remove the jumper plug and reinsert it into
the lower 2 rows of jumpers.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-9

4.

If configured for RS-422, the port’s Receive Data (RxD+) and Clear to Send (CTS+) input lines may
optionally be terminated with a 100-Ohm resistor. Termination resistors are selected by positioning thetwo flea clips (labelled JP14 and JP15). These jumpers are factory set to the unterminated position,
as indicated in the previous figures. Note that when using RS-422 in a single-ended configuration,
ports must be unterminated. Termination jumpers have no effect when the port is configured for
RS-232 operation.

5.

Once the jumper(s) have been repositioned for your application, make note of the new jumper settings
for later reference.

6.

Carefully reassemble the unit.

Note:

For re-assembly, first reconnect the AC power line (with the power OFF), next reconnect thescanning cards, and then any other cables, prior to reapplying power to the entire system.

DIP Switch

To configure the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 for RS-232/RS-422 serial operation, the single
microswitch labeled COMM SELECT must be up (1) on the rear panel DIP switch. The down (0) position
is reserved for IEEE 488 communication. When serial operation is enabled, additional DIP microswitches
configure the following required parameters: Handshaking, parity, and baud rate.

1-10

System Overview

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualHandshaking. When the RS-232 port is used, the type of handshaking must be selected by the two
microswitches labeled H/S. The options available are: No handshaking, XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS or both
XON/XOFF and RTS/CTS handshaking. Note that XON/XOFF handshaking is valid for ASCII
transmissions only, and for RS-422 operation with a Macintosh, RTS/CTS handshaking is notrecommended.
Parity. The parity must be selected using the two microswitches labeled PARITY. The options provided
are: No parity, odd parity or even parity.
Baud rate. The baud rate is selected using the three microswitches labeled SERIAL BAUD RATE.
The available baud rates are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600.
Note:(1) XON/XOFF handshaking is valid for ASCII transmissions only. (2) At 9600 baud,
hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking and possibly software (XON/XOFF) handshaking may berequired to maintain serial performance. However, for RS-422 operation with a Macintosh,
RTS/CTS handshaking is not recommended.

The rear panel DIP switch is read only during power-on or reset and should be set before applying power.
To modify any of these defaults, change the microswitch settings using a small screwdriver. The enclosure
does not need to be opened to change these settings.

Serial Connector Pins
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is equipped with one DB-9S serial connector on its rear panel
and requires a DB-9P mating connector. This connector is configured as an IBM PC when RS-232 levels
are selected, and as a Macintosh when RS-422 levels are selected.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-11

A CA-47 cable connects the unit with the computer. The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 end has one
DB9 connector, and the computer end has two connectors – one for a DB9 and one for a DB25. O
ther crossover-type cables can be used if they are wired as shown in the tables. The tables list the following
four connections from the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit:To a DB9 connector configured for RS-232
To a DB25 connector configured for RS-232
To a DB9 connector configured for RS-422
To a Mini DIN8 connector configured for RS-422.
TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
To PC Connection (RS-232)

TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
To PC Connection (RS-232)

DB9 Male
Pin & Signal

Cable
Wirin
g

DB9 Female
Pin & Signal

DB9 Male
Pin & Signal

Cable
Wirin
g

DB25 Female
Pin & Signal

2

RxD-

--

3

TxD-

2

RxD-

--

2

TxD-

3

TxD-

--

2

RxD-

3

TxD-

--

3

RxD-

5

GND



5

GND

5

GND



7

GND

7

RTS+

--

8

CTS+

7

RTS+

--

5

CTS+

8

CTS+

--

7

RTS+

8

CTS+

--

4

RTS+

TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
To Macintosh Connection (RS-422)

TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
To Macintosh Connection (RS-422)

DB9 Male
Pin & Signal

Cable
Wirin
g

DB9 Male
Pin & Signal

DB9 Male
Pin & Signal

Cable
Wirin
g

Mini DIN8 Male
Pin & Signal

1

GND



3

GND

1

GND



4

GND

2

RTS+

--

7

CTS+

2

RTS+

--

2

CTS+

4

TxD+

--

8

RxD+

4

TxD+

--

8

RxD+

5

TxD-

--

9

RxD-

5

TxD-

--

5

RxD-

6

CTS+

--

6

RTS+

6

CTS+

--

1

RTS+

8

RxD+

--

4

TxD+

8

RxD+

--

6

TxD+

9

RxD-

--

5

TxD-

9

RxD-

--

3

TxD-

The following text describes the various pin connector signals:

1-12



Transmit Data Negative (TxD-): This output pin transmits serial data to an RS-232 or RS-422 device.
The serial data received is sent with the word length, baud rate, stop bits, and parity configured for theparticular port. This signal is low true.

Transmit Data Positive (TxD+): This output pin transmits serial data to an RS-422 device only.
The pin functions identically to TxD- except that its polarity is inverted. This signal is high true.

Receive Data Negative (RxD-): This input pin accepts serial data sent by an RS-232 or RS-422 device.
The serial data received is expected to match the word length, baud rate, stop bits, and parity
configuration of the particular port. This signal is low true.

Receive Data Positive (RxD+): This input pin accepts serial data sent by an RS-422 device only.
It functions identically to RxD- except that its polarity is inverted. This signal is high true.

Request To Send Positive (RTS+): This output pin is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent an
RS-232 or RS-422 device from transmitting serial data to the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit
when it is not able to accept it. When automatic RTS/CTS handshaking is selected, the unit will assert(high) the RTS+ signal when greater than 4096 memory locations are available in its internal buffers. If
available memory drops below 4096 bytes, the unit unasserts (low) the RTS+ signal.



Request To Send Negative (RTS-): This output pin is used as a hardware handshake line with an
RS-422 device only. The pin functions identically to RTS+ except that its polarity is inverted. Thissignal is low true.

System Overview

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

Clear To Send Positive (CTS+): This input pin is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent the
TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit from transmitting serial data to an RS-232 or RS-422 device
when it is not able to accept it. When RTS/CTS handshaking is selected, the unit will not Transmit Data
(TxD+) out while the CTS+ signal is un-asserted (low). When XON/XOFF or no handshaking isselected, the CTS+ line is ignored.



Clear To Send Negative (CTS-): This input pin is used as a hardware handshake line with an RS-422
device only. It functions identically to CTS+ except that its polarity is inverted. This signal is low true.

Ground (GND): This signal sets the ground reference point for the other RS-232/RS-422 input andoutput signals.

Calibration Protection Configuration
The chassis calibration constants and the calibration password are stored by the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 in Non-Volatile RAM (NV-RAM). The password is a safety feature used to prevent
unauthorized personnel from entering calibration mode and altering the calibration constants.

As a safeguard, the calibration password and chassis calibration constants are hardware protected.
This protection is enabled by setting the microswitch 9 to the down (0) position on the rear panel DIP
switch. This is the default factory setting and should remain in this position unless purposely attempting tochange the password or chassis constants.
If it is necessary to change the calibration password (via the *K command) or to recalibrate the chassis, thishardware write protection can be disabled by setting microswitch 9 to the up (1) position. For details on
calibration, see chapter System Calibration.

CAUTION
Do not forget to set back the DIP microswitch 9 to the down (0) position whencalibration is complete. Otherwise, the calibration password and calibration
constants may be corrupted and normal operation may be disrupted.

Digital I/O Configuration

Located on the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 rear panel, the DB50 digital I/O connector provides
eight (8) digital input lines and thirty-two (32) digital output lines. The figure and table locate and describe
the input, output, and ground lines of this connector.
TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-13

DB50 Digital I/O Pin Descriptions
Line
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Output 9
Output 10

Pin
1
34
18
2
35
19
3
36
20
4

Line
Output 11
Output 12
Output 13
Output 14
Output 15
Output 16
Output 17
Output 18
Output 19
Output 20

Pin
37
21
5
38
22
6
39
23
7
40

Line
Output 21
Output 22
Output 23
Output 24
Output 25
Output 26
Output 27
Output 28
Output 29
Output 30

Pin
24
8
41
25
9
42
26
10
43
27

Line
Output 31
Output 32
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8

Pin
11
44
15
48
32
16
49
33
17
50

Line
GroundGroundGroundGroundGroundGroundGroundGroundGroundGround

Pin
12
13
14
28
29
30
31
45
46
47

Each digital output line will drive five (5) standard TTL (transistor-transistor logic) loads. All digital input
lines are one-eighth (0.125) TTL loads. All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltage.
Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to the range of 0.0 to 5.3 volts. All digital
I/O lines are referenced to digital ground.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the levels described. Otherwise, the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit may be damaged in a way that is not covered by thewarranty.

TTL Output & Trigger Input Configuration

The rear panel of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit also provides two external BNC connectors:
The TTL output and the trigger input. The BNC TTL scan output is used for synchronizing equipment with
TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 acquisition, while the BNC trigger input is used for starting and/or
stopping acquisition of the TTL output. This trigger input can be programmed to activate on a rising(positive-going) or falling (negative-going) TTL level edge. Any TTL level signal(> 2.2V = Hi, < 0.8V = Lo) may be used as a trigger pulse. A trigger pulse may also be used to generate a
Service Request. Note that the TTL Out is a LS-TTL compatible output, 0.4 mA sourcing, 8 mA sinking.
When a scan is logged into the acquisition buffer (after the actual scan), the TTL output signal is pulsed for
100 ms. Refer to the timing diagram.

1-14

System Overview

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

Expanded Memory Configuration
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 can accommodate 8 MBytes of memory, which is ideal for both
high-speed and long-term data logging. Measurements can be stored in memory and read out by
a controlling computer as time permits. Readings may be transferred at up to 300 KBytes per second overthe IEEE 488 bus, or up to 9600 baud using the unit’s standard RS-232 port.
To install expanded memory into the unit, it is necessary to perform the following steps:

WARNING
Never disassemble the case while it is connected to the AC power line!
Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

WARNING
Never disconnect the AC power line from the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
while its scanning cards are connected to an external device! Common mode
voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or 30 Vrms at the terminals, may exist which
could cause bodily injury or death!
Note:

If disassembly or disconnections are necessary, first turn off the power, then disconnect thescanning cards, next disconnect the AC power line, and then any other cables, prior todisassembly.

To Install Expanded Memory
1.

Turn off the power, disconnect the scanning cards, the power line cord, and then all other cables fromthe unit.

2.

Place the unit on a flat surface. Remove the six screws on top of the case and remove the top cover.

3.

Located on the main circuit-board assembly, alongside the scanning card enclosure, are SIMM
memory module slots JP8 and JP7. Remove the 256 KB module from JP7, insert one
4 MB module in its place, and insert the second 4 MB module in JP8.

4.

Carefully reassemble the unit, replacing the top cover and screws.

Note:

For re-assembly, first reconnect the AC power line (with the power OFF), next reconnect thescanning cards, and then any other cables, prior to reapplying power to the entire system.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-15

Scanning Card & Channel Expansion

Scanning Card Expansion
Each TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit can accept one scanning card to provide signal conditioning.
However, if your application demands more channels then you can expand the master unit’s capabilities
with either or both types of expansion units: Exp/10A and/or Exp/11A. Each Exp/10A expansion unit
allows for the addition of two scanning cards, while each Exp/11A expansion unit allows for the addition often scanning cards. Up to fifteen Exp/10A units can be attached to the master unit, giving a maximum of
30 additional scanning-card slots. Similarly, up to three Exp/11A units can be linked to the master unit,
also giving a maximum of 30 additional scanning-card slots, as shown in the following table.
Expansion Capabilities
Number of expansion scanning-card slots per expansion unit
Number of identical expansion units that can be linked to the master unit
Maximum number of expansion scanning-card slots

Note:

1-16

System Overview

Exp/10A2
1530

Exp/11A10
330

If a combination of Exp/10A and Exp/11A expansion units are linked together, then the
maximum number of expansion scanning-card slots is still 30.

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualChannel Expansion
The TempScan/1100 system can be expanded up to 992 channels, while the MultiScan/1200 system can be
expanded up to 744 channels. This is easily accomplished via a master/slave architecture wherein a mainor master unit can be connected to as many expansion slave units as allowable within the maximum of
30 scanning cards.
Each Exp/10A or Exp/11A expansion unit has a form factor identical to that of either the TempScan/1100
or MultiScan/1200 master unit, allowing the expansion unit to accept the same scanning cards as its master
unit. When connected to the TempScan/1100, the Exp/10A or Exp/11A is configurable for 32 or 64 input
channels, providing a total expansion capacity of up to 992 channels. When connected to theMultiScan/1200, the Exp/10A or Exp/11A is configurable for 24 or 48 input channels, providing a total
expansion capacity of up to 744 channels.
An expansion unit can only be controlled by the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 master unit, and nodigital I/O or alarms are included. However, expansion channels can be programmed to stimulate thealarms located on the master unit. From the programmer’s perspective, channels are accessed in the same
way as channels in the master unit. When the master unit detects the presence of expansion units during its
power-on sequence, it makes the additional channels available to the programmer. The U8 command isavailable to query the master unit for the total number of channels in the system.
A general description of both types of expansion units, their connections and their configurations,is discussed in the following chapters.

Power Line & Fuse Configuration
Introduction
The power configuration of any master or expansion unit consists of selecting the line voltage and replacing
the fuses. All of these units – TempScan/1100, MultiScan/1200, Exp/10A, and Exp/11A – each has afactory default to operate at 105-125 volts AC. However, each unit may be operated at either 105-125 or
210-250 VAC.

WARNING
Do not use this unit outdoors! The unit is intended for indoor use only! Outdoor
conditions could result in equipment failure, bodily injury or death!

WARNING
Never disassemble the case while it is connected to the AC power line! Internal
voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

WARNING
Never disconnect the AC power line from the unit while its scanning cards areconnected to an external device! Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60
VDC or 30 Vrms at the terminals, may exist which could cause bodily injury or
death!

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-17

To change the operating voltage of the TempScan/1100, MultiScan/1200, Exp/10A, and/or Exp/11A unit, itis necessary to open the enclosure. However, before modifying the voltage, disconnect any input or output
connections from the rear panel of the affected unit and then disconnect the power cord from the power line
terminal.
Line voltage must be set for 105-125 or 210-250 VAC to match the power being supplied to the
TempScan/1100, MultiScan/1200, Exp/10A, and/or Exp/11A unit. If the line voltage is changed, the fusemust also be changed. Refer to the following text for the line voltage switch and fuse locations.

Line Voltage Selection
As already mentioned, the TempScan/1100, MultiScan/1200, Exp/10A and Exp/11A unit can each operatewith 105-125 or 210-250 VAC, 50-60 Hz power, as set by its internal line-voltage switch (labelled S2 orSW2). Each unit is shipped from the factory with this operating voltage setting marked on its rear panel. If
this is not the appropriate power setting to be supplied to the unit, then the line voltage and power fuse must
be changed to avoid damage to the unit. The locations of switch S2 or SW2 and the fuse are shown in the
figures. The line-voltage selection procedure is outlined in the following steps.

WARNING
Do not perform the procedures for line voltage selection and fuse replacement,
unless qualified to do so! These procedures are intended to be used by qualified
service personnel only!

WARNING
Never disassemble the unit casing while it is connected to the AC power line!
Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

WARNING
Never disconnect the AC power line from the unit while its scanning cards areconnected to an external device! Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60
VDC or 30 Vrms at the terminals, may exist which could cause bodily injury or
death!
Note:

If disassembly or disconnections are necessary, first turn off the power, then disconnect thescanning cards, next disconnect the AC power line, and then any other cables, prior todisassembly.

To Change the Line-Voltage Selection
1.
2.
3.

1-18

System Overview

Turn off the power, disconnect the scanning cards, the power line cord, and then all other cables fromthe unit.
Place the unit on a flat surface. For the TempScan/1100, MultiScan/1200, and/or Exp/10A: Remove
the six screws on top of the case and remove the top cover. For the Exp/11A: Loosen the two thumbscrews – one at each end – of the power module (left-most panel) and slide out the power module.
Located next to the main power supply transformer is the line voltage selection switch (labeled S2 orSW2). Using a small screwdriver, insert the tip of the screwdriver into the slot of the switch and slide
the switch to the left or right until it "clicks" into place with the desired line voltage selection visible.

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

CAUTION
It is possible to place the line voltage switch (S2 or SW2) in a partial position
which could cause equipment damage or malfunction. When changing theposition of the line voltage selection switch (S2 or SW2), make sure the switch iscompletely positioned to the 115 V or 220 V selection. The switch will “click” into
place when properly positioned.
4.

Install a power line fuse appropriate for the line voltage. See section Fuse Replacement – Step 3,
following this section.

CAUTION
Do not use a fuse with a rating higher than specified. Otherwise the unit may bedamaged. If the instrument repeatedly blows fuses, locate and correct the cause of
the trouble before replacing the fuse.
5. Make note of the new voltage setting for later reference.
6. Carefully reassemble the unit.
Note: For re-assembly, first reconnect the AC power line (with the power OFF), next reconnect thescanning cards, and then any other cables, prior to reapplying power to the entire system.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-19

Fuse Replacement
The TempScan/1100, MultiScan/1200, Exp/10A and Exp/11A each contains an internal AC line fuse. This
fuse is located next to the internal line-voltage switch (labelled S2 or SW2). You may replace the fuse byusing the procedures found in the following text.

WARNING
Never disassemble the unit casing while it is connected to the AC power line!
Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

WARNING
Never disconnect the AC power line from the unit while its scanning cards areconnected to an external device! Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60
VDC or 30 Vrms at the terminals, may exist which could cause bodily injury or
death!
Note:

If disassembly or disconnections are necessary, first turn off the power, then disconnect thescanning cards, next disconnect the AC power line, and then any other cables, prior todisassembly.

To Replace the Fuse
1.

Turn off the power, disconnect the scanning cards, the power line cord, and then all other cables fromthe unit. For more information, see section Disconnecting & Reconnecting the System During Setup
on page 1-6.

2.

Place the unit on a flat surface. For the TempScan/1100, MultiScan/1200, and/or Exp/10A: Remove
the six screws on top of the case and remove the top cover. For the Exp/11A: Loosen the two thumbscrews – one at each end – of the power module (leftmost panel) and slide out the power module.

3.

Located next to the line-voltage selection switch (labeled S2 or SW2) is the power fuse. Gently pull
upward on the plastic fuse housing. The entire housing with the fuse inside should be removed.

4.

Open the fuse housing by pushing up on the tab on the bottom of the housing. Remove the fuse, andreplace it with the proper type using the following list as a guide:For line voltage 105-125 V, use fuse type 1/2 A 250 V, Slo Blo, 3AG

For line voltage 210-250 V, use fuse type 1/4 A 250 V, Slo Blo, 3AG

CAUTION
Do not use a fuse with a rating higher than specified. Otherwise the unit may bedamaged. If the instrument repeatedly blows fuses, locate and correct the cause of
the trouble before replacing the fuse.
1.

Close the housing. Insert the fuse into the fuse holder.

2.

Make note of the new fuse rating for later reference. If you have also changed the operating linevoltage selection, return to the previous section Line Voltage Selection – Step 5.

3.

Carefully reassemble the unit.

Note:

1-20

System Overview

For re-assembly, first reconnect the AC power line (with the power OFF), next reconnect thescanning cards, and then any other cables, prior to reapplying power to the entire system.

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualRack-Mount & Bench-Top Assembly
The TempScan/1100, MultiScan/1200, Exp/10A and Exp/11A package each includes accessories for rack-mount or bench-top
assembly.

Rack Mount

If rack-mount assembly is required, remove the two plastic screws from the pre-drilled holes on each side of
the unit. Since the unit can be mounted with the front or rear panel facing the front of the rack fixture,
remove only those screws from the set of holes that will be toward the front of the rack. Attach the two rackears using the enclosed screws.

Bench TopIf bench-top assembly is required, install the self-adhesive rubber feet on the bottom of the unit
approximately one inch from each corner.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

949191

System Overview 1-21

Power-Up Activation
At initial power-up or on the Reset Power-On (*R) command, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
performs automatic self-tests to ensure that it is fully functional. The front panel LED indicators show any
errors if they occur. Possible error conditions and their corresponding LED indicator patterns are shown in
the following table. Any LED pattern not shown is an internal error that is not field-serviceable; in thiscase, contact the factory. If ERROR is on by itself, there is a configuration error due to setup information in
NV-RAM. Check the error using the Query Error Status (E?) command.
LED Indicators

Error Condition
No Errors
General Hardware Failure
Position-U22 ROM Invalid
Position-U21 ROM Checksum Error
Position-U22 ROM Checksum Error
Non-Volatile RAM Error
Dynamic RAM Error
Interprocessor COM Error

TALK
(Off)
ON
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
ON
ON
ON

LISTEN
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
ON
(Off)
ON
ON

SRQ
(Off)
ON
(Off)
ON
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
ON

ERROR
(Off)
FLASHING
FLASHING
FLASHING
FLASHING
FLASHING
FLASHING
FLASHING

POWER
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

If no problems are found, the POWER LED indicator will remain on while the rest of the indicators will goout, and the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 will begin its power-up initialization. This self test is
performed each time the unit is powered up regardless of whether power-on was caused by the power switch
or the Reset Power-On (*R) command. During initialization, the self test performs the following steps:
1.

Checks for errors at power-up.

2.

Checks the flag in the NV-RAM to determine if it should power-up with factory default settings or auser-defined configuration.

3.

Loads appropriate registers with corresponding values in NV-RAM.

4.

Checks a flag to see if alarms should be enabled at power-up, and if so, enables them.

5.

Loads channel configuration registers.

6.

Loads program sequencer with appropriate channel configurations.

7.

Resets computations processor to begin acquiring scans.

The self test takes approximately five seconds to complete, after which the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit is ready for normal operation.
For more information, see section Power-Up Configuration.

1-22

System Overview

949191

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

Expansion Units

2

Exp/10A Expansion Unit ...... 2-1
Introduction ...... 2-1
Front Panel Indicators ...... 2-1
Rear Panel Switches & Connectors ...... 2-2
Exp/10A Specifications ...... 2-3

Exp/10A Hardware Configuration ...... 2-4
Master/Slave Connection ...... 2-4
Slave Configuration ...... 2-5
Channel Assignment ...... 2-5

Exp/11A Expansion Unit ...... 2-7
Introduction ...... 2-7
Front Panel Indicators ...... 2-7
Rear Panel Switches & Connectors ...... 2-7
Exp/11A Specifications ...... 2-8

Exp/11A Hardware Configuration ...... 2-9
Master/Slave Connection ...... 2-9
Slave Configuration ...... 2-10
Channel Assignment ...... 2-11

Exp/10A Expansion Unit
Introduction
All Exp/10A components are carefully inspected prior to shipment. When you receive your two-slot
expansion chassis, carefully unpack all items from the shipping carton and check for any damage which may
have occurred during shipment. Promptly report the damage to the shipping agent and your sales
representative. Retain all shipping materials in case you must return the unit to the factory.

Front Panel Indicators

Three (3) LED indicators on the front panel of the Exp/10A display the status of the expansion unit:•••

SCAN: ON when the master unit is storing a expansion channel scan in its internal buffer.
ERROR: ON when an error has occurred, OFF when no error condition exists. For more information,
see command Query Error Status (E?).
POWER: ON when power is applied to the unit and the power switch on the back panel is in the ON
position (depressed). OFF if power is not present.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Expansion Unit 2-1

Rear Panel Switches & Connectors

Two (2) switches, three (3) connectors, one (1) grounding nut, and two (2) input card slots on the rear panelof the Exp/10A provide power, slave addressing, master/slave connections, a single point grounding node,and scanning card expansion.
•
•
•
•
•
•

2-2

Expansion Units

Power Switch: Used to turn power to the Exp/10A ON and OFF. When the switch is in the depressed
position the power is ON. When in the extended position, the power is OFF.
DIP Switch: Used for selecting the Exp/10A slave address ID.
Power Connector: Provides power for the unit. Internally configurable for either 105-125 or
210-250 VAC, 50/60Hz, plus fuse circuit breaker.
Master/Slave Connector: Two DB25 master/slave ports provide one connection to a TempScan/1100,
MultiScan/1200, Exp/10A or Exp/11A unit, and one connection to another Exp/10A or Exp/11A
expansion unit.
Grounding Screw: An external single-point grounding node has been supplied for (but not limited to)thermocouple shield termination.
Shielded Enclosure: For the TempScan/1100: Accepts any combination of TempTC/32B,
TempV/32B, and/or TempRTD/16B scanning cards. For the MultiScan/1200: Accepts any
combination of MTC/24 and/or MHV/24 scanning cards. Note that the TempScan/1100 andMultiScan/1200 scanning cards must not be mixed within the same system.

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualExp/10A Specifications
CAUTION
Please read this manual carefully! If equipment is used in any manner not
specified in this manual, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
Note:

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Installation Category: For CE: Category 2 for Line Voltage Input terminal. All other terminals are
Category 1.
Master/Slave Port: Female DB-25 (2)Number of Slots: Two (2).
Number of Channels (TempScan/1100): Up to 64 differential voltage or thermocouple inputs, or up to 32
RTD inputs; accepts any combination of two (2) TempTC/32B, TempV/32B or TempRTD/16B
scanning modules.
Number of Channels (MultiScan/1200): Up to 48 differential voltage or thermocouple inputs;
accepts any combination of two (2) MTC/24 and MHV/24 scanning modules.
Channel to System Isolation: 60V peak.
Dimensions: 425mm wide x 305mm deep × 45mm high (16.75” × 12” × 1.75”).
Weight: 2.53 kg. (5.5 lbs.).
Operating Environment: For standard: Indoor use, 0 to 50°C; 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) to 35°C;
linearly derate 3% RH/°C from 35 to 50°C; For CE: Indoor use at altitudes below 2000 m, 0 to
40°°C; 0 to 80% RH up to 31°°C decreasing linearly 4% RH/°°C to 40°°C.
Controls: Power Switch (external), DIP switch for setting slave ID (external).
Front Panel Indicators: LED indicators for SCAN, ERROR, and POWER.
Power: 105-125 or 210-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 20 VA maximum.

CAUTIONLine Voltage: The protective conductor terminal on the AC line connector must
be connected to an external protective earthing system. Failure to make such aconnection will impair protection from shock.

WARNING
Service: This product contains no operator serviceable parts. Service must be
performed by qualified personnel. All terminals, including the AC line andscanning cards, must be disconnected prior to opening the Exp/10A case.
Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!
Fuse: 1/2A, 250 V, Slo Blo, 3AG (for 105-125V power line) or 1/4A, 250V, Slo Blo, 3AG (for 210-250V
power line).

CAUTION
Fuse Failure: Fuse failure indicates a possible problem within the device circuitry.
If a fuse blows, contact a qualified service representative. Replacement fuses areto be installed by qualified service personnel with the unit disconnected from thepower source and with all other terminals disconnected. If the line voltage selector
is changed, then the fuse designated for that line voltage must be used.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Expansion Unit 2-3

Exp/10A Hardware Configuration
Master/Slave Connection
Up to fifteen Exp/10A expansion units can be connected to the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 master
unit, giving options of up to 30 expansion scanning cards. Connect the expansion unit as described in thefollowing steps:

CAUTION
Before connecting an Exp/10A expansion unit to its master unit, or to anotherexpansion unit, power down all devices that are connected or to be connected.
Failure to do so could damage the equipment.

To Connect the Exp/10A Expansion Unit

2-4

1.

Turn power off and unplug the master unit and all devices connected to the system.

2.

If not already done so, turn power off and unplug the Exp/10A unit(s) which are to be connected.

3.

Connect the master/slave cable(s) (CA-35-1) as depicted in the following illustration.

4.

Plug in all system devices.

5.

Set the slave address on the rear panel DIP switch. See next section Slave Configuration.

6.

Turn power on to the master unit.

7.

Turn power on to the remaining system devices.

Expansion Units

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualSlave Configuration
CAUTION
Avoid linking two or more expansion chassis with the same slave address.
Otherwise, the unspecified addresses may result in operating errors.

For the master/slave configuration to operate correctly, the master unit must either be a TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200; it cannot be an Exp/10A or Exp/11A expansion unit.
Furthermore, each Exp/10A unit must be assigned a unique slave address. Following simple binary
weighting, this slave address is set by using microswitches 5 through 8 of the rear panel DIP switch.
In the following figure, DIP microswitch 8 is in the up position, indicating the default slave address 1.

With all four microswitches 5, 6, 7 and 8 in the up position, this setting indicates a slave address of 15(8 + 4 + 2 + 1). A maximum of 15 Exp/10A slave addresses can be set, while the address of 0 is notallowed. The Exp/10A factory default is address 1.
Note:

The address of 0 is not allowed because this is reserved for the master unit address.

Channel Assignment
Channels 1 through 32 are always in the TempScan/1100, and channels 1 through 24 are always in theMultiScan/1200, while the channels in the Exp/10A expansion unit are treated as extended channels.
With the first Exp/10A slave unit, the first channel in the first scanning card is channel 33 in the
TempScan/1100 system, and channel 25 in the MultiScan/1200 system. With the same slave unit, the firstchannel in the second scanning card is channel 65 in the TempScan/1100 system, and channel 49 in theMultiScan/1200 system. The order of multiple Exp/10A expansion units are set up using the rear panel DIP
switches, as described earlier.
Even if a scanning card slot is left empty in the master unit and/or slave unit(s), the channel assignments
remain the same, as shown in the table. For a 16-channel TempScan/1100 scanning card, the system stillassigns 32 channels to the card slot with the second 16 channels ignored. Likewise, for a 12-channel
MultiScan/1200 scanning card, the system still assigns 24 channels to the card slot with the second 12
channels ignored. For example, if a 16-channel TempRTD/16B scanning module is installed in the first slotof Logical Unit 2 (the first Exp/10A), then channels 33 through 48 will be assigned and channels 49 through64 will be ignored.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Expansion Unit 2-5

Exp/10A Slave Address Settings
Slave
Address

Slave Unit

Logical
Unit

Card
Slot

TempScan/1100
Master Unit

MultiScan/1200
Master Unit

(0 0 0 0)
0 0 0 1(0)

(Master Unit)

(1)

(1)

(Inputs 1 – 32)(Inputs 1 – 24)

1

Slave 12

1

Inputs 33 – 64

Inputs 25 – 48

2

Inputs 65 – 96

Inputs 49 – 72

1

Inputs 97 – 128

Inputs 73 – 96

2

Inputs 129 – 160

Inputs 97 – 120

1

Inputs 161 – 192

Inputs 121 – 144

2

Inputs 193 – 224

Inputs 145 – 168

1

Inputs 225 – 256

Inputs 169 – 192

2

Inputs 257 – 288

Inputs 193 – 216

1

Inputs 289 – 320

Inputs 217 – 240

2

Inputs 321 – 352

Inputs 241 – 264

1

Inputs 353 – 384

Inputs 265 – 288

2

Inputs 385 – 416

Inputs 289 – 312

1

Inputs 417 – 448

Inputs 313 – 336

2

Inputs 449 – 480

Inputs 337 – 360

1

Inputs 481 – 512

Inputs 361 – 384

2

Inputs 513 – 544

Inputs 385 – 408

1

Inputs 545 – 576

Inputs 409 – 432

2

Inputs 577 – 608

Inputs 433 – 456

1

Inputs 609 – 640

Inputs 457 – 480

2

Inputs 641 – 672

Inputs 481 – 504

1

Inputs 673 – 704

Inputs 505 – 528

2

Inputs 705 – 736

Inputs 529 – 552

1

Inputs 737 – 768

Inputs 553 – 576

2

Inputs 769 – 800

Inputs 577 – 600

1

Inputs 801 – 832

Inputs 601 – 624

2

Inputs 833 – 864

Inputs 625 – 648

1

Inputs 865 – 896

Inputs 649 – 672

2

Inputs 897 – 928

Inputs 673 – 696

1

Inputs 929 – 960

Inputs 697 – 720

2

Inputs 961 – 992

Inputs 721 – 744

0 0 1 00 0 1 10 1 0 00 1 0 10 1 1 00 1 1 1
1 0 0 0

3
4
5
6
7
8

Slave 2
Slave 3
Slave 4
Slave 5
Slave 6
Slave 7
Slave 8

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1 0 0 1

Slave 910

1 0 1 010

Slave 1011

1 1 0 01 1 0 11 1 1 01 1 1 1

Expansion Units2

9

1 0 1 1

2-6

Exp/10A Channel Assignments

Microswitches
5 through 8

11
12
13
14
15

Slave 11
Slave 12
Slave 13
Slave 14
Slave 15889897

12
13
14
15
16

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualExp/11A Expansion Unit
Introduction
All Exp/11A components are carefully inspected prior to shipment. When you receive your two-slot
expansion chassis, carefully unpack all items from the shipping carton and check for any damage which may
have occurred during shipment. Promptly report the damage to the shipping agent and your sales
representative. Retain all shipping materials in case you must return the unit to the factory.

Front Panel Indicators

Three (3) LED indicators on the front panel of the Exp/11A display the status of the expansion unit:•••

SCAN: ON when the master unit is storing a expansion channel scan in its internal buffer.
ERROR: ON when an error has occurred, OFF when no error condition exists. For more information,
see command Query Error Status (E?).
POWER: ON when power is applied to the unit and the power switch on the back panel is in the ON
position (depressed). OFF if power is not present.

Rear Panel Switches & Connectors

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Expansion Unit 2-7

Two (2) switches, three (3) connectors, one (1) grounding nut, and ten (10) input card slots on the rear
panel of the Exp/11A provide power, slave addressing, master/slave connections, a single point grounding
node, and scanning card expansion.
•

Power Switch: Used to turn power to the Exp/11A ON and OFF. When the switch is in the depressed
position the power is ON. When in the extended position, the power is OFF.

•DIP Switch: Used for selecting the Exp/11A slave address ID.

•

Power Connector: Provides power for the unit. Internally configurable for either 105-125 or 210-250
VAC, 50/60Hz, plus fuse circuit breaker.

•

Master/Slave Connector: Two DB25 master/slave ports provide one connection to a TempScan/1100,
MultiScan/1200, Exp/10A or Exp/11A unit, and one connection to another Exp/10A or Exp/11A
expansion unit.

•

Grounding Screw: An external single-point grounding node has been supplied for (but not limited to)thermocouple shield termination.

•

Shielded Enclosure: For the TempScan/1100: Accepts any combination of TempTC/32B,
TempV/32B, and/or TempRTD/16B scanning cards. For the MultiScan/1200: Accepts any
combination of MTC/24 and/or MHV/24 scanning cards. Note that the TempScan/1100 andMultiScan/1200 scanning cards must not be mixed within the same system.

Exp/11A Specifications
CAUTION
Please read this manual carefully! If equipment is used in any manner not
specified in this manual, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
Note:

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Installation Category: For CE: Category 2 for Line Voltage Input terminal. All other terminals are
Category 1.
Master/Slave Port: Female DB25 (2).
Number of Slots: Ten (10).
Number of Channels (TempScan/1100): Up to 320 differential voltage or thermocouple inputs, or up to
160 RTD inputs; accepts any combination of ten (10) TempTC/32B, TempV/32B or TempRTD/16B
scanning modules.
Number of Channels (MultiScan/1200): Up to 240 differential voltage or thermocouple inputs; accepts
any combination of ten (10) MTC/24 and MHV/24 scanning modules.
Channel to System Isolation: 60V peak.
Dimensions: 425mm wide x 305mm deep × 135mm high (16.75” × 12” × 5.75”).
Weight: 6.36 kg. (14 lbs.).
Operating Environment: For standard: Indoor use, 0 to 50°C; 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) to 35°C;
linearly derate 3% RH/°C from 35 to 50°C; For CE: Indoor use at altitudes below 2000 m,
0 to 40°°C; 0 to 80% RH up to 31°°C decreasing linearly 4% RH/°°C to 40°°C.
Controls: Power Switch (external), DIP switch for setting slave ID (external).
Front Panel Indicators: LED indicators for SCAN, ERROR, and POWER.
Power: 105-125 or 210-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 20 VA maximum

CAUTIONLine Voltage: The protective conductor terminal on the AC line connector must
be connected to an external protective earthing system. Failure to make sucha connection will impair protection from shock.

2-8

Expansion Units

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

WARNING
Service: This product contains no operator serviceable parts. Service must be
performed by qualified personnel. All terminals, including the AC line andscanning cards, must be disconnected prior to opening the Exp/11A case.
Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!
Fuse: 1/2A, 250 V, Slo Blo, 3AG (for 105-125V power line) or 1/4A, 250V, Slo Blo, 3AG (for 210-250V
power line).

CAUTION
Fuse Failure: Fuse failure indicates a possible problem within the device circuitry.
If a fuse blows, contact a qualified service representative. Replacement fuses areto be installed by qualified service personnel with the unit disconnected from thepower source and with all other terminals disconnected. If the line voltage selector
is changed, then the fuse designated for that line voltage must be used.

Exp/11A Hardware Configuration
Master/Slave Connection
Up to three Exp/11A expansion units can be connected to the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 master
unit, giving options of up to 30 expansion scanning cards. Connect the expansion unit as described in thefollowing steps:

CAUTION
Before connecting an Exp/11A expansion unit to its master unit, or to anotherexpansion unit, power down all devices that are connected or to be connected.
Failure to do so could damage the equipment.

To Connect the Exp/11A Expansion Unit
1.

Turn power off and unplug the master unit and all devices connected to the system.

2.

If not already done so, turn power off and unplug the Exp/11A unit(s) which are to be connected.

3.

Connect the master/slave cable(s) (CA-35-1) as depicted in the following illustration.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Expansion Unit 2-9

4.

Plug in all system devices.

5.

Set the slave address on the rear panel DIP switch. See next section Slave Configuration.

6.

Turn power on to the master unit.

7.

Turn power on to the remaining system devices.

Slave Configuration
CAUTION
Avoid linking two or more expansion chassis with the same slave address.
Otherwise, the unspecified addresses may result in operating errors.

For the master/slave configuration to operate correctly, the master unit must either be a TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200; it cannot be an Exp/10A or Exp/11A expansion unit.

Furthermore, each Exp/11A unit must be assigned a unique slave address. Following simple binary
weighting, this slave address is set by using microswitches 1 and 2 of the rear panel DIP switch. In theprevious figure, DIP microswitch 1 is in the LOW position while DIP microswitch 2 is in the HI position,
indicating the slave address 1. A maximum of 3 Exp/11A slave addresses can be set – 0, 1, and 2 – while
the address of 3 is not allowed. The Exp/11A factory default is address 0.
Note:

2-10

Expansion Units

The address of 3 is invalid. If this address is set, the LED indicator ERROR will light up.

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualChannel Assignment
Channels 1 through 32 are always in the TempScan/1100, and channels 1 through 24 are always in theMultiScan/1200, while the channels in the Exp/11A expansion unit are treated as extended channels. With
the first Exp/11A slave unit, the first channel in the first scanning card is channel 33 in the TempScan/1100
system, and channel 25 in the MultiScan/1200 system. With the same slave unit, the first channel in thesecond scanning card is channel 65 in the TempScan/1100 system, and channel 49 in the MultiScan/1200
system. The order of multiple Exp/10A expansion units are set up using the rear panel DIP switches, as
described earlier.
Even if a scanning card slot is left empty in the master unit and/or slave unit(s), the channel assignments
remain the same, as shown in the table. For a 16-channel TempScan/1100 scanning card, the system stillassigns 32 channels to the card slot with the second 16 channels ignored. Likewise, for a 12-channel
MultiScan/1200 scanning card, the system still assigns 24 channels to the card slot with the second 12
channels ignored. For example, if a 16-channel TempRTD/16B scanning module is installed in the first slotof Logical Unit 2 (the first Exp/10A), then channels 33 through 48 will be assigned and channels 49 through64 will be ignored.

Exp/11A Slave Address Settings

Exp/11A Channel Assignments

Microswitches
1 and 2

Slave
Address

Slave Unit

Logical
Unit

Card
Slot

TempScan/1100
Master Unit

MultiScan/1200
Master Unit

(N/A)
0 0

(N/A)

(Master Unit)

(1)

(1)

(Inputs 1 – 32)(Inputs 1 – 24)

0

Slave 12

1

Inputs 33 – 64

Inputs 25 – 48

2

Inputs 65 – 96

Inputs 49 – 72

3

Inputs 97 – 128

Inputs 73 – 96

4

Inputs 129 – 160

Inputs 97 – 120

5

Inputs 161 – 192

Inputs 121 – 144

6

Inputs 193 – 224

Inputs 145 – 168

7

Inputs 225 – 256

Inputs 169 – 192

8

Inputs 257 – 288

Inputs 193 – 216

9

Inputs 289 – 320

Inputs 217 – 240

10

Inputs 321 – 352

Inputs 241 – 264

1

Inputs 353 – 384

Inputs 265 – 288

2

Inputs 385 – 416

Inputs 289 – 312

3

Inputs 417 – 448

Inputs 313 – 336

4

Inputs 449 – 480

Inputs 337 – 360

5

Inputs 481 – 512

Inputs 361 – 384

6

Inputs 513 – 544

Inputs 385 – 408

7

Inputs 545 – 576

Inputs 409 – 432

8

Inputs 577 – 608

Inputs 433 – 456

9Inputs 609 – 640

Inputs 457 – 480

10

Inputs 641 – 672

Inputs 481 – 504

1

Inputs 673 – 704

Inputs 505 – 528

2

Inputs 705 – 736

Inputs 529 – 552

3

Inputs 737 – 768

Inputs 553 – 576

4

Inputs 769 – 800

Inputs 577 – 600

5Inputs 801 – 832

Inputs 601 – 624

6

Inputs 833 – 864

Inputs 625 – 648

7

Inputs 865 – 896

Inputs 649 – 672

8

Inputs 897 – 928

Inputs 673 – 696

9Inputs 929 – 960

Inputs 697 – 720

10

Inputs 961 – 992

Inputs 721 – 744

(N/A)

(N/A)

(N/A)

0 1

1 0

(1 1)

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

1

2

(3)

Slave 2

Slave 3

(Invalid)

889897

3

4

(N/A)

Expansion Unit 2-11

2-12

Expansion Units

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualScanning Cards

3

TempScan Scanning Cards ...... 3-1
TempTC/32B Thermocouple Scanning Card ...... 3-2
TempV/32B Voltage Scanning Card ...... 3-4
TempRTD/16B RTD Scanning Card ...... 3-6

MultiScan Scanning Cards ...... 3-7
MTC/24 Thermocouple/Volt Scanning Card ...... 3-8
MHV/24 High-Voltage Scanning Card ...... 3-10

TempScan Scanning Cards
The TempScan/1100 master unit and any Exp/10A and Exp/11A expansion units connected to this master
unit, can each accept the following three kinds of optional solid-state scanning cards:•••

TempTC/32B Thermocouple Scanning Card which measures thermocouples
TempV/32B Voltage Scanning Card which measures voltages
TempRTD/16B RTD Scanning Card which measures RTDs (resistance temperature devices)Note:

Do not mix TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200 scanning cards within the same system.
TempScan/1100 scanning cards are designed for and supported only by the TempScan/1100
master unit. Likewise, MultiScan/1200 scanning cards are designed for and supported only by
the MultiScan/1200 master unit. Otherwise, operating errors or equipment damage may
occur.

Each scanning card contains screw-terminal blocks for quick and easy input connections. Connections are
made by inserting the wire into a screw-terminal socket.
Several tie-down holes are provided for tie-wrap strain reliefs to keep wires from all the channels organized
and manageable before they exit the rear panel of the master or expansion unit.
To keep noise outside and to maintain a constant internal temperature, each scanning card fits into ashielded metal enclosure inside the master or expansion unit. The foam padding on the scanning card
provides an air dam to minimize gradients.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Scanning Cards

3-1TempTC/32B Thermocouple Scanning Card

TempTC/32B Specifications
Note: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Number of Channels: 32 differential; programmable by channel for specific thermocouple type or ±100mV full scale input.
Input Types: J, K, T, E, N, R, S, B, N14, N28, custom thermocouple, and millivolts.
Input Connector: Screw terminal.
Thermocouple Wire: #16 AWG maximum, #24 AWG minimum; #20 AWG recommended for type J, K,
T, E and N; #24 AWG recommended for type R, S, and B.
Temperature Range, Accuracy, and Resolution: Accuracy is based on 18 to 28°C, 1 year; includes cold
junction compensation; excludes thermocouple errors; thermocouple readings based on NIST
Monograph 175. Resolution given is the typical value.
Thermocouple Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Type J:-200° to +760°C;± 0.5°C;
0.10°C.
Type K:-100° to +1372°C;± 0.5°C;
0.10°C.
Type T:-100° to +400°C;± 0.5°C;
0.10°C.
Type E:-100° to +1000°C;± 0.5°C;
0.10°C.
Type N:-200° to +1300°C;± 0.5°C;
0.10°C.
Type R:
0.0° to +1768°C;± 1.00°C;
0.20°C.
Type S:
0.0° to +1768°C;± 1.00°C;
0.20°C.
Type B:+350° to +1820°C; ± 1.00°C;
0.20°C.
Type N14:0.0° to +1300°C;± 0.5°C;
0.10°C.
Type N28:-270° to +400°C;± 0.5°C;
0.10°C.
Temperature Units: °C, °F, °K, °R, and mV.

3-2

Scanning Cards

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualFault Detection: Open thermocouple may be detected by a software query.
Cold Junction Sensors: One for every 8 input channels.
Linearization: Performed by lookup table (varies by T/C type); table supports two user-defined custom
T/C types of up to 256 points each. Lookup tables are stored in battery backed-up NV-RAM.
Input Impedance: 1 MOhm typicalInput Bias Current: 20 nA maximum.
Maximum Allowable Input: ± 35V peak.
Channel to Digital Low Isolation: For standard: 500V maximum; For CE: 200V maximum.
Channel to Channel Isolation: ± 10V peak.
Temperature Coefficient: 0.03 °C/°C.
Digital Filtering: Averages 16 samples @ 50/60 Hz for line cycle noise rejection.
Voltage Range, Accuracy and Resolution: 100 mV; ± 0.02%; and 3.05 µV.
Voltage Units: Volts, counts.

TempTC/32B Description
The TempTC/32B thermocouple scanning card contains 32 differential input channels, each of which may
be configured as any thermocouple type or as a millivolt input. Temperature values may be returned inunits of °C, °F, °K, °R, or mV.
There is a 4700-picofarad polypropylene capacitor connected across the input terminals of each channel.
This capacitor acts to filter some of the input noise when measuring thermocouples. When the circuit card
is set to the ±100 millivolt range, this capacitor will react with the user source impedance to form a lowpass filter. The filter pole frequency will be 1/(2*pi*(RSHI + RSLO)*4700 * 10-12), where RSHI and RSLO
are the source resistance of the input leads.
When making differential voltage measurements with the TempTC/32B card, you should insure that one of
the common terminal blocks is connected to the common of the unit being measured.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Scanning Cards

3-3TempV/32B Voltage Scanning Card

TempV/32B Specifications
Note:

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Number of Inputs: 32 differential.
Input Connectors: Screw Terminal.
Voltage Range, Accuracy and Resolution:
Range
Accuracy
Resolution± 100 mV; ± 0.02%;
3.12 µV/bit± 1 V;± 0.02%;31.2 µV/bit± 5 V;± 0.02%;156 µV/bit± 10 V;± 0.02%;312 µV/bit
Digital Filtering: Averages 16 samples @ 50/60 Hz for line cycle noise rejection.
Temperature Coefficient: < 0.01%/°C.
Input Impedance: 1 MOhm typical.
Input Bias Current: 40 nA maximum.
Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB typical.
Maximum Allowable Input: ± 35V peak.
Channel to Digital Low Isolation: For standard: 500V maximum; For CE: (Channel Common to
Earth) 200V maximum.
Channel to Channel Isolation: ± 10V peak.

3-4

Scanning Cards

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualTempV/32B Description
The TempV/32B voltage scanning module contains 32 differential input channels and is capable ofmeasuring analog input signals on any of four programmable ranges: ±100 millivolt, ±1 volt, ±5 volt and±10 volt.

For differential input configuration, each input must have biasing currents. A certain amount of current
must be flowing into the differential inputs or else capacitance-induced noise will make the inputs appear asnoise.
The low side of each differential input channel is provided with a switchable 10-kΩ resistor to analog
common. This allows a current path when no current is flowing due to no common ground connections or ahigh-impedance input source. With no common ground connection, closing the switch connects a 10-kΩ
resistor between the (L) input and ground and provides a common mode impedance.
The relationships between the DIP microswitches and specific channels are described in the table.
TempV/32B Channel-to-Microswitch Relationships
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Microswitch
S6-8
S6-7
S6-6
S6-5
S6-4
S6-3
S6-2
S6-1

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

Channel
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

889897Microswitch
S3-8
S3-7
S3-6
S3-5
S3-4
S3-3
S3-2
S3-1

Channel
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Microswitch
S5-8
S5-7
S5-6
S5-5
S5-4
S5-3
S5-2
S5-1

Channel
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Microswitch
S4-8
S4-7
S4-6
S4-5
S4-4
S4-3
S4-2
S4-1

Scanning Cards

3-5TempRTD/16B RTD Scanning Card

TempRTD/16B Specifications
Note:

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Number of Inputs: 16 (3 or 4 wire).
Alpha: 0.00385.
Input Connectors: Screw Terminal.
Temperature Range, Accuracy and Resolution:
RTD
Range
Accuracy
Resolution-100° to +630°C; ± 0.2°C;
0.1°C
Type 100 Ω Platinum:-270° to -100°C; ± 0.4°C;
0.2°C
Type 100 Ω Platinum:
Excitation Current: < 1 mA peak.
Temperature Coefficient: < 0.1%/°C
Temperature Units: °C, °F, °K, °R, and counts.
Linearization: Performed by lookup table; support included for storing user-defined linearization tables in
NV-RAM.

TempRTD/16B Description

The TempRTD/16B RTD scanning card supports 16 channels of 3-wire or 4-wire RTDs. Measurements
may be returned in units of °C, °F, °K, °R. For proper hook-up, refer to the connection diagram.

3-6

Scanning Cards

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualMultiScan Scanning Cards
The MultiScan/1200 master unit and any Exp/10A and Exp/11A expansion units connected to this master
unit, can each accept the following two kinds of optional scanning cards:•

MTC/24 Thermocouple/Volt Scanning Module•

MHV/24 High-Voltage Scanning Module

Note:

Do not mix TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200 scanning cards within the same system.
TempScan/1100 scanning cards are designed for and supported only by the TempScan/1100
master unit. Likewise, MultiScan/1200 scanning cards are designed for and supported only by
the MultiScan/1200 master unit. Otherwise, operating errors or equipment damage may
occur.

Each scanning card contains screw-terminal blocks for quick and easy input connections. Connections are
made by inserting the wire into a screw-terminal socket.
Several tie-down holes are provided for tie-wrap strain reliefs to keep wires from all the channels organized
and manageable before they exit the rear panel of the master or expansion unit.
To keep noise outside and to maintain a constant internal temperature, each scanning card fits intoa shielded metal enclosure inside the master or expansion unit. The foam padding on the scanning card
provides an air dam to minimize gradients.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Scanning Cards

3-7

MTC/24 Thermocouple/Volt Scanning Card

MTC/24 Specifications
Note:

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Number of Channels: 24 differential; programmable by channel as specific thermocouple type or a voltage
input.
Input Types: J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N custom thermocouple, and voltage.
Input Connectors: Screw Terminal
Thermocouple Wire: #16 AWG maximum, #24 AWG minimum; #20 AWG recommended for type
J, K, T, E and N; #24 AWG recommended for type R, S, and B.
Temperature Range, Accuracy, and Resolution: Accuracy is based on 18 to 28°C, 1 year; includes cold
junction compensation; excludes thermocouple errors; thermocouple readings based on NIST
Monograph 175. Resolution given is the typical value; excludes thermocouple errors.
Thermocouple Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Type J:-100° to +760°C;± 0.5°C;
0.10°C.
Type J:-200° to -100°C;± 0.8°C;
0.20°C.
Type K:-100° to +1372°C;± 0.6°C;
0.10°C.
Type K:-200° to -100°C;± 0.8°C;
0.20°C.
Type T:-100° to +400°C;± 0.5°C;
0.15°C.
Type T:-200° to -100°C;± 0.8°C;
0.25°C.
Type E:-100° to +1000°C;± 0.7°C;
0.10°C.
Type E:-200° to -100°C;± 0.9°C;
0.20°C.
Type R:
0.0° to +1780°C;± 2.0°C;
0.40°C.
Type S:
0.0° to +1780°C;± 2.0°C;
0.40°C.
Type B:+350° to +1820°C; ± 2.0°C;
0.50°C.
Type N:-100° to +1300°C;± 0.6°C;
0.15°C.
Type N:-200° to -100°C;± 0.9°C;
0.20°C.
Temperature Units: °C, °F, °K, °R, and mV.

3-8

Scanning Cards

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualFault Detection: Open thermocouple may be detected by a software query.
Cold Junction Sensors: One for every 8 input channels.
Linearization: Performed by lookup table (varies by T/C type); table supports two user-defined custom
T/C types of up to 256 points each. Lookup tables are stored in battery backed-up NV-RAM.
Input Impedance: 1 MOhm
Input Bias Current: 20 nA max
Maximum Allowable Input: ± 25V rms
Maximum Common Mode Voltage: 200 VDC or AC peak. Specified for coupling impedance > 30
MOhm, and common mode frequency < 60 Hz. Maximum 300 VDC or AC peak before equipment
damage occurs.
Maximum Normal Mode Voltage: 10 VDC or AC peak
Channel to Power Ground Isolation: 200 V peak
Channel to Channel Isolation: 200 V peak
Temperature Coefficient: < (0.1 x rated accuracy)%/°C.
Digital Filtering: Averages 32 samples @ 50/60 Hz for line-cycle noise rejection (DCV and thermocouple
measurements)
Voltage Range, Accuracy and Resolution: Range is based on maximum peak-to-peak signal for AC volts.
Accuracy is based on AC voltages where the frequency of the input signal is an integer multiple of theAC line cycle ± 1.0%, and with line-cycle integration enabled.
Range
Accuracy
Resolution± 100 mV; ± 0.02% of range;
3.12 µV/bit± 1 V;± 0.02% of range;
31.2 µV/bit± 5 V;± 0.02% of range;
156 µV/bit± 10 V;± 0.02% of range;
312 µV/bit

MTC/24 Description
The MTC/24 thermocouple/volt scanning card contains 24 isolated differential input channels. Eachchannel can be programmed to receive inputs from thermocouple types J, K, T, E, R, S, B, and N, or fromany of the following voltage ranges: ±100 millivolts, ±1 volt, ±5 volts and ±10 volts. Regarding
thermocouples, temperature values can be returned in any of the following units: °C, °F, °K, °R, or mV.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Scanning Cards

3-9

MHV/24 High-Voltage Scanning Card

MHV/24 Specifications
Note:

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Number of Inputs: 24 differential; programmable by channel for any input range
Input Connectors: Screw Terminal.
Voltage Range, Accuracy and Resolution: Range is based on maximum peak-to-peak signal for AC volts.
Accuracy is based on AC voltages where the frequency of the input signal is an integer multiple of theAC line cycle ± 1.0%, and with line-cycle integration enabled.
Range
Accuracy
Resolution± 2.5 V;± 0.02% of range;
78.14 µV/bit± 25 V;± 0.02% of range;
781.4 µV/bit± 250 V;± 0.02% of range;
7.81 mV/bit
Digital Filtering: Averages 32 samples @ 50/60 Hz for line cycle noise rejection (DCV measurements).
Temperature Coefficient: < 0.01%/°C.
Input Impedance: 10 MOhm typical.
Input Bias Current: 20 pA maximum.
Maximum Common Mode Voltage: 500 VDC or AC peak. Specified for coupling impedance > 30
MOhm, and common mode frequency < 60 Hz. Maximum 700 VDC or AC peak before equipment
damage occurs. Maximum 325 VDC or AC peak if used in the same system with the MTC/24 scanning
module.
Maximum Normal Mode Voltage: 500 VDC or AC peak.
Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB typical.
Maximum Allowable Input: 400 VDC.
Channel to Power Ground Isolation: 500 V peak.
Channel to Channel Isolation: 500 V peak. Maximum 325 VDC or AC peak if used in the same systemwith the MTC/24 scanning module.

MHV/24 Description
The MHV/24 high-voltage scanning card contains 24 differential input channels and can measure analog
input signals on any one of the following three programmable voltage ranges: ±2.5V, ±25V, and ±250V.

3-10

Scanning Cards

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualSystem Configuration

4

Introduction …… 4-1
Memory Allocation …… 4-2
Measuring Modes (MultiScan/1200 Only) …… 4-2
Line-Cycle Integration / High-Speed Multi-Channel Mode …… 4-3
Single-Channel High-Speed Burst Mode …… 4-5

Required Configuration …… 4-6
Channel Configuration …… 4-7
Scan Configuration …… 4-9
Acquisition Configuration …… 4-13
Trigger Configuration …… 4-16

Additional Configuration …… 4-18
Alarm Configuration …… 4-19
Stamp Configuration …… 4-22
Data Format Configuration …… 4-26
Power-Up Configuration …… 4-32

Introduction
The primary function of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 system is to scan and digitize transducer
signals, typically thermocouples. Most of the system features are programmable, allowing you to change
settings and configurations from the controlling computer.
The API command set of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit provides access to these
programmable features. Issuing commands to the unit changes its internal state and its operating
configuration. Most operating states have a default value. If no commands are sent to alter its originalstate, the default value will be used. Sending commands to the unit is necessary only if the default values
are not desired.
For experts who prefer to program, the following text discusses the configuration of the TempScan/1100
and MultiScan/1200 systems without the use of ChartView. ChartView is a Windows-based setup andacquisition applications, which is included with your TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 package andprovides an easy-to-use alternative to programming.
ChartView documentation is provided immediately after Chapter 6 of this manual.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-1

Memory Allocation
Each TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200 unit comes equipped with standard 256 KB memory. This isexpandable to 8 MB (TempMEM8 or MultiMEM8).
When expanded memory is added, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit will automatically allocate
its memory for optimal use according to its current configuration. TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
memory is broken into the following two main regions:• High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers (only configured channels)• Acquisition Buffer
When channels are configured, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 calculates how much memory will
be needed for the High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers. The memory allocated to the HLL Registers would be
the following value – (Number of channels) x 20 bytes – while the remaining memory would beallocated to the Acquisition Buffer. For example, if the memory option is 256K (262144 bytes) and thenumber of configured channels is 96, then the amount allocated to the Acquisition Buffer would be:
262144 bytes Total Memory (256 KB)- 1920 bytes High/Low/Last (96 x 20)
260224 bytes Acquisition Buffer Allocation (254.125 KB)

Measuring Modes (MultiScan/1200 Only)
The operation of the MultiScan/1200 unit involves two basic internal measuring modes, as follows:• Line-Cycle Integration / High-Speed Multi-Channel (or Default) Mode. In the line-cycle integration/ high-speed multi-channel mode, the MultiScan/1200 samples channel data at 1.92 kHz or once every
520.83 µs. You can select the number of samples over which to average in order to accomplish noise
filtering.
• Single-Channel High-Speed Burst Mode. In the single-channel burst mode, the MultiScan/1200
collects data in user-defined multiples of 256 samples at a user-defined sampling frequency between
38.5 Hz and 20.0 kHz.
The following commands are provided to setup the MultiScan/1200 for a given measuring mode.
• M#mode: Select the measuring mode. The factory default is line cycle integration / high-speed multichannel mode.
• W#wt: Select the number of samples over which to average for each channel. This is valid only in line
cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode. The factory default is 32 samples.
• F#freq: Select the burst mode frequency. This is valid only in single-channel high-speed burst
mode. The factory default is 20 kHz (or 20000 Hz).
• Y0,post,0: In line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode, select the number of PostTrigger scans.

•

In single-channel high-speed burst mode, select the number of 256-sample blocks to acquire. The
number must be a power of 2.
U16: Query the measuring mode parameters M#, W#, F#, and/or Y to verify your selections.

For more information on the above commands, see Appendix A - API Command Reference.

4-2

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualNote:(1) For DC voltage and temperature, the term averaging implies obtaining the averagemeasurement over the specified number of samples. (2) For AC voltage, the term averaging
implies computing the RMS (Root Mean Square) value over the specified number of samples.

To Compute the MultiScan/1200 Scan Interval
To compute the time interval for the MultiScan/1200 to acquire one scan, use the following formulas:• For a 60-Hz Line Cycle: Scan Interval equals:
Is-m = Cv x (Wv + 12) x R1•

For a50-Hz Line Cycle: Scan Interval equals:
Is-m = Cv x (Wv + 12) x R2

Where:
Is-m = Scan Interval for the MultiScan/1200, milliseconds.
Cv = Channels, variable number of configured channels in the scan.
Wv = Sampling Weight, variable number of samples per channel.
R1 = Sampling Rate, constant of 0.52083 milliseconds per sample for a 60-Hz line cycle.
R2 = Sampling Rate, constant of 0.62500 milliseconds per sample for a 50-Hz line cycle.
To compute the time interval for the TempScan/1100 to acquire one scan, see section To Compute the
TempScan/1100 Scan Interval.

Line-Cycle Integration / High-Speed Multi-Channel Mode
The ability of the MultiScan/1200 unit to sample and average 32 measurements per line cycle enables it toreject noise resulting from AC line pickup, hence making it useful for high-accuracy applications. When inline-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode with the default weight of 32 samples per channel,
the unit can provide AC voltage, DC voltage, and thermocouple readings at a rate of up to 44 channels per
second. Further noise filtering is available with averaging over 2, 4, or 8 line cycles (at 32 samples per line
cycle) by selecting a weight of 64, 128, or 256 samples, respectively.
Sampling Weight Options
Weight (wt)Line Cycles (32 Measurements Each)

Maximum Number of Channels

1,2,4,8,16,32
64
128
256

1

744

2

431

4

234

8

122

CAUTIONDue to hardware constraints, weights greater than 32 (default) limit the number ofchannels which can be active in an acquisition.
If noise resulting from AC line pickup is not a concern, you can program the MultiScan/1200 unit toaverage 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 samples per channel for faster scanning throughput. For example, using the scaninterval formula for a 60-Hz line cycle, if the unit is configured to take 1 sample per channel, it can scan
147 adjacent channels per second. This means a fully-expanded MultiScan/1200 system could scan all of
its 744 channels every 5 seconds.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-3

Note:The MultiScan/1200 unit only supports the measurement of AC voltages where the frequencyof the input signal is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle. Consequently, samplingweights less than 32 can yield incorrect results. In order to compute an accurate Vrms value,
you must program a frequency which will yield a sufficient even integer number of samples
per line cycle.

To Enable the Default Mode
To enable line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode, issue the following commands:• M#mode: Select line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode, where mode is 0.
• W#wt: Select the number of samples over which to average, where wt is the one of the following
weights: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 (default), 64, 128, and 256.
• Y0,post,0: Select the number post of Post-Trigger scans.
• Cchans,type: Select the channel number or range, and the scanning-card channel type(s).
• Tstart,stop,0,0: Set the Trigger (trigger start event) to the software Trigger On (@) command,
where start is 1; and set the Stop (trigger stop event) to Count, where stop is 8. The Set Counts (Y)command is made valid when the Stop is set to Count.
• @: Start the acquisition.
For more information on the above commands, see Appendix A- API Command Reference.
Common Mode Voltage Inaccuracies
Inaccuracies can result if common mode voltages on adjacent channels are widely dissimilar. This
inaccuracy is due to inadequate settling time at the instrumentation amplifier when the unit is scanning
between channels. To eliminate these inaccuracies, the settling time can be increased using the Set Relay
Make Time (D#) command. For more information on this command, see Appendix A- API Command
Reference.

4-4

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualSingle-Channel High-Speed Burst ModeIn single-channel high-speed burst mode, the MultiScan/1200 unit can sample and store data from 38.5 Hz
to 20 kHz. When performing post-acquisition waveform analysis such as Fast Fourier Transforms (FFTs),
the unit can return the data points to your program in a waveform. As an alternative, the unit can provide atrue RMS (Root Mean Square) value of the equivalent AC voltage.
Due to the high sampling rates achievable in single-channel high-speed burst mode, the posting of theHigh/Low/Last (HLL) Registers and the alarms is disabled. Also, for the same reason, the Trigger (trigger
start event) can only be set to the software Trigger On (@) command, the Stop (trigger stop event) can only
be set to Count (validating the Set Counts (Y) command), and the following items are not permitted: PreTrigger, Post-Stop count, scan time stamping, and scan alarm stamping. For more information, seecommand Set Trigger Configuration (T) in Appendix A- API Command Reference.
In single-channel high-speed burst mode, the MultiScan/1200 internally collects the samples for theselected channel in 256-sample blocks. However, this externally appears the same as 256-channel scans in
the line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode. That is, when you program the number of 256sample blocks in the Post-Trigger count parameter post of the Set Counts (Y) command, you will retrieve
the data from the MultiScan/1200 unit as "Post-Trigger count" scans of 256 samples. For more
information, see command Set Counts (Y) in Appendix A- API Command Reference.
For AC voltage measurements in burst mode, the RMS value can be retrieved with the U17 querycommand upon completion of the acquisition.
Note:

Note:

The single-channel high-speed burst mode is a one-shot operation, since it collects the
specified number of samples and stops. It is not continuous, and does not allow memory
overflow and wrap-around. The maximum amount of samples which can be taken is dictatedby the amount of memory available. See command Set Counts (Y) in Appendix AAPI Command Reference.
The MultiScan/1200 unit only supports the measurement of AC voltages where the frequencyof the input signal is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle. Consequently, samplingweights less than 32 can yield incorrect results. In order to compute an accurate Vrms value,
you must program a frequency which will yield a sufficient even integer number of samples
per line cycle.

To Enable the Burst Mode
To enable single-channel high-speed burst mode, issue the following commands:• M#mode: Select single-channel high-speed burst mode, where mode is 1.
• F#freq: Select the burst mode sampling frequency, where freq is a real number between 38.5 and20000 Hz (default).
• Y0,post,0: Select the number post of 256-sample blocks to acquire, where post is limited by theamount of memory available.
• Cchans,type: Select the channel number and the scanning-card channel type.
• Tstart,stop,0,0: Set the Trigger (trigger start event) to the software Trigger On (@) command,
where start is 1; and set the Stop (trigger stop event) to Count, where stop is 8. The Set Counts (Y)command is made valid when the Stop is set to Count.
• @: Start the acquisition.
For more information on the above commands, see Appendix A- API Command Reference.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-5

Required Configuration
Although most of the user-defined configuration states have associated defaults, the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 does not scan its channels on the initial power-up activation. Before scans can begin, thefollowing required configurations must be performed:• Configuration of the desired channels. See command Channel Configuration (C).
• Configuration of the scan. See commands Channel Configuration (C) and Set Scan Interval (I).
• Configuration of the acquisition. See command Set Counts (Y).
• Configuration of the Trigger and Stop events. See command Set Trigger Configuration (T).
After these steps are completed and scanning begins, the alarms and the High/Low/Last Registers are
updated at the programmed scan rate, and the scans are placed in the Acquisition Buffer.
Example 12a. Required Configurations
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; C1-4,1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;I00:01:00.0,00:00:01.0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Y100,1000,0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;@X"

(6)
(7)
(8)

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 U4X"
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT A$The above command lines illustrates all of the required configurations:• Line 1: Configure channels 1 to 4 with Type J thermocouples.
• Line 2: Configure the normal scan interval to 1 minute and the acquisition scan interval to 1 second.
• Line 3: Set the Pre-Trigger scan count to 100 and the Post-Trigger scan count to 1000.
• Line 4: Configure the Trigger (trigger start event) to the software Trigger On (@) command and theStop (trigger stop event) to the Post-Trigger Count. The front panel TRIGGER LED indicator should
flash.
• Line 5: Trigger the acquisition. Acquisition scans should now be collected until 1000 Post-Trigger
scans have been collected. The front panel TRIGGER LED indicator should be on.
Querying the High/Low/Last Registers shows the temperature values for the configured channels.
• Line 6: Query HLL registers for the configured channels.
• Line 7: Get the response.
• Line 8: The screen will show the temperature data for the four channels.

4-6

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualChannel Configuration
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit performs several sophisticated calculations on the raw voltage
before supplying it to the controlling computer. To perform such calculations, the unit must know thechannel transducer type, and configuring a channel is the process of describing the channel transducer tothe TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit. Consequently, the configured channel becomes part of thechannel scan.
The TempScan/1100 system, including any connected Exp/10A and Exp/11A expansion units, accepts any
combination of three kinds of scanning cards. Meanwhile, the MultiScan/1200 system, including any
connected Exp/10A and Exp/11A expansion units, accepts any combination of two kinds of scanning
cards.
For the TempScan/1100 unit or the expanded TempScan/1100 system, the three scanning cards are:• TempTC/32B: This thermocouple (T/C) scanning card contains 32 differential input channels.
• TempV/32B: This volts scanning card contains 32 differential input channels.
• TempRTD/16B: This RTD scanning card contains 16 differential input channels.
For the MultiScan/1200 unit or the expanded MultiScan/1200 system, the two scanning cards are:
• MTC/24: This thermocouple/volts scanning card contains 24 differential input channels.
• MHV/24: This high-voltage scanning card contains 24 differential input channels.
The modularity of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 system eliminates the need for synchronizing
separate and possibly incompatible analog-to-digital (A/D) measuring instruments or boards. This is an
important consideration because many temperature measurement systems require a combination ofthermocouples, voltage, and RTD inputs.
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 system is capable of sensing the scanning card type that isplugged into a slot in the master unit or in one of its connected expansion units. When configuring achannel, the configuration parameters must match the scanning card type. For example, with a
TempScan/1000 system, a volts type cannot be assigned to a channel on a thermocouple scanning card, anda thermocouple type cannot be assigned to a channel on a volts scanning card. If you attempt to configurea channel number that is of the wrong type or does not exist, a channel configuration error will be logged
in the Error Source Register.
Using the Configure Channels (C) command, the minimum channel configuration required is a channel
type assigned for a single channel number or a range of channel numbers. Those channels not included in
the channel scan do not have to be configured. In addition to channel type and channel number, eachchannel included in the channel scan can have the optional values – high alarm setpoint, low alarm
setpoint, and hysteresis – associated with it. The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 alarms allow the unit
to produce an internal event when the value of a channel is outside of desired limits. These alarm events
can be used as a Trigger (trigger start event) or Stop (trigger stop event), or as a stimulus for TTL-levelsignals. For more information on channel types, see command Configure Channels (C).

CAUTION
The channel configuration cannot be changed while the trigger is armed or an
acquisition is taking place.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-7

Configuring TempTC/32B Thermocouple Channels (TempScan/1100 Only)
If the TempTC/32B scanning card is used, 32 differential thermocouple inputs are provided. In
configuring thermocouple channels, all that is required is to assign each channel to a particular
thermocouple type. Support for Type J, K, T, E, R, S, B and N (14 and 28 gauge) thermocouples are
standard. The 100-mV (with and without range-error detection) types are also supported.
Configuring TempV/32B Volts Channels (TempScan/1100 Only)
If the TempV/32B scanning card is used, 32 differential voltage inputs are provided. In configuring
voltage channels, all that is required is to assign each channel to a particular voltage type. Support for±100 mV, ±1 V, ±5 V, and ±10 V ranges in DC are standard.
Configuring TempRTD/16B RTD Channels (TempScan/1100 Only)
If the TempRTD/16B scanning card is used, 16 inputs for 3-wire or 4-wire RTDs are provided. In
configuring RTD channels, all that is required is to assign each channel to a particular RTD type, wherechannel numbers 17 through 32 on the scanning card are not used.
Configuring MTC/24 Thermocouple Channels (MultiScan/1200 Only)
If the MTC/24 scanning card is used, 24 differential thermocouple inputs are provided. In configuring
thermocouple channels, all that is required is to assign each channel to a particular thermocouple type.
Support for Type J, K, T, E, R, S, B and N (14 and 28 gauge) thermocouples are standard.
Configuring MTC/24 Volts Channels (MultiScan/1200 Only)
If the MTC/24 scanning card is used, 24 differential voltage inputs are provided. In configuring voltage
channels, all that is required is to assign each channel to a particular voltage type. Support for ±100 mV,±1 V, ±5 V, and ±10 V ranges in both DC and AC are standard.
Note:
Note:

The above AC ranges are maximum peak-to-peak signals for AC volts. Vrms values areaccurate to 70.7% of peak value.
The MultiScan/1200 unit only supports the measurement of AC voltages where the frequencyof the input signal is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle. Consequently, samplingweights less than 32 can yield incorrect results. In order to compute an accurate Vrms value,
you must program a frequency which will yield a sufficient even integer number of samples
per line cycle.

Configuring MHV/24 High-Voltage Channels (MultiScan/1200 Only)
If the MHV/24 scanning card is used, 4 differential high-voltage inputs are provided. In configuring highvoltage channels, all that is required is to assign each channel to a particular voltage type. Support for ±2.5
V, ±25 V, and ±250 V ranges in both DC and AC are standard.
Note:
Note:

4-8

System Configuration

The above AC ranges are maximum peak-to-peak signals for AC volts. Vrms values areaccurate to 70.7% of peak value.
The MultiScan/1200 unit only supports the measurement of AC voltages where the frequencyof the input signal is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle. Consequently, samplingweights less than 32 can yield incorrect results. In order to compute an accurate Vrms value,
you must program a frequency which will yield a sufficient even integer number of samples
per line cycle.

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualScan Configuration
Configuring the Scan

Channel Scan & Scan Interval Definitions
Although a fully-expanded TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 system of 31 available scanning-card slots
can provide a maximum capacity of 992 or 744 channels, respectively, only those channels configured in
the channel scan are collected and available to the controlling computer. Channels are always scanned inascending order, regardless of the sequence you input. The same configuration is used in reading channel
data through the High/Low/Last Registers or the Acquisition Buffer.
Scan configuration is also accomplished using the Configure Channels (C) command. This command
allows up to a maximum of 992 TempScan/1100 channels or 744 MultiScan/1200 channels to be assigned
as individual channels or as a range of channels. The maximum number of channels can be configured inany sequence, but these channels will be ordered sequentially for the scan.
Note:

TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 scans cannot randomly access the selected channels.

Configuring the Scan Interval
The scan interval is the time lapse between successive scans (or the inverse of the scan frequency). Using
the Set Scan Interval (I) command, you can program the scan interval with any duration from a 99-hour
period down to as fast as the unit can run under the current channel configuration.
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 has two distinct types of scan intervals:• Normal Scan Interval. The normal scan interval is used when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
unit is acquiring scans before the Trigger (trigger start event) has occurred, or after the Stop (trigger
stop event) has occurred. These two scanning regions are called the Pre-Trigger scan and the PostStop scan, respectively.
• Acquisition Scan Interval. The acquisition scan interval is used when the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit is acquiring scans after the Trigger (trigger start event) has occurred, but before
the Stop (trigger stop event) has occurred. This middle scanning region is called the Post-Trigger
scan.
The Set Scan Interval (I) command is used to set these two types of scan intervals. For example, thefollowing command – I00:00:10.0,00:00:00.1 – will set the normal scan interval to once every 10
seconds and set the acquisition scan interval to once every 0.1 seconds. One useful application for having
two different scan intervals is when events after the Trigger require faster sampling than those before the
Trigger, such as during alarm conditions.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-9

Fast-Mode Scan Rate (Minimum Scan Interval)
However, the scan interval can also be set to run at the minimum scan interval, yielding the fastest scanrate that the current system configuration will allow. This is referred to as fast mode. Either the normal or
acquisition scan interval can be set to fast mode, by specifying the following scan interval – 00:00:00.0– in the I command. For example, the command – I00:00:10.0,00:00:00.0 – will set the normal
scan interval to once every 10 seconds and set the acquisition scan interval to fast mode. These two typesof scan intervals may be queried any time via the I? command.
If fast mode is specified, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit will acquire scans at the fastest ratethat the current system configuration will allow. This requires some explanation since the rate at whichscans are acquired, while the unit is in fast mode, may vary greatly depending upon the number of channels
configured as well as the disposition of those configured channels.
Note:

The High/Low/Last Registers, the alarms, and the level event (if programmed) are all updated
at the maximum scan rate (or once every minimum scan interval), independent of any othertimebase configuration.

Disposition of Channel Configuration (TempScan/1100 Only)
An important aspect of the TempScan/1100 channel configuration is the number of channels configured
within a channel block. The TempScan/1100 groups its channels into channel blocks, where each channel
block consists of four channels. For example, the first channel block in the TempScan/1100 system
consists of channels 1 through 4; the second, channels 5 through 8; and so on.
The disposition of the channels refers to the density of the total channels configured within the system, orin other words, the number of channels skipped and not skipped over. The greater the density of thechannel blocks, that is, the greater the number of configured channels for a given channel range, the betterthe sampling rate will be.
The variable in determining the minimum scan interval is the number of non-empty 4-channel blocks.
Once you determine the number of non-empty 4-channel blocks, you can calculate the minimum scaninterval using the appropriate formula for your 50-Hz or 60-Hz line cycle system.

4-Channel Block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Note:
Note:

4-10

System Configuration

Example Disposition of TempScan/1100 Channel Configuration
Channels
In Use?
4-Channel Block
Channels
61,62, 63,6 4
1,2, 3, 4
Yes
16
65, 66, 67, 68
5, 6, 7, 8
Yes
17
9, 10, 11, 12
No69, 70, 71, 72
18
73, 74, 75, 76
13, 14, 15, 16
Yes
19
17, 18, 19, 20
No77, 78, 79, 80
20
21,22, 23,24
No
81,82, 83, 84
21
25, 26, 27, 28
No85, 86, 87,88
22
29, 30, 31, 32
No
89, 90, 91, 92
23
33, 34, 35, 36
No
93, 94, 95, 96
24
37, 38, 39, 40
No
25
97, 98, 99, 100
41,42, 43, 44
No
26
101, 102, 103, 104
45, 46, 47, 48
No
105, 106, 107, 108
27
49, 50, 51,52
No
109, 110, 111, 112
28
53, 54, 55, 56
No113, 114, 115, 116
29
57, 58, 59, 60
No117, 118, 119, 120
30

In Use?
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No

(1) Refer to the following example on scan interval computation where nine (9) channels 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 7, 15, 100, and 101 are configured. (2) This table only shows 30 of the 248 maximum
4-channel blocks (992 channels) for the fully-expanded TempScan/1100 system.
The disposition of the channel configuration does not affect MultiScan/1200 operation.

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualTo Compute the TempScan/1100 Scan Interval
To compute the time interval for the TempScan/1100 to acquire one scan, use the following formulas:• For a 60 Hz line cycle: Scan Interval is:
Is-t = [Next highest integer (Dv / 4)] x R1•

For a 50 Hz line cycle: Scan Interval is:
Is-t = [Next highest integer (Dv / 4)] x R2

Where:
Is-t = Scan Interval for the TempScan/1100, milliseconds.
Dv = Disposition, variable number of non-empty 4-channel blocks.
R1 = Sampling Rate, constant of 16.67 milliseconds (per 16-channel block) for a 60-Hz line cycle.
R2 = Sampling Rate, constant of 20.00 milliseconds (per 16-channel block) for a 50-Hz line cycle.
For example, if the nine (9) channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 15, 100, and 101 are configured, then there are five (5)non-empty 4-channel blocks (refer to the table on disposition). Using the scan interval formula for a
TempScan/1100 system with a 60-Hz line cycle, gives:
Is-t = Next highest integer (5 / 4) x 16.67 millisec.
Is-t = 2 x 16.67 millisec = 33.33 millisec.

However, if nine (9) channels are configured less densely by every fourth channel from channel 4 through36, then there are nine (9) non-empty 4-channel blocks. Using the same formula gives:
Is-t = Next highest integer (9 / 4) x 16.67 millisec.
Is-t = 3 x 16.67 millisec = 50.00 millisec.

Clearly, despite the identical number of configured channels, the disposition affects the TempScan/1100
scan interval. Meanwhile, the following table shows how the fast mode scan rate varies when the numberof configured channels increases where these TempScan/1100 channels are all adjacent to each other.
Variations of the TempScan/1100 Fast Mode Scan Rate
Number of

Number of

16-Channel
BlocksSelected
Channels

1

Scan Rate (Hz)60-Hertz Line Cycle
Hertz
milliseconds

50-Hertz Line Cycle
Hertz
milliseconds

16

60

16.67

50

20

2

32

30

33.33

25

40

3

48

20

50.00

16.67

60

4

64

15

66.67

12.50

80

5

80

12

83.33

10.00

100

…

…

…

…

…

…

10

160

6.00

166.67

5.00

200

…

…

…

…

…

…

50

800

1.20

833.33

1.00

1000

…

…

…

…

…

…

60

960

0.909

1100.00

0.833

1200

61

976

0.984

1016.67

0.820

1220

62

992

0.968

1033.33

0.806

1240

Note:

(1) The number of selected channels refer to configured channels which are all adjacent toeach other. (2) These values were obtained from the above TempScan/1100 scan interval
equations.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-11

To Compute the MultiScan/1200 Scan Interval
To compute the time interval for the MultiScan/1200 to acquire one scan, use the following formulas:• For a 60-Hz Line Cycle: Scan Interval equals:
Is-m = Cv x (Wv + 12) x R3•

For a50-Hz Line Cycle: Scan Interval equals:
Is-m = Cv x (Wv + 12) x R4

Where:
Is-m = Scan Interval for the MultiScan/1200, milliseconds.
Cv = Channels, variable number of configured channels in the scan.
Wv = Sampling Weight, variable number of samples per channel.
R3 = Sampling Rate, constant of 0.52083 milliseconds (per sample) for a 60-Hz line cycle.
R4 = Sampling Rate, constant of 0.62500 milliseconds (per sample) for a 50-Hz line cycle.
For example, if 148 channels are configured, the disposition of these channels will not be a factor. Using
the scan interval formula for a MultiScan/1200 system with a 60-Hz line cycle, if the system is configured
to take 1 sample per channel, gives:
Is-m = 148 x (1 + 12) x 0.52083 millisec.
Is-m = 148 x 13 x 0.52083 millisec = 1002 millisec = 1.002 seconds.

Meanwhile, the following table shows how the fast mode scan rate varies when the number of configured
channels increases where these MultiScan/1200 channels are all adjacent to each other, and are using thedefault sampling weight of 32 samples per channel.
Variations of the MultiScan/1200 Fast Mode Scan Rate
Number of

Number of

12-Channel
BlocksSelected
Channels1
2

50-Hertz Line Cycle
Hertz
seconds

12

3.636

0.275

3.030

0.330

24

1.818

0.550

1.515

0.660

3

36

1.212

0.825

1.010

0.990

4

48

0.909

1.100

0.758

1.320

5

60

0.727

1.375

0.606

1.650

…

…

…

…

…

…

10

120

0.36362.750

0.3030

3.300

…

…

…

…

…

…

50

600

0.072713.7500.060616.500

…

…

…

…

…

…

60

720

0.060616.5000.050519.80061

732

0.059616.7750.0497

20.130744

0.058717.0500.048920.460

62

Note:

4-12

Scan Rate (Hz)60-Hertz Line Cycle
Hertz
seconds

System Configuration(1) The number of selected channels refer to configured channels which are all adjacent toeach other. (2) These values were obtained from the above MultiScan/1200 scan interval
equations.

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualAcquisition Configuration
Configuring the Acquisition (Non-Burst Mode)

Acquisition Definition
After configuring each channel, it is necessary to configure the acquisition parameters to collect and bufferscans. An acquisition can consist of the following components:• Pre-Trigger: The state in which scans are taken before the Trigger (trigger start event) is satisfied.
This component is not required.
• Post-Trigger: The state in which scans are taken after the Trigger (trigger start event) and before theStop (trigger stop event). Required, however if the Post-Trigger is set to 0, the Trigger scan iscollected (1 scan) but no Post-Stop scans are collected• Post-Stop: The state in which scans are taken after the Stop event. This component is not required.
These components constitute a single Trigger Block in the internal memory of the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit. Every Trigger Block has one and only one Trigger (trigger start event).
Pre-Trigger StateThe Pre-Trigger state is the acquisition period before the Trigger (trigger start event), as set via the Set
Trigger Configuration (T) command. While the unit is in this state, the TRIGGER LED indicator will
flash. As in any other acquisition state, the alarms and their associated outputs will be updated as follows:
At the fastest rate possible under the current channel configuration, for the TempScan/1100; and at any
programmed Pre-Trigger scan rate up to the fastest rate possible under the current channel configuration,
for the MultiScan/1200.
During this state, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 may be configured to collect Pre-Trigger data.
This may be accomplished by specifying a non-zero value for the Pre-Trigger pre parameter of the Set
Counts (Y) command. However, the Pre-Trigger pre value coupled with the current channel configuration
cannot exceed the total amount of available memory.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-13

If the Pre-Trigger pre is set to a non-zero value, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 will begin
sampling Pre-Trigger data immediately after the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command is issued, at therate specified by the current normal scan interval, as set via the Set Scan Interval (I) command.
When the Trigger start event occurs, the Pre-Trigger data portion of the Trigger Block will contain themost recent Pre-Trigger scans. The number of Pre-Trigger scans collected will depend upon when the
Trigger occurs. If the Trigger occurs when the number of acquired Pre-Trigger scans is less than thespecified Pre-Trigger pre, then that number of Pre-Trigger scans will be the number of Pre-Trigger scanscollected to that point. Otherwise, if the Trigger occurs when the number of acquired Pre-Trigger scans isgreater than the specified Pre-Trigger pre, then the number of Pre-Trigger scans will be the number
specified by the Pre-Trigger pre parameter of the Set Counts (Y) command. If no acquisition data isdesired while in the Pre-Trigger state, the Pre-Trigger pre parameter of the Set Counts (Y) command may
be set to zero.
Pre-Trigger data may not be accessed while the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is in the PreTrigger state. The Pre-Trigger data for a particular Trigger Block is not made available to be read until the
specified Trigger occurs. There are two ways to determine if the unit is in the Pre-Trigger state:• Check the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 front panel. If the TRIGGER LED indicator is flashing,then the unit is in the Pre-Trigger state.
• Query the Status Byte Register (STB) via the User Status (U1) command. If the acquisition has been
configured and the Triggered Bit (Bit 1) is not set , then the unit is in the Pre-Trigger state. When thespecified Trigger occurs, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 exits the Pre-Trigger state and enters
the Post-Trigger state.
Post-Trigger StateThe Post-Trigger state is the acquisition period after the Trigger (trigger start event) and before the Stop(trigger stop event). While the unit is in this state, the TRIGGER LED indicator will be on. As in any
other acquisition state, the alarms and their associated outputs will be updated as follows: At the fastest ratepossible under the current channel configuration, for the TempScan/1100; and at any programmed PostTrigger scan rate up to the fastest rate possible under the current channel configuration, for theMultiScan/1200.
During this state, the unit will collect Post-Trigger data at the rate specified by the acquisition scaninterval, as set via the Set Scan Interval (I) command. Post-Trigger scans will be collected at this rateuntil the Stop event occurs. The number of scans collected during the Post-Trigger state is not restrictedby the internal buffer size. The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 can collect scans in the Post-Trigger
state indefinitely, if the controlling computer is capable of reading data out of the Acquisition Buffer fastenough to prevent a buffer overrun.
The Post-Trigger state may be detected by doing the following: Querying the Triggered Bit (Bit 1) of the
Status Byte Register (STB) via the User Status (U1) command; and querying the Stop Event Bit (Bit 1) of
the Event Status Register (ESR) via the User Status (U0) command. If and only if the Triggered Bit (Bit 1)of the STB is set, and the Stop Event Bit (Bit 1) of the ESR is not set, then the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit is in the Post-Trigger state. The unit will exit the Post-Trigger state when the Stop
event occurs.
Post-Stop StateThe Post-Trigger state is the acquisition period after the Stop (trigger stop event) until the completion of
the acquisition. While the unit is in this state, the TRIGGER LED indicator will be on. As in any otheracquisition state, the alarms and their associated outputs will be updated as follows: At the fastest ratepossible under the current channel configuration, for the TempScan/1100; and at any programmed PostStop scan rate up to the fastest rate possible under the current channel configuration, for theMultiScan/1200.

4-14

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualIf the Post-Stop stop parameter of the Set Counts (Y) command is set to a non-zero value, theTempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 will begin sampling Post-Stop data upon the occurrence of the Stop
event, and will acquire the specified number of Post-Stop scans.
When the specified number of Post-Stop scans have been collected, the unit will terminate the current
acquisition and return to a non-acquiring state. If, however, the Post-Stop stop parameter of the Set
Counts (Y) command is zero, the unit will return immediately to a non-acquiring state upon the occurrenceof the Stop event (unless the Auto Re-arm feature is used).
The Post-Stop state may be detected by querying the Stop Event Bit (Bit 1) and the Acquisition Complete
Bit (Bit 0) of the Event Status Register (ESR). If and only if the Stopped Bit (Bit 1) of the ESR is set, and
the Acquisition Complete Bit (Bit 0) of the ESR is not set, then the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit
is in the Post-Stop state. The unit will exit the Post-Stop state when the specified number of Post-Stopscans have been acquired. When this occurs, the Acquisition Complete Bit (Bit 0) of the ESR will be set
and the unit will return to a non-acquiring state (unless the Auto Re-arm feature is used).
Continuous, Gap-Free Acquisition with Two Timebases
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit can be configured to have different timebases for its PreTrigger (normal scan interval) and Post-Trigger (acquisition scan interval) states. When the user-specified
Trigger condition is satisfied, the unit switches from the Pre-Trigger to the Post-Trigger state, changing its
timebase if configured to do so. This feature, along with Auto Re-arm, can be used to collect continuous,
gap-free data at two different timebases.

To ensure that the collected data is gap-free, the Pre-Trigger pre parameter of the Set Counts (Y)command must be set to -1. If a value of 0 or higher is used as the Pre-Trigger pre value, then that value
is the maximum number of Pre-Trigger scans that can be placed in the Acquisition Buffer after the Trigger
condition is satisfied.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-15

To enable the gap-free acquisition with two timebases, you must perform the following:• Specify the two trigger events – the Trigger (trigger start event) and the Stop (trigger stop event) – via
the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command.
• Set the two timebase intervals – the normal and the acquisition scan intervals – via the Set Scan
Interval (I) command.
• Set the Pre-Trigger count to -1, via the pre parameter of the Set Counts (Y) command. If more than
one transition cycle is desired, enable the Auto Re-arm flag of the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command to allow each transition cycle to be stored in its own Trigger Block within the buffer.
Using this method, continuous data may be collected as long as the application program can read data outof the Acquisition Buffer before the buffer overruns. If the buffer overruns, the data read may not be
continuous.

Trigger Configuration
Trigger Start & Stop Events
The programmed system events are the driving force behind any acquisition. For an acquisition to takeplace, the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command is used as the central command to assign the following
events to the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit: The Trigger (trigger start event) and the Stop(trigger stop event). The Trigger and Stop may also be assigned different trigger sources. In addition, theSet Trigger Configuration (T) command also determines whether or not, after the initial acquisition, theacquisition will be re-enabled automatically, and whether or not the Trigger (trigger start event) should be
synchronized with the Pre-Trigger scan interval.
Upon the execution of this command, the unit will enter acquisition mode, and the TRIGGER LED
indicator on the front panel will flash. If Pre-Trigger scans have been configured via the Set Counts (Y)command, then the sampling for Pre-Trigger data will begin at this time. Specifically, the Set Trigger
Configuration (T) command is used to set the following parameters:• Trigger (trigger start event): This parameter is the event that is to take place in order for the unit tobegin acquiring scans. When the unit detects a Trigger, it will stop acquiring Pre-Trigger scans (ifconfigured), and begin acquiring Post-Trigger scans at that point. The first of these Post-Trigger
scans, the Trigger scan, will be Time/Date stamped for later reference, such as in a response to thefollowing User Status (U) command query: U6 – Query the Buffer Status String. Also, when the
Trigger is detected, the Triggered Bit (Bit 1) of the Status Byte Register (STB) will be set and the
TRIGGER LED indicator on the front panel will turn on.
• Stop (trigger stop event): This parameter is the event that is to take place in order for the unit to stop
acquiring scans. When the unit detects a Stop, it will stop acquiring Post-Trigger scans at that point,
unless Post-Stop scans are defined via the Set Counts (Y) command. The last of these Post-Trigger
scans, the Stop scan, will be Time/Date stamped for later reference, such as in a response to thefollowing User Status (U) command query: U6 – Query the Buffer Status String. Also, when the Stopis recognized, the Triggered Bit (Bit 1) of the Status Byte Register (STB) will be cleared and the
TRIGGER LED indicator on the front panel will turn off.

4-16

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual••

Auto Re-arm: This parameter is the feature which determines whether or not, after the initialacquisition, the acquisition will be re-enabled automatically. If the Auto Re-arm feature is in use, theTempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit will immediately begin looking for another Trigger event
once a Stop event and Post-Stop count are detected to indicate that the current acquisition has
terminated. When the next Trigger is detected, a new acquisition with the same channel configuration
will be enabled automatically. Otherwise, if this feature is not in use, and the initial acquisition has
terminated, a Set Trigger Configuration (T) command must be issued after a Stop event, before the unit
can begin looking for a Trigger.
However, using Auto Re-arm does not allow you to change the Trigger configuration between
Triggers. Consequently, the initial configuration will be used until the Auto Re-arm is disabled. To
disable the Auto Re-arm flag, a Set Trigger Configuration (T) command must be issued with the rearm parameter set to zero. Data will still be available after the T command is issued.
Trigger Synchronization: This parameter is a flag which determines whether or not the Trigger(trigger start event) should be synchronized with the Pre-Trigger scan interval, provided that both the
Pre-Trigger count and normal scan interval are configured via the Set Counts (Y) and Set Scan
Interval (I) commands, respectively. If this flag is set, then the Trigger scans will begin on the next
"tick" of the Pre-Trigger scan interval, regardless of the exact point in time when the actual Trigger
occurred. So, if the actual Trigger occurs between "ticks" of the Pre-Trigger scan interval, then theacquisition will not begin until the next "tick" of the Pre-Trigger scan interval. Otherwise, theacquisition of Post-Trigger scans will begin independently at the exact point when the Trigger (trigger
start event) is detected.

Trigger Start & Stop Event Sources
As already mentioned, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 can be configured so that the Trigger andStop are assigned different trigger sources. However, since the Set Trigger Configuration (T) commandgoverns the configuration of an acquisition, all other acquisition-dependent commands should be sent
before the trigger sources are assigned via the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command. The required
acquisition-dependent commands will depend on the selected trigger sources. For instance, if the unit isconfigured for Trigger On (@) command, it will not be necessary to send the unrelated Set Trigger Level(L) command.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-17

The Trigger and Stop can each be assigned any of the following sources:• @: Trigger and/or Stop event. Trigger source type 1. When @ is selected as the trigger source, theTrigger On (@) command will generate a trigger.
• GET: Trigger and/or Stop event. Trigger source type 2. Not applicable for RS-232 serial
applications. When GET is selected as the trigger source, data collection will start when the IEEE 488
Group Execute Trigger (GET) command is sensed on the IEEE 488 bus and the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit is addressed to LISTEN.
• TALK: Trigger and/or Stop event. Trigger source type 3. Not applicable for RS-232 serial
applications. When TALK is selected as the trigger source, data collection will start when the
TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is addressed to TALK.
• Selected Temperature-Channel Level (Above or Below): Trigger and/or Stop event. Trigger source
types 4 and 5. When a selected temperature channel is specified as the trigger source, data collection
will start when the level for the selected channel has been crossed (either above or below), as defined
via the Set Trigger Level (L) command.
• External TTL (Rising or Falling): Trigger and/or Stop event. Trigger source types 6 and 7. Whenthe External TTL Level is specified as a trigger source, a TTL level signal to the rear-panel BNC
trigger connector will generate a trigger. The external trigger is edge sensitive, and triggering on therising edge or falling edge can be specified.
• Count (Post-Trigger): Trigger and/or Stop event. Trigger source type 8. When Count is selected as
the Stop event, scans will occur until the specified number of Post-Trigger scans have been acquired,as defined via the Set Counts (Y) command. At this point, the Post-Trigger acquisition will stop and if
configured, the Post-Stop acquisition will begin.
• Alarm (On or Off): Trigger and/or Stop event. Trigger source types 9 and 10. When Alarm isselected as a trigger source, the acquisition will start or stop when any channel goes into or out of analarm condition, as defined via the Configure Channels (C) command.
• Absolute Time: Trigger and/or Stop event. Trigger source type 11. When absolute time is specified
as a trigger source, data collection will start when the real-time clock time equals the programmedtime(s), as defined via the Program Trigger Times (P) command.
Note:

For the MultiScan/1200 unit to recognize a Trigger (trigger start event) source which is set to
TTL Level or Alarm, at least one Pre-Trigger scan must be programmed via the preparameter of the Set Counts (Y) command, to initiate scanning.

For more information on Trigger and Stop configuration, see command Set Trigger Configuration (T) in
Appendix A- API Command Reference.

Additional Configuration
Beyond the minimum required configurations, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 provides further
convenience and flexibility with the following optional configurations:• Configuration of the alarms. See commands Assign Digital Alarm Output (A) and Channel
Configuration (C).
• Configuration of the stamps. See commands Set Scan Time Stamping (*T), Set Scan Alarm Stamping(A#), and Set Digital Input Stamping (I#).
• Configuration of the data format. See command Set Data Format (F).
• Configuration of the power-up. See command Set Power-Up Configuration (*S).

4-18

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualAlarm Configuration
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit can be programmed to produce an internal alarm event whenthe value of a channel is outside of user-defined limits. In turn, these alarm events can be used as sources
for Trigger or Stop events, or as stimuli for TTL-level signals. To use the alarms, the relevant channels
must be part of the channel scan. After an acquisition has been configured and armed, the alarms will beenabled and monitored. Since alarming is totally independent of buffered operations, the assignment oftrigger events or scan intervals is not required.
Note:

To enable alarm monitoring prior to, or have an alarm condition serve as, the Trigger or Stop
event, you must first configure the acquisition with at least one Pre-Trigger scan.

Alarm Setpoints
Each channel has an associated high and low setpoint. Setpoints are defined as part of a channel
configuration using the Configure Channels (C) command. These setpoints create the “envelope” that
constitutes the normal channel operating range.

If the channel value goes above the high setpoint or below the low setpoint, then the channel is in the alarmstate. If any configured channel is in the alarm state, a system alarm event will be posted. In turn, if the
Trigger event source is set to Alarm, this system alarm event would cause a Trigger.
Alarm Hysteresis
To avoid threshold transition problems, a hysteresis value can also be programmed. . A hysteresis value
provides a range for the alarm state. After the alarm setpoint is exceeded, the signal must drop below thehigh setpoint, or above the low setpoint, by the hysteresis value before the channel leaves the alarm state
and the alarm is reset.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-19

For example, let us assume a channel has alarm setpoints of 100 and -100, and a hysteresis of 10. If 100 is
exceeded, the channel will remain in the alarm state until the signal falls below 90. Or if -100 is exceeded,
the channel will remain in the alarm state until the signal rises above -90.
Digital Alarm Outputs
If preferred, an alarm event for a specific channel can be used as a stimulus for a digital (TTL) output
signal. In turn, this signal can be used to set off an audible alarm (user-supplied) or to communicate toanother device that the alarm state has occurred.
Thirty-two (32) digital alarm outputs are available via the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 rear-panel
DB50 connector. Although analog input channels on the Exp/10A or Exp/11A expansion unit can be used
to stimulate alarms, neither of these expansion units provides digital alarm outputs. Consequently,
regardless of the number of connected expansion units, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 system canonly provide 32 digital alarm outputs.
You can assign as many alarm states as you prefer to any digital output. To configure alarm conditions fordriving the digital output lines, use the Configure Channels (C) and Assign Digital Alarm Output (A)commands. The former command determines the high setpoint, low setpoint and hysteresis of the alarmstate, while the latter command assigns alarm states of a particular channel, or range of channels, toindividual outputs of the 32 available digital alarm outputs.
Example 12b. TempScan/1100 Digital Alarm Output
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: C1-32, 1, -1000.0, +1000.0, 10.0X”
PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: A1, 1X”
PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: A2, 2X”
PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: A3, 2X”

The above program example demonstrates how to configure alarms and associate them with digital alarm
outputs for 32 channels of the TempScan/1100:• Line 1: Setup channels 1 to 32 with Type J thermocouples, low setpoint = -1000.0 °C, high setpoint =+1000.0 °C, and hysteresis = 10.0°C.
• Line 2: Assign alarm channel 1 to digital output 1.
• Line 3: Assign alarm channel 2 to digital output 2.
• Line 4: Assign alarm channel 3 to digital output 2. So Channel 2 or 3 can set digital output 2.
Example 12c. MultiScan/1200 Digital Alarm Output
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: C1-24, 1, -500.0, +500.0, 50.0X”
PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: A1, 1X”
PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: A2, 2X”
PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: A3, 2X”

The above program example demonstrates how to configure alarms and associate them with digital alarm
outputs for 24 channels of the MultiScan/1200:• Line 1: Setup channels 1 to 24 with Type J thermocouples, low setpoint = -500.0 °C, high setpoint =+500.0 °C, and hysteresis = 50.0°C.
• Line 2: Assign alarm channel 1 to digital output 1.
• Line 3: Assign alarm channel 2 to digital output 2.
• Line 4: Assign alarm channel 3 to digital output 2. With both Lines 3 and 4, either channel 2 or 3 canset digital output 2.

4-20

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualComparing Buffered Data to Alarm Status Data
With the TempScan/1100 unit, unless scans are being collected at the maximum possible frequency, thealarm system may detect alarm states that will not appear in the collected data. Since the alarms are being
updated at the maximum possible frequency, which may be considerably faster than the scan frequency as
set by the programmed scan interval, an alarm state may be detected even though no such value can befound in the buffered scan data.

If such a situation is not preferred, decreasing the programmed scan interval (thus increasing the scanfrequency) will decrease the possibility of such an event. At the maximum possible scan frequency, thissituation is guaranteed not to occur.
With the MultiScan/1200 unit, the alarms are being updated at the same frequency as set by the
programmed scan interval. Hence, all detected alarm states will appear in the collected data.
Digital I/O Configuration
Located on the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 rear panel, the DB50 digital I/O connector provides
eight (8) digital input lines and thirty-two (32) digital output lines. The digital output can be controlledeither via the alarm settings or via the Set Digital Outputs (O) command. To query the digital output state,
use the Set Digital Outputs (O) command.
The Set Digital Outputs (O) command allows you to force any of the 32 digital outputs, grouped into four
8-bit banks, to a specific setting. For each digital output, you can specify whether the bit should be clearedwith a 0 (active low, logic false) or set with a 1 (active high, logic true). This command will override
the current alarm output status as set via the Assign Alarm Output (A) command.
Each digital output line will drive five (5) standard TTL (transistor-transistor logic) loads. All digital input
lines are one-eighth (0.125) TTL loads. All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltage.
Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to the range of 0.0 to 5.3 volts. All digital
I/O lines are referenced to digital ground.
For more information on digital I/O, see section Digital I/O Configuration in Chapter 1, System Overview,and the Set Digital Outputs (O) command in Appendix A-API Command Reference.

CAUTION
Do not exceed the levels described. Otherwise, the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit may be damaged in a way that is not covered by thewarranty.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-21

Stamp Configuration
Scan Time Stamping
The contents of each scan contains one reading for each of the configured channels. Optionally, timestamping of each scan can be enabled with the Set Scan Time Stamping (*T) command. Either absolute or
relative time stamping may be specified. For more information, see command Set Scan Time Stamping(*T) in Appendix A - API Command Reference.
Note:(1) Relative time stamping is not valid when you attempt to use it in conjunction with
continuous, gap-free acquisitions with two timebases. (2) With MultiScan/1200 only, timestamping is not valid in single-channel high-speed burst mode.

Example 12d. Absolute Time Stamping Enabled
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*T1X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R3X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
INPUT A$
07:35:22.400,08/29/94R+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60....

The above program example demonstrates how to enable absolute time stamping:• Line 1: Enable absolute time stamping.
• Line 2: Request all scan data in buffer.
• Line 3: Retrieve the data.
• Line 4: The screen will show the scan data in the buffer, stamped with the absolute time.
Note:

The R character (following the absolute time in the above code) is a reading separator which
has been assigned via the sep parameter of the Set Query Terminator (Q) command.

Example 12e. Relative Time Stamping Enabled
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*T2X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R3X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
INPUT A$
+00:01:05.5,0000001 R +0234.20 -0019.40 +0001.40 +0023.60....

The above program example demonstrates how to enable relative time stamping:• Line 1: Enable relative time stamping.
• Line 2: Request all scan data in buffer.
• Line 3: Retrieve the data.
• Line 4: The screen will show the scan data in the buffer, stamped with the relative time.
Note:

4-22

System Configuration

The R character (following the relative time in the above code) is a reading separator which
has been assigned via the sep parameter of the Set Query Terminator (Q) command.

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualExample 12f. Scan Time Stamping Disabled (Default)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*T0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R3X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
INPUT A$
+0234.20 -0019.40 +0001.40 +0023.60

The above program example demonstrates how to disable time stamping:• Line 1: Disable time stamping.
• Line 2: Request all scan data in buffer.
• Line 3: Retrieve the data.
• Line 4: The screen will show the scan data in the buffer, without a time stamp.
Scan Alarm Stamping
Note:

In an 8-bit byte, Bits 00 through 07 correspond to digital input/output (DIO) lines 1 through8. Also, Bit n corresponds to the decimal value 2^n (where n is an integer from 00 to 07).

As a further option in the monitoring and analysis of alarm conditions, the states of the 32 digital alarm
outputs can be stamped to each scan in real time.

Alarm stamping of each scan can be enabled with the Set Scan Alarm Stamping (A#) command. For more
information, see command Set Scan Alarm Stamping (A#) in Appendix A - API Command Reference.
Note:
Note:

With MultiScan/1200 only, alarm stamping is not valid in single-channel high-speed burst
mode, since alarms are not monitored.
If digital input stamping has also been enabled via the Set Digital Input Stamping (I#)
command, then the digital input states will be stamped after the alarm output states have been
stamped.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-23

Example 12g. Scan Alarm Stamping Enabled(1)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;A#1X”

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0234.20 -0019.40 +0001.40 +0023.60 005 128 032 066

The above program example demonstrates how to enable alarm stamping:• Line 1: Enable alarm stamping.
• Line 2: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
• Line 3: Request the next scan in the buffer.
• Line 4: Retrieve the scan.
• Line 5: The screen will show the scan data in the buffer, stamped with the alarm output states.
Example 12h. Scan Alarm Stamping Disabled (Default)(1)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;A#0X”

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0234.20 -0019.40 +0001.40 +0023.60

The above program example demonstrates how to disable alarm stamping:• Line 1: Disable alarm stamping.
• Line 2: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
• Line 3: Request the next scan in the buffer.
• Line 4: Retrieve the scan.
• Line 5: The screen will show the scan data in the buffer, without an alarm stamp.
Digital Input Stamping
Note:

In an 8-bit byte, Bits 00 through 07 correspond to digital input/output (DIO) lines 1 through8. Also, Bit n corresponds to the decimal value 2^n (where n is an integer from 00 to 07).

The Set Digital Input Stamping (I#) command allows you to see whether a digital input was “active” or“inactive” at the time of the scan. This is accomplished by appending a digital input on/off code to the
scan.

4-24

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualWith digital input stamping, the “on” (1) or “off” (0) states of the 8 digital inputs can be stamped to eachscan in real time. Digital input stamping of each scan can be enabled with the Set Digital Input Stamping(I#) command. For more information, see command Set Digital Input Stamping (I#) in Appendix A API Command Reference.
To make use of this command, EEPROM memory upgrades are required, as follows:
TempScan/1100: Requires the TEMP/1100/UPG upgrade package, with EEPROM #446-0300-1,
Version 1.2 or greater.
MultiScan/1200: Requires the MULTI/1200/UPG upgrade package, with EEPROM #264-0300-1,
Version 2.1 or greater.
Note:
Note:
Note:

The document Firmware Upgrade (#403-0922) details how to install the new EEPROM
upgrades.
With MultiScan/1200 only, alarm stamping is not valid in single-channel high-speed burstmode.
If scan alarm stamping has also been enabled via the Set Scan Alarm Stamping (A#)
command, then the digital input states will be stamped after the alarm output states have been
stamped.

Example 12i. Digital Input Stamping Enabled(1)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;I#1X”

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0234.20 -0019.40 +0001.40 +0023.60 036 000

The above program example demonstrates how to enable digital input stamping:• Line 1: Enable digital input stamping.
• Line 2: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
• Line 3: Request the next scan in the buffer.
• Line 4: Retrieve the scan.
• Line 5: The screen will show the scan data in the buffer, stamped with the digital input states.
Example 12j. Digital Input Stamping Disabled (Default)(1)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;I#0X”

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0234.20 -0019.40 +0001.40 +0023.60

The above program example demonstrates how to disable digital input stamping:• Line 1: Disable digital input stamping.
• Line 2: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
• Line 3: Request the next scan in the buffer.
• Line 4: Retrieve the scan.
• Line 5: The screen will show the scan data in the buffer, without a digital input stamp.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-25

Data Format Configuration
Readings from the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 are outputted in the format that you haveconfigured. The Set Data Format (F) command determines whether Engineering Units converted fromASCII, a Binary format, or an unconverted ASCII raw-data count is used; and if Engineering Units isselected, determines what kind of Engineering Units is used.
All commands and input data issued by the PC/IEEE 488 controller to the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit are in ASCII code (in converted Engineering Units or unconverted ASCII Counts).
Only output data supplied by the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit, such as Time/Date stamps for
High/Low/Last registers, may be returned in Binary format. Both the IEEE 488 and RS-232 interfaces
support data retrieval in ASCII code (in converted Engineering Units or unconverted ASCII Counts) and,for high-speed applications, in Binary format. The terminators End of Reading and End of Scan are notused with Binary data transfers. For the IEEE 488 interface, EOI is asserted on the last byte.
The available options for the basic data format, via the format parameter of the Set Data Format (F)command, include: Engineering Units (default), Binary with High Byte first, Binary with Low Byte first,
and ASCII Count. In turn, the available options for the Engineering Units, via the engr parameter,
include: Degrees Celsius (°C, default), Degrees Fahrenheit (°F), Degrees Rankine (°R), Degrees Kelvin(°K), and Volts (V).
Data Input Formats
Before reading the acquisition data, issuing the Set Data Format (F) command determines the format of
input data – in the form of command parameters – coming from the PC/IEEE 488 controller. However, theonly command parameters for which the F command can determine the data input format, are the highsetpoint, low setpoint, and the hysteresis parameters of the Configure Channels (C) command, and the level
and hysteresis parameters of the Set Trigger Level (L) command. These are the only command parameters
over which the Set Data Format (F) command has control.
Note:(1) The above channel and Trigger level parameters cannot be interpreted as a Binary format.
(2) If an Engineering Units or Binary format is selected as the data input format, then thechannel and Trigger level values will be interpreted as Engineering Units. (3) If the ASCIICount format is selected as the data input format, then the channel and Trigger level values
will be interpreted as Count, and the Engineering Units engr parameter will be ignored.

Example 12k. Data Input Format Cases
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; F0,0X"•

Case 1: This command line interprets the relevant high setpoint, low setpoint, level, and/or hysteresis
parameters as Engineering Units, Degrees C for the next C or L command issued.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; F1,1X"•

Case 2: This command line interprets the relevant high setpoint, low setpoint, level, and/or hysteresis
parameters as Engineering Units, Degrees F (even though the Binary format is specified) for the next C
or L command issued.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; F3,3X"

•

4-26

Case 3: This command line interprets the relevant high setpoint, low setpoint, level, and/or hysteresis
parameters as ASCII Counts for the next C or L command issued. In this case, the Engineering Units
engr parameter is ignored.

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualData Output Formats
During or after the acquisition, issuing the Set Data Format (F) command determines the format of output
data coming from the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit. However, data output formats differ
slightly from data input formats in that Binary formats may be used, and used only for the output ofchannel data. Channel data, defined as data originating from the High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers or theAcquisition Buffer, may also be output in the Engineering Units or ASCII Count format as well as the
Binary format.
The commands which can initiate channel data output (in Engineering Units, Binary, or ASCII Counts
format) are the Read Buffered Data (R), Read Last Readings (R#), and following User Status (U) command
queries: Query current HLL Registers (U4), Query and clear current HLL Registers (U5) and Query lastscan read (U13). Meanwhile, the three commands queries which can initiate output in ASCII Count format
are the following: Query current channel configuration (C?), Query the current trigger level settings (L?),
and Query configured channels (U8).
Note:(1) Channel data is the only output data which may use the Binary format. If the Binary
format is selected, then the Engineering Units engr parameter will be ignored. (2) For allother types of output data, if an Engineering Units or Binary format is selected as the data
output format, then these output data values will be interpreted as Engineering Units. (3) If
the ASCII Count format is selected as the data output format, then the output data values will
be interpreted as Count, and the Engineering Units engr parameter will be ignored.

Example 12l. Data Output Format Cases
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; F0,0X"•

Case 1: This command line interprets the output data as Engineering Units, Degrees C for the next R,
R#, U4, U5, or U13 command issued, and also for the next C?, L?, or U8 command issued.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; F1,1X"•

Case 2: This command line interprets the output data as Binary for the next R, R#, U4, U5, or U13
command issued (only channel data can be in Binary format), but also interprets the output data as
Engineering Units, Degrees F for the next C?, L?, or U8 command issued.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; F3,3X"•

Case 3: This command line interprets the output data as ASCII Counts for the R, R#, U4, U5, or U13
command issued, and also for the next C?, L?, or U8 command issued. In this case, the Engineering
Units engr parameter is ignored.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-27

Engineering Units Format
If the Engineering Units data format is selected, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 will interpret andsupply data in a format appropriate for the configured thermocouple or volts channel type. In theEngineering Units format, both input and output data formats are valid for the following data:•

Temperature: For channels configured as thermocouples, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
converts and returns all ASCII raw-data readings in the format which corresponds with theEngineering Unit selected. To obtain the default temperature unit of degrees Celsius (°C), the ASCII
raw-data values (ASCII integers ±32767) are converted by dividing them by 10, such that -3276.7 ≤°C ≤ +3276.7. Therefore, the default resolution of returned output data is 0.1°C.
The temperature format is as follows where x represents an ASCII digit: ±xxxx.xx. Meanwhile, theASCII raw-data conversion varies with the temperature units, as follows:
•
•
•
•

•

Degrees Celsius (°C, default): °C = (Raw ASCII Count)/10.
Degrees Fahrenheit (°F): °F = (9/5)°C + 32.
Degrees Rankine (°R): °R = (9/5)°C + 491.69.
Degrees Kelvin (°K): °K = °C + 273.16.

Volts: For channels configured as volts, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 converts and returns
all ASCII raw-data readings. The ASCII raw-data range is scaled-down such that the fractions 4.4/4.5(for volts) and 4.3939/4.5 (for high-voltage) of the ASCII raw-data range ±32767, gives the adjusted
ranges ±32038.84444 (for volts), and ±31994.42695 (for high-voltage), respectively.
The volts formats is as follows where x represents an ASCII digit: ±xxx.xxxxxxx. Meanwhile, theASCII raw-data conversion, and the resolution is dependent upon the volts range, as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

±0.1 V: V = (Raw Count)/(32038.84444 x 10) with a resolution of 3.12 µV/bit.
±1.0 V: V = (Raw Count)/(32038.84444 x 1.0) with a resolution of 31.2 µV/bit.
±5.0 V: V = (Raw Count)/(32038.84444 x 0.2) with a resolution of 156 µV/bit.
±10.0 V: V = (Raw Count)/(32038.84444 x 0.1) with a resolution of 312 µV/bit.
±2.5 V: V = (Raw Count)/(31994.42695 x 0.4) with a resolution of 78.14 µV/bit.
±25.0 V: V = (Raw Count)/(31994.42695 x 0.04) with a resolution of 781.4 µV/bit.
±250 V: V = (Raw Count)/(31994.42695 x 0.004) with a resolution of 7.81 mV/bit.

Time/Date and Time/Date Stamping: The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 interprets and supplies
Time/Date data in slightly different formats, depending on whether the data is input or output, and if it
is output from the HLL Registers via Acquisition Buffer output queries, whether the data represents anabsolute or a relative time stamping.
The Time/Date data will have the following ASCII-based formats:•••Time/Date input data: hh:mm:ss.t,MM/DD/YY.
Time/Date output data (absolute time stamping): hh:mm:ss.mil,MM/DD/YY.
Time/Date output data (relative time stamping): ±hh:mn:ss.mil,DDDDDDD. (Negativevalues indicate Pre-Trigger scans, whereas positive values indicate Post-Trigger scans.)

Where the ASCII-based format variables are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

4-28

System Configuration

hh: Hours such that 00 ≤ hh ≤ 23.
mm: Minutes such that 00 ≤ mm ≤ 59.
ss: Seconds such that 00 ≤ ss ≤ 59.
t: Tenths of a second such that 0 ≤ t ≤ 9.
mil: Milliseconds such that 000 ≤ mil ≤ 999.
MM: Months such that 01 ≤ MM ≤ 12.
DD: Days such that 01 ≤ DD ≤ 31.
YY: Years such that 00 ≤ yy ≤ 99.
DDDDDDD: Days such that 0 ≤ D ≤ 9.

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual•Timebase (Scan Interval): The timebase (or scan interval) data will have the same ASCII-basedformat as the Time/Date input data format, but without the date as follows: hh:mm:ss.t

Binary Format
As previously discussed, the Binary data format may be used only for the output of channel data, wherechannel data is defined as data originating from the High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers or the Acquisition
Buffer of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit. For all other types of data, input or output, if the
Binary format is selected via the format parameter of the Set Data Format (F) command, then these data
values will be interpreted as Engineering Units.
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:

Channel data is the only output data which may use the Binary format. If the Binary format
is specified for channel data, then the Engineering Units engr parameter will be ignored.
When Binary formats are specified, the hll, scan, and block parameters of the Set Query
Terminator (Q) command do not apply. These parameters refer to the High/Low/Last (HLL),
Scan, and Trigger Block terminators, respectively.
Binary numbers can represent either positive or negative decimal values. Programs using
Binary data will know how to decipher the sign of the decimal value by the Binary number
alone. Refer to the Binary-to-ASCII number conversion table.
Data in Binary format is not printable. The Binary data must be converted to ASCII format
for printability. Consequently, no query terminators are used in Binary format.

The Binary format is valid for the following channel data output only. All other data under this Binary
option will be interpreted as Engineering Units.
• Temperature: For channels configured as thermocouples, the Binary data consists of two 8-bit bytes
which can be output in either high/low-byte or low/high-byte format. Each byte is in 2h (two-digit
hexadecimal) format.
• Volts: Similarly for channels configured for voltage, the Binary data consists of two 8-bit bytes which
can be output in either high/low-byte or low/high-byte format. Each byte is in 2h (two-digit
hexadecimal) format.
• Time/Date Stamping: If Binary format is selected, the channel data output will also include
Time/Date Stamping. The HLL Registers of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 supplies
Time/Date output data in slightly different formats, depending on whether the data represents anabsolute or a relative time stamping.
With either the high/low-byte or low/high-byte selection, the Time/Date Stamping data consists of ten
8-bit bytes, as follows:••

Absolute time stamping: hmstuvwMDY
Relative time stamping: hmstuvwDEF.

Where each of the ten letters represents one 8-bit byte in 2h (two-digit hexadecimal) format, as follows(refer to the Binary-to-ASCII number conversion tables):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

h: Hours such that $00 ≤ h ≤ $FF (where decimal: -23 ≤ h ≤ 23).
m: Minutes such that $00 ≤ m ≤ $FF (where decimal: -59 ≤ m ≤ 59).
s: Seconds such that $00 ≤ s ≤ $FF (where decimal: -59 ≤ s ≤ 59).
tuvw: (Together as 4 bytes, low-to-high byte) Microseconds such that$00000000 ≤ tuvw ≤ $FFFFFFFF (where decimal: -999999 ≤ tuvw ≤ 999999).
M: Months such that $01 ≤ M ≤ $0C (decimal: 01 ≤ M ≤ 12).
D: Days such that $01 ≤ D ≤ $1F (decimal: 01 ≤ D ≤ 31).
Y: Years such that $00 ≤ Y ≤ $63 (decimal: 00 ≤ Y ≤ 99).
DEF: (Together as 3 bytes, low-to-high byte) Days such that$000000 ≤ DEF ≤ $FFFFFF (where decimal: -999999 ≤ DEF ≤ 999999).

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-29

Binary-to-ASCII Number Conversion Tables
One 4-Bit Binary Digit (Positive Values)
Binary (Hexadecimal)
ASCII Equivalent (Decimal)

$0-$9
0-9

$A
10

One 8-Bit Byte Binary Format
Binary(Hexadecimal)

$FF
…
$81
($80)
$7F
…
$00

$FFFFFF…
$800001($800000)$7FFFFF…
$000000$C
12

Binary(Hexadecimal)

-1

$FFFF
…
$8001
($8000)
$7FFF
…
$0000

(negative values)

-127
(128)
+127
(positive values)

0

Binary(Hexadecimal)-1$FFFFFFFF…
$80000001($80000000)$7FFFFFFF…
$00000000-8,388,607(8,388,608)+8,388,607(positive values)

0

$E
14

$F
15

ASCII Equivalent(Decimal)-1(negative values)-32767(32768)+32767(positive values)

0

Four 8-Bit Bytes Binary Format

ASCII Equivalent(Decimal)(negative values)$D13

Two 8-Bit Bytes Binary Format

ASCII Equivalent(Decimal)Three 8-Bit Bytes Binary Format
Binary(Hexadecimal)$B
11

ASCII Equivalent(Decimal)-1(negative values)-2,147,483,647(2,147,483,648)+2,147,483,647(positive values)

0Counts Format
The ASCII Count data format is a format that is characterized by an ASCII integer number (decimal from –32767 to +32767; hexadecimal from $8001 to +$FFFF, then from $0000 to +$7FFF) which represents acompensated or raw-data value as it would be interpreted from an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter. ThisCount format and value depends on the channel type which has been specified for that channel. For
example, if Channel 16 is assigned channel type 1 (thermocouple Type J with cold-junction compensationand linearization), then the Count format and value for this channel would also be cold-junction
compensated and linearized. Conversely, if Channel 16 is assigned channel type 31 (thermocouple Type J
without temperature sensor adjustment – raw A/D data), then the Count format and value for this channel
would also be raw.
Note:

If the ASCII Count format is specified as the data format, then the appropriate temperatureand volts data values will be interpreted as Count, and the Engineering Units engr parameter
will be ignored.

In the ASCII Count data format, both input and output data formats are valid for the following data only.
All other data under this Count option will be interpreted as Engineering Units.
• Temperature: For channels configured as thermocouples, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
does not convert, but instead, keeps and returns all ASCII raw-data readings in its unconverted format,
as an ASCII integer from –32767 to +32767. The temperature format is as follows where x
represents an ASCII digit: ±xxxxx.
• Volts: For channels configured as thermocouples, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 does notconvert, but instead, keeps and returns all ASCII raw-data readings in its unconverted format, as an
ASCII integer from –32767 to +32767. The volts format is as follows where x represents an ASCII
digit: ±xxxxx.

4-30

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualData Output Terminators
In addition to formatting the data readings themselves, you can format the output arrangement between
data readings with various data output (or query) terminators. The Set Query Terminator (Q) command isused to set the following data output terminators:• Response Terminator: This terminator is used for general purpose queries which do not request
High/Low/Last (HLL) or Acquisition Buffer data. This terminator is used in all query responses
unless the query refers to data in the High/Low/Last registers or the Acquisition Buffer. Such queries
have their own specific terminators as described below.
• Channel Terminator: This terminator is used for queries which request data residing in theHigh/Low/Last (HLL) Registers. When this terminator is specified, the terminator will be inserted
between each channel response.
• Scan Terminator: This terminator follows each scan that is output when a query request is made for
Acquisition Buffer data. When this terminator is specified, this terminator will be used to terminate
each scan as it is output to the unit. This will be true except for the last scan in the Trigger Block. In
this case, the Trigger Block terminator will be used to terminate the scan and the Trigger Block.
• Trigger Block Terminator: This terminator follows each Trigger Block that is output when a query
request is made for Acquisition Buffer data. When this terminator is specified, this terminator will be
used to terminate each Trigger Block as it is output to the unit.
• Separator Terminator: This terminator is a reading separator character which should be placed
between each returned reading in the Acquisition Buffer scan data. The valid options for thisterminator include the following values: 0 - Place no separators in returned buffered scan data when it
is read, and 1 - Place a separator into the returned buffer data when it is read. The separator is a userdefined terminator corresponding to the ASCII decimal value val, as defined by the Set User
Terminator (V) command.
Data Output Terminator Usage
CommandCommand Options

Argument

resp
Read Buffered Data

User Status

R1
R2,R3
R#chanR#first-last
U4,U5,U13

All Other Commands

All Other Options

Read Last Readings

hll

scan

block

sep

X
O

X

O
O

O

X
X

O

X

X

This table summarizes the usage of query terminators with all possible commands in printable ASCII
format, where the table symbols indicate the following meanings:• The symbol X indicates that the terminator is asserted at the end of the response.
• The symbol O indicates that the terminator is asserted within the response to separate channel and scanreadings.
• A blank cell indicates that the terminator does not affect the command.
Note:
Note:

Data in Binary format is not printable. The Binary data must be converted to ASCII format
for printability. Consequently, no query terminators are used in Binary format.
The only Acquisition Buffer query commands are the Read Buffered Data (R) commands R1,
R2, and R3. Meanwhile, the only High/Low/Last (HLL) Register query commands are theUser Status (U) commands U4, U5, and U13, and the Read Last Readings (R#) command.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Configuration

4-31

Power-Up Configuration
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit has an internally-stored factory-default configuration which
can be recalled at any time. You can program the unit to power-up in a user-defined state, or if preferred,
you can configure the unit to power-up with the default configuration.
During normal operations, the factory defaults may be recalled by issuing the Restore Factory Defaults(*F) command. When this command is processed, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 will load thefactory default configuration and will operate accordingly. However, this command may not be issued
while an acquisition is currently configured.
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is normally configured to power up with the last known
configuration at the time that it was powered down, or at the time that the Reset Power-On (*R) commandis issued. However, the unit may be configured to always power-up either under the factory default
configuration or under the last-known configuration, via the Set Power-Up Configuration (*S) command.
Note:

Configuring the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 master unit to power up under thefactory defaults or recalling the factory default settings will not affect pre-existing calibration
factors of the master unit or its slave units.

The following list describes the execution steps and effects when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 is
configured to power up under the factory default configuration:• Step 1: Q7,0,0,0,0. Using the Set Query Terminator (Q) command, set the general response
terminator to CR-LF/EOI. Set all other terminators to None.
• Step 2: V0. Using the Set User Terminator (V) command, set the user terminator to ASCII
hexadecimal value 00, or NUL.
• Step 3: F0,0. Using the Set Data Format (F) command, set the data format to Engineering Units,
Degrees Celsius.
• Step 4: M0. Using the Set SRQ Mask (M) command, set the SRQ Mask to 000.
• Step 5: N0. Using the Set Event Mask (N) command, set the Event Status Enable Register (ESE) to000.
• Step 6: *C. Using the Clear Channel Configuration (*C) command, clear all channel configurations.
• Step 7: Y0,0,0. Using the Set Counts (Y) command, set all acquisition counts to 0.
• Step 8: I00:00:00.0,00:00:00.0. Using the Set Scan Interval (I) command, set both timebase
intervals to 0 seconds, or fast mode.
• Step 9: L1,0,0. Using the Set Trigger Level (L) command, clear the trigger level configurations.
• Step 10: T0,0,0,0. Using the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command, clear the acquisition trigger
configurations.
• Step 11: M#0. MultiScan/1200 only. Using the Set Measuring Mode (M#) command, set themeasuring mode to line-cycle integration/high-speed multi-channel mode.
• Step 12: F#20000.0. MultiScan/1200 only. Using the Set Burst Mode Frequency (F#) command,
set the burst mode frequency to 20 kHz.
• Step 13: W#32. MultiScan/1200 only. Using the Set Averaging Weight (W#) command, set the
sampling weight to 32.
For more information, see Power-Up Activation in Chapter 1, System Overview.

4-32

System Configuration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualSystem Operation

5

Acquisition Buffer …… 5-1
Buffer Organization …… 5-2
Buffer Query Operation …… 5-4
Buffer Read Operations …… 5-5
Buffer Overrun …… 5-11

High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers …… 5-13
Contents of the HLL Registers …… 5-13
Access to the HLL Registers …… 5-14
Comparing Buffered Data to HLL Data …… 5-17

Status-Reporting & Mask Registers …… 5-18
Theory of Operation …… 5-19
Status-Reporting Registers …… 5-19
Mask Registers …… 5-23
Using Status-Reporting Registers …… 5-24

Additional Operation …… 5-25
Trigger Latency …… 5-25
Real-Time Clock …… 5-26
Open Thermocouple & Range Error Checking …… 5-26
Software Digital Filtering (TempScan/1100 Only) …… 5-26

Acquisition Buffer
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 Acquisition Buffer is a FIFO (First-In First-Out) buffer. In otherwords, the oldest scan data to be written into the buffer is the first scan data to be read from the buffer whena read operation is performed. Then once the scan data is read from the buffer by the controller, that data iserased from the buffer.
The buffer may consist of one or more Trigger Blocks. In turn, a Trigger Block can consist of the following
components as discussed in the previous chapter: Pre-Trigger scans (optional), Post-Trigger scans(required), and Post-Stop scans (optional). These components constitute a single Trigger Block in theinternal memory of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit. Each Trigger Block defines an acquisition
and thus contains one and only one Trigger (trigger start event). These Trigger Blocks may also be variable
in length.
Multiple Trigger Blocks are allocated sequentially, and the scans within each Trigger Block are written andread sequentially. It is not possible to randomly access a Trigger Block or a scan within a Trigger Block.
When a read operation is performed, the scan that is read is the oldest scan in the oldest trigger blockcurrently defined.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-1

Buffer Organization
Single Trigger Block
Each Trigger Block in the buffer has an associated Trigger Block descriptor, used by internal processes for
Acquisition Buffer maintenance. The management of this Trigger Block descriptor is totally usertransparent and, since the Trigger Block descriptor takes up memory, it will have an indirect affect on someuser-defined processes. For instance, the Buffer 75% Full and the Buffer Overrun conditions will happen
on a fewer number of scans as the trigger blocks increases.
A Trigger Block becomes defined when the configured Trigger (trigger start event) occurs. Once this start
event occurs, the data within the Trigger Block (including any Pre-Trigger data) is available to be read(even though the Trigger Block may not yet be complete). Scan data is written then read to the Trigger
Block in a FIFO fashion. As the controller requests written (or buffered) scan data, the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit supplies the oldest available scan data. After the scan data is supplied and read, thatscan data is erased and is no longer available from the unit, and the Read Pointer automatically advances in
the current Trigger Block. Consequently, the next scan data in the sequence, if acquired, now becomes theoldest available scan data. There is no mechanism to allow jumping around in the buffer or going back to ascan that had already been read by the controller.
Since scans are written into the Trigger Block sequentially, the Trigger scan may appear at any location
within the Trigger Block. The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 will automatically convert these physicalscan locations to logical scan locations where the Trigger scan is always oriented at location 0. The
placement of the Trigger scan at the origin facilitates the quick interpretation of the Read Pointer and gives
a frame of reference for other locations within the trigger block. If Pre-Trigger scans are configured, they
will have logical scan locations defined by negative integers, whereas Post-Trigger scans will have logicalscan locations defined by positive integers. All Trigger Block pointers are relative to the Trigger scan.
From this point on, manual text discussions will assume references to logical Trigger Blocks only.
To retrieve the scan data after a Trigger has occurred, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 provides
multiple query functions. The Read Buffered Data (R) command provides the following queries: Read theoldest scan data in the Acquisition Buffer (R1), Read the oldest complete Trigger Block in the acquisitionbuffer (R2), and Read all of the scan data available in the Acquisition Buffer (R3). The following User
Status (U) command query – Query the Buffer Status String (U6) – queries the current Trigger Block for avariety of information, including the current number of Trigger Blocks available in the buffer, and thecurrent number of scans available in the buffer.
Multiple Trigger Blocks (Auto Re-arm)
Multiple Trigger Blocks are allocated sequentially, and the scans within each Trigger Block are written andread sequentially. Hence, after the last scan of the first Trigger Block is read by the controller, the first scanof the next Trigger Block will be read next. Through the Auto Re-arm capability, it is possible to capture
more than one Trigger Block in the Acquisition Buffer of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200. The
Trigger can only be re-armed after a Trigger Block has been completed and written. Each Trigger Block
will contain one and only one Trigger (trigger start event).
If the Auto Re-arm feature is disabled, a Set Trigger Configuration (T) command must be issued to re-arm
the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 for acquisition. To disable the Auto Re-arm feature, you must issue
a Set Trigger Configuration (T) command with the re-arm flag set to zero.
If the Auto-Rearm feature is selected, another acquisition will take place on the next Trigger without any
controller intervention. This allows the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 to store several acquisitions
continuously in its buffer. The logical scan locations of the Trigger points, and their associated timestamps, can be found in the Buffer Status String. The Read Pointer is always on the oldest Trigger Block,so requests for Read Pointer status will always correspond to the Trigger Block available to be read.
However, the next Trigger must be initiated after the previous acquisition has been completed and written.
Otherwise, a Trigger overrun will occur.
Note:

5-2

System Operation

While armed, the Auto Re-arm feature does not allow you to change the acquisition
configuration.

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualRead Pointer >BufferScan -76

Trigger Scan >Scan -75
Scan -74…
Scan 000First Scan >Pre-Trigger
Scans

No longer
accessible

Scan -75
Scan -74…
Scan 000

Post-Trigger
Scans

Scan 001…
…
…

Scan 001…
Scan 845…

Scan 768

Read Pointer >…

Post-Stop
Scans

Trigger Block
1 Post-Trigger
Scans

Trigger Block
1 Post-Stop
Scans

Scan 1232

Scan 1234
Scan -76

Trigger Block
2 Pre-Trigger
Scans

Scan -75

BufferScan -76

Pre-Trigger
Scans

Scan -75
Scan -74

Scan -74

Trigger Scan >…
Scan 000Read Pointer >Trigger Block
1 Pre-Trigger
Scans

Scan 1233

Scan 1157

No longer
accessible

BufferScan -76

First Scan >Post-Trigger
Scans…
Scan 000

Scan 001…

Scan 001…

Scan 678…

Scan 379

Scan 822…
Scan 768

Scan 823
Scan 824…

Trigger Block
2 Post-Trigger
Scans

Trigger Block
2 Post-Stop
Scans

Post-Stop
Scans

Scan 1157
The Read Pointer has advanced fromthe Pre-Trigger area (Scan -76) tothe Post-Trigger area (Scan 379).

The Read Pointer has advanced into
the Post-Stop area (Scan 1232)
of the first Trigger Block.

Single Trigger BlockMultiple Trigger Blocks
Trigger Block Configurations

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-3

Trigger Overrun
A Trigger overrun (as opposed to a buffer overrun) condition exists if more than one Trigger (trigger start
event) or more than one Stop (trigger stop event) occurs during one Trigger Block acquisition. Thiscondition is flagged and notification is given, but no other action is taken. The Trigger Overrun Bit (Bit 4)
in the Error Source Register (ESC) is set. You may query the ESC via the Query Error Status (E?)
command to determine if a Trigger overrun has occurred.

Buffer Query Operation
The Acquisition Buffer holds scan data that has been initiated by one or more Triggers (trigger start events),
where each Trigger Block defines one acquisition and thus contains one and only one Trigger (trigger start
event). These Trigger Blocks may also be variable in length.
The current status of the Acquisition Buffer may be interrogated at any time by issuing the following User
Status (U) command query – Query the Buffer Status String (U6). As mentioned earlier, the U6 command isa user query command which provides the interface in which the current Acquisition Buffer configuration
may be queried, and which returns information regarding the current state of the Acquisition Buffer whenissued.
The Query the Buffer Status String (U6) command returns the following fields:•

Number of Trigger Blocks Available (Field 1). Format: xxxxxxx. This field represents the total
number of Trigger Blocks currently contained within the Acquisition Buffer, at the time the U6command was issued. The number of completed Trigger Blocks is not counted, but rather the numberof detected Triggers is counted. If their are no Trigger Blocks available, then this field will have thevalue 0000000.

•

Number of Scans Available (Field 2). Format: xxxxxxx. This field represents the total number ofscans available across all Trigger Blocks in the Acquisition Buffer, at the time the U6 command wasissued. It should be noted that Pre-Trigger data is not available to you until the defined Trigger has
occurred. If their are no scans available in the buffer, then this field will have the value 0000000.

•

Current Position of Read Pointer (Field 3). Format: ±xxxxxxx. This field represents the current readlocation within the currently-read Trigger Block. This Read Pointer is relative to the Trigger scanpoint, which is always oriented at logical scan location 0. If the Trigger scan is currently being read,then the Read Pointer will have the value 0000000. If Pre-Trigger scans are currently being read, theRead Pointer will have a negative integer value. Likewise, if Post-Trigger scans are currently being
read, the Read Pointer will have a positive integer value. If the Read Pointer is undefined at the time
the U6 command was issued, then its value will be -0999999.

•

Time/Date Stamping of Trigger Event (Field 4). Absolute ASCII format:
hh:mm:ss.mil,MM/DD/YY. Relative ASCII format: +hh:mm:ss.mil,DDDDDDD. Absolute Binary
format: hmstuvwMDY. Absolute Binary format: hmstuvwDEF. This field represents the absolute or
relative Time/Date value when the Trigger event occurred for the currently-read Trigger Block. If the
Trigger event has not yet occurred at the time the U6 command was issued, then this field will have thefollowing value:
•
•
•
•

•

5-4

System Operation

Absolute ASCII value 00:00:00.00,00/00/00,
Relative ASCII value +00:00:00.00,0000000,
Absolute Binary value 00 00 00 00000000 00 00 00 (2-2-2-8-2-2-2 digits), or
Relative Binary value: 00 00 00 00000000 000000 (2-2-2-8-6 digits).

Position of Stop Event Pointer (Field 5). Format: ±xxxxxxx. This field represents the Stop event
location within the currently-read Trigger Block. This Read Pointer is relative to the Trigger scanpoint, which is always oriented at logical scan location 0. Since the Stop event must always occur after
the Trigger event, this Read Pointer will always have a positive integer value. If the Stop event has not
yet occurred at the time the U6 command was issued, this field will have the undefined value 0999999.

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual•Time/Date Stamping of Stop Event (Field 6). Absolute ASCII format: hh:mm:ss.mil,MM/DD/YY.
Relative ASCII format: +hh:mm:ss.mil,DDDDDDD. Absolute Binary format: hmstuvwMDY. Absolute
Binary format: hmstuvwDEF. This field represents the absolute or relative Time/Date value when the
Stop event occurred for the currently-read Trigger Block. If the Stop event has not yet occurred at thetime the U6 command was issued, this field will have the following value:
•
•
•
•

•

Absolute ASCII value 00:00:00.00,00/00/00,
Relative ASCII value +00:00:00.00,0000000,
Absolute Binary value 00 00 00 00000000 00 00 00 (2-2-2-8-2-2-2 digits), or
Relative Binary value: 00 00 00 00000000 000000 (2-2-2-8-6 digits).

Position of End Scan Pointer (Field 7). Format: ±xxxxxxx. This field represents the End scan
location in the currently-read Trigger Block. This Read Pointer is relative to the Trigger scan point,
which is always oriented at logical scan location 0. Since the End scan must always occur after the
Trigger event, this Read Pointer will always have a positive integer value. If the End scan has not yet
occurred at the time the U6 command was issued, this field will have the undefined value of -0999999.
This field will always have the same value as the Position of Stop Event Pointer field unless Post-Stopscans have been configured; that is, if the Post-Stop stop parameter of the Set Counts (Y) commandhas been set to a non-zero value. In this case, this Position of End Scan Pointer field will have agreater value than the Position of Stop Event Pointer field.

•

Status of Current Trigger Block (Field 8). Format: xx. This field represents the status of thecurrently-read Trigger Block. If the currently-read Trigger Block is still being acquired, then this field
will have the value 00. If the currently-read Trigger Block has been completely acquired and has
terminated normally, then this field will have the value 01. However, if the currently-read Trigger
Block has prematurely terminated (due to user intervention), then this field will have the value 02.

It should be noted that Trigger Blocks are not assigned a Trigger Block number as such. These Trigger
Block numbers refer to locations relative to the currently-read Trigger Block. Consequently, the Trigger
Block currently being read is always Trigger Block 1. Meanwhile, the Trigger Block currently being written
is always the value of the Number of Trigger Blocks Available field.

Buffer Read Operations
As mentioned earlier, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 Acquisition Buffer is a FIFO (First-In FirstOut) buffer. In other words, the oldest scan data to be written into the buffer is the first scan data to be readfrom the buffer when a read operation is performed. Then once the scan data is read from the buffer by thecontroller, that data is erased from the buffer.
The Acquisition Buffer data is read via the Read Buffered Data (R) command. You can use this command
to read anywhere from one scan to all the scan data currently residing in the buffer. This command has thefollowing valid options:•••

Read the oldest scan currently residing in the Acquisition Buffer (R1).
Read the oldest complete Trigger Block currently residing in the Acquisition Buffer (R2).
Read all the scan data currently residing in the Acquisition Buffer (R3).

When a Read Buffered Data (R) command is issued, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 checks to see
if the read request can be fulfilled. If so, the requested scan data is moved from the Acquisition Buffer to
the Output Queue where it waits until the controller initiates transfer. However, if either of the following istrue – No channels are configured, or the amount of scan data requested is not available – then the readrequest will not be fulfilled, and a Conflict Error will be posted. The R1 and R3 commands require that atleast one scan be available, and the R2 command requires that at least one complete Trigger Block beavailable.
The Scan Available Bit (Bit 3) in the Status Byte Register (STB) can be used to determine whether or not
the Acquisition Buffer is empty. This bit is set when at least one scan is available in the buffer. The
following User Status (U) command query – Query the Buffer Status String (U6) – may also be used toretrieve more-detailed information about the state of the Acquisition Buffer.
TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-5

The responses to all queries (including U6, R1, and R2) can be configured with specific field
separators and response terminators. For details on setting query terminators, see command
Set Query Terminator (Q) in the chapter API Command Reference.

Note:

BufferN/A

Trigger Scan >Trigger Block
1 Pre-Trigger
Scans

N/A
N/A
…
N/A

Trigger Block
1 Post-Trigger
Scans

N/A
…
N/A
Stop Scan >End Scan >

…
N/A
N/A

Read Pointer >BufferScan -100

Trigger Scan >Scan -099
Scan -098…
Scan 000

Write Pointer >Scan 001…
Scan 050…
N/A
N/A

Stop Scan >Trigger Block
1 Post-Stop
Scans

…
N/A
…
N/A

Trigger Block
1 Post-Trigger
Scans

Trigger Block
1 Post-Stop
Scans

…
N/A
…
N/A

End Scan >(1) The Acquisition Buffer is empty.

Trigger Block
1 Pre-Trigger
Scans(2) The Stop event has not yet occurred.

Part 1 – The Acquisition Buffer is empty. The following describes a Query the Buffer Status String (U6) responsewhen the Acquisition Buffer is empty. The Time/Data stamping is in absolute ASCII format.

0000000,0000000,-0999999,00:00:00.000,00/00/00,-0999999,00:00:00.000, 00/00/00,0999999,00
Field

5-6

System Operation

1

Field Name
Number of Trigger Blocks Available

2

Number of Scans Available

3

Current Position of Read Pointer4

Time/Date Stamping of Trigger Event

5

Position of Stop Event Pointer

6

Time/Date Stamping of Stop Event

7

Position of End Scan Pointer8

Status of Current Trigger Block

889897

Buffer Status String Response

0000000
0000000-0999999
00:00:00.000,00/00/00-0999999
00:00:00.000,00/00/00-0999999
00

Response Description
Zero
Zero
Undefined
Absolute ASCII format
Undefined
Absolute ASCII format
Undefined
Not being acquired

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualPart 2 – The Stop event has not yet occurred. The following describes a U6 response when the Trigger event has
occurred but the Stop event has not yet occurred. The Current Position of Read Pointer field has the value of the firstavailable Pre-Trigger scan -100, and an additional 50 Post-Trigger scans are available. The Time/Data stamping is inabsolute ASCII format.

0000001,0000151,-0000100,12:01:43.100,08/29/96,-0999999,00:00:00.000, 00/00/00,0999999,00
Field
1

Field Name
Number of Trigger Blocks Available

2

Number of Scans Available

3

Current Position of Read Pointer4

Time/Date Stamping of Trigger Event

5

Position of Stop Event Pointer

6

Time/Date Stamping of Stop Event

7

Position of End Scan Pointer8

Status of Current Trigger Block

Buffer Status String Response

0000001
0000151-0000100
12:01:43.100,08/29/96-0999999
00:00:00.000,00/00/00-0999999
00

Response Description
One
100 + 1 + 50
Pre-Trigger Scan -100
Absolute ASCII format
Undefined
Absolute ASCII format
Undefined
Still being acquired

Query (U6) Buffer Operation – Single Trigger Block, Parts 1 & 2 (of 4)

Read Pointer >BufferScan -100

Trigger Scan >Scan -099
Scan -098…
Scan 000

Trigger Block
1 Pre-Trigger
Scans

Trigger Block
1 Post-Trigger
Scans

Read Pointer >BufferScan -100

Trigger Scan >Scan -099
Scan -098…
Scan 000

Scan 001…
Scan 050
Stop Scan >Write Pointer >End Scan >Trigger Block
1 Pre-Trigger
Scans

Trigger Block
1 Post-Trigger
Scans

Scan 001…
Scan 050…
Scan 100
Scan 101

Stop Scan >Trigger Block
1 Post-Stop
Scans…
Scan 150…
Scan 100
Scan 101

Trigger Block
1 Post-Stop
Scans…
Scan 150…
N/A

End Scan >(3) The End scan has not yet occurred.

…
Scan 250(4) The Trigger Block is now complete.

Part 3 – The End scan has not yet occurred. The following describes a U6 response when the Trigger event has
occurred, the Stop event has also occurred, but the End scan has not yet occurred. The Current Position of Read
Pointer field has the same value of the first available Pre-Trigger scan -100, but now an additional 100 Post-Trigger
scans plus 50 Post-Stop scans are available. The Time/Data stamping is in absolute ASCII format.

0000001,0000251,-0000100,12:01:43.100,08/29/96,0000100,12:25:01.300, 08/29/96,0999999,00
Field
1

Field Name
Number of Trigger Blocks Available

2

Number of Scans Available

3

Current Position of Read Pointer4

Time/Date Stamping of Trigger Event

5

Position of Stop Event Pointer

6

Time/Date Stamping of Stop Event

7

Position of End Scan Pointer8

Status of Current Trigger Block

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

Buffer Status String Response

0000001
0000251-0000100
12:01:43.100,08/29/96
0000100
12:25:01.300,08/29/96-0999999
00

Response Description
One
100 + 1 + 100 + 50
Pre-Trigger Scan -100
Absolute ASCII format
Post-Trigger Scan 100
Absolute ASCII format
Undefined
Still being acquired

System Operation 5-7

Part 4 – The Trigger Block is now complete. The following describes a U6 response when the Trigger event has
occurred, the Stop event has also occurred, and the End scan has also occurred. The Current Position of Read Pointerfield has the same value of the first available Pre-Trigger scan -100, and an additional 100 Post-Trigger scans plus 150
Post-Stop scans are available. The Trigger Block is now complete. The Time/Data stamping is in absolute ASCII
format.

0000001,0000351,-0000100,12:01:43.100,08/29/96,0000100,12:25:01.300,
08/29/96,0000250,01
Field
1

Field Name
Number of Trigger Blocks Available

2

Number of Scans Available

3

Current Position of Read Pointer4

Time/Date Stamping of Trigger Event

5

Position of Stop Event Pointer

6

Time/Date Stamping of Stop Event

7

Position of End Scan Pointer8

Status of Current Trigger Block

Buffer Status String Response

0000001
0000351-0000100
12:01:43.100,08/29/96
0000100
12:25:01.300,08/29/96
000025001

Response Description
One
100 + 1 + 100 + 150
Pre-Trigger Scan -100
Absolute ASCII format
Post-Trigger Scan 100
Absolute ASCII format
Post-Trigger Scan 250
Acquisition complete

Query (U6) Buffer Operation – Single Trigger Block, Parts 3 & 4 (of 4)
Buffer
Empty
Read Pointer >Scan -100

Buffer
Empty
Trigger Block
1 Pre-Trigger
Scans

Scan -099
Trigger Scan >Stop Scan >End Scan >Scan 20216 >…
Scan 000

Scan 001…
Scan 1004
Scan 1005…
Scan 1254
Block 2

Trigger Block
1 Post-Trigger
Scans

System Operation

Scan -100

Read Pointer >Scan -099

Trigger Scan >…
Scan 000

Stop Scan >Trigger Block
1 Post-Stop
Scans
End Scan >Trigger Blocks
2 through 6

Block 3Block 4Block 5Block 6

Scan 20215 >(1) The current Acquisition Buffer status.

5-8

Not accessible

889897

Scan 001…
Scan 1004
Scan 1005…
Scan 1254
Block 2

Trigger Block
1 Pre-Trigger
Scans

Trigger Block
1 Post-Trigger
Scans

Trigger Block
1 Post-Stop
Scans

Trigger Blocks
2 through 6

Block 3Block 4Block 5Block 6

(2) The oldest scan in the Acquisition
Buffer has been read.

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualPart 1 – The current Acquisition Buffer status. The Acquisition Buffer currently contains 6 available Trigger Blocks,
and 20216 available scans.
Part 2 – The oldest scan in the Acquisition Buffer has been read. The program example demonstrates how the R1
command will read the oldest scan currently residing in the buffer.
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U6X”(1)(2)
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”(3)
INPUT A$

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

0000006,0020216,-0000100,12:51:43.100,03/24/97,0001004,
13:53:01.300,03/24/97,0001254,01
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0234.20 -0019.40 +0001.40 +0023.60
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U6X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
0000006,0020215,-0000099,12:51:43.100,03/24/97,0001004,
13:53:01.300,03/24/97,0001254,01•
Line 1: Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
•
Line 2: Retrieve the status.
•
Line 3: The screen will show the current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
Before the scan is read, the Buffer Status String response indicates that the total number of Trigger Blocks available inthe buffer is 6 (7-1), and the total number of scans available in the buffer is 20216 (20567-351), where the previous
Trigger Block of 351 scans has already been read out and erased (now empty). Furthermore, it shows that the current
location of the Read Pointer is at Pre-Trigger scan -100 in the current Trigger Block. This particular scan can be retrieved
as follows:•Line 4: Get the oldest scan.
•Line 5: Get the response.
•Line 6: The screen will show the single-scan data for each of the four (4) configured channels.
•
Line 7: Now, get the current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
•
Line 8: Get the response.
•Line 9: The screen will show the new current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
Notice that after the scan is read, there are now 20215 (20216-1) scans available in the buffer and the current location of
the Read Pointer is at Pre-Trigger scan -099.

Read (R1) Buffer Operation – Multiple Trigger Blocks, Parts 1 & 2 (of 4)
Buffer
Empty
Empty
Read Pointer >Scan -100

Trigger Scan >Scan -099…
Scan 000

Stop Scan >End Scan >Scan 18660 >Scan 001…
Scan 400
Scan 401…
Scan 650
Block 2

Trigger Block
1 Pre-Trigger
Scans

Trigger Block
1 Post-Trigger
Scans

Trigger Block
1 Post-Stop
Scans

Trigger Blocks
2 through 5

Block 3Block 4Block 5

(3) The oldest complete Trigger Block in
the Acquisition Buffer has been read.
Part 3 – The oldest complete Trigger Block in the Acquisition Buffer has been read. The program example
demonstrates how the R2 command will read the oldest complete Trigger Block currently residing in the buffer.
TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-9

(1)
(2)
(3)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U6X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
0000006,0020215,-0000099,12:51:43.100,03/24/97,0001004,
13:53:01.300,03/24/97,0001254,01
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R2X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0234.20 -0019.40 +0001.40 +0023.60...(etc)...
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U6X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
0000005,0018860,-0000100,02:15:34.100,03/24/97,0000400,
04:51:10.300,03/24/97,0000650,01

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

•
Line 1: Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
•
Line 2: Retrieve the status.
•
Line 3: The screen will show the current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
Before the Trigger Block is read, the Buffer Status String response indicates that the total number of Trigger Blocks
available in the buffer is still 6, and the total number of scans available in the buffer is 20215 (20216-1). Furthermore, it
shows that the current location of the Read Pointer is at Pre-Trigger scan -099 in the first Trigger Block. This particular
Trigger Block can be retrieved as follows:•Line 4: Get the oldest complete Trigger Block.
•Line 5: Get the response.
•Line 6: The screen will show the 1355 scans of data for each of the four (4) configured channels.
•
Line 7: Now, get the current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
•
Line 8: Get the response.
•Line 9: The screen will show the new current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
Notice that after the Trigger Block is read, there are now 5 (6-1) Trigger Blocks and 18860 (20215-1355) scans available
in the buffer, and the current location of the Read Pointer is at Pre-Trigger scan -100 of the next current Trigger Block. In
addition, the following information has been updated to reflect this current Trigger Block: The Time/Date stamping of the
Trigger and Stop events, and the current locations of the Stop Event Pointer and End Scan Pointer are now at PostTrigger scans 400 and 650, respectively.

Read (R2) Buffer Operation – Multiple Trigger Blocks, Part 3 (of 4)
Buffer
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
(4) All of the scan data in the Acquisition Buffer
has been read. The buffer is now empty.
Part 4 – The oldest complete Trigger Block currently in the Acquisition Buffer has been read. The program
example demonstrates how the R3 command will read all of the scan data currently residing in the buffer.
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U6X”(1)(2)
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”(3)
INPUT A$

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

•
•
•

5-10

System Operation

0000005,0018660,-0000100,02:15:34.100,03/24/97,0000400,
04:51:10.300,03/24/97,0000650,01
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R3X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0234.20 -0019.40 +0001.40 +0023.60...(etc)...
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U6X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
0000000,0000000,-0999999,00:00:00.000,00/00/00,-0999999,
00:00:00.000,00/00/00,-0999999,00
Line 1: Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
Line 2: Retrieve the status.
Line 3: The screen will show the current status of the Acquisition Buffer.

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualBefore all of the scan data is read, the Buffer Status String response indicates that the total number of Trigger Blocks
available in the buffer is 5, and the total number of scans available in the buffer is 18860 (20215-1355). Furthermore, it
shows that the current location of the Read Pointer is at Pre-Trigger scan -100 in the first Trigger Block. All of the scandata can be retrieved as follows:•Line 4: Get all of the scan data in the Acquisition Buffer.
•
Line 5: Get the response.
•Line 6: The screen will show all 18860 scans of data for each of the four (4) configured channels.
•
Line 7: Now, get the current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
•
Line 8: Get the response.
•Line 9: The screen will show the new current status of the Acquisition Buffer.
Notice that after all of the scan data is read, the Acquisition Buffer is now complete empty.

Read (R3) Buffer Operation – Multiple Trigger Blocks, Part 4 (of 4)

Buffer Overrun
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 Acquisition Buffer will wrap around on itself if the controllingcomputer cannot read the data out fast enough before the buffer gets completely full. This situation iscalled buffer overrun (as opposed to a Trigger overrun). Although this situation prevents new data frombeing lost and keeps the scan rate consistent, it also overwrites the oldest data.
A buffer overrun is registered as an error. However, in some applications, a buffer overrun may be a part ofnormal operation. For example, if a TempScan/1100 with 256 Kbytes of memory was configured to scan
16 channels at a one minute interval, the buffer would get completely full and an overrun would occur inabout 5.6 days. Regardless of how long the TempScan/1100 is left unattended after that point, it will
always maintain the newest 5.6 days of scan data.
There are two cases of buffer overrun as follows:••

When the Acquisition Buffer contains a single Trigger Block.
When the Acquisition Buffer contains multiple Trigger Blocks.

If a buffer overrun occurs, it may be detected by querying the Status Byte Register (STB) via either of thefollowing commands:•

SPOLL: Serial Poll command. For IEEE 488 interfaces only.

•

PRINT#1, “SPOLL 07"
INPUT #2, S%
IF (S% and 128 = 128) THEN
PRINT “Buffer Overrun Occurred”
ENDIF
U1: User Status (U1) command. For both IEEE 488 and RS-232/RS-422 interfaces.
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; U1X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
INPUT #2, S%
IF (S% and 128 = 128) THEN
PRINT “Buffer Overrun Occurred”
ENDIF

Buffer Overrun With One Trigger BlockWhen only one Trigger Block is in the Acquisition Buffer, a buffer overrun will erase the entire Pre-Trigger
area. If Pre-Trigger scans were being read when the buffer overrun occurred, the Trigger scan will be thenext scan read from the buffer.
However, if no Pre-Trigger scans were configured or the Pre-Trigger has already been read, a buffer
overrun will only erase the oldest Post-Trigger scan in the buffer. If the scan being erased is currently
being read, the contents of the read scan will be in error.
If the controller detects a buffer overrun condition during a read operation, any further reading will beconsidered corrupt until a buffer reset is issued. This buffer reset can be done via the Flush Acquisition
Buffer (*B) command or reading the remaining data out of the buffer until it is clear.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-11

Buffer Overrun With Multiple Trigger Blocks
When more than one Trigger Block is in the Acquisition Buffer, a buffer overrun will erase the oldest
complete Trigger Block. If the Trigger Block being erased is currently being read, that Trigger Block read
will be terminated and the Read Pointer will be advanced to the start of the next Trigger Block.
If the controller detects a buffer overrun condition during a read operation, any further reading will beconsidered corrupt until a buffer reset is issued. This buffer reset can be done via the Flush Acquisition
Buffer (*B) command or reading the remaining data out of the buffer until it is clear.

Read Pointer >BufferScan -50
Scan -49
Scan -48…
Scan 000

Write Pointer >Post-Trigger
Scans…
Scan 252
Write Pointer >End of Buffer >BufferScan 751

Pre-Trigger
Scans

No longer
accessible
Read Pointer >Scan 752
N/A
N/A
Scan 000…
Scan 450

…
N/A
…

…
Scan 500…

N/A

End of Buffer >(1) The Write Pointer advances as scans arecollected while the Read Pointer advances
as scans are read from the buffer.

Post-Trigger
Scans…
Scan 252…
Scan 450

Post-Stop
Scans

Post-Stop
Scans

Post-Stop
Scans

Scan 750(2) After 302 scans, the Read Pointer has
advanced to Scan 252 while the Write Pointer has
advanced to Scan 752 (returning to the start of thebuffer and erasing the entire Pre-Trigger area).

Buffer Overrun – Single Trigger Block With Pre-Trigger Area

BufferScan 000Read Pointer >Scan 001

Write Pointer >Scan 602

Scan 002

No longer
accessible

Scan 002…
Scan 252
Write Pointer >End of Buffer >BufferScan 601

Post-Trigger
Scans

Read Pointer >…
Scan 352

…
N/A
…

…
Scan 450…

N/A

End of Buffer >(1) The Write Pointer advances as scans arecollected while the Read Pointer advances
as scans are read from the buffer.

Post-Trigger
Scans…
Scan 252…
Scan 352

Post-Stop
Scans

Post-Stop
Scans

Post-Stop
Scans

Scan 600(2) After 250 scans, the Read Pointer has
advanced to Scan 252 while the Write Pointer has
advanced to Scan 602 (returning to the start of thebuffer and erasing one Post-Trigger scan at atime).

Buffer Overrun – Single Trigger Block Without Pre-Trigger Area

5-12

System Operation

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualRead Pointer >BufferBlock 1

Trigger Blocks
1 through 5

Block 2

No longer
accessible

Block 3Block 4
Write Pointer >Block 5End of Buffer >

N/A
N/A

Write Pointer >Read Pointer >BufferBlock 1 to 7
Block 2 to 1

Trigger Blocks
2 through 7
renumbered to
1 through 6

Block 3 to 2
Block 4 to 3
Block 5 to 4

End of Buffer >(1) The Write Pointer advances as scans arecollected while the Read Pointer advances
as scans are read from the buffer.

Block 6 to 5
Block 7 to 6

(2) After 3 Trigger Blocks, the Read Pointer has
advanced to Block 4 while the Write Pointer has
advanced to the start of the buffer (erasing theoldest Trigger Block and renumbering the Blocks).

Buffer Overrun – Multiple Trigger Blocks

High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers
Other than reading the Acquisition Buffer, accessing the High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers is an alternative
method of getting channel data from the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 system. Independent of thetriggering and scan-interval configuration for an acquisition, the HLL Registers are constantly updated withnew values during the acquisition, at the following rates: At the maximum scan rate, for the
TempScan/1100; and at any current programmed scan rate up to the maximum scan rate, for theMultiScan/1200. At any time, the HLL Registers can be queried for channel values without affecting thebuffered data.
The minimum requirement for activating the HLL Registers is to configure the desired channel(s) in thescan, using the Configure Channels (C) command. Those channels not included in the channel scan do nothave to be configured. Meanwhile, the returned scan data will be in the desired data format – Engineering
Units, Binary, or ASCII Counts – that you have defined, using the Set Data Format (F) command.

Contents of the HLL Registers
The High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers contain and return, when requested, the following information for eachconfigured channel:*0 The High Reading for the channel since the beginning of the current acquisition or since the last HLL
query – Query and clear the current High/Low/Last (U5).
*1 The Time/Date Stamping of the High Reading.
*2 The Low Reading for the channel since the beginning of the current acquisition or since the last HLL
query – Query and clear the current High/Low/Last (U5).
*3 The Time/Date Stamping for the Low Reading.
*4 The Last or most recent Reading for the channel.
To initiate HLL updating it is only necessary to configure the desired channel(s). The HLL Registers will
only be updated for those channels configured, and you may only access the HLL Registers for theconfigured channels. You can clear the High and Low readings for each configured channel in any of thefollowing ways:•••

Powering on the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200.
Issuing a new channel configuration.
Clearing the readings explicitly by command (as discussed in the following text).

Note:

When the High and Low values are cleared, their associated Time/Date Stamps are also
cleared. After being cleared, the new High and Low values (along with their associatedTime/Date Stamping) will be initialized on the next updating of the HLL Registers.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-13

Access to the HLL Registers
You can access the HLL Registers of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit via commands issued by
the PC/IEEE 488 controller. That is, you can use these commands to access any or all of the channel-data
contents of the HLL Registers, as well as to clear the High and Low readings along with their associatedTime/Date Stamping.
The commands which can initiate the output of channel data (in Engineering Units, Binary, or ASCIICounts format) specifically from the HLL Registers are the Read Last Readings (R#) command, and thefollowing User Status (U) command queries: Query current HLL Registers (U4), Query and clear current
HLL Registers (U5) and Query last scan read (U13).
As you can see, two queries are available to read the HLL Registers: U4 and U5. The U4 command requests
the HLL data, maintaining the High and Low values, while the U5 command requests then clears the HLLdata, resetting the High and Low values to the Last value.
All HLL data will be sent to the controller as dictated by the scan configuration and data format which you
have defined. You can use the Set Query Terminator (Q) command to specify a response terminatorseparating each channel of the HLL data, and the Set Data Format (F) command to specify the output
format of the HLL data.
Example 13a. Query Current HLL Registers (U4) with HLL Terminator(1)(2)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0 Q1,1,0,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-2,1 C10,1 C15,1X”

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)

(7)
(8)

(9)
(10)

(11)
(12)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U4X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+1450.20 S 12:23:21.700,03/24/97+0850.20 S 12:35:09.300,03/24/97, +0950.30
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0450.20 S 02:00:29.500,03/24/97+0057.60 S 10:35:00.400,03/24/97, +0250.60
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$-0045.50 S 11:03:51.700,03/24/97-0110.10 S 12:55:09.100,03/24/97, -0050.80
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0150.70 S 03:39:01.200,03/24/97-0085.20 S 05:25:17.300,03/24/97, +0010.90

The above example demonstrates how to configure and query all the HLL Registers, and how the HLL
terminator can be used to control the flow of the HLL response output. Notice that only those channels
configured – 1, 2, 10 and 15 – are returned in the response.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

5-14

System Operation

Line 1: Set the data format to Degrees Celsius (°C) with HLL terminator of CR LF / EOI.
Line 2: Configure four channels – 1, 2, 10 and 15.
Line 3: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
Line 4: After an indiscriminate amount of time, query the current HLL settings.
Line 5: Get the response.
Line 6: The screen will show the Channel 1 scan data in the HLL Registers.
Line 7: Get the next response.
Line 8: The screen will show the Channel 2 scan data in the HLL Registers.
Line 9: Get the next response.
Line 10: The screen will show the Channel 10 scan data in the HLL Registers.
Line 11: Get the next response.
Line 12: The screen will show the Channel 15 scan data in the HLL Registers.

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualExample 13b. Query & Clear Current HLL Registers (U5) with No HLL Terminator(1)(2)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0X Q1,0,0,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-4,1X”

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)

(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U5X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+1450.20 S 12:23:21.700,03/24/97+0850.20 S 12:35:09.300,03/24/97, +0950.30+0450.20 S 02:00:29.500,03/24/97+0057.60 S 10:35:00.400,03/24/97, +0250.60+0045.50 S 11:03:51.700,03/24/97-0110.10 S 12:55:09.100,03/24/97, -0050.80+0150.70 S 03:39:01.200,03/24/97-0085.20 S 05:25:17.300,03/24/97, +0010.90
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;S?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$S 13:20:00.100,03/24/97
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U4X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0980.20 S 13:20:01.700,03/24/97+0959.20S13:20:09.300,03/24/97, +0975.80+0260.70 S 13:20:29.500,03/24/97+0245.60S13:20:00.400,03/24/97, +0257.60-0047.50 S 13:20:51.700,03/24/97-0051.10S13:20:09.100,03/24/97, -0049.80+0015.70 S 13:20:01.200,03/24/97+0008.20S13:20:17.300,03/24/97, +0010.40

The next example demonstrates how to reset the High and Low values along with their associatedTime/Date Stamps. It also shows the effect of specifying no HLL terminator; only one ENTER command
returns all of the HLL data.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Line 1: Set the data format to Degrees Celsius (°C) with HLL terminator of None.
Line 2: Configure four channels – 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Line 3: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
Line 4: After an indiscriminate amount of time, query and then reset the current HLL settings.
Line 5: Get the response.
Line 6: The screen will show the scan data for Channels 1 through 4 in the HLL Registers. Notice that
only one ENTER command returned all of the HLL data.
Line 7: Now get the current time.
Line 8: Get the response.
Line 9: The screen will show the current time.
Line 10: Now again, query (but do not reset) the HLL settings.
Line 11: Get the response.
Line 12: The screen will show the reset HLL data.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-15

Example 13c. Query Last Scan Reading (U13) with Celsius & HLL Terminator(1)(2)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0 Q1,1,0,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-4,1X”

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)

(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U13X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0950.30
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0250.60
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$-0050.80
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0010.90

The next example demonstrates how to read only the Last readings. Notice that since a HLL response
terminator was specified, the Last reading for each channel had to be entered separately.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Line 1: Set the data format to Degrees Celsius (°C) with HLL terminator of CR LF / EOI.
Line 2: Configure four channels – 1, 2, 3, and 4 – with no setpoints.
Line 3: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
Line 4: After an indiscriminate amount of time, query the Last channel readings.
Line 5: Get the response.
Line 6: The screen will show the Last reading for Channel 1.
Line 7: Get the next response.
Line 8: The screen will show the Last reading for Channel 2.
Line 9: Get the next response.
Line 10: The screen will show the Last reading for Channel 3.
Line 11: Get the next response.
Line 12: The screen will show the Last reading for Channel 4.

Example 13d. Query Last Scan Reading (U13) with Fahrenheit & No HLL Terminator(1)(2)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F1,0X Q1,0,0,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-4,1X”

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U13X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+1743.08 +0483.08 -0059.44 +0051.62

The next example also demonstrates how to read only the Last readings. But in this case, no HLL response
terminators are specified and the format has been changed to Degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
•
•
•
•
•
•

5-16

System Operation

Line 1: Set the data format to Degrees Celsius (°F) with HLL terminator of None.
Line 2: Configure four channels – 1, 2, 3, and 4 – with no setpoints.
Line 3: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
Line 4: After an indiscriminate amount of time, query the Last channel readings.
Line 5: Get the response.
Line 6: The screen will show the Last readings for Channels 1 through 4.

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualExample 13e. Query Last Scan Reading (U13) with Volts & No HLL Terminator(1)(2)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0X Q1,0,0,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-4,11X”

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U13X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$+00.0045603 +00.0000895 -00.0080087 +00.0090865

The next example demonstrates how changing the channel type can effect the output of HLL queries. It
also shows the effect of specifying no HLL terminator; only one ENTER command returns all of the HLL
data. Notice that even though the data format was in Degrees Celsius (°C) , the response is in Volts since
the channels were configured as such.
•
•
•
•
•
•

Line 1: Set the data format to Degrees Celsius (°C) with HLL terminator of None.
Line 2: Configure four channels – 1, 2, 3, and 4 – to Volts (despite the Degrees Celsius) in the ±100mV DC range.
Line 3: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
Line 4: After an indiscriminate amount of time, query the Last channel readings.
Line 5: Get the response.
Line 6: The screen will show the Last readings for Channels 1 through 4.

Example 13f. Read Last Readings (R#) with HLL Terminator(1)(2)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0 Q1,1,0,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-4,1X”

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(Command lines to configure and start an acquisition.)

(7)
(8)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R#2-3X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
+0250.60
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$-0049.50

The next example demonstrates how to retrieve Last readings for a subset of the configured channels.
Notice that since a HLL response terminator was specified, the Last reading for each channel had to beentered separately.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Line 1: Set the data format to Degrees Celsius (°C) with HLL terminator of CR LF / EOI.
Line 2: Configure four channels – 1, 2, 3, and 4 – with no setpoints.
Line 3: Provide the appropriate command lines to configure and start an acquisition.
Line 4: After an indiscriminate amount of time, query the Last readings for Channels 2 and 3.
Line 5: Get the response.
Line 6: The screen will show the Last reading for Channel 2.
Line 7: Get the next response.
Line 8: The screen will show the Last reading for Channel 3.

Comparing Buffered Data to HLL Data
With the TempScan/1100 unit, unless scans are being collected at the maximum possible frequency, the
HLL Registers may detect alarm states that will not appear in the collected data. Since the HLL Registers
are being updated at the maximum possible frequency, which may be considerably faster than the scanfrequency as set by the programmed scan interval, an alarm state may be detected even though no suchvalue can be found in the buffered scan data. If such a situation is not preferred, decreasing the
programmed scan interval (thus increasing the scan frequency) will decrease the possibility of such an
event. At the maximum possible scan frequency, this situation is guaranteed not to occur.
With the MultiScan/1200 unit, the HLL Registers are being updated at the same frequency as set by the
programmed scan interval. Hence, all detected alarm states will appear in the collected data.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-17

Status-Reporting & Mask Registers
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 has several internal 8-bit registers dedicated to status and event
reporting, where each bit represents a certain condition, event or error. You can access these registers via
commands issued from the PC/IEEE 488 controller.

Status-Reporting & Mask Registers

5-18

System Operation

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualTheory of Operation
Each register is part of a hierarchy of status-reporting and mask registers where operations on higher
registers will affect the contents of lower registers in the chain. This hierarchical approach provides various
levels of status reporting. The lowest levels give general event status information while the higher levels
give more details of the particular events. In the same way that the setting of events or conditions affects
the lower-level registers in the chain, the clearing of events or conditions in the higher-level registers also
clears those affected conditions in the lower-level registers.
Status-Reporting Registers
The following four registers cover a wide range of internal error and event conditions. Each of theseregisters covers a particular aspect of event reporting responsibility. These registers are briefly defined asfollows:••••

Calibration Status Register (CSR): Read/Clear-Only, via the following User Status (U) command –Query and clear the Calibration Status Register (U2). Indicates any error conditions during
TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 calibration.
Error Source Register (ESC): Read/Clear-Only, via the Query Error Status (E?) command. Indicatesany general error conditions with the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit.
Event Status Register (ESR): Read/Clear-Only, via the following User Status (U) command – Queryand clear the Event Status Register (U0). Indicates special events that have occurred in the
TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit.
Status Byte Register (STB): Read-Only, via the Serial Poll (SPOLL) command (IEEE 488 only) or thefollowing User Status (U) command – Query the Status Byte Register (U1) (IEEE 488 or serial).
Indicates critical operation events with the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit.

Mask Registers
In addition, the following two mask registers are used to configure the status and event reporting registers.
These mask registers are briefly defined as follows:••

Event Status Enable Register (ESE): Read/Write/Clear, via the following Set Event Mask (N)commands – N?, Nmask, and N0, respectively. A mask for the Event Status Register (ESR).
Service Request Enable Register (SRE): Read/Write/Clear, via the following Set SRQ Mask (M)commands – M?, Mmask, and M0, respectively. A mask for the Status Byte Register (STB).

Status-Reporting Registers
Calibration Status Register (CSR)
The Calibration Status Register (CSR) is a Read/Clear-Only register in that it may only be read and clearedby the controller, via the following User Status (U) command – Query and clear the Calibration Status
Register (U2). The read operation is a destructive read since it clears the register as it is read. This registercan only be written to by internal TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 operations.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-19

Calibration Status Register (CSR)

The Calibration Status Register (CSR) indicates calibration errors, if any, have occurred. Its bits and theerrors that set them, are as follows:•

State Indicators (Bits 7 and 6): The Bits 7/6 are set as follows:
00 – Normal Run Mode, set when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is in the state ofnormal operation.
01 – EEPROM Test Mode, set when testing a scanning card EEPROM (Electronically Erasable,

Programmable Read-Only Memory). This internal mode will not be discussed in this manual.
10 – Calibration Mode (Idle), set when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is in idle

Calibration Mode.
11 – Calibration Mode (Command Active), set when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit•

is in active Calibration Mode.
Error Indicators (Bits 0 to 5) in Normal Run Mode (00): Any calibration error in any of the fourmodes will be mapped into the CSR Bits 0 to 5, which together maps to the Calibration Error Bit (Bit 3)
in the Error Source Register (ESC). In this normal mode, these six bits are set as follows:
Bit 5: Read Failure.
Bit 4: Write Failure.
Bit 3: Checksum Error.
Bit 2: NV-RAM Error.
Bit 1: Invalid Password.
Bit 0: Invalid Command.

5-20

System Operation

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual•

Error Indicators (Bits 0 to 5) in Calibration Modes (10 or 11): Any calibration error in any of thefour modes will be mapped into the CSR Bits 0 to 5, which together maps to the Calibration Error Bit(Bit 3) in the Error Source Register (ESC). In either Calibration Mode, these same six bits are set as
follows:
Bit 5: Read Failure (EEPROM Error).
Bit 4: Write Failure (EEPROM Error).
Bit 3: Checksum Error (EEPROM Error).
Bit 2: Calibration Error. Set when the thermocouple offset or gain, or CJC (cold-junction
compensation) temperature sensor offset is outside of the valid range values, as follows:-365 ASCII Counts (-50 mV) ≤ thermocouple offset ≤ +365 ASCII Counts (+50 mV)-583 ASCII Counts (-80 mV) ≤ high-voltage offset ≤ +583 ASCII Counts (+80 mV)+0.8 (ratio) ≤ thermocouple gain ≤ +1.2 (ratio)-1000 ASCII Counts (-10°C) ≤ CJC sensor offset ≤ +1000 ASCII Counts (+10°C)
Bit 1: Invalid Password.
Bit 0: Invalid Command.

A checksum is used for validating the contents of memory. When the contents of memory is created, eachbyte is summed and the least significant byte of the resultant sum is stored in a specific byte of memory.
This value is called the checksum. Then typically on power-up, the processor recomputes the checksumand compares it to its stored known correct value. If the computed and stored checksums match, then thememory is fine. Otherwise, if they do not match, then the memory became corrupt somehow. For example,
on power-up and during calibration, the TempScan/1100 unit computes the checksum on the chassis
calibration constants in NV-RAM, and on the EEPROMs of each installed scanning card. If any of thechecksum tests fail, the Checksum Bit (Bit 3) is set in the Calibration Status Register (CSR).
For more information on NV-RAM and EEPROMs, see section Calibration Properties in the chapter
System Calibration. For more information on the Calibration Status Register (CSR), see command User
Status (U).
Error Source Register (ESC)The Error Source Register (ESC) is a Read/Clear-Only register in that they may only be read and cleared by
the controller, via the Query Error Status (E?) command. The read operation is a destructive read since it
clears the register as it is read. This register can only be written to by internal TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 operations.
The Error Source Register (ESC) indicates which general errors, if any, have occurred. Its bits and theerrors that set them, are as follows:
•

•

•

•

Command Conflict Error (Bit 7): Set when an issued command is in conflict with other issued
commands or with the current configuration. This error usually occurs when an issued commandcannot be performed because it is incompatible with the current state of the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit. This bit is one of the ESC Bits 2 to 7, which together maps to the Execution Error
Bit (Bit 4) in the Event Status Register (ESR).
Open Thermocouple or Range Error (Bit 5): Set when the hardware circuitry detects an open
thermocouple, or the software routines detect either that the input A/D data has reached its maximum
value or the input data has exceeded its linearization limits. This bit is one of the ESC Bits 2 to 7,
which together maps to the Execution Error Bit (Bit 4) in the ESR.
Trigger Overrun (Bit 4): Set when more than one Trigger (trigger start event) or more than one Stop(trigger stop event) occurs during one Trigger Block acquisition, or when when an unexpected Trigger
occurs. This bit is one of the ESC Bits 2 to 7, which together maps to the Execution Error Bit (Bit 4) inthe ESR.
Calibration Error (Bit 3): Set when the calibration is inappropriate or has failed. The Error Indicator
Bits (Bits 0 to 5) in the Calibration Status Register (CSR) together map to this bit. This bit is one of the
ESC Bits 2 to 7, which together maps to the Execution Error Bit (Bit 4) in the ESR.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-21

•Channel Configuration Error (Bit 2): Set when a channel has been inappropriately configured, either
because the channel is not present or because the specified channel type is incompatible with thescanning card type installed. This bit is one of the ESC Bits 2 to 7, which together maps to the
Execution Error Bit (Bit 4) in the ESR.
• Invalid Device Dependent Command Option (IDDCO) (Bit 1): Set when a command parameter is outof range or missing. This bit in turn maps to the Device Dependent Error Bit (Bit 3) in the ESR.
• Invalid Device Dependent Command (IDDC) (Bit 0): Set when there is a command syntax error.
This bit in turn maps to the Command Error Bit (Bit 5) in the ESR.
For more information, see command Query Error Status (E?) in the chapter API Command Reference.
Event Status Register (ESR)The Event Status Register (ESR) is a Read/Clear-Only register in that it may only be read and cleared by thecontroller, via the following User Status (U) command – Query and clear the Event Status Register (U0). .
The read operation is a destructive read since it clears the register as it is read. This register can only be
written to by internal TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 operations.
The Event Status Register (ESR) indicates which special events, if any, have occurred. Its bits and theevents that set them, are as follows:•

Power On (Bit 7): Set when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is first powered up or when
the Reset Power-On (*R) command is issued.
• Buffer 75% Full (Bit 6): Set when the Acquisition Buffer has been filled to at least 75% of its
capacity. This bit is cleared when the amount of data in the Acquisition Buffer falls below 75% of its
capacity.
• Command Error (Bit 5): Set when an illegal command or command syntax error is detected. The
Invalid Device Dependent Command (IDDC) Bit (Bit 0) in the Error Source Register (ESC) maps tothis bit.
• Execution Error (Bit 4): Set when one of several errors has occurred during the execution of acommand. Bits 2 through 7 in the Error Source Register (ESC) together map to this bit.
• Device Dependent Error (Bit 3): Set when a conflict error has occurred. A conflict error is generated
when a command cannot execute correctly because it would interfere with other commands or settings.
The Invalid Device Dependent Command Option (IDDCO) Bit (Bit 1) in the Error Source Register(ESC) maps to this bit.
• Query Error (Bit 2): Set when the controller has attempted to read from the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 output queue when no response is present or pending, or when a response has beenlost. Data may be lost when too much data is requested to be buffered in the queue, where thecontroller has sent a new query before reading the response to a prior query.
• Stop Event (Bit 1): Set when the user-defined Stop (trigger stop event) of a configured acquisition has
been satisfied. This bit is cleared when a new acquisition is configured either through the Set Trigger
Configuration (T) command or when the unit is re-armed via the Auto Re-arm mode.
• Acquisition Complete (Bit 0): Set when the acquisition operation has been completed. An acquisition
is complete when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit has finished the current acquisition. The
bit will be cleared when a new acquisition is configured through the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command.
For more information, see command User Status (U) in the chapter API Command Reference.

Status Byte Register (STB)The Status Byte Register (STB) is a Read-Only register in that it can only be read by the controller, via theSerial Poll (SPOLL) command (IEEE 488 only) or the following User Status (U) command – Query the
Status Byte Register (U1) (IEEE 488 or serial). This register can only be cleared or written to by theinternal processes of the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200.
The Status Byte Register (STB) is at the lowest-level status-reporting register in the register hierarchy.
When the controller accesses this register in real-time via an IEEE 488 SPOLL command, this access allows
the quick response of certain critical operational status conditions contained in the STB. Since this is thelowest-level register, every other status register in the system, either directly or indirectly, has access to the
STB via the Event Status Register Bit (ESR Bit 5, or ESB) in the STB. Such access gives these other status
registers the ability to quickly report their general status to the controller.

5-22

System Operation

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 sets the Message Available Bit (MAV,Bit 4) in the Status Byte
Register (STB) to determine if data can be read by the controller. This is the only status register which may
require the RS-232/RS-422 serial interface to implement a different read command – Query the Status Byte
Register (U1) – than the IEEE 488 interface which primarily implements the Serial Poll (SPOLL) command(but can also use the U1 command).
The Status Byte Register (STB) indicates which critical operation events, if any, have occurred. Its bits andthe events that set them, are as follows:
•
•

•
•
•
•

•
•

Buffer Overrun (Bit 7): Set if an overrun of the Acquisition Buffer occurs. It is cleared when thebuffer becomes empty by either reading out the contents of the buffer or performing the Flush
Acquisition Buffer (*B) command.
Request for Service Bit (RQS) or Master Summary Status Bit (MSS) (Bit 6): Set when the
TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is requesting service. It is cleared when the following is
performed: Serial Poll (SPOLL) command (IEEE 488 only) or the following User Status (U) command– Query the Status Byte Register (U1) (IEEE 488 or RS-232/RS-422 serial).
Event Status Register Bit (ESB) (Bit 5): Reflects the logical OR of all the bits in the Event Status
Register (ESR) ANDed with their equivalent enable bits in the Event Status Enable Register (ESE). Thisbit is set if at least one bit in the ESR is set and its corresponding bit in the ESE is also set.
Message Available (MAV) (Bit 4): Set when there is data available in the output queue to be read. It
is cleared when the output queue is empty. This bit reflects whether any command responses are still inthe output queue.
Scan Available (Bit 3): Set when at least one acquisition scan is available in the Acquisition Buffer tobe read. This bit is cleared when there are no scans available in the buffer to be read.
Ready (Bit 2): Set when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit has completed executing a set ofcommands and is ready to process another command from the IEEE 488 bus controller. It is cleared
when the unit is processing a command line. This bit should be examined with a Serial Poll (SPOLL)
prior to issuing a new command line. This allows any detected errors to be traced to the specificcommand line containing the error. If all of the setup information for a specific operation is included in
one line, this bit also indicates when all processing is done and the Execute (X) command is completed.
This ensures that the unit is finished processing all of its internal state changes before initiating any
further activity.
Triggered (Bit 1): Set when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit has detected a valid Trigger(trigger start event) or Stop (trigger stop event) condition from the programmed trigger source. This bit
is cleared when the acquisition is complete or the Trigger or Stop is reconfigured.
Alarm (Bit 0): Set when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit has detected a valid alarm
condition. This bit is cleared whenever the alarm condition no longer exists.

For more information, see command User Status (U) in the chapter API Command Reference.

Mask Registers
Event Status Enable Register (ESE)The Event Status Enable Register (ESE) is a Read/Write/Clear register in that they can be written andcleared, as well as read by the controller, via the following Set Event Mask (N) commands – N?, Nmask,
and N0, respectively.
The Event Status Enable Register (ESE) may be used to define which bits in the Event Status Register (ESR)
will be mapped into the ESR Bit 5 (or ESB) in the Status Byte Register (STB). The bits in the ESE represent
an exact image of the bits in the ESR. When a condition is set in the ESR, its image bit is checked in the
ESE. If any image bits are enabled, the bits in the ESR will be mapped into the ESR Bit 5 (or ESB) in the
STB.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-23

The Event Status Enable Register (ESE) controls which events, if any, are to be reflected in the Status Byte
Register (STB). The bits of the Event Status Register (ESR) are logically ANDed with the corresponding
bits of the ESE, and the resulting bits are logically ORed together in the Status Byte Register (STB). The
ESE does not affect the ESR; it only affects the ESR Bit 5 (or ESB) of the STB. The ESR Bit 5 (or ESB) in
the STB is set when its corresponding Bit 5 in the Service Request Enable Register (SRE) is enabled. The
ESE is set and interrogated with the Set Event Mask (N) command. For more information, see command Set
Event Mask (N) in the chapter API Command Reference.
Service Request Enable Register (SRE)The Service Request Enable Register (SRE) is a Read/Write/Clear register in that it can be written andcleared, as well as read by the controller, via the Set SRQ Mask (M) commands – M?, Mmask, and M0,
respectively.
The Service Request Enable Register (SRE) may be used to define those conditions in the Status Byte
Register (STB) which will generate a Service Request (SRQ). The bits in the SRE represent an exact imageof the bits in the STB except for the Request for Service Bit (RQS, Bit 6) or Master Summary Status Bit(MSS, Bit 6). When a condition is set in the STB, its image bit is checked in the SRE. If the image bit isenabled, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 will generate a Service Request (SRQ).
The Service Request Enable Register (SRE) controls which bits of the Status Byte Register (STB) arereflected in the Request for Service Bit (RQS, Bit 6) and Master Summary Status Bit (MSS, Bit 6) of the
STB. The bits of the STB are logically ANDed with the corresponding bits of the SRE. The resulting bits are
logically ORed together to form the Master Summary Status Bit (MSS, Bit 6) in the STB and to control theRequest for Service Bit (RQS, Bit 6) in the STB. The SRE does not affect the STB; it only affects the MSS
and RQS Bits of the STB. The ESE is set and interrogated with the Set SRQ Mask (M) command. For more
information, see command Set SRQ Mask (M) in the chapter API Command Reference.

Using Status-Reporting Registers
As previously mentioned, the status-reporting registers are organized in a hierarchical structure. The lowerlevel registers contain more-general event information, and the higher-level registers contain more-detailed
information about particular events. Typically, the lowest-level status-reporting register, the Status Byte
Register (STB) contains time-critical information that may require more immediate action from thecontroller. In addition, other registers may access the STB via the ESR Bit (or ESB). This allows any
condition within the status-reporting register hierarchy to have access to the STB, Serial Poll (SPOLL), andService Request (SRQ).

Example 13g. Status-Reporting Register Hierarchy
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;N0 X N8 X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M0 X M32 X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;E?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
E008
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U2X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
E002
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U0X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
E000
PRINT#1, “SPOLL07”
4

The above example demonstrates how the status reporting register hierarchy works. Notice that clearing of
the higher-level registers clears the bits in the lower-level registers that were associated with the root causeof the condition.

5-24

System Operation

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual••Line 1: Configure the ESR Bit 5 (or ESB) in the STB to be set when a Device Dependent Error occurs.
Line 2: Configure the Service Request (SRQ) when the ESB in the STB occurs.

Now the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit is configured so that when any Device Dependent Error
occurs, the unit will issue a Service Request (SRQ) to the controller. When the SRQ occurs, the controller
may perform the following sequence to determine the exact cause of the Service Request.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Line 3: Query the ESC to determine the cause of the error.
Line 4: Get the response.
Line 5: The screen will show a Calibration Error (Bit 3 value = 2^3 = 008).
Line 6: Now, query the CSR to determine the specific cause of the Calibration Error.
Line 7: Get the response.
Line 8: The screen will show a Calibration Invalid Password Error (Bit 1 value = 2^1 = 002).
Line 9: Now, query the ESR. (Reading the ESC should have cleared it.)Line 10: Get the response.
Line 11: The screen will show that the Device Dependent Error is no longer there.
Line 12: Serial Poll the STB. The screen will show that the ESB in the STB is no longer set. Only
Ready Bit 2 is set. (Ready Bit 2 value = 2^2 = 004).

Additional Operation
Trigger Latency
Each trigger source has an associated latency. This latency is the time between the actual Trigger (trigger
start event) and its recognition by the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit.
The following latency times are simplistic representations of the time between when the Trigger is detected
and when the Trigger has been processed. The hardware latency times, and the Interrupt Service Routine(ISR) times to process other tasks during the trigger event but before its detection, are not accounted for. In
other words, these times may be offset as much as the hardware latency times, in addition to the process
time taken by the longest uninterrupted ISR.
Trigger Source & Latency
Type(s)

1
2
3
4,5
6,7
8
9,10
11

Note:

Trigger Source@ character

Trigger Latency (Average)
2.255 ms

Observed Variation
620.00 µs

GET (IEEE only)

645.6 µs

3.10 µs

TALK (IEEE only)

780.53 µs

12.00 µs

(See Note below)(See Note below)

External TTL (Rising or Falling)

610.95 µs

2.10 µs

Count (Post-Trigger)

45.9 µs28.5 µs(See Note below)(See Note below)

44.5 µs

27.0 µs

Selected Temperature Channel (Level)

Alarm
Absolute Time

(1) When using a channel level or alarm as the trigger source, the trigger latency is dependent
on the number of channels. (2) With the TempScan/1100 unit, the maximum trigger latency is
the minimum scan time interval (as dictated by the maximum possible frequency) allowableby the current configuration. (3) With the MultiScan/1200 unit, the maximum trigger latency
is the greater of the following time values: The programmed scan time interval, or theminimum scan time interval (as dictated by the maximum possible frequency) allowable by
the current configuration.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

889897

System Operation 5-25

Real-Time Clock
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 contains a battery-backed-up internal real-time clock which is
programmable when set and read. Factory set according to Eastern Standard Time (U.S.), the real-timeclock runs in military time. Although setting the real-time clock time via the Set Real-Time Clock (S)command, and setting the Trigger (trigger start event) and Stop (trigger stop event) times via the Program
Trigger Times (P) command, are done at a resolution of only 0.1 second (tenths of a second), the real-timeclock actually operates at a resolution of 0.001 second (milliseconds). This millisecond resolution isevident in the Time/Date stamping of channel data output which is retrieved from the High/Low/Last (HLL)
Registers or the Acquisition Buffer.
For more information on setting the real-time clock, see command Set Real-Time Clock (S) in the chapter
API Command Reference. For more information on Time/Date stamping and data formats, see section
Stamping Configuration and section Data Format Configuration in the chapter System Configuration.

Open Thermocouple & Range Error Checking
The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit possesses built-in utilities for the detection of open
thermocouple and range errors on configured channels, as follows:••

One hardware utility: The thermocouple cards contain circuitry to detect open thermocouples.
Two software utilities: The software detection routines are designed to detect if the input A/D reaches
its maximum value, and to detect if an input exceeds the linearization limits.

If an open thermocouple or a range error is detected, then Bit 5 in the Error Source Register (ESC) will beset. In turn, Bits 2 to 7 (including Bit 5) in the ESC will together be mapped into the Execution Error Bit(Bit 4) in the Event Status Register (ESR), denoting that this particular error condition exists. The offending
channel(s) can be determined by reading their values. If a channel is in error, its value will be thefollowing:•••

If a Thermocouple channel (assuming degrees Celsius): ±3276.70.
If a Volts channel for the TempScan/1100 unit: ±32.7670.
If a Volts channel for the MultiScan/1200 unit: ±005.767.

Note:

Open thermocouple and range error checking is only performed on configured channels.

Software Digital Filtering (TempScan/1100 Only)
As a standard feature, the TempScan/1100 employs an advanced software digital filter to ensure quiet andaccurate thermocouple input. This feature is enabled as part of the factory default settings. With the Set
Software Digital Filtering (*W) command, this digital filtering feature can be disabled in order to improvereaction response time, or re-enabled to reinstate the feature.
For information on MultiScan/1200 noise filtering, see section Measuring Modes (MultiScan/1200 Only) in
the chapter System Configuration.

5-26

System Operation

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualSystem Calibration

6

Manual Calibration and Software-Automated Calibration …… 6-1
Calibration Setup …… 6-2
Calibration Properties …… 6-2
Calibration Protection …… 6-2
Calibration Status …… 6-3
Calibration Password …… 6-3

Calibration of Master Chassis …… 6-4
Calibration of Scanning Cards …… 6-6
Calibration of Thermocouple Scanning Cards …… 6-8
Calibration of Voltage Scanning Cards …… 6-12
Calibration of RTD Scanning Cards …… 6-13

CAUTIONUse approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,
when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause
equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

Manual Calibration and Software-Automated Calibration
Prior to shipment, each TempScan/1100, MultiScan/1200, Exp/10A, and Exp/11A unit, as well as each
TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200 scanning card, is calibrated. Depending on your operating
guidelines, your equipment will require periodic calibration to ensure accuracy at all times. The industry
standard for this calibration is once every year. There are two methods of calibration, (1) Softwareautomated and(2) Manual.
(1) Software-Automated Calibration [Recommended] – ChartView includes a built-in automatedcalibration feature, which is recommended over the manual method. The calibration application can beaccessed from ChartView’s Device pull-down menu as follows:⇒ Device⇒ Select Status⇒ Calibration
Once you access the automated-calibration feature, the application will guide you step-by-step through thecalibration process. Since the application automatically guides the user, the remainder of this chapter isdevoted to the manual method.

(2) Manual Calibration – The manual calibration method is supported by operating in Calibration Mode,in which a specific set of commands is provided. Aside from this introductory information, this chapter
pertains to the manual method of calibration.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Calibration

6-1

Calibration Setup
Calibration Properties
For proper results, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 master chassis and each scanning card must be
calibrated separately. The master chassis contains an on-board battery-backed-up NV-RAM (Non-Volatile
Random-Access Memory) and each card contains an on-board EEPROM (Electronically Erasable
Programmable Read-Only Memory) for saving calibration constants, allowing for card-swapping within asystem, card-swapping between systems, as well as system expansion. Calibration relates to the masterchassis and scanning cards as follows:*0 Master Chassis: Calibrated for channel offset and channel gain only.
*1 Option Cards: Calibrated for channel offset, channel gain, and cold junction sensor offset (ifthermocouples are used).

Calibration Protection
The chassis calibration constants and the calibration password are stored by the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 in Non-Volatile RAM (NV-RAM). The password is a safety feature used to prevent
unauthorized personnel from entering Calibration Mode and altering the calibration constants.
As a safeguard, the calibration password and chassis calibration constants are hardware protected. This
protection is enabled by setting the microswitch 9 to the down (0) position on the rear panel DIP switch.
This is the default factory setting and should remain in this position unless purposely attempting to change
the password or chassis constants.
If it is necessary to change the calibration password via the Change Calibration Keyword (*K) command,or to recalibrate the chassis, this hardware write protection can be disabled by setting microswitch 9 to theup (1) position.

CAUTIONTo ensure accurate measurements, calibration must only be performed byauthorized personnel.

CAUTIONTo ensure the integrity of the chassis calibration constants, verify that DIP
microswitch 9 is set in the down (0) position unless you are attempting to change
the calibration password or chassis calibration constants.

CAUTION
Do not perform calibration until after your TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
system has been powered on for at least one hour.

CAUTION
Do not forget to set DIP microswitch 9 back to the down (0) position whencalibration is complete. Otherwise, the calibration password and calibration
chassis constants may be corrupted and normal operation may be disrupted.

6-2

System Calibration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

Calibration Status
Once the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 hardware write protection is disabled, you can enter
Calibration Mode via the Enter Calibration Mode (K) command. When a valid password has been
executed and Calibration Mode has been activated, Bit 7 in the Calibration Status Register (CSR) will beset. This bit is cleared by the End Calibration Mode (E) command.
During Calibration Mode, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit will be in one of two states: Idle orcommand active. Whenever a calibration command is active, Bit 6 in the Calibration Status Register (CSR)
will be set and the TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds. Once all of the indicators are off,the unit will return to an idle state, and Bit 6 in the CSR will be cleared and ready for the next calibrationcommand. At this point, the next step in the procedure can be started. For more information on
Calibration Mode, see commands Enter Calibration Mode (K) and End Calibration Mode (E) in thechapter API Command Reference. For more information on the Calibration Status Register (CSR), seechapter System Operation.

Calibration Password
Note:

Attempts to execute calibration commands without entry into Calibration Mode will
result in a calibration error, as follows: The Invalid Command Bit (Bit 0) in the
Calibration Status Register (CSR) will be set, and in turn, any set Bits 0 to 5 in the CSR
will be mapped into the Calibration Error Bit (Bit 3) in the Error Source Register(ESC).

To Change the Calibration Password

1.

Disable calibration protection by setting the rear panel DIP microswitch 9 to the up (1) position. Thenenable Calibration Mode via the Enter Calibration Mode (K) command with a valid password. The
keyword is the five-digit keyword (or password) currently configured for the unit. Your scanning unit
is shipped with a default password of 12345. If the calibration password has not been changed, enter
K12345.

2.

Once Calibration Mode has been entered, this password can be modified. Enter the Change
Calibration Keyword (*K) command with a new five-digit password.

3.

Wait for command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds.

4.

Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) via the User Status (U) command U2 to ensure that thecommand completed without error.

5.

Disable Calibration Mode with the End Calibration Mode (E) command. Re-enable calibration
protection by resetting DIP microswitch 9 to the down (0) position.

For details on any of the above commands, see Appendix A, API Command Reference.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Calibration

6-3

Calibration of Master Chassis
Note:

The following text discusses the manual method of calibration. However, we strongly
suggest using ChartView’s internal automated calibration method. To do so, from
ChartView navigate as follows, then follow the on screen instructions.
⇒ Device ⇒ Select Status ⇒ Calibration [then follow on screen prompts]

6-4

Note:

Prior to each calibration session, disable calibration protection by setting the rear panel
DIP microswitch 9 to the up (1) position. Then enable Calibration Mode via the Enter
Calibration Mode (K) command with a valid password. If the default calibration
password has not been changed, enter K12345.

Note:

At the end of each calibration session, disable Calibration Mode with the End Calibration
Mode (E) command. Then re-enable calibration protection by resetting DIP
microswitch 9 to the down (0) position.

System Calibration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualTo Calibrate the Master Chassis for Offset
1.

For offset calibration, locate the calibration jumpers located in one corner of an appropriate scanningcard, remove the two calibration jumper caps and short the calibration jumpers using one of those
jumper caps, as shown in the figure. Slide the scanning card into the master chassis.

2.

Power up the unit and wait at least one hour before continuing.

3.

Send the Calibrate Channel Offset (H) command H0 – where channel 0 refers to the chassis – to theunit, and wait for the command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few
seconds.

4.

Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Channel Offset (H)command completed without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode
the Calibration Status Register (CSR).

5.

To monitor the chassis calibration voltage, configure a normal acquisition with Channel 3 set as
channel type 90. The input will be returned in Counts.

To Calibrate the Master Chassis for Gain

CAUTION
Ensure that the master chassis has first been calibrated for offset. If not, follow
the master chassis offset calibration procedure as described in the previous text.

1.

For gain calibration, slide the scanning card out from the chassis, locate the calibration jumpers,
remove any calibration jumper caps, and connect clip leads from the precision voltage calibration
source, as shown in the figure. Use standard copper hookup wire. Do not use thermocouple wire.
Slide the scanning card into the master chassis.

2.

Power up the unit and wait at least one hour before continuing.

3.

Set the precision voltage source to -4.4 (negative) Volts DC.

4.

Send the Calibrate Channel Gain (G) command G0,91 to the unit – where channel 0 refers to thechassis, and channel type 91 refers to a reserved calibration type – and wait for the command tocomplete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds.

5.

Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Channel Gain (G) commandcompleted without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode theCalibration Status Register (CSR).

6.

To monitor the chassis calibration voltage, configure a normal acquisition with Channel 1 set as
channel type 90. The input will be returned in Counts.

7.

Next, set the precision voltage source to +4.4 (positive) Volts DC.

8.

Repeat Steps 4, 5, and 6.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Calibration

6-5

Calibration of Scanning Cards
Scanning Card Calibration Channels
The scanning cards described in the following text are applicable to specific scanning units, as shown in
the first of the three table. For example, the TempV/32B voltage scanning card pertains to the
TempScan/1100 unit only, whereas the MTC/24 thermocouple/volts scanning card pertains to theMultiScan/1200 unit only. For the convenience of TempScan/1000A users, the TempTC/32A,
TempV/32A, and TempRTD/16A scanning cards have been included.
Scanning Card Calibration & Applicability
Scanning Card Calibration
Thermocouple

Master Unit Chassis

Offset

TempScan/1100

TempScan/1000A

MultiScan/1200

TempTC/32B

TempTC/32A

MTC/24Gain

TempTC/32B

TempTC/32A

MTC/24CJC Offset

TempTC/32B

TempTC/32A

MTC/24

Voltage
RTD

Offset

TempV/32B

TempV/32A

MTC/24, MHV/24

Gain

TempV/32B

TempV/32A

MTC/24

Offset

TempRTD/16B

TempRTD/16A

(N/A)

Gain

TempRTD/16B

TempRTD/16A(N/A)

Offset & Gain Channel Numbers
Exp/10A

Exp/11A

Master Unit Chassis

Unit #

Slot #

Unit #

Slot #

TempScan/1100(of 992 Channels)

TempScan/1000A(of 992 Channels)

MultiScan/1200(of 744 Channels)

1

1

1

2
3
4
5
6

1

33

33

25

2

2

65

65

49

1

3

97

97

73

2

4

129

129

97

1

5

161

161

121

2

6

193

193

145

1

7

225

225

169

2

8

257

257

193

1

9

289

289

217

2

10

321

321

241

1

353

353

265

2

385

385

289

1

3

417

417

313

2

4

449

449

337

1

5

481

481

361

2

6

513

513

385

1

7

545

545

409

2

8

577

577

433

1

9

609

609

457

2

10

641

641

481

1

673

673

505

2

2

705

705

529

1

3

737

737

553

2

4

769

769

577

1

5

801

801

601

2

6

833

833

625

1

7

865

865

649

2

8

897

897

673

1

9

929

929

697

10

961

961

721

1

1

1

1

2

2
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

1

3

2
Master Unit Chassis Slot

6-6

System Calibration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

The Calibrate Channel Offset (H) command – formatted as Hchan – and the Calibrate Channel Gain (G)command – formatted as Gchan,type – typically refer to calibration being performed on the first channel
number chan of each selected scanning card. These typical channel values are indicated in the second
table. However, any channel may be used. Make sure that the channel selected with the calibrationcommand matches the channel connected to the precision voltage source. Note that all three of the
TempScan/1100, TempScan/1000A, and MultiScan/1200 master chassis slots each uses scanning card
Channel 1.
The Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J) command – formatted as Jchan,type,temp – refers to calibration
being performed on multiple channel numbers of each selected scanning card. The TempTC/32B (for the
TempScan/1100) and TempTC/32A (for the TempScan/1000A) thermocouple scanning cards each have 4
on-card temperature-sensor channels for cold-junction compensation of the thermocouple signals, while theMTC/24 (for the MultiScan/1200) thermocouple/volts scanning card has only 3 on-card temperature-sensor
channels.
The multiple temperature-sensing channels on each scanning card must be supplied with an accurate
thermocouple signal of known warm-junction temperature. This may be accomplished by means of an
accurate thermocouple calibration source or of an accurate measurement of the temperature of the existing
thermocouple heat sources. Subsequently, the J command must be entered 4 times for each
TempScan/1100 or TempScan/1000A scanning card, while the J command must be entered only 3 times
for each MultiScan/1200 scanning card.
Cold-Junction Channel Numbers
Exp/10A

Exp/11A

Master Unit Chassis

Unit #

Slot #

Unit #

Slot #

TempScan/1100(of 992 Channels)

TempScan/1000A(of 992 Channels)

MultiScan/1200(of 744 Channels)

1

1

1

25,33,41

2
3
4
5
6

1

44,48,60,64

33,37,49,53

2

2

76,80,92,96

65,69,81,85

49,57,65

1

3

108,112,124,128

97,101,113,117

73,81,892

4

140,144,156,160

129,133,145,149

97,105,1131

5

172,176,188,192

161,165,177,181

121,129,1372

6

204,208,220,224

193,197,209,213

145,153,161

1

7

236,240,252,256

225,229,241,245

169,177,185

2

8

268,272,284,288

257,261,273,277

193,201,209

1

9300,304,316,320

289,293,305,309

217,225,233

2

10

332,336,348,352

321,325,337,341

241,249,257

1

364,368,380,384

353,357,369,373

265,273,281

2

2

396,400,412,416

385,389,401,405

289,297,305

1

3

428,432,444,448

417,421,433,437

313,321,329

2

4

460,464,476,480

449,453,465,469

337,345,353

1

5492,496,508,512

481,485,497,501

361,369,377

2

6

524,528,540,544

513,517,529,533

385,393,401

1

7

556,560,572,576

545,549,561,565

409,417,425

2

8588,592,604,608

577,581,593,597

433,441,449

1

9620,624,636,640

609,613,625,629

457,465,473

2

10

652,656,668,672

641,645,657,661

481,489,497

1

7
8
9
10
11

1

684,688,700,704

673,677,689,693

505,513,521

2

2

716,720,732,736

705,709,721,725

529,537,545

1

3

748,752,764,768

737,741,753,757

553,561,569

2

4

780,784,796,800

769,773,785,789

577,585,593

1

5812,816,828,832

801,805,817,821

601,609,617

2

6

844,848,860,864

833,837,849,853

625,633,641

1

7

876,880,892,896

865,869,881,885

649,657,665

2

8

908,912,924,928

897,901,913,917

673,681,689

1

9

940,944,956,960

929,933,945,949

697,705,713

10

972,976,988,992
12,16,28,32

961,965,977,981
1,5,17,21

721,729,737
1,9,17

1

12
13
14
15

2

3

2
Master Unit Chassis Slot

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Calibration

6-7

These multiple channel values are indicated in the third table. Make sure that the channels selected withthe calibration command matches the channels connected to the precision thermocouple-calibration source.
Note:

The following text discusses the manual method of calibration. However, we strongly
suggest using ChartView’s internal automated calibration method. To do so, from
ChartView navigate as follows, then follow the on screen instructions.
⇒ Device ⇒ Select Status ⇒ Calibration [then follow on screen prompts]

CAUTION
Scanning card calibration requires the use of a calibrated master unit chassis.

Calibration of Thermocouple Scanning Cards
Note:

Prior to each calibration session, disable calibration protection by setting the rear panel DIP
microswitch 9 to the up (1) position. Then enable Calibration Mode via the Enter
Calibration Mode (K) command with a valid password. If the default calibration password
has not been changed, enter K12345.

Note:

At the end of each calibration session, disable Calibration Mode with the End Calibration
Mode (E) command. Then re-enable calibration protection by resetting DIP microswitch 9 tothe down (0) position.

To Calibrate a Thermocouple Card for Offset

6-8

1.

Connect a Copper Short to Channel 1 on the scanning card being calibrated. Use standard copper
hookup wire. Do not use thermocouple wire. Slide the scanning card into the previously-calibrated
master chassis.

2.

Power up the unit and wait at least one hour before continuing.

3.

Send the Calibrate Channel Offset (H) command Hchan – where chan refers to the first channel
number on the scanning card being calibrated (refer to the previous table for valid offset channel
numbers) – and wait for the command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few
seconds.

4.

Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Channel Offset (H)command completed without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode
the Calibration Status Register (CSR).

System Calibration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's ManualTo Calibrate a Thermocouple Card for Gain

CAUTION
Ensure that the thermocouple scanning card has been calibrated for offset. If not,follow the thermocouple card offset calibration procedure as described in theprevious text.
1.

Connect a precision voltage source to Channel 1 on the scanning card being calibrated. Use standard
copper hookup wire. Do not use thermocouple wire. Slide the scanning card into the previouslycalibrated master chassis.

2.

Power up the unit and wait at least one hour before continuing.

3.

Set the Part A precision voltage source and send its corresponding Calibrate Channel Gain (G)command Gchan,type – where chan refers to the first channel number on the scanning card being
calibrated (refer to the previous table for valid gain channel numbers) – from the following list:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Part A:Part B:
Part C:Part D:Part E:Part F:
Part G:
Part H:-13.82 mV+13.82 mV-18.70 mV+18.70 mV-21.12 mV+21.12 mV-43.00 mV+43.00 mV

Gchan,7Gchan,7Gchan,6
Gchan,6
Gchan,3Gchan,3Gchan,1
Gchan,1

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Part I:
Part J:
Part K:Part L:Part M:
Part N:
Part O:Part P:-47.70 mV+47.70 mV-54.90 mV+54.90 mV-77.00 mV+77.00 mV-100.00 mV+100.00 mV

Gchan,8Gchan,8Gchan,2
Gchan,2
Gchan,4Gchan,4Gchan,10
Gchan,10

Wait for the Part A command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds.
4.

Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Channel Gain (G) commandcompleted without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode theCalibration Status Register (CSR).

5.

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the next fifteen parts: Part B through Part P.

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Calibration

6-9

To Calibrate a Thermocouple Card for Cold-Junction Offset

CAUTION
Ensure that the thermocouple scanning card has been calibrated for offset andgain. If not, follow the thermocouple card offset and gain calibration procedures
as described in the previous text.

Cold-Junction Offset Calibration

1.

Connect accurate thermocouple sources to the following multiple channels on the scanning card being
calibrated, where chan refers to the first channel number on the scanning card being calibrated (referto the previous table for valid cold-junction channel numbers).
•••

TempTC/32B (for TempScan/1100): chan, chan+4, chan+16, chan+20
TempTC/32A (for TempScan/1000A): chan, chan+4, chan+16, chan+20
MTC/24 (for MultiScan/1200): chan, chan+8, chan+16

Slide the scanning card into the previously-calibrated master chassis.
2.

Power up the unit and wait at least one hour before continuing.

3.

Apply the following temperature values in Celsius to the multiple cold-junction channels above:
•
•
•

6-10

System Calibration

TempTC/32B (for TempScan/1100): nnn.n, ppp.p, qqq.q, rrr.r
TempTC/32A (for TempScan/1000A): nnn.n, ppp.p, qqq.q, rrr.r
MTC/24 (for MultiScan/1200): nnn.n, ppp.p, qqq.q

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

4.

Send the following Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J) command Jchan,type,temp for the first coldjunction channel (temperature sensor #1):•••

TempTC/32B (for TempScan/1100): Jchan,type,nnn.n
TempTC/32A (for TempScan/1000A): Jchan,type,nnn.n
MTC/24 (for MultiScan/1200): Jchan,type,nnn.n

Wait for the command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds.
Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J)command completed without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode
the Calibration Status Register (CSR).
5.

Next, send the following Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J) command Jchan,type,temp for thesecond cold-junction channel (temperature sensor #2):•••

TempTC/32B (for TempScan/1100): Jchan+4,type,ppp.p
TempTC/32A (for TempScan/1000A): Jchan+4,type,ppp.p
MTC/24 (for MultiScan/1200): Jchan+8,type,ppp.p

Wait for the command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds.
Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J)command completed without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode
the Calibration Status Register (CSR).
6.

Next, send the following Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J) command Jchan,type,temp for thethird cold-junction channel (temperature sensor #3):•••

TempTC/32B (for TempScan/1100): Jchan+16,type,qqq.q
TempTC/32A (for TempScan/1000A): Jchan+16,type,qqq.q
MTC/24 (for MultiScan/1200): Jchan+16,type,qqq.q

Wait for the command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds.
Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J)command completed without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode
the Calibration Status Register (CSR).
7.

At this point, the 3 cold-junction channels of the MTC/24 (for MultiScan/1200) scanning card havebeen calibrated. This additional Step applies only to the fourth cold-junction channel of the
TempTC/32B (for TempScan/1100) and TempTC/32A (for TempScan/1000A) scanning cards.
Finally, send the following Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J) command Jchan,type,temp for the
fourth cold-junction channel (temperature sensor #4):••

TempTC/32B (for TempScan/1100): Jchan+20,type,rrr.r
TempTC/32A (for TempScan/1000A): Jchan+20,type,rrr.r

Wait for the command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds.
Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J)command completed without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode
the Calibration Status Register (CSR).

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Calibration

6-11

Calibration of Voltage Scanning Cards
Note:

Prior to each calibration session, disable calibration protection by setting the rear panel
DIP microswitch 9 to the up (1) position. Then enable Calibration Mode via the Enter
Calibration Mode (K) command with a valid password. If the default calibration
password has not been changed, enter K12345.

Note:

At the end of each calibration session, disable Calibration Mode with the End Calibration
Mode (E) command. Then re-enable calibration protection by resetting DIP
microswitch 9 to the down (0) position.

To Calibrate a Voltage Card for Offset
1.

Connect a Copper Short to Channel 1 on the scanning card being calibrated. Use standard copper
hookup wire. Do not use thermocouple wire. Slide the scanning card into the previously-calibrated
master chassis.

2.

Power up the unit and wait at least one hour before continuing.

3.

Send the Calibrate Channel Offset (H) command Hchan – where chan refers to the first channel
number on the scanning card being calibrated (refer to the previous table for valid offset channel
numbers) – and wait for the command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few
seconds.

4.

Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Channel Offset (H)command completed without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode
the Calibration Status Register (CSR).

To Calibrate a Voltage Card for Gain

CAUTION
Ensure that the voltage scanning card has been calibrated for offset. If not, follow
the volts card offset calibration procedure as described in the previous text.

1.

Connect a precision voltage source to Channel 1 on the scanning card being calibrated. Use standard
copper hookup wire. Do not use thermocouple wire. Slide the scanning card into the previouslycalibrated master chassis.

2.

Power up the unit and wait at least one hour before continuing.

3.

Set the Part A precision voltage source and send its corresponding Calibrate Channel Gain (G)command Gchan,type – where chan refers to the first channel number on the scanning card being
calibrated (refer to the previous table for valid gain channel numbers) – from the following list:••••

Part A: -100.0 mV DC
Part B: +100.0 mV DC
Part C: -1.00 V DC
Part D: +1.00 V DC

Gchan,11Gchan,11Gchan,12Gchan,12••••Part E:Part F:
Part G:
Part H:-5.00 V DC
+5.00 V DC
-10.00 V DC
+10.00 V DC

Gchan,13Gchan,13Gchan,14Gchan,14

Wait for the Part A command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds.

6-12

4.

Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Channel Gain (G) commandcompleted without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode theCalibration Status Register (CSR).

5.

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the next seven parts: Part B through Part H.

System Calibration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

Calibration of RTD Scanning Cards
Note:

Prior to each calibration session, disable calibration protection by setting the rear panel
DIP microswitch 9 to the up (1) position. Then enable Calibration Mode via the Enter
Calibration Mode (K) command with a valid password. If the default calibration
password has not been changed, enter K12345.

Note:

At the end of each calibration session, disable Calibration Mode with the End Calibration
Mode (E) command. Then re-enable calibration protection by resetting DIP
microswitch 9 to the down (0) position.

To Calibrate an RTD Card for Offset
1.

Connect a Copper Short to Channel 1 (across R1-, S1-, S1+, R1+) on the scanning card being
calibrated. Use standard copper hookup wire. Do not use thermocouple wire. Slide the scanning card
into the previously-calibrated master chassis.

2.

Power up the unit and wait at least one hour before continuing.

3.

Send the Calibrate Channel Offset (H) command Hchan – where chan refers to the first channel
number on the scanning card being calibrated (refer to the previous table for valid offset channel
numbers) – and wait for the command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few
seconds.

4.

Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Channel Offset (H)command completed without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode
the Calibration Status Register (CSR).

To Calibrate an RTD Card for Gain

CAUTION
Ensure that the RTD scanning card has been calibrated for offset. If not, follow
the RTD card offset calibration procedure as described in the previous text.

1.

Connect a precision 3-wire or 4-wire resistance source of xxx.xx ohms to Channel 1 on the scanningcard being calibrated. Slide the scanning card into the previously-calibrated master chassis.

2.

Power up the unit and wait at least one hour before continuing.

3.

Enter the Set RTD Gain Calibration Reference (*G) command *Ggain where gain is the appropriate
resistance value nnn.nn in ohms.

4.

Send the following Calibrate Channel Gain (G) command Gchan,type – where chan refers to thefirst channel number on the scanning card being calibrated (refer to the previous table for valid gain
channel numbers):••

3-Wire RTD: Gchan,164-Wire RTD: Gchan,17

Wait for the command to complete. The TRIGGER LED indicator will flash for a few seconds.
5.

Monitor the Calibration Status Register (CSR) to ensure that the Calibrate Channel Gain (G) commandcompleted without error. Refer to the User Status (U) command U2 to monitor and decode theCalibration Status Register (CSR).

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

879596

System Calibration

6-13

6-14

System Calibration

879596

TempScan / MultiScan User's Manual

SoftwareChartView

ViewXL

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

969296

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference
ChartView, ChartView Plus, ChartViewNET, ChartViewNET Plus, & ViewXL***
Digital Meters ……CV-34
Meter Toolbars ……CV-35
Meter Pull-Down Menus ……CV-35
Meters Configuration Menu ……CV-36

Overview ……CV-2
Groups, Charts, & Channels ……CV-2
Three Ways of Using ChartView ……CV-2
What ChartView and ChartView Plus
Provide ……CV-4

Setup Window ……CV-37
Channel & Alarm Setup Dialog Box ……CV-37

Main Window ……CV-4

Channel Configuration Columns ……CV-39
Alarm Configuration Columns ……CV-40

Channel Information Region ……CV-6
Status Indicator Region ……CV-7
Chart Pop-up Menu …… CV-8

Acquisition Setup Dialog Box ……CV-41
Burst Mode, Operational Issues ……CV-43
Measuring AC Voltage, or AC RMS Voltage…CV-44
Data Destination Dialog Box ……CV-46

Main Window Toolbar ……CV-11
Group Select ……CV-11
Start, Pause, and Stop Charts ……CV-11
Scroll Faster & Scroll Slower ……CV-11
Display Configuration ……CV-12
Channel Configuration ……CV-18
View File Data ……CV-18
Arm Acquisition ……CV-19
Disarm ……CV-19
Print Charts ……CV-19

Data Destination ……CV-46
Auto Re-Arm ……CV-46
Why use Auto Re-Arm? ……CV-47
Disabling Auto Re-Arm ……CV-47

Chart Setup Wizard ……CV-48
Introduction ……CV-48
Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard ……CV-49
Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup ……CV-50

Main Window Pull-Down Menus ……CV-20
Bar Graph, Analog, and Digital Meters …CV-31

ViewXL ….. vxl-1

Bar Graph Meters ……CV-32
Analog Meters ……CV-33***

Until the release of Data Acquisition CD 501395D-01 (version 7), the NET and Plus features werepurchased packages. We now offer these additional features free. However, to enable fullChartView functionality you need to enter the following code.

C3523DFA6C0A
Enter the above code in the Authorization Dialog Box (see page CV-20).

Reference Note:
This document serves as a reference for ChartView, ChartView Plus, ChartViewNET, ChartViewNET
Plus, Chart Setup Wizard, and ViewXL.

A ChartScan, TempScan, or MultiScan unit can operate on the ethernet providing it is configured
for RS-232 serial communications and properly connected to A Net232 ethernet/RS-232 converter.
If you will be connecting your unit to a Net232, refer to the Net232 User’s Guide, p/n 1037-0901.
ChartViewNET refers to a ChartView program that has the network feature of the program activated(for ethernet operation), much like ChartView Plus refers to a ChartView program that has theenhanced chart feature of the program activated. The NET and Plus features are each activated byseparate registration ID codes; thus it is possible to have ChartViewNET Plus (when both codes areused). For ease of discussion, this document’s use of the term ChartView also refers toChartViewNET; and ChartView Plus refers to ChartViewNET Plus.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-1

Overview
ChartView is a graphic Microsoft Windows-based program, which was designed for ease-of-use with no needof programming knowledge.
ChartView Plus permits multiple groups and up to four overlapping channels (per chart).
These enhanced features can be enabled by entering the following code in the authorization
dialog box (see page CV-20).

C3523DFA6C0A
Groups, Charts, & Channels
When starting the program with no configuration file present, a feature called Chart Setup Wizard isautomatically activated to assist you with your display setup. To make the best use of Chart Setup Wizard
you need to understand the relationship of Groups, Charts, and Channels.
Group. “Group” refers to a group of charts. ChartView makes use of one chartgroup. ChartView Plus allows up to 64 groups, depending on the capabilities ofyour PC, but can only display one group at a time.
Chart. “Chart” refers to display area that reflects real-time channel data values
for a selected channel and can be scrolled at various rates. You can assign up to
16 charts per group. ChartView Plus enables each chart to display up to four
overlapping channels.
Channel. “Channel” refers to a signal channel. Channels will be displayed inunits of °C, °F, °K, °R, mV, V, or in user-defined units, depending on theconfiguration and type of signal conditioning card used. With ChartView Plus
you can have up to 4 overlapping channels assigned to one chart.

Three Ways of Using ChartView
You can use ChartView to:•••

chart and monitor specific channels with no acquisition of data to diskacquire data with no charting or meter use
use charting and/or meters while acquiring data to disk

Chart channels (and/or monitor with meters) with no acquisition of data to disk (Acquisition State:
Waiting for Trigger) Prior to charting channels on ChartView’s Main Window, you need to configure
a display in regard to groups, charts, and channels. This aspect of configuration is performed throughChart Setup Wizard (discussed in the following text), or through a Chart Setup window accessed
through the “Channel Configuration” button on ChartView’s Main Window.
In addition to charting channels, you can monitor selected channels via digital, analog, and/or bar
graph meters. Meter discussion begins on page CV-31 of this document. A detailed discussion ofconfiguring Meters begins on page CV-36.
Note:

CV-2

ChartView

Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time.

988992

Software ReferenceAcquire data with no charting or meter use (Possible Acquisition Scenarios: Acquiring and Uploading
Acquisition, Buffering Acquisition in Instrument, and Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer). Priorto acquiring data (for saving to disk) you need to configure the acquisition using the Acquisition
window (accessed through the Setup pull-down menu of ChartView’s Main Window, or through useof the related icon button). You can enable the desired channels and assign high and low alarm values
from the configuration window.
Chart channels and/or use meters while acquiring data to disk (Possible Acquisition States: Acquiringand Uploading Acquisition, Buffering Acquisition in Instrument, and Uploading Data from Instrument
Buffer). Prior to using ChartView for charting (and/or meter use) while simultaneously acquiring data
to disk, you need to configure a display and/or meter; as well as configure the acquisition. Channels
from the display setup are automatically enabled. You can enable additional channels from the
Channel Configuration window (for the data acquisition) to acquire more data; however, these
additional channels will not change your display setup, or the channels being monitored. In otherwords, you can acquire data from channels you do not chart or monitor.
Some of the data acquisition scenarios pertaining to ChartView are as follows:2) Acquiring & Uploading Acquisition

1) Waiting for Trigger

Hard Disk

SensorBufferBufferAcquisiton Device

Computer System

Data is received by acquisition device, but not stored. Selectedchannels can be viewed graphically in scrolling charts, as wellas in one or more meters (analog, digital, or bar graph).

Computer System

Device has been triggered. Data is temporarily stored in device
buffer prior to being uploaded to PC system hard disk. As in the firstscenario, selected display channels can be viewed.

Hard Disk

SensorHard Disk

BufferBufferAcquisiton Device

Acquisiton Device4) Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer

3) Buffering Acquisition in Instrument

SensorHard Disk

SensorComputer System

Acquired data (from point of trigger) is received by acquisition device
and temporarily stored in device buffer. As in the previous scenarios,
selected display channels can be viewed.

Acquisiton Device

Computer System

Acquired data is uploaded to the PC hard disk from the device buffer.
As in the previous scenarios, selected display channels can beviewed.

Basic Data Acquisition Scenarios

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-3

What ChartView and ChartView Plus Provide
ChartView and ChartView Plus provide you with the capability to connect to, and control any member of theChartScan, NetScan, MultiScan, or TempScan family of data acquisition instruments, as well as:
Create and edit chart display setups ………………………………
Set up analog input parameters (selecting: Channels,
TC types, Units) to acquire data. …………………………………..
Configure alarms, log alarms……………………………………….

See Display Configuration, beginning on page CV-12 andChart Setup Wizard, beginning on page CV-48.
See Setup Window, beginning on page CV-37.
See pages CV-29, CV-37, and CV-40.

Set up automatic re-arms (Auto Re-Arm) …………………………

See Data Destination, page CV-46.

Configure and arm an acquisition…………………………………..

See Acquisition Setup Dialog Box, page CV-41.

View real-time display of channel data via the Main Window….

See Main Window, beginning on page CV-4.

Save data to disk……………………………………………………..

See File, page CV-20 and Data Destination, page CV-46.

Launch an independent data viewing application ………………..
Use remote RS-232 communications by attaching theacquisition device to a modem configured for Auto Answer…

See View File Data, page CV-18
See Device, page CV-27.

Main Window
While using this chapter, refer to the Main Window figure and its associated control option table asneeded. Because of the graphic aspect of the window, you should be able to develop a goodunderstanding of the program’s capabilities and associated operating techniques within a very shorttime.
The following comments apply to the figure and table on the following page.

CV-4

ChartView•

In regard to the control option table presented on the facing page, the symbols:  (mouse), Ú(arrow keypads),  (Page Up/Page Down keypads), and [spacebar] are control options that allow
you to tab to a field and make changes with the specified control.

•

Channel Selection (14) can also be made by tabbing to the Center Control (17) or Units/Div
Control (18) and using PageUp or PageDown ().

•The min and max scale values (13) and (19) are automatically generated, but can also be set fromthe Chart Setup Dialog.

•

You can use the Chart pull-down menu to turn grid limit lines Off, or On. Limit lines can be solidor dots.

•

In regard to the time stamp (region 21), if you stop the chart the time stamp will begin at 00:00:00
upon restarting the chart (if using relative time), or at the real clock time (if using absolute time).

•

More detailed information regarding the pull-down menus and toolbar buttons is provided
throughout the chapter.

988992

Software ReferenceChartView Main Window and Control Options

 = Mouse, Ú= Arrow Keypads ,  = PageUp/PageDown Keypads
Note: The bulleted list on page CV-4 relates to this table.

1

Group SelectCtrl+G, or Ú, or 

14

Channel Selection

2

Start Charts andIndicators

 or, F5

15

Multiply (x2)

3

Pause Charts or, F7

16

Present Value of Selected
ChannelN/A

4

Stop Charts or, F617

 or, Ú, or type-in

5

Scroll Faster or, Ctrl+Z

18

6

Scroll Slower

 or, Ctrl+X

19

Center (Value at Chart MidLine)
Units/Division(Vertical increment per one gridbox)
Chart Min. Scale Value (Grid
Limit Line)

7

Display Configuration

or, Pointer over chartand “right-click” Current
group will be selected.

20

Divide (÷2)

 or, Tab-to/Spacebar

8

ChannelConfiguration



21

Time Stamp (hr:min:sec)

Thru Pull-Down Menus
only

9

View File Data or, Windows Pull-

22

Status Message Box

N/A

Ctrl+Z (Faster)Ctrl+X (Slower) or, Ú or, Tab-to/Spacebar or, Ú, or type-in
From Chart Pull-downmenu or Chart Setup
Dialog Box

down menu

10

Arm Acquisition

 or, Ctrl+T

23

11

Disarm …

 or, Ctrl+Y

24

Time/Division (Chart Speed),the Horizontal increment per
grid box
Status LEDs

12

Print Charts or, Ctrl+P

25

Chart Display

Chart Max. Scale
Value (Grid LimitLine)

From Chart Pull-downmenu or Chart Setup
Dialog Box

13

Software Reference

Double-click left mouse button in selected chart to zoom in orzoom back out. Right-click to bring up the chart pop-up display
with the current group and target chart selected. See Chart
Display Pop-up Menu, page CV-8 for additional information.

988992ChartView , CV-5

Channel Information Region
Channels can return values in units of °C, °F, °K, °R, mV, V, or user
defined units (if the mX + b option is used). With exception of mX + b
user defined-units, units depend on the configuration and type ofsignal conditioning card used. Signal conditioning cards are detailed
in the user’s manual for you data acquisition device. The Channel
Information Region is located on the right-hand side of ChartView’s
main window. The values displayed in this region are the real-timevalues of the selected channel.
By clicking on the up or down arrows by the channel selection box(item 14), you can select one (of a maximum of 4 channels) that wereassigned to a chart. You could then observe the chart-related
information of the chosen channel.
You can also select a new channel for the information region by placing the cursor in (or tabbing overto) the “Center” or “Units/Div” fields and then pressing PageUp or PageDown. This is particularly
useful when your main window has been re-sized such that the channel selection boxes are not visible.
The following list identifies the various areas of the region.
13
14
15
16

Note:

Chart Max. Scale Value(Grid Limit Line)
Channel Selection(Of chart’s available channels)
Multiply (x2)
Present Value

17
18
19
20

Center(Value at chart mid-line)
Units/Division(Provides the vertical increment of one grid box.)
Chart Min. Scale Value (Grid Limit Line)
Divide (÷2)

The basic ChartView program does not permit overlapping channels or having more than
one chart group. Multiple group applications (ChartView Plus) can be activated by use of a
special code, allowing up to four overlapping channels per chart. Regardless of whether you
are using the basic ChartView program, or ChartView Plus, there is a maximum limit of 16
charts per group.

Multiply and Divide Buttons - In addition to reading channel values, you can increase or decrease thesize of the selected channel’s chart. This is accomplished with the Multiply (15) and Divide (20)push-buttons. The Multiply push-button effectively increases the size of the selected channel’s chartby a factor of two, while automatically adjusting the chart’s high and low values (items 13 and 19).
Aside from “clicking” on the Multiply/Divide controls, you can use your keyboard spacebar to control
this feature once the button (15 or 20) is selected. Selection may be with mouse, or by tabbing over tothe control.
Making changes to a channel’s chart parameters does not affect the parameters of the other channels,
with the following exception: Holding the keyboard’s control key down while adjusting either spinnerfor center (item 17), or spinner for units/div (item 18) causes the parameter change to apply to allchannels displayed for the chart, not just the currently selected channel display. This feature applies tothe spinners and keyboard up and down arrow keys, but not to the text input.
Center Control - The Center control (item 17) changes the value of the selected channel’s chartcenterline. Changing the value of center results in an automatic change of the chart’s high and low
end values (items 13 and 19), and possibly an automatic change of the units/div (item 18). Aside fromusing the center spinner controls to change center, you can change the center value by placing themouse cursor in (or tabbing over to) the field and then either typing in the desired value, or using the
PC keyboard up and down arrow control keys.

CV-6

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceUnits/div - The units in units/div (18) can be °C, °F, °K, °R, mV, or V. The division referenced is
one vertical grid. In the example above for Channel 1, each vertical grid increment represents 10.58°C
per division. Changing the units/division spinner controls will result in an automatic adjustment of themax scale and min scale values (items 13 and 19). Aside from using the units/div triangular controls
to change the value, you can change units/div by placing the mouse cursor in (or tabbing over to) the
field and then either typing in the desired value, or using the PC keyboard arrow control keys.

Status Indicator Region

The status indicator region of the Main Window, located along the bottom of the window, consists ofthe following items:
21
22

Scrolling Time
Status Message Box

23
24

Chart Speed (Time/Div)
Status LEDs1

Scrolling Time - Scrolling Time (21) is turned On or Off from the View pull-down menu. Time
Stamp can be “absolute” (real time) or “relative.” Absolute time is based on your computer clock,whereas relative time starts at 00:00:00 hours/minutes/seconds, and then continues timing inincrements relative to the Chart Speed (23). The Absolute or Relative time stamp style is selectedfrom the Chart pull-down file.
Status Message Box - The Status Message Box (22) informs you of the status of the data acquisition
device. Several sample messages appear below:
Sample Status Messages
Attaching to device …
Setting channel configuration …
Setting the acquisition parameters.
Charting …

Trigger device. Setting acquisition parameters.
Acquisition active. Updating active.
Acquisition active. No updating.
Waiting for trigger …

Chart Speed - Chart Speed (23) consists of a “time per division” value that can be changed using the“faster” (rabbit) button or “slower” (turtle) button. Fourteen possible chart speeds are as follows:
0.1 sec/div
0.2 sec/div
0.5 sec/div

1 sec/div
2 sec/div
5 sec/div

10 sec/div
30 sec/div
1 min/div

2 min/div
5 min/div
10 min/div

30 min/div
1 hr/div

Status LEDs1 - ChartView’s Main Window contains five virtual LEDs (item 24) for conveying thestate of the system. Each of the five indicators is labeled on the main window. These indicators are:

Software Reference

Initializing:

Indicates ChartView is configuring the data acquisition instrument.

Charting:

Indicates charting is in progress. This indicator is useful when charts are scrolling at a very slow
speed.

Disk:

Indicates ChartView is writing to disk.

Buffering in
Instrument:

Indicates the data acquisition instrument is storing scans that are not being saved to disk.

Uploading:

Indicates data in the instrument is being uploaded to the PC.

988992ChartView , CV-7

Chart Pop-up Menu

Right-click on a chart tobring up the chart popup menu.

The “Chart
Properties” dialog
box allows you to
configure theoperating mode of
selected chart.

Click on “Properties” toaccess a “Chart
Properties” dialog box.

ChartView Main Window with Chart Pop-up Menu and “Chart Properties”Dialog Box
When you place the mouse cursor over a chart and right-click a pop-up menu appears. The menu
provides a means to perform the following tasks. Note that the term “selected chart” refers to the chartfrom which the pop-up menu was accessed. In the preceding figure Chart 2 is the selected chart.

CV-8

ChartView•

Edit current channel – Brings up the Chart Display Configuration Setup dialog box for thecurrent channel of the selected chart. See Using the pop-up menus’ Edit current channel
feature on page CV-9 for detailed information.

•

Zoom chart / Un-Zoom chart – Zoom chart causes the selected chart to occupy the entire
ChartView main window. After the zoom-in, the pop-up menu’s “Zoom chart” selection is
replaced by an “Un-zoom” option. The latter returns the ChartView window to its previous
display of multiple charts (if applicable). Note that double-clicking the left mouse button will
also zoom or un-zoom the selected chart.

•

Clear chart – erases all channels from the selected chart. Timestamps, if shown, are also
cleared. If charts are scrolling, the channels will begin to chart again, immediately following
the “clear chart” action. Note that the clear action does not reset a relative timestamp to
00:00:00.

•

Clear all charts and timestamps - erases all channels from the all charts. Timestamps, if
shown, are also cleared. If charts are scrolling, the channels will begin to chart again,
immediately following the action. Note that the clear action does not reset relative
timestamps to 00:00:00.

•

Restore all chart properties – Synchronizes the charts and resets them to the default
settings. Grids are turned on and aligned with other; timestamps are off, the scroll rate of 1
sec/div is selected, and the limit line option is turned off.

•

Synch all charts timestamps – This feature synchronizes charts, but does not alter their
settings. The feature is used to align all chart grids and timestamps.

•

Main Timestamp visible - A checkmark appears by this selection when it is enabled and atimestamp will appear just above the LED section at the bottom of the ChartView window.
When disabled, the checkmark disappears and no main timestamp will be visible. The “MainTimestamp visible” actions have no bearing on the timestamps for individual charts.

988992

Software Reference•Properties - Selecting “Properties” from the pop-up menu accesses a Chart Properties dialog
box. The box allows you to change the selected chart in regard to the following.

Properties Dialog Box- Turn grid lines on or off- Turn the chart’s timestamp on or off, and choose absolute or relative as the type oftimestamp. Absolute timestamps make use of real clock time. Relative timestamps
start at 00:00:00.
- Select the desired scroll rate for the chart from a pull-down list
- Elect to have solid limit lines, dotted limit lines, or no limit lines (off)- Restore the selected chart’s default values. The grids are turned on; timestamps areoff, the scroll rate of 1 sec/div is selected, and the limit line option is turned off.
Using the pop-up menus’ “Edit current channel” feature

Selecting “Edit Current Channel” from the Pop-up Menu
Perform the following steps to edit a channel by using the pop-up menu. The step numbers correspond directly
to the numbers in the preceding figure.
Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-9

(1)Look at the channel selection box to ensure that the desired channel is shown. If not, select thedesired channel.
In the above figure, chart 2 is displaying two channels. However, since “CH2” can be seen in
the channel selection box it is the currently selected channel. If desired, we could select theother channel from the selection box at this point.
Note: Compressed ChartView windows will not show 100% of the window’s features. If you
do not see channel selection boxes in the ChartView main window, simply use the mouse
to expand the window until the channel selection boxes become visible; or “zoom” thedesired chart to make it occupy the full window.

(2)

Right-click on the chart’s display region. In this example we are using chart 2. The pop-up
menu appears.

(3)

In the pop-up menu select “Edit current channel.” The Chart Display Configuration Setup
dialog box will appear with the selected channel ready for reconfiguration (following figure).

Chart Display Configuration Setup

CV-10

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceMain Window Toolbar
Each item in the toolbar, with exception of Group Select (1), is represented by an individual button
icon. Toolbar-related functions can also be activated from pull-down menus (discussed later). Placing
the cursor on the button and clicking the mouse button enables the tool, or opens a corresponding
dialog box. Each Toolbar button has a pop-up label that appears when the mouse is placed over the
button.
Note: The toolbar represented below is for ChartView’s Main Window. Separate toolbars exist for
Bar Graph, Digital Meters, and Analog Meters options (selectable from the Windows pull-downmenu.) These other toolbars are discussed later in the chapter.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Group SelectStart Charts and Indicators
Pause Charts
Stop Charts
Scroll Faster
Scroll Slower

7
8
9
10
11
12

Display Configuration
Channel Configuration
View File Data
Arm Acquisition
Disarm …
Print Charts

Group SelectThis feature indicates the chart group being charted. Clicking on the down arrow reveals other chartgroups configured by the user. The standard ChartView program allows the use of only one chartgroup, while ChartView Plus can be configured to display up to 64 groups (one group at a time). To
select a different chart group, simply pull down the group list and select the desired group. The grouplist can be obtained by any of the control options provided in the table on page CV-5. These are: a)clicking the down arrow, b) using Ctrl + G on the keyboard, c) using the keyboard up or down arrow
key, d) using the page up or page down key. If using a control option other than “a,” you may need to
select the group select box by repeatable pressing the keyboard’s Tab key until the group select box isselected. The name of the currently selected group appears in white on a dark background.

Start, Pause, andStop Charts
As their names imply, these three buttons are used to start, pause, or stop the charts. Pressing “pause”
suspends chart scrolling, but does not stop the “charting” process. While “pause” is pressed, thechannel region of the main window will continue to display real time values. Pressing “pause” asecond time restarts the scrolling action. Pressing “stop” causes the charting process to stop andinstantly freezes the channel region at its present values. This does not affect the acquisition.

Scroll Faster &Scroll Slower
These buttons provide a means of speeding up and slowing the chart’s scrolling rate, also referred to as
chart speed. These two buttons do not affect the scan rates of the acquisition device. The chart speed(item 23) is indicated in the lower right-hand corner of the main window as time/div.
There are 14 possible chart speeds, as follows:
0.1 sec/div
0.2 sec/div
0.5 sec/div

Software Reference

1 sec/div
2 sec/div
5 sec/div

10 sec/div
30 sec/div
1 min/div

988992

2 min/div
5 min/div
10 min/div

30 min/div
1 hr/div

ChartView , CV-11

Display
Configuration
The Display Configuration button accesses a Display Configuration Setup dialog box. This box will
also be displayed if: a) Create Charts Manually is selected during use of the Wizard Chart Setup
program, b) you select Setup from the Chart pull-down menu, c) you right-click on the chart region in
ChartView’s Main Window.
Note:

If multiple chart groups are present in the display configuration, the current group will beselected in the display configuration tree.

When you first click on the Display Configuration button, a Display Configuration Setup box appears.
A display region shows the configured structure of the groups, charts, and channels. From this box,
you can select the number of charts to be assigned to a specific group. With the use of the mouse
cursor, you can also select a chart or channel for additional editing. In addition to the text presented in
the following sub-sections: Normal Edit and Manually Creating a Display, you can refer to thefollowing for related information:
In this chapter, Chart Setup Wizard provides information on the use of Chart Setup Wizard for the set
up of groups, charts, and channels.
Reference Note: For the very first display setup, or when the configuration file has been
deleted, you will need to use Chart Setup Wizard. Chart Setup Wizard information begins
on page CV-48.
The method you use to access the Display Configuration Setup window makes a difference. When you
use the toolbar button or the pull-down menu’s Setup selection, the Display Configuration Setup
window appears with the current chart display configuration intact. With this type of access you
would simply edit your existing chart display. Channel and alarm configurations do not change, withexception that newly displayed channels will be enabled.
When you access the Display Configuration Setup from the Chart Setup Wizard, the Display
Configuration Setup window appears with no existing display. This allows for a “clean slate”
approach to creating a chart display, as opposed to an “editing” approach. Channel and alarmconfigurations do not change, with exception that newly displayed channels will be enabled.
Normal Edit
To explain editing a configuration, we make use of an example where changes are desired for Chart 1.
In the following figure, Chart 1 was highlighted by clicking on it with the mouse cursor. The Display
Configuration Setup box then changed, allowing you to see specific channel types (such as volts only)
or to “Show all Types,” as in the example. From this setup box you can add or delete charts andchannels. You can:
•
•
•
•

CV-12

ChartView

hold down the Shift key and use the cursor to select several consecutive channels for addition ordeletionhold down the Ctrl key and use the cursor to select several non-consecutive channels for addition ordeletion
double-click on an available channel to add it to the selected channels
double-click on a selected channel to remove it from the selected channels list

988992

Software ReferenceDisplay Configuration Setup Dialog Box with an Existing Configuration
Note: When a chart contains overlapping channels [and the channels share values such that their traces
reside on top of each other], then the channels listed lower in the display list (the most recently added
channels) will obscure the channels higher in the list (those that were added first).

Adding Channel 2 to Chart 1

Another variation of the Display Configuration Setup box appears when you highlight a channel. In
the following figure, Channel 1 (of Chart 1, Group 1) was selected, resulting in a new screen image.
From this screen, you can edit the channel setup.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-13

Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1
ChartView and ChartView Plus data channels can operate in one of two modes: Units Full Scale or,Units/Div. The mode is selected by radio button.
Units Full Scale. When Units Full Scale is selected, as depicted in the above figure, you can alter
Y Max and Y Min. These are the upper and lower limits of the channel as they will appear on thechart when the channel is selected. When you change either parameter, Y Center and Units/Division
are automatically adjusted. You can not directly adjust Y Center or Units/Division while “Units Full
Scale” is selected. You can change Y Max and Y Min by using the up and down arrows, or byhighlighting the existing value, typing in the new value, the pressing “Enter” on your PC keyboard.
Note:

If the window size is changed, a chart operating in the Units Full Scale mode will maintain its
full scale setting across the chart.

Units/Div. When Units/Div. is selected, you can alter Y Center and Units/Div. Y Center is thecenterline value of the chart when the channel is selected. Units/Div. is the vertical value of on chart
grid increment. When you change Y Center or Units/Div. Y Max and Y Min are automaticallyadjusted. You can not directly adjust Y Max or Y Min while “Units/Div” is selected. You can change
Y Center and Units/Div. by using the up and down arrows, or by highlighting the existing value,
typing in the new value, the pressing “Enter” on your PC keyboard.
Note:

If the window size is changed, a chart operating in the Units/Div. Mode will maintain its
units per division scale setting across the chart.

The channels (in the display) will be enabled, and will appear in ChartView’s Main Window. The
Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart (for ChartView Plus applications), and will be visible
when the applicable Group is selected. Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time.
It is important to understand that other channels (those not in the display setup) maintain their existing
configuration status. They are not affected by the edit of the configuration display.
You can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window. Enabling additional
channels allows you to acquire more data; however, it will not change your display on ChartView’s
Main Window. In other words, you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor.

CV-14

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceManually Creating a Display
For ChartView Plus users, if you plan to have a chart setup that is not weighted evenly, i.e., different
numbers of channels per chart and different numbers of charts per group, you may want to manually
setup your chart display from scratch, i.e., without beginning from a pre-existing display
configuration. This method is arrived at from the Chart Setup Wizard window by selecting “Manual
Chart Creation.” When this button is clicked, the program exits the Chart Setup Wizard and enters the
manual method of Display Configuration Setup. Although this method is referred to as “manual,” itstill contains some automatic elements, such as Automatically Add Groups to the Setup (available with
ChartView Plus).
Note:

Even if an unevenly distributed chart display is desired, you can always edit a pre-existing
chart setup, or create a new setup by one of the Chart Setup Wizard’s automatic methods, andthen edit the setup.

To manually setup your chart display, using the “clean slate” approach, as opposed to “editing an
existing display,” perform the following steps.
1.

Select Wizard from the Chart pull-down menu of ChartView’s main window. The New Display
Setup dialog box appears.

2.

Click OK on the New Display Setup dialog box. The Wizard setup window appears (seefollowing figure).

3.

Click on the Manual Chart Creation button. The Display Configuration Setup box appears. Since
the previous display configuration was reset, no groups or charts are seen in the display area on
the left side of the screen.
Note: If you have ChartView Plus, you will be allowed to have more than one group, as well as
overlapping channels (up to four per chart). If you have the basic ChartView program,youwill be limited to one group, and only one channel per chart.

Display Configuration Setup, The “Clean Slate” Approach

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-15

4.

As seen in the previous figure for the “Clean Slate” approach, you have two options at this point.
Perform (4a) or (4b) as appropriate. With ChartView Plus, option (4a) is typically used.
(4a) Automatically add groups to the setup. Enter the number of groups and charts desired by using the cursor
and typing in the value, or by using the pull-down arrows and making the appropriate selections; then click on
the Create Groups button.
(4b) Manually add groups to the setup. Type in the name of the chart group; then click on the Add Display
Group button.

The Display Configuration Setup screen changes to show chart groups, and the number of charts
for the selected (black highlighted) chart group. From this screen you can change the number ofcharts in a group, as well as change the group name.

Adding a Chart to Group 1
5.

Change the number of charts per group if desired.

6.

Change the group name if desired.

7.

Click on a group to see the chart(s) assigned to the group. In the above example there is one
group with one chart.

8.

Click on a chart to assign channels to the chart. A screen similar to the following will appear.

Assigning Channels to Chart 1 of Group 1
CV-16

ChartView

988992

Software Reference

9.

Choose channels for the selected chart. With ChartView Plus, you can select up to four
overlapping channels per chart. With the basic ChartView program, you are limited to one
channel per chart. There are four methods of adding channels. These are as follows:•

Highlight an available channel using the cursor and left-hand mouse button; then click the Add button.
Repeat for each channel to be added.

•

Double-click on the channel (in the available channels list to add; in the selected channels list to
remove)•Hold down the keyboard’s Shift Key and use the left-hand mouse button to select a block ofconsecutive available channels (up to 4); then click the Add button. Example: CH3, CH4, CH5,CH6.

•

Hold down the keyboard’s Ctrl button and use the left-hand mouse button to select up to 4 available
channels (these can be non-consecutive); then click the Add button.
Example: CH1, CH3, CH5, CH7, as in the previous figure.

Note:

You can also remove channels in a similar manner by highlighting a channel(s) in the SelectChannels box, and then clicking on the Remove button. In the previous figure, CH7 (in theselect box) is highlighted. Clicking the Remove button would delete the channel from
Chart1.

Note:

When a chart contains overlapping channels [and the channels share values such that theirtraces reside on top of each other], then the channels that are listed lower in the display list
(the most recently added channels) will obscure the channels higher in the list (those thatwere added first).

10. In the display area (on the left-hand side of the screen) click on a channel to check the channel’s
configuration and to re-configure the channel, if desired. The Display Configuration Setup
Window will appear similar to the following figure.
Note:

Changing the display configuration does not change the existing channel and alarmconfiguration. It only changes how the chart groups, charts, and channels will be displayed.

This screen contains two “radio buttons” for selecting the method of adjusting the display modeand channel setup. It is the same screen discussed in the sub-section, Editing an Existing Display
Configuration. From this screen you need to choose Units Full Scale or Units/Div. Each method
was previously discussed (see page CV-14).

Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-17

Remember, you can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window. Enabling
additional channels allows you to acquire more data; however, it will not change your display on
ChartView’s Main Window. In other words, you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor.

Channel Configuration
The “Channel Configuration” button brings up the Setup Window with one of three “tabbed” dialog
boxes displayed: Acquisition Setup (page CV-37), Channel & Alarm Setup (page CV-37), or Data
Destination (page CV-43). The information entered in the Acquisition Setup dialog box is used by the
Arm Acquisition command to set up the acquisition of data to disk. When the trigger is satisfied, thescans are collected at the selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file. The
Channels & Alarms dialog box is used to configure channels and alarms; the Data Destination dialog
box is used to assign a filename and folder location for data, select an Excel or binary format (.TXT or.IOT respectively), and to select optional Time/Date and/or Alarm Stamps (to be included in the data)
if desired. You can tab back and forth from each one of these dialog boxes to the other.

View File Data
If a data file exists, clicking the “View File Data” button will bring up an independent view program,if such an application has been installed. eZ-PostView is an example of a view application. If you
have more than one view application installed, you can select the one you want to access via the File
Converter Preferences dialog box (following figure). The Converter Preferences dialog is opened
from the Data Destination dialog box, as discussed on page CV-43.

This field indicates theData File Viewer that will
be accessed via the<View File Data> button.

Identifying the Selected Data File Viewer

CV-18

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceArm Acquisition
You can use the Arm Acquisition button to activate an acquisition. When you click on this button the system is“armed” to begin collecting data by a recognized trigger (as set in the acquisition setup dialog box.) Three cases
are as follows:
1) If there is no Pre-trigger defined, the Trigger option under the Event Configuration portion of theAcquisition Setup dialog box will determine when the Arm process is initiated.

Console Trigger Box2) When a Pre-trigger is defined, the Arm process is initiated as soon as the Arm Acquisition is selected.
3) If a keystroke is chosen as the trigger, the Console Trigger dialog box will appear when the Arm
Acquisition is selected.

Disarm...
Use the “Disarm…” button to deactivate the data acquisition process at any point during an active acquisition.
The following confirmation dialog box will appear when this item is selected.

Message Box Regarding Possible Data Loss

Print Charts
The Print Charts button activates a screen print of ChartView’s main window.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-19

Main Window Pull-Down Menus
The ChartView main window features several pull-down menus. As an alternative to the menus, you
can enable several menu items by using Toolbar buttons, previously discussed. The common items(for the pull-down menus and toolbar) are described in more detail in the Toolbar section.

File

New
(Ctrl + N)

Sets all channel parameters to their startup (factory default) setting.

Open…
(Ctrl +O)

Sets all channel parameters as directed by a specified configuration file (.cvw). The
Load ChartView Setup window prompts you to select from a list of previously saved
configuration files.
Saves the existing all-inclusive channel configuration settings for later recall. The
Save command overwrites the existing version if the versions are named the same.

Save(Ctrl + S)
Save As…
Print…
(Ctrl + P)

Saves the existing configuration for later recall; asks whether to overwrite theoriginal version or save under a new filename.
The Print Charts button activates a screen print of ChartView’s main window.
When a chart contains overlapping channels [and the channels share values such that
their traces reside on top of each other], then the channels listed lower in the display
list (the most recently added channels) will obscure the channels higher in the list
(those that were added first).

About…

Displays ChartView version number and copyright information.

Authorization

Opens up the Authorization Dialog
Box. From here you can enter a code
to enable all ChartView features.
Enter the following code to enable allfeatures.

C3523DFA6C0A
Authorization Dialog Box
Exit

CV-20

ChartView

Exits the ChartView program.

988992

Software ReferenceWhen ChartView is started for the very first time there is no default channel
configuration file. In this case a ChartView Startup dialog box appears, providing you
with the following four choices: Retry, Select Device, Load File, and Exit Program.
After choosing Select Device a Select Interface dialog box appears, allowing you tochoose IEEE 488, RS-232, Network, or Simulated Instrument.
For ethernet operation, “Network” must be selected as the device interface.
Note: NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 selection.

After the selection has been made, when ChartView is shutdown, the selected interface device and allchannel configuration settings will be automatically saved in a default configuration file. Upon thenext start of ChartView, the default configuration is automatically loaded.
If the default configuration becomes corrupt, or if you would like to bypass the default configuration
when starting ChartView, you can hold down the Shift Key when starting ChartView. This causes the
program to ignore the default channel configuration settings and causes the ChartView Startup dialog
box to appear. This allows you to select Load File to make use of a specified channel configuration
file from a previously saved configuration.

Chart

WizardSetup

Software Reference

Ctrl+W

Accesses Chart Setup Wizard feature for automated chart configuration.
Accesses Chart Setup window, allowing you to edit your display
configuration.

988992ChartView , CV-21

Display config.

Note:

Start
Stop
Pause

F5
F6
F7

Allows you to: Open a previously saved display configuration file, save thecurrent display configuration file, or save the current display configuration
file in a different location (or under a different file name). (See followingnote).
There will be no default Display Configuration file present the first time
ChartView is started. In this case, Chart Setup Wizard activates, allowing
you to create a display setup. When ChartView is shutdown, the display
configuration is automatically saved in a default configuration file that will
load upon the next startup of ChartView.
If the default display configuration becomes corrupt, or if you would like tobypass this configuration when starting ChartView, you can hold down theControl Key when starting ChartView. This causes the program to ignore thedefault display configuration and await your creation of a new display.
Starts, stops, or pauses chart scrolling.

Next Group Ctrl+G

Selects the next chart group in the display configuration.

FasterSlowerUsed to alter the chart scrolling speed. There are fourteen possible chart
speeds. The range of speeds is from 0.1 sec/div to 1.0 hr/div.

Ctrl+Z
Ctrl+X

Zoom[ Restore ]Zoom causes the Main Window to display one chart only. For example, if
you were viewing 3 charts and desired to get a better view of Chart 2, you
could use Zoom to view Chart 2 using the full chart viewing area, ascompared to using one third of the area. The zoom feature can also be
invoked by double-clicking in the chart region of the chart you want to apply
the zoom to.
Once you have zoomed in on a chart, the pull-down menu Zoom option is
replaced by a Restore option. Selecting Restore from the menu will returnthe main window to its previous multiple chart viewing status. The restore
feature can also be invoked by again double-clicking in the chart region.

Grid limit lines

Allows you to turn the chart’s grid limit lines (items 13 & 19) on or off. If“on”, you can have the grid lines appear as solid or dots.

Off
Ctrl+F1
Solid Ctrl+F2
Dots Ctrl+F3

Timestamp

Allows you to select an Absolute or Relative style of timestamp.

Absolute Ctrl+F4
Relative Ctrl+F5

View

Toolbar

CV-22

ChartView

A 9 by Toolbar indicates the toolbar will be visible. The absence of the 9indicates the visible toolbar option is not chosen, and in this case will notappear on the Main Window. Use the mouse to select or de-select the toolbar
option.

988992

Software ReferenceView (continued)
Timestamps &Chartspeed

Statusbar

A 9 by Timestamps & Chartspeed indicates the options are selectable andvisible. The absence of the 9 indicates the timestamp/chartspeed option is notchosen, and therefor not visible on the Main Window. Use the mouse to selector de-select this option.
A 9 by Statusbar indicates the Status Message Box and Status LEDs arevisible (items 22 and 24, page CV-5). The absence of the 9 indicates thestatus bar will not be visible on the Main Window. Use the mouse to select orde-select this option.

Options

Option Settings includes three separate dialog boxes, accessible by tabs, as
indicated in the following screen captures.
ChartsRestricts Scroll Speed to Eliminate Aliasing
It is possible for chart displays to exhibit aliasing when using ChartScan,
NetScan, or MultiScan devices. The aliasing effect can be eliminated fromthe display by enabling the “Restrict scroll speed to actual scan rate” feature.
This reduces the scroll speed to a range that results in non-aliased displays.
SystemDetermines Communication Timeout in Seconds andCommunications Timeout Panel
The system communications timeout determines how long the software will
wait [in seconds] before declaring a detected communications error. You
can enter a number for “retries.”
AC Line Frequency
Radio buttons provide a choice of 60 Hz or 50 Hz. The default is 60 Hz.
The frequency indicated, i.e., 50 Hz or 60 Hz needs to agree with thefrequency of the power supply to your scan unit.
Under the “System” tab of the View Menu’s Option Settings, thefrequency indicated, i.e., 50 Hz or 60 Hz, needs to agree with thefrequency of the power supply to your scan unit.
Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-23

Acquisition

Auto Re-Arm Trigger and Overwrite Options
Automatic Keyboard Trigger on Auto Re-Arm
This feature works in conjunction with Keyboard Triggering when Auto ReArm is being used. For details regarding Auto Re-Arm, see page cv-46.
If the option is disabled, acquisition data is saved to disk, and the device
automatically re-arms. ChartView displays the Trigger dialog box and waits forthe trigger button to be pressed by the user before beginning the next
acquisition.
If the option is enabled, the trigger dialog box is not displayed and the trigger is
automatically sent to the acquisition device. The automatic trigger may bedelayed by up to 2 seconds (after the previous acquisition has finished).
Ask to overwrite existing data files
If this feature is checked existing data files will not be automatically written
over. Instead, you will be asked via prompt if you want to write over the
existing file.

AcquireCV-24

Arm Acquisition(Ctrl + T)

Arms the data acquisition device in preparation of receiving a trigger.

Disarm…
(Ctrl + Y)

Disarms the data acquisition device and discontinues the acquisition of data.

Acquisition Status...

Displays the condition of a data acquisition.

Start All Meters

Starts all meters. Does not affect charts.

Stop All Meters

Stops all meters. Does not affect charts.

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceData

Upload Data
DuringAcquisition

Enables ChartView to retrieve scans from device memory as data becomes available. The
acquisition is active.

(automatic control)

Abort Upload

Aborts the upload. Stops ChartView’s transfer of data from the instrument to disk.

(Ctrl + J)(manual control)

Upload Scans
Until Done

This feature is used in cases where an instrument has already scanned data (or is currently
scanning data) while not connected to a computer, i.e., ChartView was not being used for realtime data collection. Later, when a computer is connected to the instrument, the “Upload Scans
Until Done” selection enables ChartView to access the device memory, and then upload thedata. The upload will continue until all of the scanned data has been obtained by ChartView.

Window

Bar Graph Meters

Selecting Bar Graph Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Bar
Graph window. This window displays several channels in bar graph format. To activate thedisplay, select the Start button in the meter toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an
active (On) channel. You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time. (See page CV32).

Analog Meters

Selecting Analog Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Analog
Meters window. This window displays several channels in a dial/gage format. To activate thedisplay, select the Start button in the meter toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an
active (On) channel. You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time. (See page CV-33).

Digital Meters

Selecting Digital Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Digital
Meters window to display several channels in numeric format. To activate the display, selectthe Start button from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On)channel. You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time. (See page CV-34).

View File Data

If a data file exists, this selection will bring up an independent view program, if installed.
eZ-PostView is an example of a view application. If you have more than one view application
installed, you can select the one you want to access via the File Converter Preferences dialog
box. The Converter Preferences dialog is opened from the Data Destination dialog box, as
discussed on page CV-43.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-25

Convert ExistingFiles

You may find that you need to convert data files from one format to another to make them
acceptable for viewing in your intended view application. If so, you can use the Convert
Existing Files selection to bring up a window similar to the following. From the window you
can search for a file, select it, then convert it from its present format to another. Clicking the<Format> button (lower right section of the window) brings up a list of all available formats
to which the selected file can be converted to. Once the desired formats have been selected,
simply click the <Convert> button.

Selecting a File for Conversion

Device …

Interface ¾

Setup IEEE 488

The IEEE 488 Setup dialog box appears. Valid addresses are 0 to 30. DIP switch settingsmust agree with this setup. For ChartScan, an IEEE 488 interface card is required for useof IEEE 488 interface. NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 interface.
When using ChartView with IEEE 488 applications, you must make use of an IOtech
Driver 488 driver. In addition, the device must be configured in the Driver 488 and be
named WAVE.
NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 interface.

CV-26

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceSetupRS-232The RS-232 Setup dialog box appears. If “Yes” is chosen for modem, the RS-232 Setup
window changes, allowing you to cancel your call waiting service by entering your cancellation
code and your modem phone number. The Cancel Code pull-down list provides three common
code options. Instead of using a code from the list, you can type in the desired code. Note thatthe device DIP switch settings must match those entered in the text boxes.

Comm Port

1-16

Baud Rate

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

ParityNone, Odd, or Even

Handshaking

None or RTS/CTS

Modem

No or Yes

Cancel Codes
for Call Waiting*70, 70#, 1170, or type in other acceptable code

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-27

Setup Network

Setup Network is a purchased option that provides ameans of configuring systems that have a Net232
Ethernet/RS-232 Converter. For details regarding
the Net232 refer to the Net232 User’s Guide (p/n1037-0901). A copy of the guide is shipped with theNet323 device.
Upon selecting “Setup Network” the Network
Interface Configuration dialog box will appear(following figure), but only if the option has beenauthorized.

Network Interface Configuration
Dialog Box

If no authorization code was previously entered, an “Internet Options” message will appear as
in the upper image of the following figure. Clicking the <Enter Code> button on thismessage box brings up the “Authorization” box (following figure, lower image).
After entering C3523DFA6C0A and clicking the <Apply Code> button you will be able toaccess the Network Interface Configuration dialog box. From that box you can configure thescan device for the Ethernet.

Message and Authorization Code Boxes

Reference Note: For details regarding the Net232, refer to the Net232 User’s
Guide (p/n 1037-0901). A copy of the guide is shipped with the Net323
Ethernet/RS-232 Converter.
Simulated Instrument

CV-28

ChartView

The program will generate data from a simulated instrument with no actual hardware
concerns.

988992

Software ReferenceDevice …

Status ¾

Instrument
Inventory

Accesses the System Inventory dialog box.

System Inventory Dialog Box
AlarmsStatusBrings up selection list for Status, Log configuration, and Log Enable
Brings up the Alarm Status dialog box, which shows thecurrent state of each alarm. The alarm state appears as
either a “1” or “0”, the “1” being digital High, and the “0”being digital Low (0). A one-for-one correlation between
the alarm number and channel can only occur if eachchannel of a 32 channel [or less] system is assigned to a
dedicated alarm number.
Alarm Status Dialog Box

Log configuration

Alarm logging is a feature of ChartView Plus only. Alarm Logging allows you to monitor the
Alarm states of the instrument, and save selected information to a file whenever any of the stateschange.
Alarm logging is implemented by periodically polling the instrument; thetime interval between polls is about one second. With this in mind, beaware any event that could trigger an alarm [lasting one second or less],
could be missed and not logged.

Alarm Log Configuration Dialog Box

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-29

From the Alarm configuration dialog box, you can define the information that will be saved in thelog file. Options include the Time and Date when the state change occurred, the Alarm number, theChannel(s) that tripped the alarm along with the current reading, and the state of the alarm itself or
all alarms, either 1 or 0. Additionally you can define the character that is used to separate theinformation in the file. This is useful if you want to read the file into a program that presents theinformation in a tabular format, such as Microsoft Excel.
By using combinations of option settings you can define how the alarm log file is filled. If you
choose not to save Alarm ID's (Alarm numbers) in combination with saving All Alarm States, your
Alarm file will be saved with one line of text each time an Alarm state change is detected during
polling. The line will contain the optional Time and Date and 32 digits, one for each alarm, set toeither 0 or 1. The left most digit is Alarm one and the rightmost is Alarm 32. Note that you cannot
choose to save channel information if you have not checked the Alarm ID's checkbox.
The following example shows what the Alarm log entries look like if this configuration is selected:
1:21:10 PM 01/29/03
1:21:11 PM 01/29/03
1:21:13 PM 01/29/03
1:21:14 PM 01/29/03

00000000000000000000000000000000
01000000000000000000000000000000
11000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000

If you choose to log Alarm ID's and multiple Alarm state changes are detected during a single poll,
multiple lines of text will be saved in the log file; one for each alarm that had a state change. By
examining the optional Time and Date information you can identify which lines in the Alarm log areassociated with Alarms that were detected during a specific polling event. If you have Alarm ID's
enabled, you can also choose to log Channel information. The channel information contains the channel
label and the current reading associated with the channel. The following example shows what the alarm
log entries look like if this configuration is selected:
1:39:46 PM 01/29/03
1:39:46 PM 01/29/03
1:40:11 PM 01/29/03
1:40:12 PM 01/29/03
1:40:27 PM 01/29/03
1:41:10 PM 01/29/03
Log Enable(Ctrl+A)

Instrument Error
StatusAlarm-01
Alarm-02
Alarm-01
Alarm-01
Alarm-01
Alarm-01(CH1-68.72) 1(CH3-68.54) 1(CH1-73.22) 0(CH1-86.36) 1(CH1-71.42) 0(CH1-69.98)(CH2-71.24) 0

Once an alarm log file exists, log enable can be used to activate the logging process; or todisable an active log. A checkmark (9) preceding Log Enable indicates that the log is active.
No checkmark present indicates the alarm log has not been enabled.

Brings up the Device Error Status dialog box.
This box lists existing error types, including
invalid command and channel configuration
errors.

Device Error Status Dialog Box

CV-30

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceInstrument
Realtime Clock

Brings up the Device System Time dialog box.
You can adjust the time and date settings fromthis box.

Device System Time Dialog Box
Calibration

Choosing this selection activates a calibration routine for a connected instrument. Thisroutine replaces an earlier independent application known as ScanCal. Refer to the
Calibration chapter for details.

Setup

Channels & Alarms
Ctrl+L

Accesses the Setup Window for configuring channels and alarms. From the channels &alarms dialog box, you can select the Acquisition Setup and Data Destination dialog
boxes.

Acquisition
Ctrl+C

Accesses the Acquisition Setup dialog box. From the Acquisition Setup box, you canselect the Channels & Alarms dialog box, as well as the Data Destination dialog box.

Data Destination

Accesses the Setup Window for assigning the Data Destination and provides a means ofconfiguring the Auto Re-Arm feature (see page CV-46). From the Data Destination
dialog box you can directly access the Acquisition Setup and the Channels & Alarms
dialog boxes.

Bar Graph, Analog, and Digital Meters
This section pertains to channel data display screens (windows, or dialog boxes) other than the main
chart screen (ChartView’s main window).
After a brief discussion and illustration of each meter type, commonalties to these three types ofmeters are presented. These common areas include: Toolbars, Pull-Down Menus, and two special
Pop-Up Menus, one for configuring the meters, and the other for replacing a represented channel withanother.

Software Reference

Note:

The acquisition-to-disk has a higher priority then the updating of Charts, Meters, and theReading column. Therefore, data is displayed as soon as the acquisition task is satisfied. As
the scan rate is increased, the acquisition-to-disk task will take up more processor (CPU) time
and the displaying of data will be updated as time allows. If you select linear conversion(mX + b) as the units for channel configuration you should expect a further impact on real time
display performance. The mX + b conversion is discussed in the section, Channel and Alarm
Setup Dialog Box.

Note:

The meter channels selected are independent of the group chart assignments.

988992ChartView , CV-31

Bar Graph Meters
Selecting Bar Graph Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Bar Graphwindow. This window displays several channels in bar graph format. To activate the display, selectthe Start button from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On) channel. You
can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time.

Bargraph Meters, Shown with 3 Meters Selected for Viewing

Note 1: Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop-up
menu. A single click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration pop-up
menu (item H). Both of these pop-up menus are discussed in the section, Meters Configuration
Menu.
The items in this window are as follows:

A - Start
C - Reset Peak Hold
E - Print
G - Number of Meters
B - Stop
D - Stay On Top
F - Rows x Columns
H - Configuration Pop-Up Menu
These items are discussed in more detail, following the description of Digital Meters.

Configuration Note:…. for Bar Graph Meters
For Bar Graph Meters, configure the meter settings by first clicking the right mouse button
anywhere within the meter display area. A pop-up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure
the meter in regard to scale, limits, channel selection, adding peak hold indicators, etc. Refer to thesection entitled Meters Configuration Menu for more detail.

CV-32

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceAnalog Meters
Selecting Analog Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Analog Meters
window. This window displays several channels in a dial/gage format. To activate the display, selectthe Start button from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On) channel. You
can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time.

Analog Meters, Shown with 4 Meters Selected for Viewing
Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop-up
menu (not shown). A single-click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up aconfiguration pop-up menu (see Bar Graph Meters figure, item H). Both of these pop-up menus are
discussed in the section, Meters Configuration Menu.
Note that Meter #3 (CH3) in the above figure shows Peak Indicators near the pointer, as well as atrend indicator in the upper right hand corner of the meter.
The items in this window are as follows:
A- Start
B- StopC - Reset Peak Hold
D - Stay On Top

E - Print
F - Rows x Columns

G - Number of Meters
H - Configuration Pop-Up Menu

These items are discussed in more detail, following the description of the Digital Meters.

Configuration Note:…. for Analog Meters
For Analog Meters, configure the meter settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere
within the meter display area. A pop-up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meterin regard to scale, limits, channel selection, adding peak hold indicators, etc. Refer to the section
entitled Meters Configuration Menu for more detail.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-33

Digital Meters
Selecting Digital Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Digital Meters
window to display several channels in numeric format. To activate the display, select the Start button
from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On) channel. You can select toview up to 32 meters at a given time.

Digital Meters, Shown with 6 Meters Selected for Viewing

Note: Although the Digital Meters instrument is capable of displaying 6 decimal places, there is not 6
place accuracy in the readings. Due to transducer and transient noises, the accuracy of voltage
readings is ± 0.02%. Temperature accuracy varies, depending on thermocouple type; with type
J having ± 0.5°C for a range of -100°C to +760°C. For your application, please refer tospecifications of the signal conditioning card(s) used, as well as the thermocouple type, and thedata acquisition instrument used (TempScan, MultiScan, or ChartScan).

Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop-up
menu (not shown). A single-click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up aconfiguration pop-up menu (see Bar Graph Meters figure, item H). Both of these pop-up menus are
discussed in the section, Meters Configuration Menu. Note that each of the above channels shows atrend indicator on the left side of the meter.
The items in this window are as follows:
A - Start
B - StopC - N/AD - Stay On Top

E - Print
F - Rows x Columns

G - Number of Meters
H - Configuration Pop-Up Menu

Toolbar items A through G are discussed in more detail in the following section, Meter Toolbars.
Item H is discussed in the subsequent section, Meters Configuration Menu.

…. For Digital Meters

Configuration Note:

Configure the Digital Meters settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within thedigital meter display area. A pop-up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter inregard to scale, limits, channel selection, etc. Refer to the section, Configure Meter Settings formore detail.

CV-34

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceMeter Toolbars
The toolbars for the three types of meters are identical, with exception that the Digital Meters toolbar
does not have a Reset Peak Hold button (item C in the following figure).

Meters Toolbar Buttons
Item

Name

FunctionA

Start

Starts meters.

B

Stop

Stops meters.

C

Reset Peak Hold
Indicator

Resets the floating markers. Upon reset, the markers will instantly
adjust to indicate the highest and lowest values reached since the timeof the reset. This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters.

D

Stay On Top(Push pin)Locks or unlocks the meter window on top of other windows.

E

Print

Sends the meter(s) display image to connected printer.

F

Rows x Columns

Opens a small menu with “row x column” arrangement options. Example:
When the number of meters is 6 the grid options will be: 6x1, 3x2, 2x3, and2x4 with the first number being the number of rows. If you then select 3x2,
you will have 3 rows of meters with 2 meters per row.

G

Number of Meters

Specifies the number of meters to appear on the screen.
A maximum number of 32 meters can be selected.

Meter Pull-Down Menus
The meters windows each have a Control and View pull-down menu, as indicated by the following
figure. The functions of these menus can also be implemented by using the toolbar buttons.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-35

Meters Configuration Menu
A meters configuration menu (lower left corner of figure) will appear when you place the mousepointer over a meter and click the right-hand mouse button. The menu allows you to access various
dialog boxes for changing parameters for an individual meter, or simultaneously for a group of meters.
The steps for configuring a meter are detailed below.
Note: The Show Peak Hold Indicator / Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for
Digital Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters.

Meter Configuration Menu and Related Dialog Boxes

Configuring a Meter
1.
2.
3.

Bring up the desired meter group (Bar Graph, Analog, or Digital).
Place the mouse cursor over the meter you desire to reconfigure.
Click on the right mouse button. A Meters Configuration Menu, similar to that in the above figure,will appear.
Note: The Show Peak Hold Indicator / Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for
Digital Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters.

4.

Select the desired option from the meter configuration menu.

5.

If a dialog box is required, for example, to change a limit, simply enter in the new value in theappropriate parameter box and press “Apply” or “OK.” Pressing “Apply” implements your changes,
but keeps the dialog box open, allowing you to make additional changes. Pressing “OK” implements
your changes and closes the dialog box.
The following table and the preceding figure serve as a quick reference to meters configuration.

CV-36

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceConfigure Meter Settings, Function Descriptions
Function

Description

1

Select Channel

Select a new channel for display. The selected channel will replace the one currently seen in
the meter. Note, double-clicking the left mouse button in the meter region will also bring up
a dialog box that allows you to select a new channel.

2

Set Scale

Set the high and low points of the scale, as well as define the decimal place format.

3

Show Peak Hold
Indicator

Places high and low uni-directional floating markers on the scale to indicate the highest andlowest values reached up to the present time. This feature does not apply to the Digital
Meters selection.

Reset Peak Hold
Indicator

Resets the floating markers. Upon reset, the markers will instantly adjust to indicate thehighest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset. This feature does not apply to
the Digital Meters selection.

4

Show Trend
Indicator

Displays a pointer to indicate the direction of the trend. Note, during rapid meter fluctuations
the increase and decrease pointers will appear to blink simultaneously.

5

Set Limits

Provides a way of establishing high and low limit set-points.

Show Limits

Displays limits in color (red for high, blue for low). The color is applied to scale regions >the set limit values. For Digital Meters, the limits are indicated by red numbers and an upper
red bar for hitting or exceeding the high limit; and blue numbers and a lower blue bar whenreaching or exceeding the low limit.

Properties

Allows setting and showing limits, as well as opening the Scale dialog box.

6

You can access a different dialog box from the one initially selected. For example, from the Set Scaledialog box you can select Limits to access the Set Limits/Show Limits display, as well as select“Misc.” to “Show Trend Indicator” and “Show Peak Hold Indicators.” You can use the Simulated
Instrument mode to familiarize yourself with various meter configuration options.

Setup Window
The Setup Window is used to configure channels, setup acquisition parameters, and assign data
destinations, and configure the Auto Re-Arm feature. The Setup Window contains three tabs: Channeland Alarm Setup, Acquisition Setup, and Data Destination. Once in the Setup window you can accessan inactive dialog box by clicking on its related tab. The three tabs remain visible; regardless of which
dialog box is active.
Access the Setup window using one of the following methods:•

Use the Setup pull-down menu (on ChartView’s main window) and select the desired
dialog box (Channel and Alarm Setup, Acquisition Setup, or Data Destination)•

Double-click the Channel Configuration button (item 8, main window figure), then clickon the appropriate dialog box tab

Channel & Alarm Setup Dialog Box
The Channel and Alarm Setup dialog box consists primarily of a configuration spreadsheet. The
dialog box allows you to configure the input channels, and displays them. Each row shows a single
channel and its configuration. The number of rows may vary (depending on the number of channels
present in your acquisition system). Four of the columns (On, Type, Label, and Units) allow blocks
of cells to be selected and altered at the same time. Clicking on one of these column headers selects
the entire column.
When a cell is selected, the message box reveals a note, and often a related pull-down list. In thefollowing figure, the cell for channel “Type” has been selected. This caused the “CHOOSE TYPE->”message to appear, along with the type pull-down menu. Depending on the column, you can makechanges to the information contained in the cell by either of the following methods:••••
Software Reference

double-clicking the cell with the mouse
highlighting the cell and typing in the new value or label
selecting from a list
using copy (Ctrl+C) and paste (Ctrl+V) functions
988992ChartView , CV-37

Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box
Channel and Alarm Setup, Button Descriptions(1) – Turn On All Channels (Alt + N)(2) – Turn Off All Channels Not Assigned to Charts (Alt + F)(3) – Turn On/Off Channel Readings (Alt + R)(4) – Print Entire Channel and Alarm Setup (Alt + P)
The following table indicates message and pull-down menu aspects of the Channel and Alarm Setup
Dialog Box.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

ColumnChannel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box
Message and Pull-Down List Aspects
MessagePull-Down List*

CH
On
Reading
Type
Label
Units
Low
High
Hyst
Alarm#N/A
ENABLE or DISABLE
N/A
CHOOSE TYPE->ENTER LABEL (MAX = 8 LETTER)
CHOOSE UNITS->ENTER DESIRED LOW LIMITENTER DESIRED HIGH LIMITENTER DESIRED HYSTERESISSELECT AN ALARM#

No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes

*A “Yes” indicates the item has an associated pull-down list from which aselection can be made.

The pull-down list selection or copy/paste process are useful for making multiple channel
configuration changes within a column. You may double-click within a cell to make your way
through all the possible selections. The selections are repetitive; in other words, you will eventuallyadvance to the same selection with which you started.
The following text provides more detail regarding the channel and alarm configuration parameters.
The number preceding the text refers to the column number with “1” being the left-hand column and“10” being the right-hand column of the Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box.

CV-38

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceChannel Configuration Columns
1) Channel (CH) ⎯ This column serves only as a channel number indicator. The channel number cannot
be changed from this column.
2) On ⎯ The On column allows you to enable a channel for data collection. When a cell or block of cells inthis column is selected, a selection box will appear that allows “On” to enable or “Off” to disable thechannel. Double-clicking a cell in this column toggles the channel’s enable status. Clicking the Make All
Channels Active button enables (turns all channels “on”). Clicking on the Make All Channels Inactive
button disables all channels (turns them “off”), with the exception that channels assigned to charts can only
be turned off from the display configuration setup.
3) Reading ⎯ The reading column displays the scanning device input readings. The column is activatedand deactivated by clicking the <Turn On/Off Channel Readings> button (button # 3 in the preceding
figure). Unless you are using the simulated instrument mode, the column’s values are real-time channel
values from the instrument. This column will update the readings as fast as the computer will allow.
Note: The spreadsheet cannot be altered while the channel Readings column is enabled.
4) Type ⎯ A block of cells in this column can be selected for convenience of single type selection.
Double-clicking a cell will select the next available type.
5) Label ⎯ The Label column identifies the input channel by descriptive name. The label is used whenselecting a channel in the trigger and chart selection lists. The label column automatically uses the channel
number as a default. You can change the label to any alphanumeric designation not exceeding eightcharacters. Each label used must be unique (specific) to its designated channel.
6) Units ⎯ Cells in the Units column are dependent on the Type selected and automatically change when thetype is changed. An example is that of temperature units being replaced by volts units when changing
from a thermocouple type to a volts type.
If the channel is configured for Temperature, the units automatically change to °C (default); at this point,
you have the option of selecting a different engineering temperature unit (°F, °K, °and R). Note that the
mX+b equation, discussed in the following text, is typically not used for temperature readings, sincetemperature data will be linear. However, you can use the equation in temperature applications, forexample: setting b to -32 in order to watch deviations from freezing point when temperature is in °F.
In addition, with ChartView Plus you can subtract a reference channel from the mX+b equation to obtain atemperature differential, as indicated in the following example.
Example:A heated room has 2 thermocouples (T1 for CH1 and T2 for CH2); with T1 being in the center of the room
and T2 positioned at an outer wall. If the outer wall is monitored to ensure a temperature within ±2°F (ofthe temperature indicated by thermocouple T1), then CH1 can be used as a reference channel such that its
value will be subtracted from the actual value for channel 2. Assume the central thermocouple is reading
90.5°F and the outer thermocouple (for CH2) is reading 89.0°F. In this case, we can use the equation sochannel 2’s charted reading will not be of the actual temperature, but will be the differential between CH1
and CH2, e.g.:y = (mX + b) - ref. chan; where:
y = Channel 2’s charted value (a temperature
differential)
m=1
b=0
X = CH2
ref. Chan. = CH1
Channel 2’s charted value = (1 x CH2 + 0) - CH1
Channel 2’s charted value = (1 x 89.0°F + 0) - 90.5°F

Channel 2’s charted value = -1.5°F

Note: The reference channel feature is only available with ChartView Plus.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-39

Note: When using a channel as a reference channel, remember that lower numbered channels are calculated
ahead of higher numbered channels, e.g., CH1 is calculated ahead of CH2. This makes a difference
when subtracting a reference channel in regard to the time aspect of the reference value.
If the channel is configured for Volts, the units automatically change to V; at this point, you have theoption of selecting the millivolt unit (mV). The user can also change each channel to apply a linear
equation (mX+b) to the data. When the mX+b option is selected the Configure Engineering Units dialog
box is displayed. You are prompted to define “m” and “b” and the engineering units label; as well as which
standard units the mX+b equation should be applied to. The engineering units chosen will be displayed in
the “Units” column, and the “mX+b” equation will be applied to the reading from the device before thereading is displayed or written to disk.
The mX+b option is convenient for obtaining a value that has a linear relation to a channel reading.
X is the scanned voltage value read back from the acquisition device
m is [but not limited to] a proportionality constant or gain factor, but not zero.
b is the offset value (the value of the calculated reading when the scanned value is “zero”).

Alarm Configuration Columns
1)
2)
3)
4)

Low Limit ⎯ Set alarm low limit.
High Limit ⎯ Set alarm high limit.
Hysteresis ⎯ A hysteresis value can be set for each channel to avoid a “chatter” problem.
Alarm # ⎯ You can assign one alarm number (1 to 32) to a channel. Any number of channels can be
assigned to the same alarm number. A given digital output will be set “true” (1) if at least one of thecommon channels (assigned to a single alarm) enters an alarm state.

CV-40

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceAcquisition Setup Dialog Box
The information entered in the Acquisition Setup dialog box is used by the Arm Acquisition command
to set up the acquisition of data to disk. When the trigger is satisfied, the scans are collected at the
selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file.
The Acquisition Setup dialog box can be accessed in one of three ways: a) clicking on the Channel
Configuration button (item 8 in Main Window figure), b) clicking on the Acquisition Setup tab fromthe Channels or Data Destination dialog boxes, c) using the Setup pull-down menu and selecting
Acquisition.
ChartScan, NetScan, and MultiScan have two modes of data acquisition, these are:••Normal mode
High-speed, single-channel mode (burst mode)

The mode is selected from the lower left-hand portion of the dialog box. The following figure
represents a screen capture with normal mode selected.

Acquisition Setup Dialog Box, Normal Mode

The following figure depicts components of an acquisition. The Trigger and Stop Points represent theentries described under the Event Configuration selection in the table on the following page.

In the “High-speed, single-channel” mode the Scan Intervals parameters section is replaced with a
High-Speed Setup parameters section with boxes for selection of Channel and Scan Rate, as indicatedin the figure under the heading, Burst Mode, Operational Issues on page CV-43.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-41

In the High-speed, single-channel (burst mode), all ChartView display functions areintentionally disabled. Data acquisition and storage to disk are the only services that remainfunctional. When you select the High-speed, single channel mode, a Warning dialog box
appears with this information, providing you with the opportunity to cancel if desired.

Reference Note: Burst mode operational constraints are discussed in greater detail on page CV-43.

Acquisition Setup
Parameter
Event Configuration

Options
Trigger: Set a trigger scan in the Acquisition by using one of the following:
Keyboard - Use Console Trigger dialog box to start trigger scan.
Note: If the Keyboard Trigger is selected the use of Pre-trigger is disabled.
External TTL - Use an external signal to start the trigger scan.
Channel Value - Use specified value and or hysterisis of a given channel. Select if thetrigger is to occur “above” or “below” the specified values.
Alarm - Use an Alarm value to start the trigger scan.
Absolute Time - Use a time of day to start the trigger scan.
Note: If Absolute Time is selected, the use of Auto Re-Arm is disabled.

Acquisition
Parameters

Stop:

Set a stop scan in the Acquisition by using one of the above selections or Count (asspecified below). Keyboard isn’t applicable. If a MultiScan, ChartScan, or NetScan isconnected and High-Speed Single-Channel (Burst Mode) is selected, then “Count fromtrigger” is the only Stop available for the event configuration.

Count:

Specify a number of scans to be read before a stop scan is set.

Scan Counts:

Specify the number of scans in an acquisition
Pre-trigger
Post Stop
Average weight: Average weight can be specified only when in the Normal Mode. The value forthe average weight determines the number of samples to be averaged when in
Normal Mode. Values of 1, 2, 4, and 8 are for high-speed multiple channel
applications for thermocouples and DC voltages where noise filtering is not an
issue.
Values of 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 are recommended for AC noise rejection.
Scan Intervals: Time between scans (frequency of scans)
Pre-trigger and Post Stop
Post-trigger
Use one IntervalHigh Speed Setup:
Allows for channel and scan rate entries for high-speed, single channel mode.

Note: These parameters cannot be altered while an acquisition is in progress.
Note: If Normal Mode is selected, channels assigned to a chart must be (and will be) enabled in the Acquisition.

CV-42

ChartView

988992

Software Reference

The assigned channels will be “ON” in the
Channel Configuration portion of the
Channel and Alarm Setup spreadsheet andcan not be turned off while assigned to achart. However; additional channels (notassigned to charts) can still be enabled anddisabled from the Channel and Alarm Setup
sheet.
Example. In the figure to the left:(a) Channel 1 and Channel 2 can not be
turned “OFF.” Each is assigned to a chart.
(b) Both Channel 3 and Channel 4 can beturned “OFF.” Neither is assigned to a chart.
(c) An attempt to remove a chart-assigned
channel will result in a message box similar
to that in the figure.
Normal Mode, CH1 and CH2 Assigned to a Chart

Burst Mode, Operational Issues

Acquisition Setup Dialog Box, High-Speed, Single-Channel Mode
The Burst Mode, also referred to as High-speed, single-channel mode, is selected with a radio-button located on
the lower left of the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box. The following bulleted issues apply to Burst Mode operations.
•

When in the High-speed, single-channel (burst mode), all ChartView display functions are intentionallydisabled. Data acquisition and storage to disk are the only services that remain functional. When you
select the High-speed, single channel mode, a Warning message box appears, as indicated in thefollowing figure.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-43

This Warning Appears Prior to Enabling the Burst Mode•

The Burst Mode channel will be the only channel enabled in the instrument. This is regardless of the
ON/OFF status indicated on the Channel and Alarm Setup spreadsheet (located on the Setup Channel
Types, Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Window).

•

When using Burst Mode, data saved to disk can still be viewed in a view application. However, thechart setup will only allow you to select the single channel (previously selected in ChartView as thehigh-speed Burst Mode channel).
Example: If Channel 4 is selected as the High-Speed Setup Channel (in ChartView’s Acquisition Setup),and data is acquired and saved to disk, then the only channel that can be selected for chart
display is Channel 4.

•

When you switch operation from Burst Mode, back to Normal Mode…
a) channels that were assigned to Charts will automatically re-enable, i.e., returned to an ON state.
b) channels that were not assigned to Charts, but were set to ON prior to selecting Burst Mode, will not
return to the ON state automatically.
c) the channel that was selected for Burst Mode will remain in the ON state, unless turned off by theuser.

Measuring AC Voltage, or AC RMS Voltage
Introduction
When someone talks about measuring AC voltage, they are usually talking about measuring“AC RMS,” which is the effective periodic value of the voltage for one full cycle. RMS (Root Mean
Square) is the square root of the average of the squares of the signal being measured.
ChartScan, MultiScan and NetScan can use multiple channels to measure AC RMS voltages; but are
restricted to the use of one channel when measure actual AC voltage at 60 cycles. The following
questions and answers should help to clarify this point.

Question 1: Can I measure multiple channels of 60 cycle waveforms with ChartScan, MultiScan, or
NetScan?
Answer:CV-44

ChartView

No. Measuring a 60 cycle (or 50 cycle) waveform with ChartScan, MultiScan, or
NetScan requires the use of High-speed, single-channel Burst Mode. While in thismode, only one channel can be measured. See related questions 2 and 3.

988992

Software ReferenceQuestion 2: How do I measure a 60 cycle waveform using just one channel?
Answer:To measure AC, you must sample at a rate fast enough to see every cycle line.
Multiplying the number of cycles by 10 will provide an adequate sampling rate. For
example: for 60 Hz you should sample at 600 samples/sec; and for 50 Hz you should
sample at 500 samples/sec.
To obtain these sample rates [with ChartScan, MultiScan, or NetScan], use theHigh-speed, single-channel (Burst Mode).

Question 3: Can I measure multiple channels of 60 cycle “AC RMS” voltage with ChartScan,
MultiScan, or NetScan?
Answer:Yes, providing the amplitude of the signals falls within the range of the card. For
example, if your amplitude was 120V you would need to use a high voltage signalconditioning card. Note that the CSN14/HV/S card has a high range of ±250V. To
measure multiple channels of 60 cycle AC RMS (or 50 Hz, AC RMS in Europe),
perform the steps in the following section, Measuring AC RMS.

Measuring AC RMS
The following steps pertain to measuring AC RMS voltage.
1.

Determine the peak voltage of the input signal.

2.

Based on the value from step 1, select the appropriate VAC option. This is done in ChartView’s
Channel and Alarm Setup window (see following figure).

Choosing A Voltage Type** Note: The range of ±250Vwas obtained with a CSN14/HV/S card.
3. In the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box, set the Average Weight to “32.”Setting Average Weight to 32(in the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box)
4. Run the acquisition as normal.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-45

Data Destination Dialog Box
The Data Destination dialog box can be accessed from the Setup Channel Types, Alarms, andAcquisition Parameters screen (following figure) by selecting the Data Destination tab, or by
selecting Data Destination from the Setup pull-down menu. The box contains two panels. The upper
panel is labeled Data Destination. The lower panel is labeled Binary data options and selected fileformats.
Data Destination
The Data Destination portion of the box is used to assign a Data File Name and a Base Directory
location; i.e., the location of the new data file(s). The panel includes an Auto Re-Arm section.

Destination Dialog Box
The Data Destination panel’s Auto Re-Arm feature allows for a large number of acquisitions to takeplace automatically, with each acquisition using the same configuration settings. When Auto Re-Arm
is selected, as soon as a trigger block is terminated the system immediately re-arms itself and waits forthe trigger condition to repeat itself, after which another acquisition begins.
There are three options regarding the use of Auto Re-Arm:•••

capture one trigger block (default, Auto Re-Arm disabled)
capture multiple trigger blocks in one file
capture multiple trigger blocks in indexed files
Three Options Pertaining to Auto Re-Arm

CV-46

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceWhy use Auto Re-Arm? You can use Auto Re-Arm as a convenient way to monitor and analyze specifictypes of trigger events. For example, if you set Channel 1 going above 30°C as a trigger, you canchoose to have 100 (or more) acquisitions to be initiated by the same trigger criteria (Channel 1 >30°C). Whether you select to capture the trigger blocks in one file, or each in a separate file, each of
the data acquisitions will occur automatically; and each will make use of your set configuration.
Disabling Auto Re-Arm To disable Auto Re-Arm, simply uncheck the Enable Auto Re-Arm selection.
The default setting of “Capture one trigger block” will then be in effect.

Note: The trigger event, trigger by absolute time, is not suitable for automatic re-arming. In thisinstance, the default of “Capture one trigger block” is automatically forced.
Binary Data Options and Selected File Formats
This panel allows you to select a combination of three different data stamps that you would like tohave included with the acquisition data. The possible stamps are:•••Time / Date Stamp
Alarm Stamp
Digital Input Stamp

The panel includes a <File Conversion Preferences> button. Clicking the button brings up a dialog
box similar to the following:

File Converter Preferences
The File Converter Preferences box provides a means of selecting the file format(s) that you want toconvert the data files to. The box offers choices in regard to whether you want a source data file to bedeleted upon the completion of a file conversion, and whether or not you want to allow existing files tobe overwritten without first prompting you that such an overwrite is about to take place.
In addition to selecting file formats, the File Converter Preferences box allows you to add timestamps
to ASCII Text Files and, on an unrelated note, to select a Data File Viewer. The view applications are
independent of ChartView and are installed separately. The application that is selected here is the onethat ChartView will attempt to access when you click the <View File Data> button from ChartView’s
main window toolbar.
Reference Note:
ez-View applications include eZ-PostView, eZ-TimeView, and eZ-FrequencyView. Usersof these applications should refer to the Post Acquisition Data Analysis User’s Guide
PDF. The document can be viewed directly from the data acquisition CD by using theCD’s <View PDFs> button.

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-47

Chart Setup Wizard
Introduction
Chart Setup Wizard is a feature of ChartView and ChartView Plus. The feature allows you to set up
your initial chart display configuration using an automated method, or manually create a new display
configuration. The following points are important in regard to the Chart Setup Wizard.
•

You can edit the chart display by accessing the Display Configuration Setup dialog box
from the Chart pull-down menu; or by clicking of the Chart Setup button in the main
window toolbar. This method does not use the Chart Setup Wizard and does not reset
your chart display configuration setup.

•

Activating the Chart Setup Wizard will reset your chart Display Configuration Setup.
It will not reset your Channel and Alarm configuration.

•

Chart Setup Wizard, as described in this text, covers the expanded setup applications
available with ChartView Plus. The basic ChartView program does not permit
overlapping channels or having more than 1 chart group.

•

Expanded applications (ChartView Plus) can be activated by use of a special code
available from the factory. Please consult your service representative for more detailed
information.

Activating the Chart Setup Wizard from the Chart pull-down menu will result in the following dialog
box and warning.

The Chart Setup Wizard window appears when you attempt to run ChartView for the very first time, as
well as when a configuration file does not exist. When a configuration file already exists, you caneasily access the Chart Setup Wizard by selecting Wizard in the Chart pull-down menu. It is importantto realize running the Chart Setup Wizard will result in a reset of your display setup; it will not,however, change your channel and alarm configuration (with the exception of new display channels
now enabled).
The chart setup determines how your ChartView Main Window will appear in regard to the following:•••number of chart groups available for viewing
number of charts shown for each selected groupthe number of overlapping channels in each chart (not to exceed 4)

You can choose to manually create a configuration, or have one created automatically. The automatic
setup method offers three choices: Simple, Moderate, and Advanced. Moderate and advanced are only
available with ChartView Plus.
Note:

CV-48

ChartView

You can use Chart Setup Wizard to quickly set up a large number of charts. You can thenfine-tune the layout manually via the Manual Chart Creation feature.

988992

Software ReferenceA Manual Chart Creation, Create Charts button allows you to bypass the Chart Setup Wizard and enter amanual mode. This option makes use of ChartView’s Display Configuration feature (discussed on page CV12). Manual chart creation allows you to vary the number of assigned channels per chart, as well as vary the
number of charts per group.

Chart Setup Wizard, Simple Mode

1

Chart Setup Wizard, Automatic Setup Options
Group Setup
Chart Setup
Channel Setup(for Chart Groups)
1 group only
Up to 16 charts
1 channel per chart
1 group only
Up to 16 charts
Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart

1

Up to 64 groups

Setup Type
SimpleModerate

Advanced

Up to 16 charts pergroup

Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart

1

Note : Moderate and Advanced modes of Automatic Chart Creation are only available with ChartView Plus. The
standard ChartView program allows for 1 chart group only, and does not permit overlapping channels.
2

Note : The Manual Chart Creation, Create Charts button (above figure) allows you to exit the Chart Setup Wizard andenter a manual create chart display mode.

Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard
The previous figure shows the Simple mode dialog box for Automatic Chart Creation. The following figures show theModerate and Advanced mode dialog boxes (available only with ChartView Plus).

Dialog Boxes for Moderate and Advanced Modes of Automatic Chart Creation, ChartView Plus Only

Software Reference

988992ChartView , CV-49

It is a simple task to create chart display configurations using the automatic method. The following
steps apply to this feature of Chart Setup Wizard.
1.

Select Wizard from the Chart pull-down menu of ChartView’s main window. The New
Display Setup dialog box appears.

2.

Click OK on the New Display Setup dialog box. The Wizard setup window appears.

3.

Select the desired mode tab (Simple, Moderate, or Advanced). Moderate and advanced
modes are only available with ChartView Plus.

4.

Use the pull-down arrows, or use the cursor and type in a new value to make selections
for the number of groups, charts, and channels as applicable.

5.

If you desire to start with a channel other than channel 1, use the pull-down arrow andselect the desired starting channel number.

6.

When your setup is complete, click on the Automatic Chart Creation, Create Charts
button. A percentage of completion bar will appear, followed by the Channel and Alarm
Setup box.

7.

Make appropriate configuration changes, if any are desired, including enabling additional
channels; then click on the OK button. After clicking OK, the Main Window appears
and you can begin running charts. The Channel and Alarm Setup section of this chapter
contains related information.

The channels in the setup you create will be automatically enabled and will appear in chart form on
ChartView’s Main Window. The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart (for ChartView Plus
applications), and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected. Only one group of charts canbe viewed at a time.
As mentioned earlier, you can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window.
Enabling additional channels allows you to acquire more data to disk; however, it will not change yourdisplay on ChartView’s Main Window. In other words, you can acquire data from channels you do
not monitor.

Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup
You can bypass Chart Setup Wizard by clicking on the Manual Chart Creation, Create Charts button
in Chart Setup Wizard’s main window. After selecting this option you will be using the Display
Configuration Setup dialog boxes to create a display from scratch, i.e., using a “clean slate” approach.
This is method is detailed with an example, in the section Manually Creating a Display, beginning on
page CV-15.

CV-50

ChartView

988992

Software ReferenceViewXL
Software Reference
Overview …… vxl-1
Program Requirements …… vxl-1
Installation of ViewXL Add-in …… vxl-1

Menu …… vxl-2
Toolbar …… vxl-3
Using the ViewXL Program API …… vxl-8
An Example Macro …… vxl-9
ViewXL API Definition …… vxl-11

Overview
ViewXL is a Microsoft Excel Add-In that provides setup and data acquisition for personal computers
running 32-bit versions of Microsoft Windows. The features of Excel and the selected data acquisition
server, for example, ChartView or DaqView, combine seamlessly to form a powerful data acquisition tool.
ViewXL:• Augments Microsoft Excel with data acquisition capability.
• Automatically converts data to engineering units.
• Allows multiple data acquisitions [obtained using auto-rearm] to beplaced into multiple worksheets.
• Can import data from previously acquired data files.
Once the ViewXL add-in is installed, a ViewXL toolbar and related menu appear in Excel. These provide
all configuration and data acquisition controls.
With ViewXL, you can obtain automated reports by taking advantage of the Software Components
concept. For example, you can embed an Excel spreadsheet object into a Word document. When the
spreadsheet object is activated, it gives you access to ViewXL. In this case, the Word document holds all
text, as well as an embedded Excel worksheet object. The Excel worksheet object holds raw and calculated
data and graphics.
Double-clicking on the Excel worksheet object in Word can access ViewXL, allowing the user toefficiently prepare a statistical report. This compound document allows you to collect, configure, analyze,
graph, and annotate data, with a just a few clicks of a mouse button.

Program Requirements
ViewXL requires the following software:•••

A data acquisition server application, such as 32-bit ChartView or DaqView, that can implement the
View-App Interface standard.
Microsoft Excel 2000 or later
32 bit Microsoft Windows Operating System (Windows 2000 or Windows XP)

Installation of ViewXL Add-in
ViewXL is a standard Microsoft Excel Add-in. It is installed by selecting the Excel Tools/Add-Ins menu
item. If ViewXL does not appear in the list of available add-ins, press the Browse... button, and then selectthe ViewXL.xla file. When the Add-In appears in the list, click the check-box next to ViewXL toenable the program.

989092457-0913 rev 3.0

Menu

ViewXL Menu
The ViewXL menu gives you access to all of the Add-Ins features. The first six menu items are alsoavailable from the ViewXL Toolbar.
Reference Note:
Refer to the Toolbar section, beginning on page vxl-3, for a description of the functions thatcan be accessed by both the Toolbar and the pull-down Menu.
Import Existing Files
Brings up the Import Files dialog box. Normally ViewXL gets data from an acquisition performed by theconnected data acquisition server application (e.g., ChartView or DaqView). This is an alternate way of
selecting data files for viewing in the Excel workbook.
Reference Note:
For detailed information, refer to page vxl-6, Import Files.

Options
Brings up the Options dialog box. The ViewXL options settings are made from the Options dialog box.
From there you can select, among other options, the desired data acquisition application.
Reference Note:
For detailed information, refer to page vxl-4, Options.

About
Brings up the About dialog box. This displays copyright and version information about the Add-In.
Help
Displays the Help File.

vxl-2

ViewXL989092

Software ReferenceToolbar
The ViewXL toolbar provides access to the Add-Ins most frequently used features. These features, and a
few others, are also available from the ViewXL Menu. The toolbar contain six buttons separated into twogroups. From left to right these are:
Buttons Used to Control the
Data Acquisition Server

Buttons Used to Control the
Data Display

ConfigureArm / Disarm
Load
Configuration File

ViewXL Toolbar

Display
Header Info
Use Data
Destination Cell
Set Data
Destination Cell

The first three buttons are used to control the data acquisition application [also referred to as “server.” Theremaining three are used to control the way data is displayed in the worksheets. The toolbar can be left
floating over the worksheet, as shown in the above figure, or docked along with the other Excel toolbars.
To dock the toolbar, simply drag it to the toolbar area of the Excel main window.
A description of each button function follows.
ConfigureThis button is used to launch the data acquisition application, such as ChartView or DaqView.
If a data acquisition application [server] has not been selected, a message will be displayed tothat effect. To choose a data acquisition server, select the ViewXL/Options menu item, thenselect an application from the list of available servers.
Arm / DisarmThis push-push button is used to arm or disarm the acquisition. If the acquisition application
has been set for manual trigger, pushing this button will initiate the trigger. When pushed, theArm button remains "depressed" until the acquisition finishes. Pushing the button again, during
the acquisition, halts it.

989092457-0913 rev 3.0

Load Configuration
When pushed, the Load Configuration dialog box appears with a list of configuration files thatare compatible with the running data acquisition application [server]. To load a new
configuration, select one of the files in the list, then press the <Load File> button.
Display Header
This push-push button instructs ViewXL to display [or hide] Header Information in theworksheet along with the acquisition data. Header Information includes Channel Labels,
Channel Units, and in some cases, the Source data file.
Use Data Destination
This push-push button instructs ViewXL to start loading [or stop loading] acquisition data andheader information into the worksheet, starting from the data destination cell that is the upper
left corner where the data will be placed.
Set Data Destination Cell
Pushing this button saves the position, of the currently selected cell, as the data destination
location where acquisition header and data information will be saved.

Load Configuration
The Load Configuration dialog box presents a list of
configuration files that are compatible with thecurrently running data acquisition application (suchas ChartView or DaqView).

Load Server Configuration File Dialog Box

Options
The Options dialog allows you select a data acquisition
server program, and choose how the Add-In performs
specific operations.

Data Acquisition Server
If a server program, such as ChartView or DaqView,
is running you can stop it by selecting the applicationfrom the Select pull-down list, and pressing the<Unload Server> button. After selecting a new server
program from the list, press the OK button to enable
the selection.
Before the ViewXL Add-In can control a dataacquisition application [server], you must select thedesired application from the list. The selected server
name will be saved when Excel is closed, and restored
the next time Excel is started. This is the default serverthat will be started when the Configure Toolbar button
is pressed, or Menu item is selected.
 Automatically start server when Excel opens.

When checked, this informs the Add-In that the default
data acquisition application [server] should be
automatically started when Excel is started. The
Configure button does not have to be pressed to start
the server.
ViewXL Options Dialog Box

vxl-4

ViewXL989092

Software ReferenceEnable Server file conversion.
This option enables the post acquisition file conversion for the specified format type, such as ASCII, and
DADISP. If the option is not checked, then the post acquisition file conversion process is disabled.

Display data after acquired.
If checked, the data acquired by the data acquisition application, such as ChartView or DaqView, is automaticallyread and displayed in Excel. Checked is the default setting for this option. Un-check this option if you want toacquire data without automatically loading it into Excel.

Delete server data files after reading into Excel.
Check this option if you want the Add-In to automatically delete the server data files after they have been read anddisplayed in Excel.

Clear spreadsheet cells when inserting data.
Check this option if you want ViewXL to automatically clear the worksheet before displaying new data.

Span worksheets beyond column:
Check this option if you want to control the number of columns of data that can be viewed in a single worksheet.
Example:You have an acquisition that contains 24 channels of data. Check the “Span worksheets beyond column”
option and then enter either '16', or the letter 'P' into the column entry field. ViewXL will clip the display
at column P, and then create an additional worksheet for the remaining channels.
When Spanning is enabled, the number of channels displayed on a worksheet, and the number ofworksheets created, will be determined by factors such as: (1) The number of channels in the acquisition,(2) The column specified, (3) The Data Destination settings, and (4) Whether or not Timestamps are
displayed. Scans of data [that span multiple worksheets] are placed in the same row on each sheet, alongwith timestamp information, if enabled.
Remove unused worksheets.
Check this option if you want ViewXL to automatically delete any worksheets that are not needed to display thecurrently Imported data files, or Server acquisition data

Timestamps
Enable Timestamps
If checked, the Add-In attempts to read timestamp information [from the data file] and add it to theworksheet. Timestamps are placed in the first column of the worksheet. All channels are moved to theright one column, to make room for the timestamps. If timestamps are not supported, they are notdisplayed in the worksheet. You can check if timestamps are supported in a particular file by selecting thefile in the "Import Files" dialog, and checking the Preview Info button. With timestamps enabled, you canselect the type of timestamp to be displayed.
(z) Display Absolute Time (if available).
If supported, Absolute timestamps are displayed in a Date / Time format. For example "01/24/02
10:33:20 AM". Since these timestamps only have a One Second resolution, they are not practicalfor data that was acquired at moderate to fast scan rates. Unless your scan rate is very slow, it isrecommended that you use Relative timestamps.
(z) Display Relative Timestamps.
Relative timestamps show the time, in seconds, of a scan relative to the trigger position. For
example, if you have an acquisition that has three pretrigger scans, and the pre and post trigger scanrates were 1000 scans / second, the timestamps for the first four scans would be -0.003, -0.002,-0.001 and 0.000 respectively. This indicates that the first scan was taken 3 ms prior to the trigger
point; the next scan 2 ms prior; and the next 1 ms prior. Scan number four was the trigger point so
its relative time was zero.

989092457-0913 rev 3.0

Multiple Data Files
This option selects how the files are displayed if either: (a) an acquisition contains multiple data files[acquired using auto-rearm] or, (b) if multiple files have been selected for Import.
(z) Place in multiple worksheets.
This tells the Add-In that you want multiple files to be placed in multiple worksheets. Excel will
create a new worksheet for each file selected, or for each file in the acquisition. The sheets will be
named with the file name [excluding the extension]. Existing worksheets will be reused if the filenames are the same; and the data on the worksheet will be updated.
(z) Append to current worksheet.
Places data [from all files] end-to-end on the current worksheet. Files are separated by a single
blank row. Make sure your versions of Windows and Excel are capable of supporting the numberof rows of data that will be produced.

Import FilesThe Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files dialog box allows you to open and view data files thatwere previously acquired by one of the supported data acquisition software programs. These include:
DaqView, WaveView, LogView, ChartView Binary, Personal DaqView, DaqExplorer, and data files thatwere saved by the DaqCOM data acquisition component.

The “Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files” Dialog Box
As it appears when ViewXL is running independent of a data acquisition application.
When the ViewXL Add-In is running, independent of a data acquisition application, then the “Import
Previously Acquired Binary Data Files” dialog box opens with an appearance similar to that shown in theabove figure. You can use the Browse feature to locate data files that are accessible to your PC. Simply
press the <Browse> button, select the desired file, and then press the <Open> button.
Note: The files listed are the data descriptor files. Descriptor files contain information about theirassociated binary data files. At this point, it is the descriptor that you are selecting, not the actual
binary data file.
After selecting a compatible descriptor file, select the data type of the file from the drop down list
(see the following figure).

Selecting a Descriptor File and a Compatible Data TypeIf you do not know the data file type, you can select Unknown from the list. However, there
exists a possibility that an Unknown file may be identified as the wrong data type, andproduce undefined results.

vxl-6

ViewXL989092

Software ReferenceIf the ViewXL Add-In is running while connected to a data acquisition application, e.g., ChartView or
DaqView), then the <Server Data Files> button is enabled, as indicated in the following figure. This button
brings up the File Open dialog that has been initialized to display the sub-directory when the currently
active acquisition application [server] stores its data files. The Data Type selection is disabled and is presetto the data type of the running server.

Importing-Server Data Files Dialog Box
Select the desired files from the Open Binary
Descriptor File dialog box; then press the <Open>button. See the figure to the right.
The selected file names will be placed in thedrop-down list, in the Import Previously Acquired
Binary Data Files dialog box (shown below).
When one or more files have been added to the drop
down file list (following figure), you can:(a) press the Import button to view the data in an
Excel worksheet, or,(b) check the "Preview Info" box to view a summaryof the highlighted file, as indicated in the Using thePreview Option … figure.

Selecting Binary Descriptor Files

Drop-Down List ofPreviously Acquired Binary Files

Using the Preview Option toView a File Summary
The "Acquisition Information" panel (see previous figure, right-side, central section) displays a summaryof the selected file. Included are: the number of channels in the file, number of data scans in the file, preand post-trigger rates in samples per second, the number of pre-trigger scans, and the type of time stamp
information supported by the file. Time stamp options are: "None", Relative", or "Rel + Abs" [for both
relative and absolute]. Relative time stamps show the time interval between scans. Absolute time stamps
show a Date and Time associated with a scan.
Note: For high-speed acquisitions, the one-second resolution of Absolute time stamps may not provide
any meaningful information.

989092457-0913 rev 3.0

The "Channel Information" panel (see previous figure, right-side, lower section) displays a summary of
the channel selected in the channels list. The summary shows the maximum and minimum range limits ofthe channel data, and the channel engineering Units.
When the <Import> button is pressed, the selected files are opened and read into the Excel workbook.
In regard to the option: place multiple files into multiple worksheets•

When enabled - a worksheet is created for each file, and each worksheet isrenamed with name of the file [excluding the file extension].

•

When disabled (not enabled) - all files are placed on the same worksheet,separated by a blank row.
The number of rows, that an Excel spreadsheet
can have, is determined by the version of
Microsoft Windows being used. Make sure thatyou do not exceed the limits, as described in the
Excel documentation, for your version of
Windows.

File Information in Excel Worksheet

Using the ViewXL Program API
The ViewXL Add-In exposes several methods that you can call from yourown Excel Macros.
Before you can use the Add-In you must perform the following steps.
1.

Make the Excel Visual Basic toolbar visible. This is accomplished byright-clicking in a blank area on the Excel Menu or Toolbar space.
When the pop-up menu appears, check the "Visual Basic" selection,
as indicated in the figure at the right.

2.

With the Visual Basic toolbar visible, click the <Visual Basic Editor>
button.

Visual Basic Editor
3.

Selecting Visual Basic

Click the "Tools" menu; then select the "References" item.

Selecting References in the Tools Pull-down Menu
4.

vxl-8

ViewXL

Select VIEWXL from the list of Available References (following figure). Be sure a check mark is next
to the VIEWXL selection; then press the OK button.

989092

Software ReferenceSelecting VIEWXL from Available References
You have now performed the tasks needed to use the ViewXL Add-In from your own Excel Macros.

An Example Macro
We will now be looking at an example of a macro that uses
ViewXL to tell a data acquisition application [server], to Loada Configuration File, and to Arm the acquisition. This macro
assumes that the specified file is known to be compatible withthe currently running acquisition application, for example
ChartView or DaqView.
Clicking the Run Macro Button

1.

Start by clicking the <Run Macro> toolbar button
following figure). This brings up the Macro dialog
box, where we will create a new macro.

2.

Enter the name "GetData" in the "Macro name" field; then press the <Create> button
as indicated in the following figure.

Creating a Macro Named “GetData”

You will see the newly created macro in the Visual Basic editor

989092457-0913 rev 3.0

3.

Inside the Macro (between the Sub and End Sub lines) type in the string "viewxl.interface"(see following figure). As you type the Period character after the word "interface" you will see alist pop-up that shows the ViewXL Add-In functions.

4.

Select "vxlLoadConfigFile" from the list.

GetData Macro
5.

Enter a Blank Space after the macro and enter the name of the configuration file.
In this case we will use "exceltest.cfg" as indicated in the following figure.

Sub GetData()
VIEWXL.Interface.vxlLoadConfigFile “exceltest.cfg”
VIEWXL.Interface.vxlArmServer
End Sub
Entering “exceltest.cfg” as the Configuration File Name

6.

Finally, add a call to the "vxlArmServer" function.

When done, your macro should look like the one shown above.
At this point you can return to the Macro dialog box and Run your "GetData" macro.

vxl-10ViewXL989092

Software ReferenceViewXL API Definition
ViewXL provides a limited set of methods that you can use in your own Excel macros to leverage thepower of the Add-In. The methods below make up the ViewXL Programming API. If you use thesemethods in your own Excel macros, there are certain precautions that you must take when designing yourprograms.
•

If you start an acquisition, your program must periodically relinquish control so the ViewXL
Add-In can perform its internal tasks. If your macro is simple, like the example given in the"Using the ViewXL Program API" section, then this is unnecessary. The sample macro iscalled, directs ViewXL to perform two tasks; then exits. During an acquisition, ViewXL polls
the server every two seconds. Your macro must not run longer than this without releasing
control.

•

You must make certain that the currently running server can implement, or is compatible
with, the API call being made. For example, in the example macro, page vxl-9, we trusted thatthe "exceltest.cfg" file was a valid configuration file for the currently running server.

•

You must ensure that the server is running before making a call that would be directed to it.
You can't call the server if it is not running, or has not been selected in the Options dialog
box. The Options dialog box is discussed on page vxl-4.

Function vxlArmServer() As BooleanThis function Arms the acquisition. If the server is not currently loaded, it will be loaded and Armed. The
function returns True if successful, otherwise False. A False value will be returned if the server is already
Armed when the call is made.
Function vxlDisArmServer() As BooleanThis function disarms the server and aborts the acquisition. The function returns True if successful,otherwise False. A False value will be returned if the server is already disarmed when the call is made.
Sub vxlConfig()
This method starts the server. A server must have been previously selected in the Options dialog box
before this call is made. The Options dialog box is discussed on page vxl-4.
Sub vxlLoadConfigFile(Optional ByRef sCfgFullPathName As String)This method instructs the server to load the specified configuration file. The file name can not contain adrive or path specification. If the file name is omitted from the call, the Load Configuration dialog box isdisplayed, allowing you choose a configuration file. The Load Configuration dialog box is discussed on
page vxl-4.
Sub vxlUseDataDestination(Optional ByVal bState As Boolean)This is used to enable or disable the use of the data destination worksheet cell. If a True or False value ispassed in the call, the data destination is enabled or disabled. If a value is omitted from the call, the data
destination state is toggled on and off. Data destination is discussed on pages vxl-3 and 4.
Sub vxlUseHeader(Optional ByVal bState As Boolean)This is used to enable or disable the use of the data header. If a True or False value is passed in the call,the data header is enabled or disabled. If a value is omitted from the call, the data header state is toggled
on and off. The data header is discussed on pages vxl-3 and 4.
Sub vxlSetDataDestination(ByRef wksCell As Range)
This sets the data destination to the worksheet cell identified by the Excel Range object reference passed
to the method. The Range object must not reference a range of cells that span multiple rows or columns.
For example, the following call would set the data destination to Row 3 and Column C; then enableusage of the data destination.
VIEWXL.Interface.vxlSetDataDestination Range("C3")VIEWXL.Interface.vxlUseDataDestination True

Public Function vxlIsServerReady() As Boolean
Returns True if the Server is in a state where it can receive commands from an Excel VBA program. The
Server would not be ready if it was busy performing a lengthy task, or if a message or dialog box that
requires user action is displayed.

989092457-0913 rev 3.0

Public Function vxlIsAcquiring() As BooleanThis function returns True if the Server is Armed and acquiring data.
Public Function vxlGetAcqFiles(ByRef sArray() As String) As BooleanThis function gets the names of the files that have been acquired by the Server. If the Function returns
True, there are files that have been acquired. The sArray argument is an undimensioned string array. On
return, the array will be dimensioned and filled with the names of the acquired data files. Note. If theoption to delete data files after reading them into Excel is checked, the file names returned by thisfunction call may have already been deleted. The function can be used as follows:
Dim i As Integer
Dim sArray() As String
If (VIEWXL.Interface.vxlGetAcqFiles(sArray) Then
For i = LBound(sArrray) To UBound(sArray)' Process FilessArray(i)
Next
EndIf

Public Function vxlIsServerRunning() As BooleanThis function returns True if the Server is currently running.
Public Sub vxlUpdateViewXL()This method synchronizes the ViewXL Menus and Toolbar with the current state of the Server.
This is not normally needed if an acquisition has been started from the ViewXL interface.
However, if an acquisition has been started from the Server application, this call can be used to
update the ViewXL interface. The following example demonstrates the use of this, and otherAPI functions.
' Check if the Server is running
If (Not VIEWXL.Interface.IsServerRunning()) Then
Beep
' ask to start server if not running
If (MsgBox("The server is not running. Do you want to start it?", _vbQuestion + vbYesNo) <> vbYes) Then
Exit SubEnd If
VIEWXL.Interface.vxlConfig
End If' update current server status
VIEWXL.Interface.vxlUpdateViewXL' if the server is acquiring, stop it
If (VIEWXL.Interface.vxlIsAcquiring) Then' halt the acquisition in progress
VIEWXL.Interface.vxlDisArmServer
End If' Continue with Excel VBA program

vxl-12

ViewXL989092

Software Reference

APPENDICES

Appendix A – API Command Reference

Appendix B – IEEE 488, Serial, and ASCIIAppendix C – Program Examples in Quick Basic

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

969296

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualAppendix A - API Command ReferenceA

Introduction …… A-2
Command Syntax …… A-2
Command Interpretation …… A-3
Command Summary …… A-6

Command Reference …… A-11
Command Description Format …… A-11
The Commands …… A-11
@ - Trigger On Command …… A-12
*B - Flush Acquisition Buffer …… A-13
*C - Clear Channel Configuration …… A-14
*F - Restore Factory Settings …… A-15
*G - Set RTD Gain Calibration Reference …… A-16
*K - Change Calibration Keyword …… A-17
*P - Adjust Calibration Card Pots …… A-18
*R - Reset Power-On …… A-19
*S - Set Power-Up Configuration …… A-20
*T - Set Scan Time Stamping …… A-21
*W - Set Software Digital Filtering …… A-22
A - Assign Alarm Output …… A-23
A# - Set Scan Alarm Stamping …… A-24
C - Configure Channels …… A-25
C# - Select Cards …… A-28
D# - Set Relay Make Time …… A-29
E - End Calibration Mode …… A-30
E? - Query Error Status …… A-31
F - Set Data Format …… A-32
F# - Set Burst Mode Frequency …… A-34
G - Calibrate Channel Gain …… A-35
H - Calibrate Channel Offset …… A-36
I - Set Scan Interval …… A-37
I# - Set Digital Input Stamping …… A-38
J - Calibrate Cold Junction Offset …… A-39
K - Enter Calibration Mode …… A-40
L - Set Trigger Level …… A-41
L# - Set Scan Rate …… A-42
M - Set SRQ Mask …… A-43
M# - Set Measuring Mode …… A-44
N - Set Event Mask …… A-45
O - Set Digital Output …… A-46
P - Program Trigger Times …… A-47
Q - Set Query Terminator …… A-48
QC? - Query Card Data …… A-49
R - Read Buffered Data …… A-50
R# - Read Last Readings …… A-51
S - Set Real-Time Clocks …… A-52
T - Set Trigger Configuration …… A-53
U - User Status …… A-55
V - Set User Terminator …… A-58
W# - Set Averaging Weight …… A-59
X - Execute …… A-60
Y - Set Counts …… A-61
? - Query …… A-62

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

API Command Reference A-1

Introduction
Command Syntax
Command Characters
Commands are identified with the following characters:
*0
*1
*2
*3

A single letter (A through Z)
A single letter (A through Z) followed by a pound sign (#)
An at-sign character (@)
An asterisk (*) followed by a single letter (A through Z)

In addition, the commands are governed by the following syntax rules.
Case Sensitivity
Commands may be entered in upper or lower case.
For example, A1,1X is interpreted the same as a1,1X.
White Spaces
White space (which consists of all ASCII values of 32 and below, and includes the space, tab, new-line andcarriage-return characters) is generally allowed anywhere between commands and command arguments.
However, white space is not allowed in the middle of command options.
For example, 1 2 3 is not the same as 123.
Multiple Parameters
If more than one parameter is used for a command, they must be separated by a comma or white space.
For example: Q4,1,1,0,0X or Q 4 1 1 0 0X is appropriate.
Command Strings
Commands may be sent individually or in a string with other commands.
For example, the following four lines of a program:
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1,1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A1,1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C2,2X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A2,2X"

have the same effect as the single line:
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; C1,1 A1,1 C2,2 A2,2 X"

Execute Command
Deferred commands are interpreted and processed in the Acquisition Buffer as they are received, but theyrequire the Execute (X) command to be issued in order to be executed. If multiple system commands areused in the same string, each use of the command must be followed by the Execute (X) command. Any
number of Execute (X) commands may be inserted into the same command string. However, immediate
commands do not require an Execute (X) command to be processed. For more detail on these commandtypes, see section Command Interpretation next in this chapter.
For example, to clear the SRQ Mask and then set it for SRQ on Trigger Event:
PRINT#1, OUTPUT10; "M000 X M002 X"

To configure Channels 1 through 32 for temperature and Channels 33 through 64 for volts, using one
command string:
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-32,1 C33-64,11 X"

A-2

API Command Reference

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualFixed Formats
Any command with the Query (?) command extension or any User Status (U) command returns a fixed
format. For instance, any option that can range up to 65,535 always returns five digits, so zero would be
returned as 00000. In the following command descriptions, leading zeros are included. However, they are
not required when entering the command.
Conflict Errors
Some combinations of commands and parameters can be sent to the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200
unit that are out of range for a particular configuration or inconsistent with other commands. For instance,
specifying a Set Scan Interval (I) command with less time than the unit can acquire scans results in a
conflict error:
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-992,I00:00:00.0,00:00:00.0X"

A conflict error lights up the ERROR LED indicator on the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 front panel
and returns an E4 when queried with the Query Error Status (E?) command. Some conflict errors result ina default value for a conflicted command. For instance, in the example above, the specified Set Scan
Interval (I) command defaults to the fastest possible scan interval for the number of defined channels.

Command Interpretation
As commands are received by the unit, they are interpreted in the order in which they are received. Somecommands are immediate, which means they immediately take effect. Other commands are deferred andhave no effect on device operation until the Execute (X) command is interpreted.
Immediate & Deferred Commands
An example of an immediate command is the Set Digital Outputs (O) command, which immediately
chooses the specified digital output line. An example of a deferred command is the Set Data Format (F)command, which determines the input and output format used for channel data when the Execute (X)command is interpreted.
As deferred commands are interpreted, their desired effects are recorded in internal temporary registers. As
additional deferred commands are interpreted, their effects are added to these registers, possibly
overwriting earlier effects. Finally, when the Execute (X) command is interpreted, the temporary registers
are examined in the execution order described later. If two deferred commands that do not affect the samefunction are received before the Execute (X) command, they take effect in the execution order. If a deferredcommand is sent multiple times within a command line, the last occurrence of the command will takeprecedence. Note that a command line is terminated by the Execute (X) command. For example, if the Set
Data Format (F) command line F1,1 F1,3X is sent, the data output format will be as specified by thelatter F1,3X command. The former F1,1 command is overridden and never takes effect.
If an error is detected during command processing, commands are ignored up through and including thenext Execute (X) command. Thus, any immediate commands after the error, and all deferred commands on
the same line, are ignored. For example, the command line:
T1,1,0,0O216,0,25,255

AA

T3,7,0,0K20

X

contains the error AA. Only the Set Digital Outputs (O) command O216,0,25,255 is executed, because itis an immediate command that occurred before the error. The deferred commands T1,1,0,0 andT3,7,0,0 and the immediate command K20 after the error have no effect.
Deferred commands help reduce the effects of errors and improve synchronization of command execution.
The primary advantage of deferred commands is that they are executed as a group, either all or none. If
any errors occur, deferred commands have no effect and the device is left in a consistent state instead of apartially modified, inconsistent state.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

API Command Reference A-3

Table 16a. Immediate & Deferred Commands
Command

A-4

@
*B
*C
*F
*G
*K
*P
*R
*S
*T
*W
A
A#
C
C#
D#
E
E?
F
F#
G
H
I
I#
J
K
L
L#
M
M#
N
O
P
Q
QC?
R
R#
S
T
U
V
W#
X
Y

Trigger On Command
Flush Acquisition Buffer
Clear Channel Configuration
Restore Factory Settings
Set RTD Gain Calibration Reference
Change Calibration Keyword
Adjust Calibration Card Pots
Reset Power-On
Set Power-Up Configuration
Set Scan Time Stamping
Set Software Digital Filtering
Assign Alarm Output
Set Scan Alarm Stamping
Configure Channels
Select Cards
Set Relay Make Time
End Calibration Mode
Query Error Status
Set Data Format
Set Burst Mode Frequency
Calibrate Channel Gain
Calibrate Channel Offset
Set Scan Interval
Set Digital Input Stamping
Calibrate Cold Junction Offset
Enter Calibration Mode
Set Trigger Level
Set Scan Rate
Set SRQ Mask
Set Measuring ModeSet Event Mask
Set Digital Output
Program Trigger Times
Set Query Terminator
Query Card Data
Read Buffered Data
Read Last Readings
Set Real-Time Clocks
Set Trigger Configuration
User Status
Set User Terminator
Set Averaging Weight
ExecuteSet Counts
Command Extension

?

Query

API Command Reference

889897

TempScan/1100
Deferred
Immediate
DeferredMultiScan/1200
Deferred
Immediate
Deferred

Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
DeferredDeferredDeferredDeferred

Immediate(N/A)
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate(N/A)
DeferredDeferredDeferred

Immediate(N/A)
Immediate
Immediate
Deferred(N/A)
Immediate
Immediate
DeferredDeferred

Immediate
Deferred
Immediate
Immediate
DeferredDeferred
Immediate
Immediate
DeferredDeferred

Immediate
Immediate
DeferredDeferredDeferred(N/A)
Deferred

Immediate
Immediate
Deferred(N/A)
DeferredDeferredDeferred

Immediate
DeferredDeferred

Immediate
DeferredDeferred

Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Deferred
Immediate
Deferred(N/A)
Immediate
Deferred
TempScan/1100

Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate
Deferred
Immediate
DeferredDeferred
Immediate
DeferredMultiScan/1200

Immediate

Immediate

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualTable 16b. Deferred Commands Execution Order
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6

TempScan/1100

V
Q
F
M
N
L

Set User Terminator
Set Query Terminator
Set Data Format
Set SRQ Mask
Set Event Mask
Set Trigger Level

MultiScan/1200

V
Q
F
M
N
L

Set User Terminator
Set Query Terminator
Set Data Format
Set SRQ Mask
Set Event Mask
Set Trigger Level

7

Channel Setup Commands
A
Assign Alarm Output
A#
Set Scan Alarm StampingI#
Set Digital Input Stamping*C
Clear Channel Configuration
C
Configure Channels*W
Set Software Digital FilteringL#
Set Scan Rate

Channel Setup Commands
A
Assign Alarm Output
A#
Set Scan Alarm StampingI#
Set Digital Input Stamping*C
Clear Channel Configuration
C
Configure Channels
D#
Set Relay Make TimeF#
Set Burst Mode Frequency
M#
Set Measuring ModeW#
Set Averaging Weight

8
9
10
11
12

P
I
Y
T
@

P
I
Y
T
@

Program Trigger Times
Set Scan Interval
Set Counts
Set Trigger Configuration
Trigger On Command

Program Trigger Times
Set Scan Interval
Set Counts
Set Trigger Configuration
Trigger On Command

Deferred Commands Execution Order
The immediate commands take effect immediately when they are interpreted. Even so, they must be
followed by an Execute (X) command to terminate the command string for correct operation. For example,
the Enter Calibration Mode (K) command K00001X.
Deferred commands are not executed until the Execute (X) command has been successfully parsed andinterpreted. Upon interpretation of the Execute (X) command, the order of execution of all deferredcommands is as shown in the table.
This ordering ensures that the configuration of acquisitions takes place before any data is acquired. The Set
Trigger Configuration (T) command is the last command performed before the issuance of any Trigger(trigger start event) since data acquisition may begin once the T command has been defined.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

API Command Reference A-5

Command Summary
Command

Syntax@

Trigger On Command@

Trigger on receipt of an @.

*B

Flush Acquisition
Buffer*B

Flush any data currently in the Acquisition Buffer.

*C

Clear Channel
Configuration*C

Clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are
configured.

*F

Restore Factory
Settings*F

Restore unit to factory configuration.

*G

Set RTD Gain
Calibration
Reference(TempScan/1100 only)*GgainSet RTD Gain Calibration reference point to specified numberof ohms. gain is the reference point in the form of a real
number nnn.nn

G?

Query the present reference point setting*K

Change Calibration
Keyword*Kkey

Change the calibration keyword where key is the keyword in
the form of a 5-digit number nnnnn. Therefore thepassword can be no longer than 5 characters.

*P

Adjust Calibration Card
Pots

*PchanSelect voltage level to be enabled for adjustment. Valid
options for chan are 01 – Enable –4.4 Volt Source on
calibration card. 02 – Enable +4.4 Volt Source on calibration
card. and 03 – Select 0 Volts Ground.

*R

Reset Power-On*R

Power-on reset. Equivalent to a hardware reset.

*S

Set Power-Up
Configuration*SmodeSpecify power-up configuration mode. Valid options for mode
are 0 – Power-up under last known configuration (default)
and 1 – Power-up under factory default configuration.

*T

Set Scan Time
Stamping*TstateSpecify whether or not scan time stamping will be enabled.
Valid options for state are: 0 – Disable scan time stamping(default), 1 – Enable absolute time stamping, and 2 – Enable
relative time stamping.

*W

Set Software Digital
Filtering(TempScan/1100
only)*WmodeSpecify whether or not software digital filtering forthermocouple cards will be enabled. Valid options for mode
are: 0 – Disable digital filtering for thermocouple cards, and1 – Enable digital filtering for thermocouple cards (default)

A

Assign Alarm Output

Achans,outputSet alarm condition where chans is the channel(s) to assign tothe digital output.
chans may be in two forms: chan (for a single channel where
1 [chan [ max) or first – last (for a range of channels where1 [ first < last [ max), where max = 992 for the
TempScan/1100 and max = 744 for the MultiScan/1200.
output is the digital output number to associate the channel(s)with, where 1<=output<=32, and 0 is null.

A?

Query channels assigned to digital output.

A#

Set Scan Alarm
Stamping

A#stateSpecify whether or not scan alarm stamping will be enabled.
Valid options for state are 0 – Disable scan alarm stamping(default), and 1 – Enable scan alarm stamping.

C

Configure Channels

Cchans,type [,

Configure the channels for the master unit and its slave units.
chans and type are required arguments, while lowsp,
highsp and hyst are optional.
chans may be in two forms: chan (for a single channel where 1[ chan [ max) or first – last (for a range of channels where1 [ first < last [ max), where max = 992 for the
TempScan/1100 and max – 744 for the MultiScan/1200.
The chassis is chan = 0.
type is the type to assign to those channels. 0 is null.
Query current channel configuration[lowsp],[highsp],[hyst] ]C?

A-6

Description

API Command Reference

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualCommand

SyntaxDescription

C#

Select Card

C#cardSelect the card from which subsequent QC? and U12interrogation will retrieve information. Valid options forcard are: 0 - Selects the chassis, 1 - Selects the card in
the master unit, 2 - Selects the 1st slave card, 3 - Selects
the 2nd slave card, 4 - Selects the 3rd slave card, etc, 30 Selects the 29th slave card, and 31 - Selects the 30th slave
card.

D#

Set Relay Make Time(MultiScan/1200 only)

D#makeSpecify how long to wait after closing a channel relay before
reading valid data, where make is the number of 520.833microsecond intervals.

E

End Calibration ModeE

Terminate Calibration Mode

E?

Query Error Status

E?

Returns present error condition of the unit with one of thefollowing error codes:
E128 - Command Conflict Error.
E032 - Open Thermocouple or Range Error.
E016 - Trigger Overrun.
E008 - Calibration Error.
E004 - Channel Configuration Error.
E002 - Invalid Device Dependent Command Option (IDDCO).
E001 - Invalid Device Dependent Command (IDDC).
E000 - No error has occurred.

F

Set Data Format

Fengr,
formatConfigure the input and output formats.
engr converts the raw data to the engineering units that you
prefer to work with. Valid options are: 0 - degrees Celsius(default), 1 - degrees Fahrenheit, 2 - degrees Rankine, 3 degrees Kelvin, and 4 - Volts.
format places the readings in a format that you prefer towork with. Valid options are: 0 - Engineering Units (default),
1 - Binary (Low Byte/High Byte), 2 - Binary (High Byte/Low
Byte), and 3 - Counts (ASCII).
Query the data format.

F?
F#

Set Burst Mode
Frequency(MultiScan/1200 only)

F#freq

Select burst mode sampling frequency where freq is a real
number and where 38.5 < freq < 20000.0 Hertz(default).

G

Calibrate Channel Gain

Gchan,
type

Calibrate the correction gain constants for given option card
where chan is the channel number such that 1 < chan <max, where max = 992 for the TempScan/1100 and max =744 for the MultiScan/1200. The chassis is chan = 0.
type is the channel type.

H

Calibrate Channel
OffsetHchan

Calibrate the correction offset constants for given option card
where chan is the channel number such that 1 < chan <max, where max = 992 for the TempScan/1100 and max =744 for the MultiScan/1200. The chassis is chan = 0.

I

Set Scan Interval

Inorm,
acq

Set the two configurable scan intervals of the unit where norm
and acq are the normal and acquisition scan intervals whichhave the form: hh:mm:ss.t where hh is hours, mm isminutes, ss is seconds, and t is tenths of a second.

I?

Query scan interval selection.

I#stateSpecify whether or not digital input stamping will be enabled.
Valid options for state are: 0 - Disable digital input
stamping (default), and 1 - Enable digital input stamping.

I#

Set Digital Input
Stamping

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

API Command Reference A-7

Command

SyntaxJ

Calibrate Cold Junction
OffsetJchan,
type,
temp

Calibrate the cold-junction offsets for cold-junction
compensation of the thermocouple signals where chan isthe channel number such that 1 < chan < max, where max= 992 for the TempScan/1100 and max = 744 for theMultiScan/1200.
type is the thermocouple channel type.
temp is the reference temperature currently being applied tothe selected channel, with the form nnn.n in degrees º C.

KEnter Calibration Mode

Kkey

Enter Calibration Mode if the keyword (or password) is correct,
where key is the keyword in the form of a 5-digit number
nnnnn. Therefore the password can be no longer than 5characters.

K?

Query Kkey as defined above.

Lchan,
level,
hyst

Sets the level against which the testing of channel readings
should be performed where chan is the channel number
such that 1 < chan < max, where max = 992 for the
TempScan/1100 and max = 744 for the MultiScan/1200.
level is the level against which the readings are tested todetermine if the level has been exceeded.
hyst is the hysteresis level.
Query the current level settings

L

Set Trigger LevelL?
L#

Set Scan Rate
(TempScan/1100
only)

L#rateSpecify whether to select the optional slow scan rate or to
select the default fast scan. Valid options for rate are: 0 Select fast scan rate (default), and 1 - Select slow scan rate.

M

Set SRQ Mask

Mmask

Use the IEEE 488 Service Request (SRQ) mechanism to
inform the IEEE 488 bus controller of certain conditions,where mask is in the form of the number nnn such that000 < nnn < 255 is summed from the following conditions:
128 - SRQ on Buffer Overrun.
032 - SRQ on Event Detected.
016 - SRQ on Message Available (MAV).
008 - SRQ on Scan Available.
004 - SRQ on Ready.
002 - SRQ on Trigger Event.
001 - SRQ on Alarm.
000 – Clear SRQ Mask.
Query the SRQ mask.

M?
M#

Set Measuring Mode
(MultiScan/1200
only)

M#modeSpecify measuring mode. Valid options for mode are: 0 Line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode, and
1 - Single-channel high-speed burst mode.

N

Set Event Mask

Nmask

Directly sets the Event Status Enable Register (ESE) wheremask is in the form of the number nnn such that 000 <nnn < 255 is summed from the following conditions:
128 – ESB on Power On
064 – ESB on Buffer 75% Full032 – ESB on Command Error
016 – ESB on Execution Error
008 – ESB on Device Dependent Error
004 – ESB on Query Error
002 – ESB on Stop Event
001 – ESB on Acquisition complete
000 – ESB on Clear Event Mask
Query the Event mask.

N?

A-8

Description

API Command Reference

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

O

Command

SyntaxDescription

Set Digital Outputs

Obank1,bank2,
bank3,bank4

Set any of the 32 digital outputs (separated into four 8-bit
banks) to a specified setting, where bankn (n = 1, 2, 3, 4)
is an argument in the form of the number nnn such that000 < nnn < 255 when converted to binary format
represents the desired settings for the 8-bit bank.
Query current state of digital output.

O?
P

Program Trigger Times

Pstart,stop

P?
Q

Set Query Terminator

Set the Trigger and/or Stop times for an acquisition configured
for start and/or stop on absolute time, where start andstop are in the standard Time/Date input format:
hh:mm:ss:t,MM/DD/YY where hh is in hours, mm is inminutes, ss is in seconds, t is in tenths of a second, MM is
the month, DD is the day, and YY is the year.
Query current start and stop times.

Qresp,
hll,
scan,
block,
sep

Set the query terminators with the following parameters: resp
is the response terminator, hll is the channel terminator,
scan is the scan terminator, and block is the Trigger
Block terminator.
sep is the separator terminator which determines whether or
not a separator character should be used. Valid options for
sep are: 0 - Place no separators in returned buffered scandata when it is read, and 1 - Place a separator whose value
is determined by the current Set User Terminator (V)command setting into the returned buffer data when it is
read.

Q?

Query current terminator settings.

QC?

Query Card Data

QC?

Read back the card identification and calibration informationfrom the scanning card previously selected by the SelectCard (C#) command.

R

Read Buffered Data

Rtype

Read scan data from the Acquisition Buffer where type is thetype of data request being made. Valid options for type
are: 1 - Read the oldest scan currently residing in the
Acquisition Buffer, 2 - Read the oldest complete Trigger
Block currently residing in the Acquisition Buffer, and 3 Read all the scan data that currently resides in the
Acquisition Buffer.

R?

Query the contents of the Acquisition Buffer.

R#

Read Last Readings

R#chans

Queries the last readings from the HLL Registers for specified
channels.
chans may be in two forms: chan (for a single channel
where 1 < chan < max) or first-last (for a range ofchannels where 1 < first < last < max), where max =992 for the TempScan/1100 and max = 744 for theMultiScan/1200.

S

Set Real-Time Clocks

Stime

Set the internal real-time clock where time is in the standard
Time/Date input format: hh:mm:ss:t, MM/DD/YY
where hh is in hours, mm is in minutes, ss is in seconds, t
is in tenths of a second, MM is the month, DD is the day, and
YY is the year.
Query the internal real-time clock.

S?
T

Set Trigger
Configuration

Tstart,stop,
re-arm,sync

T?

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

Configure an acquisition of scan data with the following
parameters:
start is the start event and stop is the stop event
re-arm determines if the unit should continue acquiring after
the first acquisition completes, where 1 is on and 0 is off.
sync determines if acquisition events should be synchronizedwith the internal timebases, where 1 is on and 0 is off.
Query the present trigger configuration

API Command Reference A-9

CommandU

User Status

Syntax

Ureq

Description
Request information about various internal conditions of theunit where req refers to one of the following request types:
0 - Query and clear the Event Status Register (ESR)

1 - Query the Status Byte Register (STB)
2 - Query and clear the Calibration Status Register (CSR)
3 - Query the current system settings
4 - Query the current High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers
5 - Query and clear the current High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers
6 - Query the Buffer Status String
7 - Query the assigned alarm outputs
8 - Query the configured channels
9 - Query the digital inputs
10 - Query the installed memory option
11 - Query the current alarm channels
12 - Query the Time/Date stamping of the last calibration
13 - Query the last scan read
14 - Query the card ID types
15 - Query the product information
16 - Query the measuring parameters (MultiScan/1200 only)
17 - Query Root Mean Square (RMS) (MultiScan/1200 only)
18 - Query the acquisition states and various system flags
V

Set User Terminator

Vval
V?

W#

Set Averaging Weight(MultiScan/1200
only)

W#wt

Specify the number of samples to average in line cycle
integration / high-speed multi-channel mode where wt is theaveraging weight. Valid options for wt are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16,
32 (default), 64, 128, and 256.

X

ExecuteX

Execute preceding command string.

Y

Set Counts

Ypre,
post,
stop
Y?

Set acquisition counts where pre is the Pre-Trigger count,
post is the Post-Trigger count and stop is the Post-Stopcount.

Command Extension

?

A-10

Set the User Terminator value to any character whose numericvalue (ASCII value) val is in the range 0 to 255.
Query the present User Terminator value.

Query

API Command Reference

SyntaxQuery current acquisition count selections.
Description
Query the present configuration or mode of the command
preceding the ?

?

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualCommand Reference
The following pages provide the command set for the TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200. For eachcommand, the command name, the descriptive name, and the command description are given. In turn, thecommand description includes the following format.

Command Description Format
TypeThis item refers to the part of the system that the command acts upon. The defined Types are as follows:•

Acquisition: This command type refers to those commands which affect how the scans/channels are
acquired.

•

Buffer: This command type refers to those commands which affect the buffer operations and/or
pointers.

•

Calibration: This command type refers to those commands which affect instrument calibration.

•

Channel: This command type refers to those commands which affect channel configuration and/or
acquisition.

•

System: This command type refers to those commands which affect general system functionality.

Execution
This item refers to the point in time which an interpreted command is executed. The defined Executions
are as follows:•

Immediate: This command execution indicates that the command will be executed immediately uponsuccessful parsing of the command and instrument parameters.

•

Deferred: This command execution indicates that the command will be saved and executed later (after
successfully parsing and performing an Execute (X) command).

BannerMost of the commands are used with both the TempScan/1100 and MultiScan/1200 units. However, inseveral instances, a banner like those shown below, will indicate whether a command is used with the
TempScan/1100 unit only, or with the MultiScan/1200 unit only.
TempScan/1100 only
MultiScan/1200 only

The Commands
The following pages presents the API Command Reference for both the TempScan/1100 andMultiScan/1200 units in alphabetical order by command syntax.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

API Command Reference A-11

@ - Trigger On Command
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAXDESCRIPTION

Acquisition
Deferred@

Trigger upon receipt of an @The Trigger On (@) command will start or stop the acquisition accordingly when the start or stop argumentsof the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command is set to 1 (trigger on). The T command is used as a trigger source
and follows the same rules as other trigger sources as defined by the T command.
The @ command is valid only when an acquisition is configured such that either the Trigger (trigger start event)and/or Stop (trigger stop event) is defined as the Trigger On (@) command. Otherwise, if this command is issued
such that either the Trigger and/or Stop are not defined as the Trigger On (@) command, an error condition will
occur.
EXAMPLE

A-12

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X”‘ Configure an acquisition with both Trigger and Stopbeing assigned the Trigger On (@) command

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; @X”
SLEEP 10PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; @X”‘ Start the acquisition‘ Wait 10 seconds to collect data
‘ Stop the acquisition

API Command Reference

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

*B - Flush Acquisition Buffer
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAXDESCRIPTION

BufferImmediate*B

Flush any data currently in the Acquisition Buffer

The Flush Acquisition Buffer (*B) command will flush any data currently in the Acquisition Buffer. Upon executionof this command, all data currently in the buffer will be deleted and made unavailable to be read. This commandshould only be used when it is determined that the data in the buffer is no longer needed or may be corrupt.
Once this command is executed, data in the buffer is irrevocably lost.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"SPOLL07"
INPUT#2, S%
IF (S% AND 128) = 128 THEN
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; *BX"
ENDIF

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Serial Poll the unit
‘ Get the Serial Poll response‘ Check for Buffer Overrun‘ Data may be corrupt, flush the Acquisition Buffer

API Command Reference A-13

*C - Clear Channel Configuration
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAXDESCRIPTION

ChannelDeferred*C

Clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are configured

The Clear Channel Configuration (*C) command will clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are
configured. After this command has been performed, channel readings will be not be updated; therefore, no HLL
or Acquisition Buffer updates will be performed until a new configuration is entered via the Configure Channels (C)command. This *C command may be used when the present configuration is no longer acceptable and you wish
to reconfigure channels from scratch.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; *CX"PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; C1,1X"

A-14

API Command Reference

889897‘ Clear all channel configurations‘ Configure Channel 1 of thermocouple Type J

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

*F - Restore Factory Settings
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAXDESCRIPTION

SystemImmediate*F

Restore unit to factory configuration

The Restore Factory Defaults (*F) command may be used to restore the unit to the same configuration it had
when it left the factory. Issuing this command will cause the unit to load the factory default configuration into theworking configuration. This command may not be issued while an acquisition is configured since it will cause
certain acquisition-dependent settings to change. Issuing this command while an acquisition is configured willcause a Command Conflict Error to occur.
For more information on the factory default configuration, see section Power-Up Configuration in the chapter
System Configuration.
Note: Issuing the *F command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost. The
calibration factors for the master unit and its slaves, however, will remain intact.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?T?Y?X"PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT A$
Q1,7,7,7,0 T0,3,0,0 Y100,1000,0
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*FX"PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?T?Y?X"PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT A$
Q1,0,0,0,0 T0,0,0,0 Y0,0,0

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Retrieve some current configuration settings‘ Get the settings‘ Screen shows the current settings‘ Restore factory default configuration‘ Retrieve some current configuration settings‘ Get the settings‘ Screen shows the new settings

API Command Reference A-15

*G - Set RTD Gain Calibration Reference
TempScan/1100 only
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Calibration
Immediate*GgainG?

Set RTD Gain Calibration reference point to specified number of ohms. gainis the reference point in the form of a real number nnn.nn.
Query the present reference point setting.

DESCRIPTION
RTD (Resistance Temperature Device) Gain Calibration requires a precision resistance source to be applied to
Channel 1 of each RTD card being calibrated. The factory default reference resistance (invoked with reference
point = 0.00) is 384.4 ohms (830.0°C).
The Set RTD Gain Calibration Reference (*G) command allows you to change the reference resistance prior tocalibrating the gain. This is useful if individual calibration labs have different precision resistance sources andwhen temperature measurement exclusivity at lower temperatures can be made even more accurate bycalibrating at a lower reference point.
For more information on manually calibrating the TempScan/1100, see chapter System Calibration.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*G247.04X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;K12345X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;H1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;G1,17X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;EX"A-16

API Command Reference

889897‘ Set the RTD Gain Calibration reference point to 247.04 ohms
(400.0°C).
‘ Enter Calibration Mode
‘ Short out Channel 1 on RTD card in master unit
‘ Calibrate offset for RTD card in master unit
‘ Apply precision resistance of 247.04 ohms on Channel 1 of RTD
card in master unit
‘ Calibrate gain for 4-wire RTD for RTD card in master unit
‘ Remove precision voltage‘ End Calibration Mode

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

*K - Change Calibration Keyword
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Calibration
Immediate*Kkey

Change the calibration keyword, where key is the keyword in the form of a 5digit number nnnnn. Therefore the password can be no longer than 5characters.

DESCRIPTION
Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary
for normal, everyday operation.
The Change Calibration Keyword (*K) command allows the changing of the calibration keyword which is a userdefined password. This password is a safety feature to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering Calibration
Mode and potentially altering calibration constants. The new keyword must be a 5-digit decimal number. Oncethe keyword is set, it will thereafter be used by the Enter Calibration Mode (K) command to determine entry into
Calibration Mode.
For more information on manual calibration, see chapter System Calibration.
Note: This command is only valid when the calibration protection is disabled via the rear DIP microswitch 9.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U2X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT#2, C%
IF (C% AND 16) THEN
PRINT,"ERROR — INVALID KEYWORD”
SLEEP 5PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*K67890X”
ENDIF
PRINT#1, “EX”

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Enter Calibration Mode. Keyword = 12345‘ Check for keyword error‘ Get the Calibration Status Register (CSR)‘ If so, wait until keyword check jumper is disabled‘ Enter new Keyword = 67890‘ End Calibration Mode

API Command Reference A-17

*P - Adjust Calibration Card PotsTYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Calibration
Immediate*PchanSelect voltage level to be enabled for adjustment. Valid options for chan are:
01 - Enable -4.4 Volt Source on calibration card, 02 - Enable +4.4 Volt
Source on calibration card, and 03 - Select 0 Volts Ground.

DESCRIPTION
Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary
for normal, everyday operation.
The Adjust Calibration Card Pots (*P) command is used to enable the -4.4 Volt or +4.4 Volt source on the special
calibration card to allow for their adjustment. A secondary, diagnostic use for this command is to program thechannel sequencer to “sit” on a specified channel without changing address lines, accessing temperature
sensors, or making/breaking relay contacts.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;K12345X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*P02X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*P01X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;EX"A-18

API Command Reference

889897‘ Enter Calibration Mode
‘ Enable -4.4 Volt Source‘ Adjust -4.4 Volt Source‘ Enable +4.4 Volt Source‘ Adjust +4.4 Volt Source‘ End Calibration Mode

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

*R - Reset Power-On
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAXDESCRIPTION

SystemImmediate*R

Power-on reset. Equivalent to a hardware reset.

The Reset Power-On (*R) command has the same effect on the unit as removing and re-applying power. Allbuffer data and channel configurations are erased. Meanwhile, the IEEE 488 bus commands Device Clear (DCL)and Selected Device Clear (SDC) do not have this effect. They clear only the command input buffer, the output
queue, and any pending commands.
Note: Because the Reset Power-On (*R) command performs a full power-on reset, 3 or 4 seconds are required
before you can communicate with the unit. A total of at least 5 seconds is required before normal
operations can take place.
Note: Issuing the Set Power-Up Configuration (*S) command *S1 and then power-cycling the unit, or issuing
the Reset Power-On (*R) command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost.
However, the calibration factors for the unit and its slaves will remain intact.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*RX"SLEEP 4
WHILE (S% and 4) = 0
PRINT #1, “SPOLL07"
INPUT#2,S%
WEND

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual‘ Restore power-on settings to the unit
‘ Wait 4 seconds to restore communication‘ Keep checking the Serial Poll response of the unit until it is ready

889897

API Command Reference A-19

*S - Set Power-Up Configuration
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemImmediate*SmodeSpecify power-up configuration mode. Valid options for mode are: 0 - Powerup under last known configuration (default). 1 - Power up under factory
default configuration.

DESCRIPTIONWith the Set Power-Up Configuration (*S) command, specifying the mode to be 0 will cause the unit to load its
last known configuration when it is powered on or when the Reset Power-On (*R) command is issued. The last
known configuration will be exactly the same as the configuration it had when it was last powered down or a *R
command was issued. Specifying this mode will insure that the unit will always come up with the configuration
which has most recently been defined. Using this mode is convenient if it is undesirable to reconfigure the unit
every time it is powered up or a *R command is issued.
Specifying the mode to be 1 will cause the unit to load the factory default configuration when it is powered on orwhen a *R command is issued. Using this mode is the same as power-cycling the unit then issuing the Restore
Factory Settings (*F) command. For more information on the factory default configuration, see section Power-Up
Configuration in the chapter System Configuration.
Note: Issuing the Set Power-Up Configuration (*S) command *S1 and then power-cycling the unit, or issuing
the Reset Power-On (*R) command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost.
However, the calibration factors for the unit and its slaves will remain intact.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?T?Y?X"PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT A$
Q1,7,7,7,0 T1,3,0,0 Y100,
1000,0PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*S1X"
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*RX”
SLEEP 5PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?T?Y?X"PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT A$
Q1,0,0,0,0 T0,0,0,0 Y0,0,0

A-20

API Command Reference

889897‘ Retrieve some current configuration settings‘ Get the settings‘ Screen shows settings‘ Configure to power up with factory defaults‘ Reset the unit
‘ Wait for the unit to reset‘ Retrieve some current configuration settings‘ Get the settings‘ Screen shows settings

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

*T - Set Scan Time Stamping
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemImmediate*TstateSpecify whether or not scan time stamping will be enabled. Valid options forstate are: 0 - Disable scan time stamping (default), 1 - Enable absolute
time stamping, and 2 - Enable relative time stamping.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Scan Time Stamping (*T) command, when enabled, will append a Time/Date stamping to each scanbeing output by the unit to the controller. This Time/Date output data can be in absolute or relative formats.
When Engineering Units format is selected via the Set Data Format (F) command:•

Absolute time stamping is in the format: hh:mm:ss.mil,MM/DD/YY.

•

Relative time stamping is in the format: ±hh:mm:ss.mil,DDDDDDD. (Negative values indicate PreTrigger scans, whereas positive values indicate Post-Trigger scans.)

When Binary format is selected via the Set Data Format (F) command, the Time/Date stamping is returned as ten
8-bit bytes in 2h (two-digit hexadecimal) format, as follows:•

Absolute time stamping is in the format: hmstuvwMDY.

•

Relative time stamping is in the format: hmstuvwDEF.

When ASCII Counts format is selected via the Set Data Format (F) command, the output data is interpreted asEngineering Units.
For more information on data formats, see section Data Format Configuration in the chapter System
Configuration. For more information on time stamping, see section Stamping Configuration in the chapter System
Configuration.
Note: Relative time stamping is not valid when you attempt to use it in conjunction with continuous, gap-freeacquisitions with two timebases.
Note: With MultiScan/1200 only, time stamping is not valid in single-channel high-speed burst mode.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*T1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*T2X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*T0X"

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual‘ Enable absolute time stamping‘ Enable relative time stamping‘ Disable scan time stamping

889897

API Command Reference A-21

*W - Set Software Digital Filtering
TempScan/1100 only
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferred*WmodeSpecify whether or not software digital filtering for thermocouple cards will beenabled. Valid options for mode are: 0 - Disable digital filtering forthermocouple cards, and 1 - Enable digital filtering for thermocouple cards(default).

DESCRIPTIONAs a standard feature, the TempScan/1100 employs an advanced software digital filter to ensure quiet andaccurate thermocouple input. This feature is enabled as part of the factory default settings. Using the Set
Software Digital Filtering (*W) command, this digital filtering feature can be disabled in order to improve reaction
response time, or re-enabled to reinstate the feature.
Note: This feature is only valid for the TempTC/32B thermocouple scanning card for the TempScan/1100.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*W0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*W1X"

A-22

API Command Reference‘ Disable software filtering‘ Enable software filtering

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualA - Assign Digital Alarm Output
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferredAchans,outputA?

Set alarm condition where chans is the channel(s) to assign to the digital
output.
chans may be in two forms: chan (for a single channel where 1 < chan <max) or first-last (for a range of channels where 1 < first < last
< max), where max = 992 for the TempScan/1100 and max = 744 for theMultiScan/1200.
output is the digital output number with which to associate the channel(s),where 1 < output < 32. The value of 0 (null) will unassign a digital alarm
condition by disassociating the channel(s) from any digital output.
Query channels assigned to digital output.

DESCRIPTION
The Assign Digital Alarm Output (A) command is used to assign alarm states of a particular channel, or range ofchannels, to individual outputs of the 32 available digital alarm outputs.
To use the alarms, the relevant channels must be part of the channel scan. After an acquisition has been
configured and armed, the alarms will be enabled and monitored. Since alarming is totally independent of
buffered operations, the assignment of trigger events or scan intervals is not required.
If preferred, an alarm event for a specific channel can be used as a stimulus for a digital (TTL) output signal. In
turn, this signal can be used to set off an audible alarm (user-supplied) or to communicate to another device thatthe alarm state has occurred.
Thirty-two (32) digital alarm outputs are available via the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 rear-panel DB50
connector. Although analog input channels on the Exp/10A or Exp/11A expansion unit can be used to stimulate
alarms, neither of these expansion units provides digital alarm outputs. Consequently, regardless of the numberof connected expansion units, the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 system can only provide 32 digital alarm
outputs.
Note: To enable alarm monitoring prior to, or have an alarm condition serve as, the Trigger or Stop event, youmust first configure the acquisition with at least one Pre-Trigger scan.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-32, 1,-100.0, 100.0, 1.0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A1,1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A2-16,2X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A17-25,3X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A26-32,32X"

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Configure Channels 1 - 32 with a low setpoint of -100.0, ahigh setpoint of 100.0, and a hysteresis of 1.0‘ Assign Channel 1 alarm to digital output 1‘ Assign Channels 2 - 16 alarms to digital output 2‘ Assign Channels 17 - 25 alarms to digital output 3‘ Assign Channels 26 - 32 alarms to digital output 32

API Command Reference A-23

A# - Set Scan Alarm Stamping
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferredA#stateSpecify whether or not scan alarm stamping will be enabled. Valid options forstate are: 0 - Disable scan alarm stamping (default), and 1 - Enable scan
alarm stamping.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Scan Alarm Stamping (A#) command, when enabled, is used to stamp the alarm states of the 32 digital
alarm outputs to the end of each scan as the scans occur in real time. The alarm status consists of 32 bits,
grouped into four 8-bit bytes: Bits 07-00, 15-08, 23-16, and 31-24. Each of these 32 bits is identified with a 1
signifying alarm on, or a 0 signifying alarm off.
In the following data formats, the alarm status will be stamped to each scan in the corresponding patterns:•

Binary Low-High-Byte format: Four 8-bit Bytes 1 through 4, where:
Byte 1: Bits 07 through 00.
Byte 2: Bits 15 through 08.
Byte 3: Bits 23 through 16.
Byte 4: Bits 31 through 24.

•

Binary High-Low-Byte format: Four 8-bit Bytes 1 through 4, where:
Byte 1: Bits 15 through 08.
Byte 2: Bits 07 through 00.
Byte 3: Bits 31 through 24.
Byte 4: Bits 23 through 16.

•

ASCII format: Four 8-bit bytes in Binary format converted to twelve bytes in printable ASCII format:
TwwwTxxxTyyyTzzz, where:

T = User terminator.
www = Three-digit decimal value of Bits 07 through 00.
xxx = Three-digit decimal value of Bits 15 through 08.
yyy = Three-digit decimal value of Bits 23 through 16.
zzz = Three-digit decimal value of Bits 31 through 24.
For more information on alarm stamping, see section Stamping Configuration in the section System
Configuration.
Note: In an 8-bit byte, Bits 00 through 07 correspond to digital input/output (DIO) lines 1 through 8. Also, Bit ncorresponds to the decimal value 2^n (where n is an integer from 00 to 07).
Note: With MultiScan/1200 only, alarm stamping is not valid in single-channel high-speed burst mode, sincealarms are not monitored.
Note: If digital input stamping has also been enabled via the Set Digital Input Stamping (I#) command, then thedigital input states will be stamped after the scan alarm output states have been stamped.
Note: Data in Binary format is not printable. The Binary data must be converted to ASCII format for printability.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A#1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A#0X"

A-24

API Command Reference‘ Enable scan alarm stamping‘ Disable scan alarm stamping

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualC - Configure Channels
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

ChannelDeferred

Cchans,type [,[lowsp],[highsp],[hyst] ]C?

Configure the channels for the master unit and its slave units. chans andtype are required arguments, while lowsp, highsp and hyst are
optional.
chans may be in two forms: chan (for a single channel where 1 < chan <max) or first-last (for a range of channels where 1 < first <last < max), where max = 992 for the TempScan/1100 and max =744 for the MultiScan/1200. The chassis is chan = 0.
type is the type to assign to those channels. The value of 0 (null) willremove the affected channel from the scan group.
Query current channel configuration.

DESCRIPTION
The optional arguments lowsp, highsp and hyst are the low setpoint, high setpoint and hysteresis values,
respectively, for the Configure Channels (C) command. These arguments are only needed if it is desired toconfigure alarms on the specified channel(s). The format for these optional arguments follow the rules forreadings input defined under the Set Data Format (F) command.
The channel type is used by the unit to determine how a certain channels readings are to be interpreted.
Because of this fact, defining the channel type is critical to the proper configuration of the channel. Each channelmust be assigned a channel type in order for it to be included in the scan group. Assigning a channel type of 0
will remove that channel from the scan group. Reserved types are non-assignable types that are reserved to theinternal processes of the unit. Among these types, 90 and 91 are reserved for chassis calibration. Note thatspecifying a reserved type will cause an error.
Note: Specifying a reserved type will cause an error.
Note: Since the Configure Channels (C) command is a deferred command, the channel(s) will not actually be
configured until the Execute (X) command is processed. Also, since the configuring of channels takes agood deal of processor time, it is recommended that as many Configure Channels (C) commands shouldbe placed on one command line as possible. This will avoid unnecessary processing time overhead when
configuring many channels.
The following table outlines the channel types for the TempScan/1100 and the MultiScan/1200 units:
Channel Types

0
1-9
10
11
12,13,14
15
16,17,18
19
20
21,22
23,24,25,26
27
28,29
30
31-50
51-59
60-99
111-127

TempScan/1100 Description
Null
Thermocouple Card
Thermocouple Card
Thermocouple Card and Volts Card
Volts Card
Reserved
RTD Card
RTD Card
Reserved
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
Reserved
Thermocouple Card
Thermocouple Card
Reserved
Reserved

MultiScan/1200 Description
Null
Thermocouple Card
(N/A)
Volts Card
Volts Card
Reserved
Reserved(N/A)
High-Voltage Card
High-Voltage Card
Volts Card
(N/A)
High-Voltage Card
High-Voltage Card
Thermocouple Card
(N/A)
Reserved
Reserved

See the following tables for details:

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

API Command Reference A-25

Thermocouple Scanning Cards
Thermocouple
Assignable Channel Types
Type
NormalFor Troubleshooting purposes only, not for normal operation.
Operatio
These special types are valid only in degrees Celsius.
nSame asWithout temperature Temp.
Temp. sensor
normalsensor adjustment
sensorvalues only,
operation(i.e. raw A/D input ofvalues only,
not linearized
but
the T/C type)linearized
without(Temp(Multi(i.e. raw A/Dtemperature
Scan
Scan
input of thesensor
/1100
/1200
temp.
adjustment
only)
only)
sensors)
1
31
51
40
41
50
J
2
32
52
40
42
50
K
3
33
53
40
43
50
T
4
34
54
40
44
50
E
5
35
55
40
45
50
R
6
36
56
40
46
50
S
7
37
57
40
47
50
B
8
38
58
40
48
50
N (14 gauge)
9
39
59
40
49
50
N (28 gauge)
10
100 mV
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(MultiScan/1200
only)
11
100 mV
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(MultiScan/1200
only)
Volts Scanning Cards
Volts Type
Assignable Channel Types(Range)Normal Operation(TempScan(MultiScan/1100 only)/1200 only)
11
11
100 mV DC
1212
1 V DC13
13
5 V DC14
14
10 V DC23
100 mV AC(N/A)
24
1 V AC(N/A)
25
5 V AC(N/A)
26
10 V AC(N/A)
RTD Card Types
RTD Type

3-Wire RTD
4-Wire RTD

A-26

API Command ReferenceHigh-Voltage Scanning Cards
High-Voltage
Assignable Channel Types
Type (Range)
Normal Operation(Multi Scan /1200 only)
2.5 V DC
25 V DC
250 V DC
2.5 V AC
25 V AC
250 V AC

20
21
22
28
29
30

Assignable Channel Types
NormalRaw A/D
Operation
Input(Temp Scan /1100 only)

16
17

18
19

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; F0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*C”
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1,1,-100.0,
100.0, 0.5"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C33-34,11"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C65,2"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U13X"
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT A$+0034.40-0103.00+0012.30+0004.60

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Set Data Format to Engineering Units, degrees C‘ Clear current channel configuration‘ Configure channel for Type J thermocouple with low setpointof -100.0 °C, high setpoint of 100.0 °C and hysteresis of
0.5 °C‘ Configure Channels 33 and 34 for Volts type (100 mV
range) and no setpoints‘ Configure Channel 65 for Type K thermocouple with no
setpoints‘ Execute the above configuration (The unit is now scanning
the above configuration)‘ Get the last readings of configured channels‘ Retrieve response‘ Screen shows the last readings

API Command Reference A-27

C# - Select Card
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Calibration
Immediate

C#cardSelect the card from which subsequent QC? and U12 interrogation will
retrieve information. Valid options for card are: 0 - Selects the chassis, 1- Selects the card in the master unit, 2 - Selects the 1st slave card, 3 Selects the 2nd slave card, 4 - Selects the 3rd slave card, etc, 30 - Selects
the 29th slave card, and 31 - Selects the 30th slave card.

DESCRIPTION
Using the Select Card (C#) command with a number from the range 1-31 for the parameter card, will cause
subsequent Query Card Data (QC?) and User Status (U12) commands to return the calibration factors of thecards by themselves. To return the calibration factors of the cards as part of the system, select a number fromthe range 101-131.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C#0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;QC?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
INPUT #2, A$
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C#5X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U12X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
INPUT #2, A$
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C#105X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;QC?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
INPUT #2, A$

A-28

API Command Reference

889897‘ Select chassis‘ Read chassis calibration factors‘ Select the fourth slave card - 5‘ Read back the Time/Date that card 5 was last calibrated‘ Select the fourth slave card in order to read back thecalibration factors as part of the system‘ Read back the system calibration factors of card 5

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

D# - Set Relay Make TimeMultiScan/1200 only
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferredD#makeSpecify how long to wait after closing a channel relay before reading validdata, where make is the number of 520.833-microsecond intervals.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Relay Make Time (D#) command allows the user to increase the delay between closing a relay andreading valid channel data. The system powerup default is: make = 6 = 3.125 milliseconds.
If common mode voltages on adjacent channels are widely dissimilar, reading inaccuracies can result. This
inaccuracy is due to inadequate settling time at the instrumentation amplifier when the unit is scanning between
channels. To eliminate these inaccuracies, the settling time can be increased using the D# command as shownin the example below.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M#0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;W#32X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;D#12X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Y0,10,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-360,1X
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Select line cycle integration/high-speed multichannel mode
‘ Select number of samples = 32
‘ Set Relay Make Time = 12 = 6.25 milliseconds‘ Setup to read 10 past trigger scans‘ Enable Channels 1 - 360 for Type J thermocouples‘ Arm the unit
‘ Trigger unit and collect scans

API Command Reference A-29

E - End Calibration ModeTYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAXDESCRIPTION

Calibration
Immediate

E

Terminate Calibration Mode

Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary
for normal, everyday operation.
To use this command the unit must be in Calibration Mode. The End Calibration Mode (E) command is then used
to take the unit out of Calibration Mode. Once this command has been executed the unit will no longer be in
Calibration Mode and the Enter Calibration Mode (K) command must be issued to re-enter Calibration Mode.
For more information on manual calibration, see chapter System Calibration.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;H545X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;G545,1X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;G545,1X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;J21,2,90.0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;EX”

A-30

API Command Reference

889897‘ Enter Calibration Mode
‘ Apply precision voltage‘ Will calculate offsets for slave card 17 (TempScan/1100)‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Apply precision voltage of -50.0 mV‘ Calibrate negative gain for thermocouple, for slave card 17(TempScan/1100)‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Apply precision voltage of +50.0 mV‘ Calibrate positive gain for thermocouple, for slave card 17(TempScan/1100)‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Apply temperature of 90.0 °C‘ Calibrate cold junction offset for Channel 21 on the master
unit card‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Remove precision voltage‘ End Calibration Mode

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

E? - Query Error StatusTYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemImmediate

E?

Returns present error condition with one of the following error codes:
E128 – Command Conflict Error.
E032 – Open Thermocouple or Range Error.
E016 – Trigger Overrun.
E008 – Calibration Error.
E004 – Channel Configuration Error.
E002 – Invalid Device Dependent Command Option (IDDCO).
E001 – Invalid Device Dependent Command (IDDC).
E000 - No error has occurred.

DESCRIPTION
When an error has occurred, the ERROR LED indicator on the front panel of the unit turns on. The Query Error
Status (E?) command is used to determine the present error condition, as stored in the 8-bit byte of the Error
Source Register (ESC). After the execution of an E? command, the unit responds with one of the following error
codes:•

E128: Command Conflict Error (ESC Bit 7). This error indicates that an issued command is in conflict withother issued commands or with the current configuration. This error usually occurs when an issued
command cannot be performed because it is incompatible with the current state of the unit.

•

E032: Open Thermocouple or Range Error (ESC Bit 5). This error occurs when the hardware circuitry
detects an open thermocouple, or the software routines detect either that the input A/D data has reached its
maximum value or the input data has exceeded its linearization limits.

•

E016: Trigger Overrun (ESC Bit 4). This error occurs when more than one Trigger (trigger start event) or
more than one Stop (trigger stop event) occurs during one Trigger Block acquisition, or when an unexpected
Trigger occurs.

•

E008: Calibration Error (ESC Bit 3). This error occurs when the calibration is inappropriate or has failed.
The Error Indicator Bits (Bits 0 to 5) in the Calibration Status Register (CSR) together map to this bit.

•

E004: Channel Configuration Error (ESC Bit 2). This error indicates that a channel has been
inappropriately configured, either because the channel is not present or because the specified channel type
is incompatible with the scanning card type installed.

•

E002: Invalid Device Dependent Command Option (IDDCO) (ESC Bit 1). This error occurs when acommand parameter is out of range or missing.

•E001: Invalid Device Dependent Command (IDDC) (ESC Bit 0). This indicates a command syntax error.

•

E000: No error has occurred.

After the execution of a Query Error Status (E?) command, most error conditions are cleared. Error conditions
may also be cleared by issuing the following User Status (U) command to the unit: U0 – Query and clear the
Event Status Register (ESR). The ERROR LED indicator will remain on until an E? or U0 command is executed
to clear the error condition.
EXAMPLESPRINT#1, "CLEAR07"
PRINT#1, "OUTPUT07;E?X"
PRINT#1, "ENTER07"
INPUT#2, A$
PRINT A$
E000

‘ Reset the unit
‘ Request error status

PRINT#1, "OUTPUT07;K3 X"
PRINT#1, "OUTPUT07;E?X"
PRINT#1, "ENTER07"
INPUT#2, A$
PRINT A$
E002

‘ Send illegal command option. (Note: ERROR LED indicator turns on)‘ Request error status. (Note: ERROR LED indicator turns off)

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual‘ Display shows E000, no errors occurred‘ Displays E002 (Invalid Device Dependent Command Option)

889897

API Command Reference A-31

F - Set Data Format
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferred

Fengr,
formatF?

Configure the input and output formats.
engr converts the raw data to the engineering units with which you prefer towork. Valid options are: 0 - degrees Celsius (default), 1 - degrees
Fahrenheit, 2 - degrees Rankine, 3 - degrees Kelvin, and 4 - Volts.
format places the readings in a format with which you prefer to work. Valid
options are: 0 - Engineering Units (default), 1 - Binary (Low/High Byte),
2 - Binary (High/Low Byte), and 3 - Counts (ASCII).
Query the data format.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Data Format (F) command configures the input and output data format for data transmissions with theunit, and requires two arguments. The first argument engr refers to the specific Engineering Units if applicable,
and the second argument format refers to the reading format.
The following tables list the valid data input and output formats for Engineering Units, Binary, and Counts.
Data Input Formats
Data Type
Temperature

Volts
Time/Date(Absolute)
Timebase(Scan Interval)

Engineering Units

xxxx.xx °C
xxxx.xx °F
xxxx.xx °R
xxxx.xx °K+xxx.xxxxxxx
hh:mm:ss.t,
MM/DD/YY
hh:mm:ss.t

Data Output Formats
Data TypeEngineering Units
Temperature

Volts
Time/Date Stamp(Absolute)
Time/Date Stamp(Relative)
Timebase(Scan Interval)

xxxx.xx °C
xxxx.xx °F
xxxx.xx °R
xxxx.xx °K+xxx.xxxxxxx
hh:mm:ss.mil,
MM/DD/YY+hh:mm:ss.mil,
DDDDDDD
hh:mm:ss.t

Data Input & Output Legend
LegendEngineering Units
x = ASCII digit
hh = hours
mm = minutes
ss = seconds
t = tenths
mil = milliseconds
MM = months
DD = days
YY = years
DDDDDDD = days

A-32

API Command Reference

889897BinaryHigh/Low Byte
Low/High Byte
(Interpreted asEngineering Units)

Counts±xxxxx±xxxxx(Interpreted asEngineering Units)(Interpreted asEngineering Units)(Interpreted asEngineering Units)(Interpreted asEngineering Units)

BinaryHigh/Low Byte
Low/High Byte

Counts

H/L

L/H±xxxxx

H/L
L/H
hmstuvwMDY±xxxxx(Interpreted asEngineering Units)(Interpreted asEngineering Units)(Interpreted asEngineering Units)

hmstuvwDEF(Interpreted asEngineering Units)

BinaryCountsH = high order byte
L = low order byte
h = hoursm = minutess = seconds
tuvw = microseconds
M = months
D = days
Y = years
DEF = days

x = ASCII digit

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualWhen the unit is inputting or outputting data, it first references the current reading format. For example, if
format is 0 (Engineering Units), it will then reference the current settings of the engineering units and thenperform the necessary conversion. However, data readings are only converted to the specified engineering units
if the associated channel type is a channel that supports those engineering units. For example if the specified
channel is a volts channel and the engineering units is 0 (°C), then the reading will be interpreted as volts, not atemperature in °C.
The following table shows the effect of the Set Data Format (F) command on reading input/output formats for thecommands and queries over which it has control.
Reading Formats
Commands

Engineering Units

C,C?,L,L?,U8
R,R#,U4,U5,U13

Engineering UnitsEngineering Units

BinaryHigh/Low Byte
Low/High Byte
Engineering UnitsEngineering Units
Binary (High/Low)
Binary (Low/High)CountsCountsCountsFor more information on data formats, see section Data Format Configuration in the chapter System
Configuration.
EXAMPLESPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07:F0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1,1,-100.0,100.0,1.0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; U4X”
PRINT#1, “ENTERO7"‘ Set the Engineering Units to °C and thereading format to Engineering Units‘ Set points and hysteresis interpreted as °C‘ Retrieve High/Low/Last readings‘ Returned readings are in Engineering °C
formatLINE INPUT #2, A$
PRINT A$PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F1,1X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1,1,-100.0,100.0,1.0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U4X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
LINE INPUT #2, A$
PRINT A$

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Set the Engineering Units to °F and reading
format to Binary Low/High Byte
‘ Set points and hysteresis interpreted as °F‘ Retrieve High/Low/Last readings‘ Returned readings in Binary Low/High format

API Command Reference A-33

F# - Set Burst Mode Frequency
MultiScan/1200 only
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferredF#freq

Select burst mode sampling frequency where freq is a real number andwhere 38.5 < freq < 20000.0 Hertz (default).

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Burst Mode Frequency (F#) command is used to select the channel sampling frequency when theMultiScan/1200 is in single-channel high-speed burst mode. For more information on burst mode, see section
Measuring Modes (MultiScan/1200 Only) in the chapter System Configuration.
For AC measurements where the RMS (Root Mean Square) value is to be returned via the following User Status(U) command – Query measuring mode parameters (U16) – it is your responsibility to program a frequency which
will yield a sufficient whole even number of samples per line cycle in order to compute the RMS accurately. In
general, for AC measurements, the frequency should equal (2n * 60) Hz where n is a positive integer.
For more information on MultiScan/1200 measuring mode parameters, see section Measuring Modes(MultiScan/1200 Only) in the chapter System Configuration, and see commands Set Measuring Mode (M#) and
Set Averaging Weight (W#).
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F#15000.0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F#100.5X”

A-34

API Command Reference

889897‘ Select 15 KHz sampling frequency‘ Select 100.5 Hz sampling frequency

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

G - Calibrate Channel GainTYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Calibration
Immediate

Gchan,
type

Calibrate the correction gain constants for given option card where chan isthe channel number such that 1 < chan < max, where max = 992 for the
TempScan/1100 and max = 744 for the MultiScan/1200. The chassis ischan = 0.
type is the channel type.

DESCRIPTION
Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary
for normal, everyday operation.
Active only in Calibration Mode, the Calibrate Channel Gain (G) command is used to calibrate the correction gain
constants for a given scanning card. The channel gain value is necessary in order for the internal firmware toaccurately interpret readings coming from the input channels. This command will take the parameters chan andtype and will calculate the gain based on the present channel input voltage.
For more information on manual calibration, see chapter System Calibration.
Note: To achieve correct results, this command must be issued twice. First, with a negative input voltage andnext, with a positive input voltage. Each time the command has been issued, the precision voltage sourcemust remain at its value until the TRIGGER LED indicator stops flashing.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;G524,1"

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;G524,1"

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;EX”

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Enter Calibration Mode
‘ Apply negative precision voltage‘ Calculate negative gain for thermocouple card on slavecard 16 (TempScan/1100)‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Apply positive precision voltage‘ Calculate positive gain for thermocouple card on slavecard 16 (TempScan/1100)‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Remove precision voltage‘ End Calibration Mode

API Command Reference A-35

H - Calibrate Channel Offset
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Calibration
Immediate

Hchan

Calibrate the correction offset constants for given option card where chan isthe channel number such that 1 < chan < max, where max = 992 for the
TempScan/1100 and max = 744 for the MultiScan/1200. The chassis ischan = 0.

DESCRIPTION
Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary
for normal, everyday operation.
Active only in Calibration Mode, the Calibrate Channel Offset (H) command is used to calibrate the correction
offset constants for a given scanning card. The channel offset values are necessary in order for the internal
firmware to accurately interpret readings coming from the input channels. This command will take the parameterchan and calculate the offsets based on the present channel input voltage.
For more information on manual calibration, see chapter System Calibration.
Note: To achieve correct results, a short must be connected across the desired channel before performing thiscommand. After the command has been issued, the precision voltage source must remain at its value atleast until the TRIGGER LED indicator stops flashing.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;H524X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;EX”

A-36

API Command Reference

889897‘ Enter Calibration Mode
‘ Connect short across the desired channel‘ Calculate offsets for slave card 16 (TempScan/1100)‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Remove precision voltage‘ End Calibration Mode

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualI - Set Scan Interval
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Acquisition
Deferred

Inorm,
acq

I?

Set the two configurable scan intervals of the unit where norm and acq are
the normal and acquisition scan intervals which have the form:
hh:mm:ss.t where hh is hours, mm is minutes, ss is seconds, and t istenths of a second.
Query scan interval selection.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Scan Interval (I) command is used to set the following two types of scan intervals:•

Normal Scan Interval. The normal scan interval is used when the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit
is acquiring scans before the Trigger (trigger start event) has occurred, or after the Stop (trigger stop event)has occurred. These two scanning regions are called the Pre-Trigger scan and the Post-Stop scan,
respectively.

•

Acquisition Scan Interval. The acquisition scan interval is used when the TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 unit is acquiring scans after the Trigger (trigger start event) has occurred, but before theStop (trigger stop event) has occurred. This middle scanning region is called the Post-Trigger scan.

The norm and acq arguments represent the normal and acquisition scan intervals, respectively.
The scan interval can also be set to run at the minimum scan interval, yielding the fastest scan rate that thecurrent system configuration will allow. This is referred to as fast mode. Either the normal or acquisition scaninterval can be set to fast mode, by specifying the following scan interval – 00:00:00.0 – in the I command.
When the I command is interrogated by the unit, the unit will determine, by examining its current channel
configuration, if it is capable of running at the desired interval. If the unit determines that it is not capable ofrunning at the desired interval, it will automatically default to fast mode for the interval(s) in question. It will also
issue a Command Conflict Error to inform you that it is not running at the user-specified interval.
The scan interval can be programmed from a 24-hour period to a 0.1-second period in increments of 0.1 second.
In addition to setting the scan interval to zero, if the scan interval is programmed for a value less than the unit iscapable of running at, the unit will also default to fast mode.
For more information on scan intervals, see section Scan Configuration in the chapter System Configuration.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, OUTPUT07;I01:00:00.0,
00:00:00.0X
PRINT#1, OUTPUT07;I?XPRINT#1, ENTER07
LINE INPUT #2, I$
PRINT I$
I01:00:00.0,00:00:00.0

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Set normal scan interval to once every hour andacquisition scan interval to fast mode
‘ Query the current scan intervals‘ Screen shows the current scan intervals

API Command Reference A-37

I# - Set Digital Input Stamping
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferredI#stateSpecify whether or not digital input stamping will be enabled. Valid options forstate are: 0 - Disable digital input stamping (default), and 1 - Enabledigital input stamping.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Digital Input Stamping (I#) command, when enabled, is used to stamp the digital input states of the 8digital inputs to the end of each scan as the scans occur in real time. The digital input status consists of 16 bits,
grouped into two 8-bit bytes: Bits 07-00 and 15-08, where Bits 15-08 are always inactive. Consequently, each of
the 8 Bits 07-00 is identified with a 1 signifying input on, or a 0 signifying input off, while each of the 8 Bits 15-08
is identified with a 0 (off).
In the following data formats, the digital input status will be stamped to each scan in the corresponding patterns:•

Binary Low-High-Byte format: Two 8-bit Bytes 1 and 2, where:
Byte 1: Bits 07 through 00.
Byte 2: Bits 15 through 08.

•

Binary High-Low-Byte format: Two 8-bit Bytes 1 and 2, where:
Byte 1: Bits 15 through 08.
Byte 2: Bits 07 through 00.

•

ASCII format: Two 8-bit bytes in Binary format converted to eight bytes in printable ASCII format:
TxxxT000, where:

T = User terminator.
xxx = Three-digit decimal value of Bits 07 through 00.
For more information on digital input stamping, see section Stamping Configuration in the section System
Configuration.
Note: In an 8-bit byte, Bits 00 through 07 correspond to digital input/output (DIO) lines 1 through 8. Also, Bit ncorresponds to the decimal value 2^n (where n is an integer from 00 to 07).
Note: If scan alarm stamping has also been enabled via the Set Scan Alarm Stamping (A#) command, then thedigital input states will be stamped after the scan alarm output states have been stamped.
Note: Data in Binary format is not printable. The Binary data must be converted to ASCII format for printability.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;I#1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;I#0X"

A-38

API Command Reference‘ Enable digital input stamping‘ Disable digital input stamping

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualJ - Calibrate Cold Junction Offset
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Calibration
Immediate

Jchan,
type,
temp

Calibrate the cold-junction offsets for cold-junction compensation of thethermocouple signals where chan is the channel number such that 1 <chan < max, where max = 992 for the TempScan/1100 and max = 744
for the MultiScan/1200.
type is the thermocouple channel type.
temp is the reference temperature currently being applied to the selectedchannel, with the form nnn.n in degrees º C.

DESCRIPTION
Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary
for normal, everyday operation.
Active only in Calibration Mode, the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J) command is used to calibrate the cold
junction offsets for cold-junction compensation of the thermocouple signals. Each thermocouple input channel
has associated with it one of these temperature sensors. Although calibrated at the factory, these temperature
sensors are subject to component aging which may affect their accuracy over time. The function of the J
command is to allow the adjusting of the internal firmware to compensate for the affects of component aging.
Since there are 4 cold junction temperature sensors associated with 32 temperature input channels, it isnecessary to select 4 channels. Each channel is associated with one of the 4 cold junction temperature sensors
in order to calibrate all cold junction temperature sensors on a given card.
For more information on manual calibration, see chapter System Calibration.
Note: To achieve correct results, four separate channels on each card must be supplied with an accurate
thermocouple signal of known warm junction temperature before performing this command. After thecommand has been issued, the applied thermocouple signal must remain at its value until the TRIGGER
LED indicator stops flashing.
Note: The parameter type is the same channel type that is used with the Configure Channels (C) command.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;J812,2,101.7X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;EX”

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Enter Calibration Mode
‘ Apply precision temperature‘ Compute cold junction offset for the temperature
sensor associated with the type K thermocouple
on channel 1 of slave card 25 at 101.7°C‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Remove precision temperature‘ End Calibration Mode

API Command Reference A-39

K - Enter Calibration ModeTYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Calibration
Immediate

Kkey

Enter Calibration Mode if the keyword (or password) is correct, where key is
the keyword in the form of a 5-digit number nnnnn. Therefore thepassword can be no longer than 5 characters.

K?

Query Kkey as defined above.

DESCRIPTION
Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary
for normal, everyday operation.
The Enter Calibration Mode (K) command places the unit into Calibration Mode. While in Calibration Mode theunit may be calibrated using any of the defined calibration commands. In addition, all other commands are valid
during Calibration Mode. However, if the unit is not in Calibration Mode, none of the defined calibrationcommands are valid, and an error condition will be generated if any of these commands are issued.
The K command requires a pre-defined keyword as a parameter. This keyword must match the existing keyword
definition in order to enter Calibration Mode. If the keyword is not correct, Calibration Mode will not be enteredand no calibration commands will be processed.
For more information on manual calibration, see chapter System Calibration.
Note: If the keyword becomes lost or forgotten a new keyword can be issued with the Change Calibration
Keyword (*K) command.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U2X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
INPUT#2, C%
IF (C% AND 16) THEN
PRINT,"ERROR - INVALID KEYWORD”
HALT
ENDIF
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT10;H524X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT10;G524,1X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT10;G524,1X”

PRINT#1, “EX”

A-40

API Command Reference

889897‘ Enter Calibration Mode with the keyword 12345‘ Check for keyword error‘ Get the Calibration Status Register (CSR)‘ Check for a keyword error‘ If there is an error, stop execution‘ Connect short across desired channel‘ Calculate offset for slave card 16 (TempScan/1100)‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Wait until TRIGGER LED indicator stops flashing‘ Apply negative precision voltage‘ Calculate negative gain for slave card 16(TempScan/1100)‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Apply positive precision voltage‘ Calculate positive gain for slave card 16(TempScan/1100)‘ Wait for command to complete‘ Remove precision voltage‘ End Calibration Mode

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualL - Set Trigger Level
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

ChannelDeferred

Lchan,
level,
hyst

L?

Sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be
performed where chan is the channel number such that 1 < chan < max,
where max = 992 for the TempScan/1100 and max = 744 for theMultiScan/1200.
level is the level against which the readings are tested to determine if thelevel has been exceeded.
hyst is the hysteresis level.
Query the current level settings

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Trigger Level (L) command simply sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be
performed. The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command should be used to configure whether the level condition
should be tested for going above the specified level or below the specified level.
The parameter level is the value, which, if exceeded by going above or below it as defined, generates a
Trigger (trigger start event) or Stop (trigger stop event). The parameter hyst is the hysteresis value that, withlevel, is used to test whether the level condition still persists. The level condition will persist until the channel
readings no longer exceed the level as specified. Further, in order to come out of the level condition, the channel
readings must retreat from the exceeded level value by the amount of the hysteresis value. The temperature andvolts format for the level and hyst arguments follow the rules defined under the Set Data Format (F)command and in the section Data Format Configuration in the chapter System Configuration.
Note: The Set Trigger Level (L) command is only valid for Trigger Types 4 and 5, as defined by the Set Trigger
Configuration (T) command.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;L1,100.0,10.0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;L?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07"
LINE INPUT #2, L$
PRINT L$
L001,+0100.0,+0010.0
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T4,5,0,0X”

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Set the Engineering Units format to be degrees C‘ Set the level channel to be Channel 1 at a level 100.0°C with a hysteresis of 10.0 °C‘ Read the current level setting‘ The screen shows the current level settings‘ Set the Trigger on channel going above the level andset the Stop on the channel going below the level

API Command Reference A-41

L# - Set Scan Rate
TempScan/1100 only
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferredL#rateSpecify whether to select the optional slow scan rate or to select the default
fast scan. Valid options for rate are: 0 - Select fast scan rate (default),
and 1 - Select slow scan rate.

DESCRIPTION
Although the TempScan/1100 factory default setting is fast scan rate, the Set Scan Rate (L#) command canprogram the scan rate to be reduced by a factor of 4 (from 16 readings per line cycle to 4 readings per line cycle).
This slow scan rate feature allows for increased settling time when measuring signals with long wire lengths.
Using this L# command, the fast scan rate can also be reinstated.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;L#0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;L#1X"

A-42

API Command Reference‘ Select fast scan rate
‘ Select slow scan rate

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualM - Set SRQ Mask
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferred

Mmask

M?

Use the IEEE 488 Service Request (SRQ) mechanism to inform the IEEE 488
controller of certain conditions, where mask is in the form of the number
nnn such that 000 < nnn < 255 is summed from the following conditions:
128 – SRQ on Buffer Overrun
004 – SRQ on Ready032 – SRQ on Event Detected
002 – SRQ on Trigger Event
016 – SRQ on Message Available
001 – SRQ on Alarm
008 – SRQ on Scan Available
000 – Clear SRQ Mask
Query the SRQ mask.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set SRQ Mask (M) command uses the IEEE 488 Service Request (SRQ) mechanism to inform the IEEE 488
bus controller of the existence of several conditions in the Service Request Enable Register (SRE). The bits in
the SRE represent an exact image of the bits in the Status Byte Register (STB) except for the Request for Service
Bit (RQS, Bit 6) or Master Summary Status Bit (MSS, Bit 6). When a condition is set in the STB, its image bit ischecked in the SRE. If the image bit is enabled, the unit will generate a Service Request (SRQ).
Multiple conditions can be enabled simultaneously. If multiple conditions are contained within the same command
string, each Set SRQ Mask (M) command should be followed by the Execute (X) command. Otherwise, since theresulting SRQ Mask register value is the logical ORed value, or sum, of the individual values sent, the entire
summed value of all the desired conditions may be sent within one Set SRQ Mask (M) command. The
programmed SRQ Mask remains enabled until it is cleared by the receipt of a M000 command, the receipt of a
Reset Power-On (*R) command, or the detection of a Device Clear (DCL) or Selected Device Clear (SDC).
The following list outlines the possible conditions of the Service Request Enable Register (SRE), as reflected in
the Status Byte Register (STB).
•

M128: SRQ on Buffer Overrun (SRE Bit 7). Sending this command will cause the unit to generate a Service
Request when it has detected that an overrun of the Acquisition Buffer has occurred.

•

M032: SRQ on Event Detected (SRE Bit 5). Sending this command will cause the unit to generate a
Service Request when at least one of the defined events in the Event Status Register (ESR) has occurred.

•

M016: SRQ on Message Available (SRE Bit 4). Sending this command will cause the unit to generate a•M008: SRQ on Scan Available (SRE Bit 3). Sending this command will cause the unit to generate a•M004: SRQ on Ready (SRE Bit 2). Sending this command will cause the unit to generate a Service

Service Request when there is data available in the output queue to be read.
Service Request when at least one acquisition scan is available in the Acquisition Buffer to be read.
Request when the unit has completed executing a set of commands and is ready to process anothercommand from the IEEE 488 bus controller.
•

M002: SRQ on Trigger Event (SRE Bit 1). Sending this command will cause the unit to generate a Service
Request when it has detected a valid Trigger (trigger start event) or Stop (trigger stop event) from theprogrammed trigger source.

•

M001: SRQ on Alarm (SRE Bit 0). Sending this command will cause the unit to generate a Service
Request when it has detected a valid alarm condition.

•

M000: This is the power-on default mask value. Sending this command disables the unit from generating
Service Requests by clearing the entire mask of the Service Request Enable Register (SRE) to zero.

For more information, see section Status-Reporting & Mask Registers in the chapter System Operation.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;M0X”
PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;M3X”

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual‘ Clear the Service Request Enable Register (SRE)‘ Set the unit to SRQ on Alarm or Trigger (003 = 002 + 001)

889897

API Command Reference A-43

M# - Set Measuring Mode
MultiScan/1200 only
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferredM#modeSpecify measuring mode. Valid options for mode are: 0 - Line-cycle
integration / high-speed multi-channel mode, and 1 - Single-channel highspeed burst mode.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Measuring Mode (M#) command selects one of the two basic internal measuring modes supported by theMultiScan/1200 unit:•

Line-Cycle Integration / High-Speed Multi-Channel (or Default) Mode. In the line-cycle integration / highspeed multi-channel mode, the MultiScan/1200 samples channel data at 1.92 kHz or once every 520.83 µs.
You can select the number of samples over which to average in order to accomplish noise filtering.

•Single-Channel High-Speed Burst Mode. In the single-channel burst mode, the MultiScan/1200 collects
data in user-defined multiples of 256 samples at a user-defined sampling frequency between 38.5 Hz and20.0 kHz.

For more information on MultiScan/1200 measuring mode parameters, see section Measuring Modes(MultiScan/1200 Only) in the chapter System Configuration, and see commands Set Burst Mode Frequency (F#)
and Set Averaging Weight (W#).
EXAMPLES

A-44

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M#0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;W#32X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Y0,10,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-3,1X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”‘ Select Line Cycle Integration/High-Speed Multi-Channel Mode
‘ Select number of samples = 32
‘ Setup to read 10 Post-Trigger scans‘ Enable Channels 1 - 3 for thermocouples Type J‘ Arm the unit
‘ Trigger unit and collect scans

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M#1X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F#10000.0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Y0,4096,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1,26X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”‘ Select Single Channel High-Speed Burst Mode
‘ Set sampling frequency = 10 KHz‘ Set count to take a 1.0-megabyte amount of samples‘ Select Channel 1 for reading 250 Volts AC samples‘ Arm the unit
‘ Trigger unit and collect scans

API Command Reference

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualN - Set Event Mask
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferred

Nmask

N?

Directly sets the Event Status Enable Register (ESE) where mask is in theform of the number nnn such that 000 < nnn < 255 is summed from thefollowing conditions:
128 – ESB on Power On
004 – ESB on Query Error
064 – ESB on Buffer 75% Full002 – ESB on Stop Event
032 – ESB on Command Error
001 – ESB on Acquisition complete
016 – ESB on Execution Error
000 – ESB on Clear Event Mask
008 – ESB on Device Dependent Error
Query the Event mask.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Event Mask (N) command directly sets the Event Status Enable Register (ESE) which in turn, determines
which Event Status Register (ESR) conditions are enabled to generate the Event Status Register Bit (ESR Bit 5 or
ESB) in the Status Byte Register (STB). The bits in the ESE represent an exact image of the bits in the ESR.
When a condition is set in the ESR, its image bit is checked in the ESE. If any image bits are enabled, the bits inthe ESR will be mapped into the ESR Bit 5 (or ESB) in the STB.
Multiple conditions can be enabled simultaneously. If multiple conditions are contained within the same command
string, each Set Event Mask (N) command should be followed by the Execute (X) command. Otherwise, since theresulting Event Mask register value is the logical ORed value, or sum, of the individual values sent, the entire
summed value of all the desired conditions may be sent within one Set Event Mask (N) command. The
programmed Event Mask remains enabled until it is cleared by the receipt of a N000 command, or the receipt ofa Reset Power-On (*R) command.
The following list outlines the possible conditions of the Event Status Enable Register (ESE), as reflected in the
Event Status Register (ESR):•

N128: ESB on Power On (ESE Bit 7). Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB when theunit is first powered up or when the Reset Power-On (*R) command is issued.

•

N064: ESB on Buffer 75% Full (ESE Bit 6). Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB whenthe Acquisition Buffer has been filled to at least 75% of its capacity.

•

N032: ESB on Command Error (ESE Bit 5). Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB when•N016: ESB on Execution Error (ESE Bit 4). Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB when•N008: ESB on Device Dependent Error (ESE Bit 3). Sending this command will allow the setting of the
ESB when a conflict error has occurred. A conflict error is generated when a command cannot execute

an illegal command or command syntax error is detected.
one of several errors has occurred during the execution of a command.

correctly because it would interfere with other commands or settings.
•

N004: ESB on Query Error (ESE Bit 2). Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB when thecontroller has attempted to read from the output queue when no response is present or pending, or when a
response has been lost. Data may be lost when too much data is requested to be buffered in the queue,
where the controller has sent a new query before reading the response to a prior query.

•N002: ESB on Stop Event (ESE Bit 1). Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB when the•N001: ESB on Acquisition Complete (ESE Bit 0). Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB

user-defined Stop (trigger stop event) of a configured acquisition has been satisfied.
when the acquisition operation has been completed.
•

N000: This is the power-on default mask value. Sending this command clears the entire mask of the Event
Status Enable (ESE) Register to zero.

For more information, see section Status-Reporting & Mask Registers in the chapter System Operation.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;N0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;N3X”

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual‘ Clear the Event Status Enable Register (ESE)‘ Enable ESB on detection of Stop Event or Acquisition Complete(003 = 002 + 001)

889897

API Command Reference A-45

O - Set Digital Outputs
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemImmediate

Obank1,bank2,
bank3,bank4
O?

Set any of the 32 digital outputs, grouped into four 8-bit banks, to a specified
setting, where bankn (for n = 1, 2, 3, 4) is an argument in the form of thenumber nnn such that 000 < nnn < 255 when converted to binary format
represents the desired settings for the 8-bit bank.
Query current state of digital output.

DESCRIPTION
Located on the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 rear panel, the DB50 digital I/O connector provides eight (8)digital input lines and thirty-two (32) digital output lines. The Set Digital Outputs (O) command allows you to force
any of the 32 digital outputs, grouped into four 8-bit banks, to a specific setting. For each digital output, you canspecify whether the bit should be cleared with a 0 (active low, logic false) or set with a 1 (active high, logictrue).
The Set Digital Outputs (O) command will override the current alarm output status as set via the Assign Alarm
Output (A) command. However, if it is desired not to affect a certain bank (for example, to preserve the alarm
output states), a value of 999 can be used for the argument for that bank. This will effectively “mask off” thatbank from being updated.
The Bank to Digital Output mapping is as follows:
Bank 1 (Byte 1): Digital Outputs (Bits) 07 through 00.
Bank 2 (Byte 2): Digital Outputs (Bits) 15 through 08.
Bank 3 (Byte 3): Digital Outputs (Bits) 23 through 16.
Bank 4 (Byte 4): Digital Outputs (Bits) 31 through 24.
Each argument bankn represents the desired bitmapping for the corresponding bank of digital outputs. The
argument is a decimal number, which, when converted to binary format, represents the desired settings for thatbank of digital outputs. For example, an argument of 201 for bank2 would be interpreted in binary as
11001001 as follows:
Argument
Decimal Values
Active High/Low
Logical Value
Bit
Digital I/O Line
Digital Outputs

128
High

64
High

1

1

15
16

14
15

0
Low

201 = 128 + 64 + 8 + 1
0
8
Low
High

0

0

1

0
Low

0

11
13
12
10
12
14
13
11
Digital Outputs Lines 16, 15, 12 and 09 are set.

0
Low

1
High

0

1

09
10

08
09

For more information on digital outputs, see section Digital I/O Configuration in the chapter TempScan/1100 &MultiScan/1200, or see section Digital I/O Configuration in the chapter System Configuration.
Note: In an 8-bit byte, Bits 00 through 07 correspond to digital input/output (DIO) lines 1 through 8. Also, Bit ncorresponds to the decimal value 2^n (where n is an integer from 00 to 07).
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;O?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
LINE INPUT #2, N$
PRINT N$O128,255,065,024
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;O000,999,076,234X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;O?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
LINE INPUT #2, O$
PRINT O$
O000,255,076,234

A-46

API Command Reference

889897‘ Get the current state of the digital output banks‘ Screen shows the current state of the banks‘ Set Banks 1, 3, and 4‘ Get the new state of the digital output banks‘ Screen shows the new state of the banks‘ Note that Bank 2 did not change

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualP - Program Trigger Times
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

ChannelDeferred

Pstart,stop

Set the Trigger and/or Stop times for an acquisition configured for start and/or
stop on absolute time, where start and stop are in the standard
Time/Date input format: hh:mm:ss:t,MM/DD/YY where hh is in hours,
mm is in minutes, ss is in seconds, t is in tenths of a second, MM is themonth, DD is the day, and YY is the year.

P?

Query current start and stop times in the form: Pstart,stop

DESCRIPTION
The Program Trigger Times (P) command is used to specify the Trigger (trigger start event) and/or Stop (trigger
stop event) times for an acquisition that is configured for a start and/or stop on absolute time, as set via the Set
Trigger Configuration (T) command. If only the start time is needed, the stop argument should be set to
00:00:00.0,00/00/00. Likewise, if only the stop time is needed, the start argument should be set to
00:00:00.0,00/00/00.
In addition to the ability to start/stop on a particular Time/Date, the unit has the ability to start/stop at a particularTime, independent of the Date. If the Date for the start/stop Time is of no concern, then the Date portion of theTime/Date field should be set to 00/00/00. In this way, the unit can start or stop an acquisition at a particularTime regardless of the Date. This feature is particularly useful when using the Auto Re-arm feature of the unit
where, for example, data can be collected at a particular time each day for a number of days without userintervention.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;S12:54:00.0,01/01/98X”
PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;P01:00:00.0,01/01/98,
02:00:00.0,01/01/98X”
PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;T11,11,0,0X”

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Set the internal real-time clock of the unit
‘ Set start (1:00 am) and stop (2:00 am)
acquisition times‘ Configure for start/stop on absolute time

API Command Reference A-47

Q - Set Query Terminator
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferred

Qresp,
hll,
scan,
block,
sep

Set the query terminators via the following parameters: resp is the response
terminator, hll is the channel terminator, scan is the scan terminator, andblock is the Trigger Block terminator.
sep is the separator terminator which determines whether or not a separator
character should be used. Valid options for sep are: 0 - Place noseparators in returned buffered scan data when it is read, and 1 - Place aseparator whose value is determined by the current Set User Terminator (V)command setting into the returned buffer data when it is read.

Q?

Query current terminator settings.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Query Terminator (Q) command is used to set the data output terminators via the following parameters –resp, hll, scan, block, and sep. Each of the first four arguments may be defined with one of the following
terminator types, where USER is the user-defined User Terminator corresponding to the ASCII decimal value
val, as defined by the Set User Terminator (V) command:
Terminator
Type

0
1
2
3
4
5

Terminator Description
IEEE-488

Serial(None)CR LF/EOI
CR LF
LF CR/EOI
LF CR
CR/EOI(None)
CR LF
CR LF
LF CR
LF CR
CR

Terminator
Type

6
7
8
9
10

Terminator Description
IEEE-488

SerialCR
LF/EOI
LF
USER/EOI
USER

CR
LF
LF
USER
USER

The first argument resp specifies the response terminator for general purpose queries which do not request
High/Low/Last or Acquisition Buffer data. The second argument hll specifies the channel terminator to be usedfor High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers query requests. The third argument scan specifies the terminator which will
follow each scan that is output for Acquisition Buffer query requests, except when following the last scan in the
Trigger Block. In this case, the next argument block specifies the terminator which will follow each Trigger
Block. The last argument sep specifies whether or not a reading separator character should be placed between
each returned reading in the Acquisition Buffer scan data. Like the USER terminator, this separator is a userdefined User Terminator with the ASCII decimal value val, set via the Set User Terminator (V) command.
For more information on terminators, see section Data Format Configuration in the chapter System Configuration.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-2,1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;F0,0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q7,7,0,0,0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?X"PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
Q07,07,00,00,00
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U13X"
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT#1 A$+0104.20
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT#1 A$+0010.40
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q7,0,0,0,0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U13X"
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT#1 A$+0104.20+0010.40

A-48

API Command Reference

889897‘ Configure two channels for Type J thermocouples‘ Configure Engineering Units, degrees C‘ Set the resp and hll terminators to LF/EOI‘ Get the current query terminators‘ Screen shows the current query terminators‘ Request the last readings‘ Get reading for Channel 1‘ Screen shows reading‘ Get reading for Channel 2‘ Screen shows reading‘ Now set the resp terminator only to LF/EOI‘ Request the last readings‘ Get readings for Channels 1 through 4' Screen shows readings for Channels 1 and 2
together, instead of one at a time

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualQC? - Query Card Data
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Calibration
Immediate

QC?

Read back the card identification and calibration information from thescanning card previously selected by the Select Card (C#) command.

DESCRIPTION
Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary
for normal, everyday operation.
The Query Card Data (QC?) command is used to read back the card identification and calibration informationfrom the scanning card previously selected by the Select Card (C#) command. When this command is issued,
the returned information includes the following:•

Card Number, Card Serial Number, and Card ID (type).

•

Offsets, Negative Gains and Positive Gains for PGA values 0 through 7.

•

Offsets for Cold-Junction Temperature Sensors 1 through 4.

•

Time/Date of the last calibration.

For the Card ID, the types are as follows:
Card ID Types

-1
0
1
2
16
17

TempScan/1100 Scanning Card
No scanning card is installed

MultiScan/1200 Scanning Cards
No scanning card is installed

TempTC/32B thermocouple card

(N/A)

TempV/32B volts card

(N/A)

TempRTD/16B RTD card

(N/A)

(N/A)

MTC/24 thermocouple/volts card

(N/A)

MHV/24 high-voltage card

For information on selecting chassis, card only, or card/chassis information, see command Select Card (C#).
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; C#5X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; QC?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$
C#:005 SN:0000000 ID:016
O:+00000 G:1.00000,1.00000
O:+00000 G:1.00000,1.00000
O:+00000 G:1.00000,1.00000
O:+00000 G:1.00000,1.00000
O:+00000 G:1.00000,1.00000
O:+00000 G:1.00000,1.00000
O:+00000 G:1.00000,1.00000
O:+00000 G:1.00000,1.00000
CJ:+00000,+00000,+00000,+00000#
01:34:23.6,08/23/97

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Select the fourth slave card - 5‘ Read back the fourth slave card information' Get response' Screen shows the following card information:
On line 1, the Card Number, Card Serial Number,and Card ID (type); on lines 2 through 9, the Offsets,
Negative Gains, and Positive Gains for PGA values
0 through 7; on line 10, the Offsets for Cold-Junction
Temperature Sensors 1 through 4; and on the lastline, the Time/Date of last calibration.

API Command Reference A-49

R - Read Buffered Data
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

BufferImmediate

Rtype

Read scan data from the Acquisition Buffer where type is the type of data
request being made. Valid options for type are: 1 - Read the oldest scancurrently residing in the Acquisition Buffer, 2 - Read the oldest complete
Trigger Block currently residing in the Acquisition Buffer, and 3 - Read all
the scan data that currently resides in the Acquisition Buffer.

R?

Query the contents of the Acquisition Buffer.

DESCRIPTIONThe TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 Acquisition Buffer is a FIFO (First-In First-Out) buffer. In other words, theoldest scan data to be written into the buffer is the first scan data to be read from the buffer when a read operationis performed. Then once the scan data is read from the buffer by the controller, that data is erased from thebuffer.
To retrieve the scan data after a Trigger has occurred, the unit provides multiple query functions. The Read
Buffered Data (R) command is used to retrieve data specifically from the Acquisition Buffer. You can use thiscommand to read anywhere from one scan to all the scan data currently residing in the buffer. This commandhas the following valid options:•

Read the oldest scan currently residing in the Acquisition Buffer (R1).

•

Read the oldest complete Trigger Block currently residing in the Acquisition Buffer (R2).

•

Read all the scan data currently residing in the Acquisition Buffer (R3).

The Read Buffer Data (R) command operates as follows: When a command is interpreted, the requested scandata, if it exists, is moved one scan at a time from the Acquisition Buffer to the output queue where it will wait instate until you remove it. Once the data is removed from the output queue, the next Read Buffered Data (R)command may be issued.
For more information on the Acquisition Buffer, see section Acquisition Buffer in the chapter System Operation.
For information on formatting the query terminators for buffer data, see command Set Query Terminators (Q).
Note: If the appropriate amount of scan data is not in the Acquisition Buffer at the time these commands areissued, a Command Conflict Error will result.
Note: For the MultiScan/1200 only, if the unit is in single-channel high-speed burst mode, then “scan” means one
block of 256 samples.
EXAMPLE

S% = 0
While (S% and 8) = 0
PRINT#1 “SPOLL07"
INPUT#2, S%
WENDPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R1X"
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
LINE INPUT#2, A$

A-50

API Command Reference‘ Wait for a scan

‘ Get the scan

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

R# - Read Last Readings
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemImmediateR#chans

Queries the last readings from the HLL Registers for specified channels.
chans may be in two forms: chan (for a single channel where 1 < chan <max) or first-last (for a range of channels where 1 < first <last < max), where max = 992 for the TempScan/1100 and max = 744
for the MultiScan/1200.

DESCRIPTION
The Read Last Readings (R#) command will return the last readings for specific channels from the High/Low/Last(HLL) Registers, as a subset of the following User Status (U) command query - Query last scan read (U13) –which returns the last readings for all the configured channels in the scan. This command is useful for querying
specific channels within the current channel configuration without having unwanted channels returned. The
response to this command takes the same form as the U13 command query, whereby each reading conforms to
the data output format specified via the Set Data Format (F) command. In addition, each channel is terminatedby the query terminator hll, as specified via the Set Query Terminator (Q) command.
For more information on the HLL Registers or data output formats, see section High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers in
the chapter System Operation, or see section Data Format Configuration in the chapter System Configuration.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-32,1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;F1,0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R#32X"
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
LINE INPUT #2, R$
PRINT R$
+0103.20
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R#1-4X"
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
LINE INPUT #2, S$
PRINT S$
-0003.70+0005.60+0010.20+0024.40

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Configure Channels 1 - 32 for Type J thermocouples‘ Set format for engineering units degrees C‘ Get the last reading for Channel 32‘ Screen shows the last reading(Channel 32 is 103.2 °C)‘ Get the last readings for Channels 1 - 4‘ Screen shows the last readings(Channel 1 is -3.7 °C)(Channel 2 is 5.6 °C)(Channel 3 is 10.2 °C)(Channel 4 is 24.4 °C)

API Command Reference A-51

S - Set Real-Time ClockTYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemImmediate

Stime

S?

Set the internal real-time clock where time is in the standard Time/Dateinput format: hh:mm:ss:t,MM/DD/YY where hh is in hours, mm is inminutes, ss is in seconds, t is in tenths of a second, MM is the month, DD
is the day, and YY is the year.
Query the internal real-time clock.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Real-Time Clock (S) command is used to set the battery-backed-up internal real-time clock of the unit.
The time argument follows the same format as the standard Time/Date input format. In order for the Time/Datestamping of output data to be accurate, the real-time clock must be set to an accurate Time/Date. Once set, thereal-time clock will remember the current time, even when powered off.
For more information on the real-time clock, Time/Date stamping and data formats, see section Additional
Configuration, section Stamping Configuration and section Data Format Configuration, respectively, in the chapter
System Configuration.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; S14:00:00.0,4/30/97X”

A-52

API Command Reference

889897‘ Current date and time

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

T - Set Trigger Configuration
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Acquisition
Deferred

Tstart,stop,
re-arm,sync

T?

Configure an acquisition of scan data with the following parameters:
start is the start event and stop is the stop event
re-arm determines if the unit should continue acquiring after the firstacquisition completes, where 1 is on and 0 is off.
sync determines if acquisition events should be synchronized with theinternal timebases, where 1 is on and 0 is off.
Query the present trigger configuration

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Trigger Configuration (T) command is used as the central command to assign the following events to the
TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit: The Trigger (trigger start event) and the Stop (trigger stop event). The
Trigger and Stop may also be assigned different trigger sources. In addition, the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command also determines whether or not, after the initial acquisition, the acquisition will be re-enabled
automatically, and whether or not the Trigger (trigger start event) should be synchronized with the Pre-Trigger
scan interval.
Since the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command governs the configuration of an acquisition, all other acquisitiondependent commands should be sent before the trigger sources are assigned via the Set Trigger Configuration(T) command. The required acquisition-dependent commands will depend on the selected trigger sources. For
instance, if the unit is configured for Trigger On (@) command, it will not be necessary to send the unrelated Set
Trigger Level (L) command.
The following table lists the valid trigger types and their associated commands prior to trigger configuration:
Trigger
Type

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Trigger Source Description

None - Event Not Defined
Trigger on (@) Command
Trigger on GET (IEEE 488 only)
Trigger on TALK (IEEE 488 only)
Trigger on Channel Above Level
Trigger on Channel Below Level
Trigger on TTL Signal Rising
Trigger on TTL Signal Falling
Trigger on Count
Trigger on Alarm Turning On
Trigger on Alarm Turning Off
Trigger on Absolute Time

Required Commands Prior To
Trigger Configuration

Optional
Commands
Prior To
Trigger
Configuration

With PreTrigger/ PostStop Scans

Without PreTrigger/ PostStop Scans

(N/A)

(N/A)

I,Y
I,Y
I,Y
I,Y,L
I,Y,L
I,Y
I,Y
I,Y
I,Y,C
I,Y,C
I,Y,P

I
I
I
I,L
I,L
I
I
I,Y
I,C
I,C
I,P

(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)

A
A
(N/A)

The first parameter start defines the Trigger (trigger start event) that is to take place in order for the unit tobegin acquiring Post-Trigger scans. Setting the start parameter to 0 will disable the acquiring of Post-Trigger
scans; this may be performed at any time during or after an acquisition. The start parameter will automaticallybe set to 0 upon the termination of an acquisition unless the re-arm flag is set to 1.
The second parameter stop defines the Stop (trigger stop event) that is to take place in order for the unit to stop
acquiring Post-Trigger scans. Setting the stop parameter to 0 will have the same effect as setting the stop
parameter to type 8 (Trigger on Count) with the Post-Stop count (Y command) set to 0. In both cases, the PostTrigger scans will be collected and the acquisition immediately terminated.
The third parameter re-arm defines the Auto Re-arm feature which determines whether successive acquisitions
will be re-enabled automatically, or remain disabled after the initial acquisition has terminated.
The fourth parameter sync defines the trigger synchronization flag which determines whether the Trigger will be
synchronized with the Pre-Trigger scan interval (I command), or begin as soon as the Trigger is detected,
regardless of the exact time it occurred.

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

API Command Reference A-53

For more information on Trigger and Stop configuration, see section Trigger Configuration in the chapter System
Configuration.
Note: If the Trigger and Stop are assigned different trigger types (sources), a combination of the acquisitiondependent commands prior to trigger configuration is required.
Note: For the MultiScan/1200 unit to recognize a Trigger (trigger start event) source which is set to TTL Level or
Alarm, at least one Pre-Trigger scan must be programmed via the pre parameter of the Set Counts (Y)command, to initiate scanning.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Y100,10000,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,1X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”

A-54

API Command Reference

889897‘ Set Pre-Trigger count to 100, Post-Trigger count to 10000
and define no Post-Stop count‘ Set Trigger as Trigger On (@) command, set Stop as
Post-Trigger Count (10000) and synchronize the
Trigger to the Pre-Trigger timebase interval‘ Issue Trigger

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualU - User StatusTYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemImmediate

Ureq

Request information about various internal conditions of the unit where req
refers to one of the following request types:
0 - Query and clear the Event Status Register (ESR)
1 - Query the Status Byte Register (STB)
2 - Query and clear the Calibration Status Register (CSR)
3 - Query the current system settings
4 - Query the current High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers
5 - Query and clear the current High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers
6 - Query the Buffer Status String
7 - Query the assigned alarm outputs
8 - Query the configured channels
9 - Query the digital inputs
10 - Query the installed memory option
11 - Query the current alarm channels
12 - Query the Time/Date stamping of the last calibration
13 - Query the last scan read
14 - Query the card ID types
15 - Query the product information
16 - Query the measuring mode parameters (MultiScan/1200 only)
17 - Query the Root Mean Square (RMS) value (MultiScan/1200 only)
18 - Query the acquisition states and various system flags

DESCRIPTIONThe User Status (U) command is used to return information about various conditions of the unit, and may be sent
at any time without interfering with normal operation. The following text provides more detailed information about
the User Status (U) command responses.
U0: Query and clear the Event Status Register (ESR). This request responds with an integer nnn of the•form 000 ≤ nnn ≤ 255, where the individual values are as follows, and multiple values are summed:

128 - Power On (Bit 7)
064 - Buffer 75% Full (Bit 6)
032 - Command Error (Bit 5)
016 - Execution Error (Bit 4)008 - Device Dependent Error (Bit 3)004 - Query Error (Bit 2)
002 - Stop Event (Bit 1)
001 - Acquisition Complete (Bit 0)•

U1: Query the Status Byte Register (STB). This request responds with an integer nnn of the form000 ≤ nnn ≤ 255, where the individual values are as follows, and multiple values are summed:
128 - Buffer Overrun (Bit 7)008 - Scan Available (Bit 3)
064 - RQS or MSS (Bit 6)
004 - Ready (Bit 2)
032 - Event Detected (Bit 5)002 - Triggered (Bit 1)
016 - Message Available (Bit 4)
001 - Alarm (Bit 0)•

U2: Query and clear the Calibration Status Register (CSR). This request responds with an integer nnn of
the form 000 ≤ nnn ≤ 255, where the separate values are as follows, and multiple values are summed.
The CSR Bits 7 and 6 respond with the following combined values:
192 - Calibration Mode, Command Active

064 - EEPROM Test Mode (Bit 6 only)(Both Bits 7 and 6)
128 - Calibration Mode, Idle (Bit 7 only)

000 - Normal Run Mode (Neither Bit 7 nor 6)(Not discussed in this manual.)

Meanwhile, the CSR Bits 5 through 0 respond with the following individual values:
If in Normal Run Mode (000), then:

032 - Read Failure (Bit 5)
016 - Write Failure (Bit 4)008 - Checksum Error (Bit 3)004 - NV-RAM Error (Bit 2)
002 - Invalid Password (Bit 1)
001 - Invalid Command (Bit 0)

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

If in either Calibration Modes (192 or 128), then:
032 - Read Failure – EEPROM Error (Bit 5)
016 - Write Failure – EEPROM Error (Bit 4)008 - Checksum Error – EEPROM Error (Bit 3)004 - Calibration Error (Bit 2)
002 - Invalid Password (Bit 1)
001 - Invalid Command (Bit 0)

API Command Reference A-55

•

U3: Query the current system settings. This request is equivalent to the following string of queries:
F?I?L?P?Q?S?T?Y? Consequently, this request responds with the following data in their respective
forms for all of the configured channels, according to the user-defined data and terminator formats:Fengr,format
Inorm,acq
Lchan,level,hyst
Pstart,stop•

Qresp,hll,scan,block,sep
Stime
Tstart,stop,re-arm,sync
Ypre,post,stop

U4: Query the current High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers. This request responds with the HLL Registers data
for all of the configured channels, according to the user-defined data and terminator formats. For more
information, see section High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers in the chapter System Operation.

•

U5: Query and clear the current High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers. This request responds with the HLL
Registers data for all of the configured channels, according to the user-defined data and terminator formats,and clears out the current High and Low readings for all of the configured channels. For more information,
see section High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers in the chapter System Operation.

•

U6: Query the Buffer Status String. This request responds with the following Buffer Status String data
fields. For more information, see section Acquisition Buffer in the chapter System Operation.
Number of Trigger Blocks Available (Field 1)
Position of Stop Event Pointer (Field 5)
Number of Scans Available (Field 2)
Time/Date Stamping of Stop Event (Field 6)
Current Position of Read Pointer (Field 3)
Position of End Scan Pointer (Field 7)
Time/Date Stamping of Trigger Event (Field 4)
Status of Current Trigger Block (Field 8)•

U7: Query the assigned alarm outputs. This request responds with the current digital alarm output
configuration in the form Achan,output for all channels that are currently assigned to digital outputs,
according to the user-defined data and terminator formats. (The A? command query only responds with thecurrent configuration or mode of the previously executed A command.)•U8: Query the configured channels. This request responds with the current channel configuration in theform Cchans,type[,lowsp,highsp,hyst] for all of the configured channels, according to theuser-defined data and terminator formats. (The C? command query only responds with the current
configuration or mode of the previously executed C command.)•U9: Query the digital inputs. This request responds with the current state of the eight digital inputs(provided via the rear panel DB50 digital I/O connector), as reflected in the active digital input lines of theconnected instrument. For more information, see command Set Digital Input Stamping (I#).

•

U10: Query the installed memory option. This request responds with the current amount of memory
installed (in kilobytes), as follows:
00256 - 256 KB option
04096 - 4 MB option
01024 - 1 MB option
08192 - 8 MB option•

U11: Query the current alarm channels. This request responds with all of the channels which have been
programmed with valid alarm setpoints, in the form ccc,a,ccc,a,ccc,a,… etc., where ccc is a 3-digit
channel number and a is the current alarm state of that channel number. For example, a response may be:
001,0,008,1,013,1,512,1,690,0 which indicates that at the time of the query, Channels 1 and690 were not in an alarm state, whereas Channels 8, 13, and 512 were in an alarm state.

•

U12: Query the Time/Date stamping of the last calibration. This request responds with a number sign (#) to
distinguish this Time/Date stamping from other Time/Date stampings, followed by the Time/Date of the lastcalibration, according to the user-defined data formats. For example, a response in absolute Engineering
Units may be: #12:31:01.237,04/24/97•

U13: Query the last scan read. This request responds with the HLL Registers data for all of the configured
channels of the last scan only, according to the user-defined data and terminator formats. For more
information, see section High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers in the chapter System Operation.

•

U14: Query the card ID types. This request responds with the card ID types for all of the maximum 31
scanning card slots in the system, whether or not the system is expanded, as follows:
For the TempScan/1100 system:
For the MultiScan/1200 system:-1 - No scanning card is installed.
-1 - No scanning card is installed.
0 - TempTC/32B thermocouple card.
1 - TempV/32B volts card.
2 - TempRTD/16B RTD card

16 - MTC/24 thermocouple/volts card.
17 - MHV/24 high-voltage card

Note that the U14 command can only be issued when all of the channels are in an unconfigured state.
Otherwise, if any channels are configured, the system will issue a Command Conflict Error. To clear any
configured channels, issue the Clear Channel Configuration (*C) command.

A-56

API Command Reference

889897

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual•

U15: Query the product information. This request responds with the current TempScan/1100 orMultiScan/1200 product information including version levels.

•

U16: Query the measuring mode parameters (MultiScan/1200 only). For the MultiScan/1200 only, thisrequest is equivalent to the following string of measuring mode queries: M#?F#?W#? Consequently, thisrequest responds with the following measuring mode data in their respective forms:
M#mode F#freq W#wt•

U17: Query the Root Mean Square (RMS) value (MultiScan/1200 only). For the MultiScan/1200 only, thisrequest responds with the Root Mean Square (RMS) value computed from the last-completed acquisition insingle-channel high-speed burst mode. For more information, see section Measuring Modes(MultiScan/1200 Only) in the chapter System Configuration.

•

U18: Query the acquisition states and various system flags. This request responds with an integer nnn of
the form 000 ≤ nnn ≤ 255, where the separate values are as follows, and multiple values are summed.
The U18 Bits 7 through 4 respond with the following individual values:
128 - Acquisition Block Available (Bit 7)
064 - Power up under default configuration

032 - Not used.
016 - Scan Alarm Stamping Enabled (Bit 4)(Bit 6). Otherwise, power up under thelast configuration.
Meanwhile, the U18 Bits 3 and 2 respond with the following combined values:

012 - Not used.

004 - Absolute Scan Time Stamping Enabled

008 - Relative Scan Time Stamping

000 - Scan Time Stamping Not Enabled(Bit 2 only)
Enabled (Bit 3 only)(Neither Bits 3 nor 2)

Lastly, the U18 Bits 1 and 0 respond with the following combined values:

003 - Acquiring Post-Stop Scan Data

001 - Armed – Acquisition is armed and may be(Both Bits 1 and 0)
002 - Acquiring Post-Trigger Scan Data
(Bit 1 only)

000 - Idle – No acquisition is armed or acquiring any

acquiring Pre-Trigger Scan Data (Bit 0 only)
scan data (Neither Bit 1 nor Bit 0)

Note: Except for calibration errors, any other error conditions are cleared after the status string is read by thecontroller. Meanwhile, calibration errors are cleared when the unit is calibrated.
Note: Status strings are returned when the unit is next addressed to TALK. If the unit is configured to Trigger on
TALK, requesting a status report will not cause the unit to trigger.
EXAMPLES
Refer to the EXAMPLES section for each of the following commands:*K - Change Calibration Keyword
C - Configure Channels
C# - Select Card
F - Set Data Format
K - Enter Calibration Mode
Q - Set Query Terminator
X - Execute
Y - Set Counts

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897

API Command Reference A-57

V - Set User Terminator
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferredVval
V?

Set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric value (ASCII
value) val is in the range 0 to 255.
Query the present User Terminator value.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set User Terminator (V) command is used to set the user-defined User Terminator value to any character
whose numeric value (ASCII value) is in the range 0 to 255. The User Terminator may be used by the Set Query
Terminator (Q) command to specify a user-defined terminator for any of the defined terminator types or as areading separator for the Read Buffered Data (R) command.
For more information on data output (or query) terminators, see command Set Query Terminator (Q), or see
section Data Format Configuration in the chapter System Configuration. For more information on ASCII
characters, see section Appendix B.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Q1,0,1,1,1X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;V44X”
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-4,1X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;I00:00:01.0,
00:00:00.1”
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Y0,1000,0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;@X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R1X”
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT A$
0020.30,0023.80,0034.90,0013.50
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;V58X”
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R1X
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT A$
0020.30:0023.80:0034.90:0013.50

A-58

API Command Reference

889897‘ Set the reading separator (fifth parameter) flag on‘ Data format is Engineering Units, degrees Celsius‘ Set the User Terminator to be a comma (,)‘ Configure Channels 1 - 4 as Type J thermocouples‘ Configure scan interval‘ Configure Post-Trigger Counts‘ Set Trigger as Trigger On (@) command, and set Stop as
Counts‘ Trigger the acquisition‘ Read oldest scan
‘ Retrieve the oldest scan
‘ Screen shows the scan data readings separated bycommas‘ Set the User Terminator to be a colon (:)‘ Read the next scan
‘ Retrieve the next scan
‘ Screen shows scan data readings separated by colons

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

W# - Set Averaging Weight
MultiScan/1200 only
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemDeferredW#wt

Specify the number of samples to average in line cycle integration / highspeed multi-channel mode where wt is the averaging weight. Valid options
for wt are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 (default), 64, 128, and 256.

DESCRIPTIONThe Set Averaging Weight (W#) command selects how many samples to average for each thermocouple or DC
volts channel, or how many samples over which the Root Mean Square (RMS) is calculated for AC volts. Whenthe MultiScan/1200 unit is in line cycle integration/high-speed multi-channel mode with the default weight of 32
samples per channel, the unit can provide AC voltage, DC voltage, and thermocouple readings at a rate of up to
44 channels per second.
Further noise filtering is available with averaging over 2, 4, or 8 line cycles (at 32 samples per line cycle) byselecting a weight of 64, 128, or 256 samples, respectively. If noise resulting from AC line pickup is not aconcern, you can program the MultiScan/1200 unit to average 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 samples per channel for fasterscanning throughput.
Weight (wt)Line Cycles (32 Measurements Each)

Maximum Number of Channels

1,2,4,8,16,32
64
128
256

1
2
4
8

744
431
234
122

For more information on MultiScan/1200 measuring mode parameters, see section Measuring Modes(MultiScan/1200 Only) in the chapter System Configuration, and see commands Set Burst Mode Frequency (F#)
and Set Measuring Mode (M#).
Note: Due to hardware constraints, weights greater than 32 (default) limit the number of channels which can be
active in an acquisition.
Note: The MultiScan/1200 unit only supports the measurement of AC voltages where the frequency of the input
signal is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle. Consequently, sampling weights less than 32 can yield
incorrect results. In order to compute an accurate Vrms value, you must program a frequency which will
yield a sufficient even integer number of samples per line cycle.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M#0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;W#64X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Y0,10,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-3,1X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X”
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Select line cycle integration/high-speed multi-channel mode
‘ Select number of samples = 64
‘ Setup to read 10 Post-Trigger scans‘ Enable Channels 1 - 3 for Type J thermocouples‘ Arm the unit
‘ Trigger unit and collect scans

API Command Reference A-59

X - Execute
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAXDESCRIPTION

SystemImmediate

X

Execute preceding command string.

Deferred commands are interpreted and processed in the Acquisition Buffer as they are received, but they require
the Execute (X) command to be issued in order to be executed. If multiple system commands are used in thesame string, each use of the command must be followed by the Execute (X) command. Any number of Execute(X) commands may be inserted into the same command string. However, immediate commands do not require
an Execute (X) command to be processed.
While a command line is being interpreted, the front panel LED indicators will not be updated. These LED
indicators will only be updated when the unit is in a ready state. In order to determine if the unit is in a readystate, perform a Serial Poll on the Status Byte Register (STB) for the Ready Bit (Bit 3).
For more detail on deferred and immediate command types, see section Command Interpretation at the beginningof this chapter.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"CLEAR07"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*C"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-16,1 C17,2
C18-32,3"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U4"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;E?X"
PRINT#1,"ENTER07"
INPUT A$
E128

A-60

API Command Reference

889897‘ Clear the unit
‘ Clear the current channel configuration‘ Send channel configuration‘ Get HLL data for the new channel configuration.
(Note: ERROR LED indicator turns on)‘ Instruct the unit to execute the U4 command. Now theunit has its new channel configuration‘ Find out what caused the error‘ Retrieve error response‘ Screen shows E128 - Command Conflict Error, due tofact that no channels were configured (C is a deferredcommand) when the U4 was executed (U4 is animmediate command)

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualY - Set Counts
TYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

Acquisition
Deferred

Ypre,
post,
stop
Y?

Set acquisition counts where pre is the Pre-Trigger count, post is the PostTrigger count and stop is the Post-Stop count.
Query current acquisition count selections.

DESCRIPTION
For either the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit, the Set Counts (Y) command is used to set a Pre-Trigger,
Post-Trigger, and Post-Stop scan count to define the size of the acquisition. The optional Pre-Trigger countcannot exceed the memory size, but the required Post-Trigger count can. If the Post-Trigger count exceeds thememory size, it is the responsibility of the PC/IEEE 488 controller to deplete the FIFO Acquisition Buffer as thedata is being collected, or else a buffer overrun error will occur. The optional Post-Stop count can also be
associated with an acquisition to collect samples after the Stop (trigger stop event) occurs.
If a Trigger (trigger start event) is encountered before the Pre-Trigger count is satisfied, the unit will trigger but
have fewer than the specified Pre-Trigger count in its buffer. The following User Status (U) command query –Query the Buffer Status String (U6) – can be used to check the Pre-Trigger count. Although normal Pre-Trigger
scans are acquired as soon as the acquisition is armed, they are not available or valid until the Trigger occurs.
For the MultiScan/1200 only, in single-channel high-speed burst mode, samples are internally collected for theselected channel in 256-sample blocks. However, this externally appears the same as 256-channel scans in theline-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode. That is, when you program the number of 256-sample
blocks in the Post-Trigger count parameter post of the Set Counts (Y) command, you will retrieve the data from
the MultiScan/1200 unit as "Post-Trigger count" scans of 256 samples.
The single-channel high-speed burst mode is a one-shot operation, since it collects the specified number ofsamples and then stops. It is not continuous, and does not allow memory overflow and wrap-around. The
maximum amount of samples which can be taken is dictated by the amount of memory available, as follows:
Single-Channel High-Speed Burst Mode
System Memory"Post-Trigger Count"
256 Kbytes
1 Megabytes
4 Megabytes
8 Megabytes

2 to 512
2 to 2048
2 to 8192
2 to 16384

Note: The TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit can be configured to have different timebases for its PreTrigger and Post-Trigger states. When the Trigger condition is satisfied, the unit goes from the PreTrigger state to the Post-Trigger state, changing its timebase, if configured to do so. For more information,
see section Acquisition Configuration in the chapter System Configuration.
Note: For the MultiScan/1200 only, in single-channel high-speed burst mode, the Post-Trigger count parameter
post is used to select the number of 256-sample blocks to collect.
EXAMPLEPRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Y100,1000,50X"
PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;N0 N2 X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X"

TempScan / MultiScan User’s Manual

889897‘ Configure acquisition counts for 100 Pre-Trigger scans,
1000 Post-Trigger scans, and 50 Post-Stop scans‘ Configure Event Status Register Bit (ESB) of the Status
Byte Register (STB) to be set when the Pre-Trigger
count is satisfied‘ Set Trigger as Trigger On (@) command, and set Stop as
CountsAPI Command Reference A-61

? - QueryTYPE
EXECUTIONSYNTAX

SystemImmediate?

Query the present configuration or mode of the command preceding the ?

DESCRIPTION
Most commands have a corresponding query command formed by appending the question mark (?) commandextension. Stored in the output queue until the PC/IEEE 488 controller retrieves them, query command
responses consist of the present configuration or mode of the previously-executed command. When appropriate,
these query command responses take the form of a command string which, if it were executed, would put the unit
into the configuration it was in when the query was executed.
For example, the Set User Terminator (V) command query V? gives its response in the following form: Vval
where 0 < val < 255. This response is in the form of the previous Set User Terminator (V) command and, if it issent to the unit, it would set the user-defined User Terminator to the same value that it had when the query wasissued.
Query commands are immediate. However, even though query commands generate their responses as soon as
they are interpreted, before any other commands including the Execute (X) command, they must still be followedby this Execute (X) command for proper termination. Any number of query commands can be combined into one
command string to create a specialized status command that responds with only the information of interest for agiven application. Query command responses are always fixed-length strings in a pre-defined format.
For more information on command execution, see section Command Interpretation at the beginning of thischapter, and see command Execute (X).
EXAMPLEPRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; V1X V?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$PRINT A$
V1
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; V0X V?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$PRINT A$
V0
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; V4 V?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$PRINT A$
V0
PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; V?X”
PRINT#1, “ENTER07”
INPUT A$PRINT A$
V4

A-62

API Command Reference

889897‘ Get the response of the current User Terminator‘ Retrieve response‘ Screen shows the current User Terminator V1‘ Change the User Terminator and get response‘ Retrieve response‘ Screen shows new User Terminator V0‘ Change User Terminator and get response, without using
the intermediate Execute (X) command‘ Retrieve response‘ Screen still shows the V0 because the immediate
command V? was executed before the deferredcommand V4‘ Again get the response of the current User Terminator‘ Retrieve response‘ Screen shows new User Terminator V4

TempScan / MultiScan User’s ManualAppendix B – IEEE 488, Serial, and ASCIIB

IEEE 488 Bus & Serial Bus Lines …… B-1
IEEE 488 Bus Commands …… B-2
ASCII Codes …… B-3
ASCII Code Summary …… B-3
ASCII Code Details …… B-5

Abbreviations …… B-10

IEEE 488 Bus & Serial Bus Lines
Bus State

Bus Line
8

7

Data Transfer (DIO) Lines
6
5
4
3

2

1

0
1
0

0
0
1

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

1
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
1

0
1
0

1
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
1
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

1
0
0

0
0
1

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
1

0
0
0

0
1
0

1
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

Bus Management Lines
Interface Clear
IFC

REN

Remote Enable

IEEE 488 Interface: Bus Management Lines
Attention ($04)
ATN

EOI
SRQ

End-Or-Identify ($80)
Service Request ($40)

IEEE 488 Interface: Handshake Lines
Data Valid ($08)
DAV

NDAC
NRFD

Not Data Accepted ($10)
Not Ready For Data ($20)

Serial Interface: Bus Management Lines
Data Terminal Ready ($02)
DTR

RI
RTS

Ring Indicator ($10)
Request To Send ($01)

Serial Interface: Handshake Lines
Clear To Send ($04)
CTS

DCD
DSR

Data Carrier Detect ($08)
Data Set Ready ($20)

Hexadecimal & Decimal Values
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

889597

$80

$40

$20

$10

$08

$04

$02

$01

128

064

032

016

008

004

002

001

IEEE488, Serial, & ASCII

B-1

IEEE 488 Bus Commands…… A-

Bus State

DCL
GET
GTL
LAG
LLO
MLA
MTA
PPC
PPD
PPU
SCG
SDC
SPD
SPE
TAG
TCT
UNL
UNT

IEEE 488 Bus Command(ATN is asserted “1”)Device Clear
Group Execute Trigger ($08)
Go To Local ($01)
Listen Address Group ($20-3F)
Local Lock Out ($11)
My Listen Address
My Talk Address
Parallel Poll Config
Parallel Poll Disable ($07)
Parallel Poll Unconfig ($15)
Second. Cmd. Group ($60-7F)
Selected Device Clear ($04)
Serial Poll Disable ($19)
Serial Poll Enable ($18)
Talker Address Group ($40-5F)
Take Control ($09)
Unlisten ($3F)
Untalk ($5F)

Hexadecimal & Decimal Values
Hexadecimal Value
Decimal Value

B-2

IEEE 488, Serial, & ASCII

889597

8

7

Data Transfer (DIO) Lines
6
5
4
3

2

1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1

0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0

0
0
0
r
0
r
r
P1
1
0
m
0
0
0
r
0
1
1

0
0
1
n
1
n
n
P0
1
1
d
0
1
0
n
1
1
1

1
0
0
a
1
a
a
0
0
1
c
0
1
1
a
0
1
1

0
1
0
d
0
d
d
S
0
0
o
0
1
1
d
1
1
1

1
0
0
d
0
d
d
P2
1
1
m
1
0
0
d
0
1
1

$80

$40

$20

$10

$08

$04

$02

$01

128

064

032

016

008

004

002

001

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

…… A-ASCII Codes…… A-ASCII Code Summary…… A-Decimal Values 00 to 63 – ACG, UCG & LAG
Box Items
Hexadecimal Value

$41

65

Decimal ValueA
Bus Message(in center) ASCII Character01

Addressed Command Group (ACG)$00

00 $01

NUL

01 $02SOH
GTL
08 $09

$08

BS

STX
09 $0A

HT

GET

TCT

$10

16 $11

02 $0303 $04

ETX

EOT
SDC
11 $0C

10 $0BLF

04 $05VT

05 $06ENQ
12 $0DFF

06 $07

ACK

BEL
PPD
14 $0F

13 $0E

CR

07

SO

15

SI

Universal Command Group (UCG)DLE

17 $12DC1
LLO
24 $19$18CAN

18 $13DC2
25 $1A

EM

SPE

SPD

$20

32 $21

19 $14DC3

DCL
27 $1C

26 $1BSUB

20 $15DC4

ESC

21 $16NAK
PPU
28 $1DFS

22 $17SYN
29 $1EGS

23

ETB
30 $1F

RS

31

US

Listen Address Group (LAG)

SP
00
$28

33 $22!
01
40 $29

(
08
$30

02
41 $2A09
48 $31

16
$38

”

)

0
8

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B04
43 $2C11
50 $33

18
57 $3A

:

88959715
54 $3722
61 $3E55

7
2362 $3F

>
30

47

/

6

=
29

07
46 $2F14
53 $3621
60 $3D

39

’

.

5

<
28

06
45 $2E13
52 $3520
59 $3C38 $27

&

-

4

;
27

05
44 $2D12
51 $3419
58 $3B

37 $26

%

,

3

26

36 $25

$

+

2

9
25

03
42 $2B10
49 $32

17
56 $3935 $24

#

*

1

24

34 $23

63?
UNL

IEEE488, Serial, & ASCII

B-3

…… A-

Decimal Values 64 to 127 – TAG & SCG
Box Items
Hexadecimal Value

$41

65

Decimal ValueA
Bus Message(in center) ASCII Character

01
Talk Address Group (TAG)$40

64 $41@00$48

65 $42A
01
72 $49

H
08
$50
16
$58

I

X

Y

Z

[

\

O

V

]

79

15
86 $5722
93 $5E

29

G

N

U

71

07
78 $4F14
85 $5621
92 $5D

28

F

M

T

70 $4706
77 $4E13
84 $5520
91 $5C

27

E

L

S

69 $4605
76 $4D12
83 $5419
90 $5B

26

D

K

R

68 $4504
75 $4C11
82 $5318
89 $5A

25

C

J

Q

67 $4403
74 $4B10
81 $5217
88 $5924

B
02
73 $4A09
80 $51

P

66 $43

87W
23
94 $5F

^
30

95

_
UNT

Secondary Command Group (SCG)$60

96 $61

‘
00
$68

01
104 $69

h
08
$70
16
$78

i

17
120 $79B-4

j

18
121 $7A

25IEEE 488, Serial, & ASCIIk

19
122 $7B

26

l

20
123 $7C

27

889597m

21
124 $7D

28

n

29

22
125 $7E

o
119

w
23
126 $7F

~
30

111

15
118 $77

v

}

103

g
07
110 $6F

14
117 $76u|

102 $67f
06
109 $6E

13
116 $75t{

101 $66e05
108 $6D

12
115 $74sz

100 $65d04
107 $6C

11
114 $73ry

99 $64c
03
106 $6B

10
113 $72qx

98 $63b
02
105 $6A

09
112 $71p

24

97 $62

a

127

DEL
31

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

…… A-ASCII Code Details…… A-Decimal Values 00 to 31 – ACG & UCG Characteristics
ASCII Control Codes (Decimal 00 to 31)
Hex
Character &…… A-Name
Abbreviation…… A-Value($)
Addressed Command Group (ACG)
Dec
Value

00

$00

…… A-None

/ NUL
01
$01
^A / SOH
02$02^B / STX
03$03^C / ETX
04$04^D / EOT
05$05^E / ENQ
06$06^F / ACK
07$07^G / BEL
08$08^H / BS
09$09^I / HT
10$0A^J / LF
11$0B^K / VT
12$0C^L / FF
13$0D^M / CR
14$0E^N / SO
15$0F^O / SI
Universal Command Group (UCG)
16$10^P / DLE
17$11^Q / DC1
18$12^R / DC2
19$13^S / DC3
20$14^T / DC4
21$15^U / NAK
22$16^V / SYN
23$17^W / ETB
24$18^X / CAN
25$19^Y / EM
26$1A^Z / SUB
27$1B^[ / ESC
28$1C^\ / FS
29$1D^] / GS30$1E^^ / RS31$1F^_ / US

Notes:Null…… A-Bus Message

None

Start of Header

Go To Local (GTL)

Start of Text

None

End of Text

None

End of Transmission

Selected Device Clear (SDC)

InquiryNone

Acknowledgment

None

Bell

Parallel Poll Disable (PPD)

Backspace

Group Execute Trigger (GET)

Horizontal Tab

Take Control (TCT)Line Feed

None

Vertical Tab

None

Form Feed

None

Carriage Return

None

Shift Out

None

Shift In

None

Data Link Escape

None

Device Control 1

Local Lockout (LLO)

Device Control 2

None

Device Control 3

None

Device Control 4

Device Clear (DCL)

Negative Acknowledgment

Parallel Poll Unconfig (PPU)

Synchronous Idle

None

End of Transmission Block

None

CancelSerial Poll Enable (SPE)End of Medium

Serial Poll Disable (SPD)Substitute

None

Escape

None

File Separator

NoneGroup Separator

None

Record Separator

None

Unit Separator

None

ASCII control codes are sometimes used to “formalize” a communications session between
communication devices.
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4, FS, GS, RS, and US all have user-defined meanings, and may vary

in use between sessions or devices.
DC4 is often used as a general “stop transmission character.”Codes used to control cursor position may be used to control print devices, and move the print
head accordingly. However, not all devices support the full set of positioning codes.

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

889597

IEEE488, Serial, & ASCII

B-5

…… A-

Decimal Values 00 to 31 – ACG & UCG Descriptions
Dec
Name
Addressed Command Group (ACG)

ASCII Control Codes (00 to 31)
Description
Space filler character. Used in output timing for some device
drivers.

00

Null (NUL)01

Start of Header (SOH)

Marks beginning of message header.

02

Start of Text (STX)

Marks beginning of data block (text).

03

End of Text (ETX)

Marks end of data block (text).

04

End of Transmission (EOT)

Marks end of transmission session.

05

Inquiry (ENQ)

Request for identification or information.

06

Acknowledgment (ACK)07

Bell (BEL)“Yes” answer to questions or “ready for next transmission.” Used inasynchronous protocols for timing.
Rings bell or audible alarm on terminal.

08

Backspace (BS)Moves cursor position back one character.

09

Horizontal Tab (HT)Moves cursor position to next tab stop on line.

10

Line Feed (LF)

Moves cursor position down one line.

11

Vertical Tab (VT)Moves cursor position down to next “tab line.”

12

Form Feed (FF)Moves cursor position to top of next page.

13

Carriage Return (CR)Moves cursor to left margin.

14

Shift Out (SO)Next characters do not follow ASCII definitions.

15

Shift In (SI)Next characters revert to ASCII meaning.

Universal Command Group (UCG)
16

Data Link Escape (DLE)17

Device Control 1 (DC1)

Not defined. Normally used for ON controls.

18

Device Control 2 (DC2)

Usually user-defined.

19

Device Control 3 (DC3)

Not defined. Normally used for OFF controls.

20

Device Control 4 (DC4)

Usually user-defined.

21

Negative Acknowledgment (NAK)“No” answer to questions or “errors found, re-transmit.” Used inasynchronous protocols for timing.

22

Synchronous Idle (SYN)

Sent by asynchronous devices when idle to insure sync.

23

End of Transmission Block (ETB)

Marks block boundaries in transmission.

24

Cancel (CAN)

Indicates previous transmission should be disregarded.

25

End of Medium (EM)Marks end of physical media, as in paper tape.

26

Substitute (SUB)

Used to replace a character known to be wrong.

27

Escape (ESC)

Marks beginning of an Escape control sequence.

28

File Separator (FS)Marker for major portion of transmission.

29

Group Separator (GS)Marker for submajor portion of transmission.

30

Record Separator (RS)Marker for minor portion of transmission.

31

Unit Separator (US)Marker for most minor portion of transmission.

Notes:

Used to control transmissions using “escape sequences.”

ASCII control codes are sometimes used to “formalize” a communications session between
communication devices.
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4, FS, GS, RS, and US all have user-defined meanings, and mayvary in use between sessions or devices.
DC4 is often used as a general “stop transmission character.”Codes used to control cursor position may be used to control print devices, and move theprint head accordingly. However, not all devices support the full set of positioning codes.

B-6

IEEE 488, Serial, & ASCII

889597

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

…… A-

Decimal Values 32 to 63 – LAG
ASCII Character Set (Decimal 32 to 63)
Dec
Hex
Character
Name
Bus Message
Listen Address Group (LAG)
32
$20
Space
Bus address 00<space>
33

$21

34

$22

35

$23

36

$24

37

$25

38

$26

39

$27

40

$28

41

$29

42

$2A

43

$2B

44

$2C

45

$2D

46

$2E

47

$2F

!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
,
.
/

Exclamation Point

Bus address 01

Quotation MarkBus address 02

Number Sign

Bus address 03

Dollar Sign

Bus address 04

Percent Sign

Bus address 05

AmpersandBus address 06

Apostrophe

Bus address 07

Opening Parenthesis

Bus address 08

Closing Parenthesis

Bus address 09

Asterisk

Bus address 10

Plus Sign

Bus address 11

Comma

Bus address 12

Hyphen or Minus Sign

Bus address 13

PeriodBus address 14

Slash

Bus address 15

Listen Address Group (LAG)
48
$30
Zero
0

Bus address 16

49

$31

50

$32

51

$33

52

$34

53

$35

54

$36

55

$37

56

$38

57

$39

58

$3A

59

$3B

60

$3C

61

$3D

62

$3E

63

$3F

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?

One

Bus address 17

Two

Bus address 18

Three

Bus address 19

Four

Bus address 20

Five

Bus address 21

Six

Bus address 22

Seven

Bus address 23

Eight

Bus address 24

Nine

Bus address 25

Colon

Bus address 26

Semicolon

Bus address 27

Less Than Sign

Bus address 28

Equal Sign

Bus address 29

Greater Than Sign

Bus address 30

Question Mark

Unlisten (UNL)

889597

IEEE488, Serial, & ASCII

B-7

…… A-

Decimal Values 64 to 95 – TAG
ASCII Character Set (Decimal 64 to 95)
Dec
Hex
Character
Name
Bus Message
Talk Address Group (TAG)64$40
At Sign
Bus address 00
@

B-8

65

$41

66

$42

67

$43

68

$44

69

$45

70

$46

71

$47

72

$48

73

$49

74

$4A

75

$4B

76

$4C

77

$4D

78

$4E

79

$4F

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O

Capital A

Bus address 01

Capital B

Bus address 02

Capital C

Bus address 03

Capital D

Bus address 04

Capital E

Bus address 05

Capital F

Bus address 06

Capital G

Bus address 07

Capital H

Bus address 08

Capital I

Bus address 09

Capital J

Bus address 10

Capital K

Bus address 11

Capital L

Bus address 12

Capital M

Bus address 13

Capital N

Bus address 14

Capital O

Bus address 15

Talk Address Group (TAG)
80$50
Capital PP

Bus address 16

81

$51

Capital Q

Bus address 17

82

$52

Capital R

Bus address 18

83

$53

84

$54

85

$55

86

$56

87

$57

88

$58

89

$59

90

$5A

91

$5B

92

$5C

93

$5D

94

$5E

95

$5F

IEEE 488, Serial, & ASCII

Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_

Capital S

Bus address 19

Capital T

Bus address 20

Capital U

Bus address 21

Capital V

Bus address 22

Capital W

Bus address 23

Capital X

Bus address 24

Capital Y

Bus address 25

Capital Z

Bus address 26

Opening Bracket

Bus address 27

Backward Slash

Bus address 28

Closing Bracket

Bus address 29

Caret

Bus address 30

Underscore

Untalk (UNT)889597

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

…… A-

Decimal Values 96 to 127 – SCG
ASCII Character Set (96 to 127)
Dec
Hex
Character
Name
Bus Message
Secondary Command Group (SCG)
96
$60
Grave
Command 00
’
97

$61

98

$62

99

$63

100

$64

101

$65

102

$66

103

$67

104

$68

105

$69

106

$6A

107

$6B

108

$6C

109

$6D

110

$6E

111

$6F

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
I
j
k
l
m
n
o

Lowercase A

Command 01

Lowercase B

Command 02

Lowercase C

Command 03

Lowercase D

Command 04

Lowercase E

Command 05

Lowercase F

Command 06

Lowercase G

Command 07

Lowercase H

Command 08

Lowercase I

Command 09

Lowercase J

Command 10

Lowercase K

Command 11

Lowercase L

Command 12

Lowercase M

Command 13

Lowercase N

Command 14

Lowercase O

Command 15

Secondary Command Group (SCG)
112$70
Lowercase P
pCommand 16

113

$71

Lowercase Q

Command 17

114

$72

Lowercase R

Command 18

115

$73

116

$74

117

$75

118

$76

119

$77

120

$78

121

$79

122

$7A

123

$7B

124

$7C

125

$7D

126

$7E

127

$7F

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL

Lowercase S

Command 19

Lowercase T

Command 20

Lowercase U

Command 21

Lowercase V

Command 22

Lowercase W

Command 23

Lowercase X

Command 24

Lowercase Y

Command 25

Lowercase Z

Command 26

Opening Brace

Command 27

Vertical Line

Command 28

Closing Brace

Command 29

Tilde

Command 30

DeleteCommand 31

889597

IEEE488, Serial, & ASCII

B-9

Abbreviations(bullet symbol) “and” (e.g. *SC CA)

*
*CA
*SC
A/D
ACG
ACK
ADC
API
ASCII
ATN
BEL
BS
CA
CAN
CCL
CJC
CMD
CR
CSR
CTS
DAV
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DCD
DCL
DDE
DEL
DIO
DLE
DLL
DMA
DMM
DSR
DTR
EEPROM
EM
ENQ
EOI
EOL
EOT
EPROM
ESB
ESC
ESC
ESE
ESR
ETB
ETX

B-10

(asterisk symbol) “unasserted” (e.g. *SC)Not Controller Active mode
Not System Controller mode
Analog-to-Digital
Addressed Command Group
Acknowledgment (ASCII Code)Analog-to-Digital Converter
Application Program Interface
American Standard Code for Info. Interchange
Attention line
Bell (ASCII Code)Backspace (ASCII Code)Controller Active mode
Cancel (ASCII Code)Character Command Language
Cold Junction Compensation
Bus Command interpretation
Carriage Return (ASCII Code)Calibration Status Register
Clear To Send line
Data Valid line
Device Control 1 (ASCII Code)Device Control 2 (ASCII Code)Device Control 3 (ASCII Code)Device Control 4 (ASCII Code)
Data Carrier Detect line
Device Clear bus command
Dynamic Data Exchange
Delete (ASCII Code)
Data Transfer (I/O) line
Data Link Escape (ASCII Code)Dynamic Link Library
Direct Memory Access
Digital Multimeter
Data Set Ready line
Data Terminal Ready line
Electronically Erasable Programmable ROM
End of Medium (ASCII Code)Inquiry (ASCII Code)End-Or-Identify line
End-Of-Line terminator
End of Transmission (ASCII Code)Erasable Programmable ROM
Event Status Register bit
Error Source Register
Escape (ASCII Code)Event Status Enable Register
Event Status Register
End of Transmission Block (ASCII Code)
End of Text (ASCII Code)IEEE 488, Serial, & ASCII

889597

FCC
FF
FS
GET
GPIB
GS
GTL
GUI
H/W
HT
IDDC
IDDCO
IEEE
IFC
IOCTL
ISA
ISR
ist
LAG
LED
LF
LLO
LSB
MAV
MLA
MSB
MSS
MTA
N/U
NAK
NDAC
NRFD
NUL
NV-RAM
PCI
PPC
PPD
PPU
RAM
REN
RI
RMS
ROM
RQS
RS
RSrsv
RTD
RTS
SC
SCG

Federal Communications Commission
Form Feed (ASCII Code)File Separator (ASCII Code)Group Execute Trigger bus command
General Purpose Interface Bus
Group Separator (ASCII Code)
Go To Local bus command
Graphical User Interface
HardwareHorizontal Tab (ASCII Code)Invalid Device Dependent Command
Invalid Device Dependent Command Option
Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
Interface Clear line
Input/Output Control
Industry Standard Architecture bus
Interrupt Service Routine
Bus Device Individual Status
Listen Address Group bus command
Light-Emitting DiodeLine Feed (ASCII Code)
Local Lock Out bus command
Least Significant Bit
Message Available bit
My Listen Address
Most Significant Bit
Master Summary Status bit
My Talk Address
Not Used
Negative Acknowledgment (ASCII Code)Not Data Accepted line
Not Ready For Data line
Null (ASCII Code)
Non-Volatile RAM
Peripheral Component Interconnect bus
Parallel Poll Configure bus command
Parallel Poll Disable bus command
Parallel Poll Unconfig bus command
Random-Access Memory
Remote Enable line
Ring Indicator line
Root Mean Square
Read-Only Memory
Request for Service bit
Record Separator (ASCII Code)
Revised Standard (e.g. RS-232, RS-422)
Request for Service bit
Resistance Temperature Device
Request To Send line
System Controller mode
Secondary Command Group

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

SCPI
SCSI
SDC
SI
SO
SOH
SPD
SPE
SRE
SRQ
STB
STX

Standard Cmds. for Programmable Instruments
Small Computer System Interface bus
Selected Device Clear bus command
Shift In (ASCII Code)
Shift Out (ASCII Code)Start of Header (ASCII Code)
Serial Poll Disable bus command
Serial Poll Enable bus command
Service Request Enable Register
Service Request line
Status Byte Register
Start of Text (ASCII Code)TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

889597

SUB
SYN
T/C
TAG
TCT
TTL
UCG
UNL
UNT
US
VDM
VT

Substitute (ASCII Code)
Synchronous Idle (ASCII Code)
Thermocouple
Talk Address Group bus command
Take Control bus command
Transistor-Transistor Logic
Universal Command Group
Unlisten bus command
Untalk bus command
Unit Separator (ASCII Code)
Virtual DOS Machine
Vertical Tab (ASCII Code)

IEEE488, Serial, & ASCII

B-11

B-12

IEEE 488, Serial, & ASCII

889597

TempScan/MultiScan, Appendix B

Appendix C – Program Examples in Quick BasicC

Introduction …… C-1
Reading HLL Status …… C-3
TempScan/1100 …… C-3
MultiScan/1200 …… C-4

Reading HLL Data from Thermocouple & Volts Cards …… C-5
TempScan/1100 …… C-5
MultiScan/1200 …… C-6

Acquiring Pre- & Post-Trigger Data at Different Rates …… C-7
TempScan/1100 …… C-7
MultiScan/1200 …… C-9

Acquiring Pre- & Post-Trigger Data at the Same Rate …… C-11
TempScan/1100 …… C-11
MultiScan/1200 …… C-13

Operating Alarms …… C-15
TempScan/1100 …… C-15
MultiScan/1200 …… C-17

Using the IEEE 488 SRQ with Alarms …… C-19
TempScan/1100 …… C-19
MultiScan/1200 …… C-21

Acquiring Buffer Data in Binary Format …… C-23
TempScan/1100 …… C-23
MultiScan/1200 …… C-25

Acquiring HLL Data in Binary Format …… C-27
TempScan/1100 …… C-27
MultiScan/1200 …… C-29

Using Auto Re-arm to Capture Multiple Trigger Blocks …… C-31
TempScan/1100 …… C-31
MultiScan/1200 …… C-33

Acquiring Burst Mode Data (MultiScan/1200 Only) …… C-35

Introduction
This appendix walks through example programs for IEEE 488 and RS-232 applications. Although written
in QuickBASIC, the program logic and the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 device-dependentcommands apply to all languages and computers.
These program examples use the IEEE 488 bus via the Personal488 PC/IEEE 488 controller interface tocommunicate with the TempScan/1100 or MultiScan/1200 unit. These programs begin with a shortpreamble, which opens the software driver and substantiates communications. After the driver is opened,commands are issued to the driver through character strings in quotes.

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-1

The QuickBASIC PRINT and INPUT commands are used to communicate with the driver. The mostcommonly used driver commands are ENTER, OUTPUT, and SPOLL, as follows:•

ENTER gets data from the selected device, The syntax of the ENTER command is "ENTERaddr", where
addr is the IEEE 488 address of the instrument. Right after the ENTER command, the QuickBASICINPUT function must be used to bring the data into a language variable.

•

OUTPUT sends data to the selected device. The syntax of the OUTPUT command is "OUTPUTaddr;out
data", where addr is the IEEE 488 address of the instrument, and out data is the string ofcharacters to send to the device.
•

SPOLL is an abbreviation for Serial Poll which retrieves an 8-bit status response from the selected
instrument. The syntax of the SPOLL command is "SPOLLaddr", where addr is the IEEE 488
address of the instrument. Right after the SPOLL command, the QuickBASIC INPUT function must be
used to bring the data into a language variable.

Note:

C-2

In all of the following examples, the IEEE 488 bus address is 07.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix CReading HLL Status
TempScan/1100
Example 15a. HLL32.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 4(4) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(7) …… 15-WEND(8) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-32,3X”(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;Y1,0,0X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X"(11) …… 15-PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is collecting HLL data for all 32 channels”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to start or stop retrieving HLL data...”(13) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND
(14) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U4X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$(18) …… 15- …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO 32…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of Channel”; i…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT MID$(U$, (i * 66) - 65, 66)…… 15- …… 15-NEXT i(22) …… 15-WENDThis program is HLL32.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 32 channels, collect theHigh/Low/Last (HLL) Registers data, and post it on the screen.
•Lines 1- 3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the TempScan/1100 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait few seconds.

•

Lines 4-7: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Line 8: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used to configure a range of channels from 1 to
32 as Type T thermocouples.

•

Lines 9-10: Program for one Pre-Trigger scan via the Set Counts (Y) command. Then program the
Trigger (trigger start event) and Stop (trigger stop event) via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command to arm the acquisition.

•Lines 11-13: The next three lines tell you to hit a key to start the acquisition. The program will notproceed until a key is pressed.

•

Lines 14-22: Until another key is pressed to exit the loop, the U4 command is issued and the HLL datais collected. The IEEE 488 controller command OUTPUT sends U4 to the TempScan/1100, thecommand ENTER requests the data, then the command LINE INPUT gets the data from the IEEE 488
driver and places it in the variable U$. The FOR loop extracts the data for the individual channels fromthe string U$ and places them on the screen. Time and date information is also available in the HLL
data.

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-3

MultiScan/1200
Example 15b. HLL24.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 4(4) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(7) …… 15-WEND(8) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#0X”(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;W#32X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-24,3X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT07;Y1,0,0X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X"(13) …… 15-PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is collecting HLL data for all 24 channels”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to start or stop retrieving HLL data...”(15) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND
(16) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U4X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$(20) …… 15- …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO 24…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of Channel”; i…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT MID$(U$, (i * 66) - 65, 66)…… 15- …… 15-NEXT i(24) …… 15-WENDThis program is HLL24.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 24 channels, collect theHigh/Low/Last data, and post it on the screen.

C-4•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-7: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 8-9: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case, theMultiScan/1200 will be setup for line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode.

•

Line 10: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used to configure a range of channels from 1
to 24 as Type T thermocouples.

•

Lines 11-12: Program for one Pre-Trigger scan via the Set Counts (Y) command. Then program the
Trigger (trigger start event) and Stop (trigger stop event) via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command to arm the acquisition. Telling the MultiScan/1200 to start acquiring data is the last thingnecessary to start scanning. Since the MultiScan/1200 does not scan channels until an acquisition isarmed, arming an acquisition with one Pre-Trigger scan allows valid HLL data to be read.

•Lines 13-15: The next three lines tell you to hit a key to start the acquisition. The program will notproceed until a key is pressed.

•

Lines 16-24: Until another key is pressed to exit the loop, the U4 command is issued and the HLL datais collected. The IEEE 488 controller command OUTPUT sends U4 to the MultiScan/1200, thecommand ENTER requests the data, then the command LINE INPUT gets the data from the IEEE 488
driver and places it in the variable U$. The FOR loop extracts the data for the individual channels fromthe string U$ and places them on the screen. Time and date information is also available in the HLL
data.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix CReading HLL Data from Thermocouple & Volts Cards
TempScan/1100
Example 15c. HLL64.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 4(4) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(7) …… 15-WEND(8) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-32,3X”(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C33-64,14X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT07;Y1,0,0X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X"(12) …… 15-PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is collecting HLL data for all 32 channels”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to start or stop retrieving HLL data...”(14) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND
(15) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U4X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$(19) …… 15- …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO 32…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of Channel”; i…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT MID$(U$, (i * 66) - 65, 66)…… 15- …… 15-NEXT i(23) …… 15- …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO 32…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of Channel”; i + 32…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT MID$(U$, (32 * 66) + (i * 78) - 77, 78)…… 15- …… 15-NEXT i(27) …… 15-WENDThis program is HLL64.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 32 thermocouple and 32
volts channels, collect the High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers data, and post it on the screen.
•Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the TempScan/1100 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-7: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 8-9: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range of channels
from 1 to 32 as Type T thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from 33 to 64
as ±10 volts DC inputs.

•

Lines 10-11: Program for one Pre-Trigger scan via the Set Counts (Y) command. Then program the
Trigger (trigger start event) and Stop (trigger stop event) via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command to arm the acquisition.

•Lines 12-14: The next three lines tell you to hit a key to start the acquisition. The program will notproceed until a key is pressed.

•

Lines 15-27: Until another key is pressed to exit the loop, the U4 command is issued and the HLL datais collected. The IEEE 488 controller command OUTPUT sends U4 to the TempScan/1100, thecommand ENTER requests the data, then the command LINE INPUT gets the data from the IEEE 488
driver and places it in the variable U$. The FOR loop extracts the data for the individual channels fromthe string U$ and places them on the screen. Since the format of the volts data is subtly different thanthat of the thermocouple data, two different FOR loops must be used to extract the channel data. Timeand date information is also available in the HLL data.

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-5

MultiScan/1200
Example 15d. HLL48.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 4(4) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(7) …… 15-WEND(8) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#0X”(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;W#32X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-24,3X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C25-48,14X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;Y1,0,0X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X"(14) …… 15-PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is collecting HLL data for all 48 channels”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to start or stop retrieving HLL data...”(16) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND
(17) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U4X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$(21) …… 15- …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO 24…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of Channel”; i…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT MID$(U$, (i * 66) - 65, 66)…… 15- …… 15-NEXT i(25) …… 15- …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO 24…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of Channel”; i + 24…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT MID$(U$, (24 * 66) + (i * 78) - 77, 78)…… 15- …… 15-NEXT i(29) …… 15-WENDThis program is HLL48.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 24 thermocouple and 24
volts channels, collect the High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers data, and post it on the screen.

C-6•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-7: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 8-9: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case, theMultiScan/1200 will be setup for line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode.

•Lines 10-11: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range ofchannels from 1 to 24 as Type T thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from25 to 48 as ±10 volts DC inputs.

•

Lines 12-13: Program for one Pre-Trigger scan via the Set Counts (Y) command. Then program the
Trigger (trigger start event) and Stop (trigger stop event) via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command to arm the acquisition. Telling the MultiScan/1200 to start acquiring data is the last thingnecessary to start scanning. Since the MultiScan/1200 does not scan channels until an acquisition isarmed, arming an acquisition with one Pre-Trigger scan allows valid HLL data to be read.

•Lines 14-16: The next three lines tell you to hit a key to start the acquisition. The program will notproceed until a key is pressed.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C•Lines 17-29: Until another key is pressed to exit the loop, the U4 command is issued and the HLL datais collected. The IEEE 488 controller command OUTPUT sends U4 to the MultiScan/1200, thecommand ENTER requests the data, then the command LINE INPUT gets the data from the IEEE 488
driver and places it in the variable U$. The FOR loop extracts the data for the individual channels fromthe string U$ and places them on the screen. Since the format of the volts data is subtly different thanthat of the thermocouple data, two different FOR loops must be used to extract the channel data. Timeand date information is also available in the HLL data.

Acquiring Pre- & Post-Trigger Data at Different Rates
TempScan/1100
Example 15e. SLOW_ACQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 4(4) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(7) …… 15-WEND(8) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-32,1X”(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C33-64,2X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y30,1,200X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:01.0,00:00:00.3X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,1,0,0X"(13) …… 15-PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is collecting Pre-Trigger data and is readyfor a Trigger...”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to trigger the start of acquisition...”…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND
(16) …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT 07;@X”(17) …… 15-PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is collecting and uploading Post-Trigger data

as it becomes available...”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to trigger the stop of acquisition...”…… 15-i = 0(20) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15-i = i + 1…… 15-S% = 0(23) …… 15- …… 15-WHILE ((S% AND 8) <> 8)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%(26) …… 15- …… 15-WEND…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1 “OUTPUT 07; R1X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1 “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, READINGS$…… 15- …… 15-LOCATE 7, 1: PRINT “The scan”; i; “was:”; READINGS$(31) …… 15-WEND(32) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”(33) …… 15-i = 0…… 15-U% = 0…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15-i = i + 1…… 15-S% = 0(38) …… 15- …… 15-WHILE ((S% AND 8) <> 8)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%(41) …… 15- …… 15-WEND

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-7

(42) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1 “OUTPUT 07; R1X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1 “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, READINGS$…… 15- …… 15-LOCATE 7, 1: PRINT “The scan”; i; “was:”; READINGS$…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07; UOX:…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, :ENTER07”…… 15- …… 15-OUTPUT #2, U%…… 15- …… 15-IF U% = 1 THEN END(50) …… 15-WENDThis program is SLOW_ACQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 64 thermocouple
channels, collect the data as soon as it becomes available, and post it on the screen.

C-8•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the TempScan/1100 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-7: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 8-9: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range of channels
from 1 to 32 as Type J thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from 33 to 64
as Type K thermocouples.

•Line 10: The Set Counts (Y) command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the
different acquisition states. In this example, 30 scans will be taken while in the Pre-Trigger state, 1
while in the Post-Trigger state, and 200 while in the Post-Stop state. The Post-Trigger count is only
valid when the Stop (trigger stop event) is set to Count via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command. This example does not use Count, so this parameter is ignored.

•Line 11: The Set Scan Interval (I) command sets the time period between scans in hours-minutesseconds format. The TempScan/1100 can have two different scan intervals, one for the Post-Trigger
state (acquisition scan interval), and one for the Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop states (normal scaninterval). This example sets up the Post-Trigger scan interval to 0.3 seconds (3.33 Hz), and the PreTrigger and Post-Stop scan intervals to 1.0 second (1.0 Hz).

•Line 12: The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command sets up the Trigger (trigger start event ) andStop (trigger stop event) parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the Trigger and Stop are bothassigned the Trigger On (@) command character as sent by the controller. The Auto Re-arm flag is
disabled, so that the TempScan/1100 will not re-arm itself for another acquisition after the firstacquisition is complete. The synchronization flag is also disabled, so the TempScan/1100 will not resynchronize itself to the Trigger point when the Trigger (trigger start event) begins. When the
TempScan/1100 encounters the Execute (X) command, it will be armed and will start the collection of
the Pre-Trigger data.

•

Lines 13-16: The next four lines prompt you to hit a key to trigger the TempScan/1100 acquisition.
When a key is hit, the Trigger On (@) command character is sent as the Trigger.

•

Lines 17-31: While in the Post-Trigger state, this program will first check for an available scan via a
Serial Poll of the TempScan/1100, and will then compare the response with an 8. If a scan isavailable, the R1 command tells the TempScan/1100 to send the oldest scan to the IEEE 488
controller. The command ENTER requests the response data from the TempScan/1100. The command
INPUT places the retrieved data into the variable READINGS$. Since the acquisition is slow and thebuffer in the TempScan/1100 can be made very large, this program can go off to other foregroundtasks while the TempScan/1100 is acquiring data, and only occasionally query the unit and collect its
data.

•

Line 32: When a key is hit once again to stop the current acquisition, the program proceeds to the next
block where the Trigger On (@) command character is sent once again. This time, the character is sent
as the Stop, ending the Post-Trigger state and entering the Post-Stop state.

•Lines 33-50: Now the collection of the Post-Stop data begins by querying for new scans andrequesting the data. The program is done when the acquisition is complete.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

MultiScan/1200
Example 15f. SLOW_ACQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 4(4) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(7) …… 15-WEND(8) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#0X”(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;W#32X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-24,1X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C25-48,2X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y30,1,200X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:03.0,00:00:02.0X”(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,1,0,0X"(15) …… 15-PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is collecting Pre-Trigger data and is readyfor a Trigger...”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to trigger the start of acquisition...”…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND(18) …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT 07;@X”(19) …… 15-PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is collecting and uploading Post-Trigger

data as it becomes available...”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to trigger the stop of acquisition...”…… 15-i = 0(22) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15-i = i + 1…… 15-S% = 0(25) …… 15- …… 15-WHILE ((S% AND 8) <> 8)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%(28) …… 15- …… 15-WEND…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1 “OUTPUT 07; R1X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1 “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, READINGS$…… 15- …… 15-LOCATE 7, 1: PRINT “The scan”; i; “was:”; READINGS$(33) …… 15-WEND(34) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”(35) …… 15-i = 0…… 15-U% = 0…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15-i = i + 1…… 15-S% = 0(40) …… 15- …… 15-WHILE ((S% AND 8) <> 8)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%(43) …… 15- …… 15-WEND…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1 “OUTPUT 07; R1X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1 “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, READINGS$…… 15- …… 15-LOCATE 16, 1: PRINT “The scan”; i; “was:”; READINGS$…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07; UOX:…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, :ENTER07”…… 15- …… 15-OUTPUT #2, U%…… 15- …… 15-IF U% = 1 THEN END(52) …… 15-WEND

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-9

This program is SLOW_ACQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 48 thermocouple
channels, collect the data as soon as it becomes available, and post it on the screen.

C-10

•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-7: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 8-9: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case, theMultiScan/1200 will be setup for line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode.

•Lines 10-11: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range ofchannels from 1 to 24 as Type J thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from25 to 48 as Type K thermocouples.

•Line 12: The Set Counts (Y) command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the
different acquisition states. In this example, 30 scans will be taken while in the Pre-Trigger state, 1
while in the Post-Trigger state, and 200 while in the Post-Stop state. The Post-Trigger count is only
valid when the Stop (trigger stop event) is set to Count via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command. This example does not use Count, so this parameter is ignored.

•Line 13: The Set Scan Interval (I) command sets the time period between scans in hours-minutesseconds format. The MultiScan/1200 can have two different scan intervals, one for the Post-Trigger
state (acquisition scan interval), and one for the Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop states (normal scaninterval). This example sets up the Post-Trigger scan interval to 2.0 seconds (0.5 Hz), and the PreTrigger and Post-Stop scan intervals to 3.0 seconds (0.333 Hz).

•Line 14: The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command sets up the Trigger (trigger start event ) andStop (trigger stop event) parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the Trigger and Stop are bothassigned the Trigger On (@) command character as sent by the controller. The Auto Re-arm flag is
disabled, so that the MultiScan/1200 will not re-arm itself for another acquisition after the firstacquisition is complete. The synchronization flag is also disabled, so the MultiScan/1200 will not resynchronize itself to the Trigger point when the Trigger (trigger start event) begins. When theMultiScan/1200 encounters the Execute (X) command, it will be armed and will start the collection of
the Pre-Trigger data.

•

Lines 15-18: The next four lines prompt you to hit a key to trigger the MultiScan/1200 acquisition.
When a key is hit, the Trigger On (@) command character is sent as the Trigger.

•

Lines 19-33: While in the Post-Trigger state, this program will first check for an available scan via a
Serial Poll of the MultiScan/1200, and will then compare the response with an 8. If a scan is available,
the R1 command tells the MultiScan/1200 to send the oldest scan to the IEEE 488 controller. The
command ENTER requests the response data from the MultiScan/1200. The command INPUT places
the retrieved data into the variable READINGS$. Since the acquisition is slow and the buffer in theMultiScan/1200 can be made very large, this program can go off to other foreground tasks while theMultiScan/1200 is acquiring data, and only occasionally query the unit and collect its data.

•

Line 34: When a key is hit once again to stop the current acquisition, the program proceeds to the next
block where the Trigger On (@) command character is sent once again. This time, the character is sent
as the Stop, ending the Post-Trigger state and entering the Post-Stop state.

•Lines 35-52: Now the collection of the Post-Stop data begins by querying for new scans andrequesting the data. The program is done when the acquisition is complete.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix CAcquiring Pre- & Post-Trigger Data at the Same Rate
TempScan/1100
Example 15g. FAST_ACQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-32,3X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C33-48,2X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y50,100,200X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.1,00:00:00.1X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;L1,20.0,0X"(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T4,5,0,0X"(15) …… 15-PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is collecting Pre-Trigger data and has notbeen triggered...”…… 15-PRINT “Waiting for Channel 1 to reach the Trigger level and start theacquisition...”(17) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 2) <> 2…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“SPOLL 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%…… 15-WEND…… 15-PRINT “The Trigger level event has been detected...”(22) …… 15-PRINT “Waiting for the Stop level event...”(23) …… 15-WHILE (U% AND 1) <> 1…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT 07;U0X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, U%…… 15-WEND(28) …… 15-PRINT “The acquisition is now complete...”(29) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U6X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$…… 15-PRINT U$…… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 8, 6)…… 15-UA% = VAL(UA$)…… 15-PRINT UA%(36) …… 15-PRINT #1, “The TempScan/1100 collected”; UA%; “scans of data.”(37) …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO UA%…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R1X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 14"…… 15-INPUT #2, SCAN$…… 15-PRINT “Scan ”; i; “ is :”…… 15-PRINT SCAN$(43) …… 15-NEXT I

This program is FAST_ACQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 48 thermocouple
channels, set up the TempScan/1100 for fast acquisition, and then bring the values into the controller after
the acquisition is complete. From a logic standpoint, the difference between this program and the
SLOW_ACQ.BAS program is that this FAST_ACQ.BAS program reads blocks of data instead of one scan at atime. This method is usually more efficient in case of fast scan intervals.

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-11

•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the TempScan/1100 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range of channels
from 1 to 32 as Type T thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from 33 to 48
as Type K thermocouples.

•Line 11: The Set Counts (Y) command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the
different acquisition states. In this example, 50 scans will be taken while in the Pre-Trigger state, 100
while in the Post-Trigger state, and 200 while in the Post-Stop state. The Post-Trigger count is only
valid when the Stop (trigger stop event) is set to Count via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command. This example does not use Count, so this parameter is ignored.

•Line 12: The Set Scan Interval (I) command sets the time period between scans in hours-minutesseconds format. The TempScan/1100 can have two different scan intervals, one for the Post-Trigger
state (acquisition scan interval), and one for the Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop states (normal scaninterval). This example sets up the Post-Trigger, Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop scan intervals to the samevalue of 0.1 second (10.0 Hz).

•Line 13: The Set Trigger Level (L) command specifies the channel as Channel 1 at a level of 20°C
with a hysteresis of 0°C (where the default units is degrees Celsius). This command is relevant only
when the Trigger (trigger start event ) or Stop (trigger stop event) is a channel level, as specified on
the next line.

•

Line 14: The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command sets up the Trigger (trigger start event ) andStop (trigger stop event) parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the Trigger and Stop are
assigned the rising level and falling level, respectively, of an input channel as specified via the Set
Trigger Level (L) command. The Auto Re-arm flag is disabled, so that the TempScan/1100 will not rearm itself for another acquisition after the first acquisition is complete. The synchronization flag isalso disabled, so the TempScan/1100 will not re-synchronize itself to the Trigger point when the
Trigger (trigger start event) begins. When the TempScan/1100 encounters the Execute (X) command,
it will be armed and will start the collection of the Pre-Trigger data.

•

Lines 15-22: After the Execute (X) command has been received, the TempScan/1100 arms itself andthen waits for the Trigger (trigger start event) of Channel 1 rising above 20°C. The IEEE 488 Serial
Poll (SPOLL) command is used to query the acquisition status of the TempScan/1100. A SPOLL valueof 2 signifies that Channel 1 has in fact risen above 20°C.

•

Lines 23-28: Using the User Status (U) command U0 to query the Event Status Register (ESR), we now
wait until the Acquisition Complete event is reached.

•Lines 29-36: During the acquisition or after the acquisition has been completed, the Acquisition
Buffer can be queried for the data that is available for transfer. The User Status (U) command U6 canbe used to query the Buffer Status String, which includes the following eight fields of information: (1)Number of Trigger Blocks Available, (2) Number of Scans Available, (3) Current Position of Read
Pointer, (4) Time/Date Stamping of Trigger Event, (5) Position of Stop Event Pointer, (6) Time/Date
Stamping of Stop Event, (7) Position of End Scan Pointer, and (8) Status of Current Trigger Block.
For more information on the Acquisition Buffer, see chapter System Operation.
This example uses the last parameter in the return string as an indicator of how much data is available
to transfer to the IEEE 488 controller. The function MID$ extracts 6 characters from the string U$
starting at character 8.

•

C-12

Lines 37-43: The Read Buffered Data (R) command R1 is used to request the oldest scan from the unit.
Using the variable UA% calculated from the previous step, all of the oldest scan data is transferred tothe controller.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

MultiScan/1200
Example 15h. FAST_ACQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#0X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;W#32X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-24,3X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C25-48,2X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y50,100,200X”(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.0,00:00:00.0X”(15) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;L1,20.0,0X"(16) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T4,5,0,0X"(17) …… 15-PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is collecting Pre-Trigger data and has notbeen triggered...”…… 15-PRINT “Waiting for Channel 1 to reach the Trigger level and start theacquisition...”(19) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 2) <> 2…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“SPOLL 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%…… 15-WEND…… 15-PRINT “The Trigger level event has been detected...”(24) …… 15-PRINT “Waiting for the Stop level event...”(25) …… 15-WHILE (U% AND 1) <> 1…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT 07;U0X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, U%…… 15-WEND(30) …… 15-PRINT “The acquisition is now complete...”(31) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U6X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$…… 15-PRINT U$…… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 9, 7)…… 15-UA% = VAL(UA$)…… 15-PRINT UA%(38) …… 15-PRINT #1, “The MultiScan/1200 collected”; UA%; “scans of data.”(39) …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO UA%…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R1X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 14"…… 15-INPUT #2, SCAN$…… 15-PRINT “Scan ”; i; “ is :”…… 15-PRINT SCAN$(45) …… 15-NEXT i

This program is FAST_ACQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 48 thermocouple
channels, set up the MultiScan/1200 for fast acquisition, and then bring the values into the controller after
the acquisition is complete. From a logic standpoint, the difference between this program and the
SLOW_ACQ.BAS program is that this FAST_ACQ.BAS program reads blocks of data instead of one scan at atime. This method is usually more efficient in case of fast scan intervals.

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-13

•Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case, theMultiScan/1200 will be setup for line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode.

•Lines 11-12: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range ofchannels from 1 to 24 as Type T thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from25 to 48 as Type K thermocouples.

•Line 13: The Set Counts (Y) command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the
different acquisition states. In this example, 50 scans will be taken while in the Pre-Trigger state, 100
while in the Post-Trigger state, and 200 while in the Post-Stop state. The Post-Trigger count is only
valid when the Stop (trigger stop event) is set to Count via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command. This example does not use Count, so this parameter is ignored.

•Line 14: The Set Scan Interval (I) command sets the time period between scans in hours-minutesseconds format. The MultiScan/1200 can have two different scan intervals, one for the Post-Trigger
state (acquisition scan interval), and one for the Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop states (normal scaninterval). This example sets up the Post-Trigger, Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop scan intervals to the samevalue of 0.0 second, which defaults the MultiScan/1200 acquisition to fast mode.

•

Line 15: The Set Trigger Level (L) command specifies the channel as Channel 1 at a level of 20°C
with a hysteresis of 0°C (where the default units is degrees Celsius). This command is relevant only
when the Trigger (trigger start event ) or Stop (trigger stop event) is a channel level, as specified on
the next line.

•

Line 16: The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command sets up the Trigger (trigger start event ) andStop (trigger stop event) parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the Trigger and Stop are
assigned the rising level and falling level, respectively, of an input channel as specified via the Set
Trigger Level (L) command. The Auto Re-arm flag is disabled, so that the MultiScan/1200 will not rearm itself for another acquisition after the first acquisition is complete. The synchronization flag isalso disabled, so the MultiScan/1200 will not re-synchronize itself to the Trigger point when the
Trigger (trigger start event) begins. When the MultiScan/1200 encounters the Execute (X) command,
it will be armed and will start the collection of the Pre-Trigger data.

•

Lines 17-24: After the Execute (X) command has been received, the MultiScan/1200 arms itself andthen waits for the Trigger (trigger start event) of Channel 1 rising above 20°C. The IEEE 488 Serial
Poll (SPOLL) command is used to query the acquisition status of the MultiScan/1200. A SPOLL valueof 2 signifies that Channel 1 has in fact risen above 20°C.

•

Lines 25-30: Using the User Status (U) command U0 to query the Event Status Register (ESR), we now
wait until the Acquisition Complete event is reached.

•Lines 31-38: During the acquisition or after the acquisition has been completed, the Acquisition
Buffer can be queried for the data that is available for transfer. The User Status (U) command U6 canbe used to query the Buffer Status String, which includes the following eight fields of information: (1)Number of Trigger Blocks Available, (2) Number of Scans Available, (3) Current Position of Read
Pointer, (4) Time/Date Stamping of Trigger Event, (5) Position of Stop Event Pointer, (6) Time/Date
Stamping of Stop Event, (7) Position of End Scan Pointer, and (8) Status of Current Trigger Block.
For more Acquisition Buffer information, see chapter System Operation.
This example uses the last parameter in the return string as an indicator of how much data is available
to transfer to the IEEE 488 controller. The function MID$ extracts 7 characters from the string U$
starting at character 9.

•

C-14

Lines 39-45: The Read Buffered Data (R) command R1 is used to request the oldest scan from the unit.
Using the variable UA% calculated from the previous step, all of the oldest scan data is transferred tothe controller.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

Operating Alarms
TempScan/1100
Example 15i. ALARM2.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-32,3,1,18,0X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A1-2,1X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;Y1,0,0X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X"(13) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;O?X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, O$(17) …… 15- …… 15-IF MID$(O$, 2, 3) = “001” THEN…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 1 OR 2 is in an Alarm condition.”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U11X”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, A$…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT A$(23) …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-IF MID$(A$, 5, 1) = “1” THEN…… 15- …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 1 is now in an Alarm condition.”:…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-ELSE…… 15- …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 1 is not in an Alarm condition.”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-END IF(28) …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-IF MID$(A$, 11, 1) = “1” THEN…… 15- …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 2 is now in an Alarm condition.”:…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-ELSE…… 15- …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 2 is not in an Alarm condition.”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-END IF…… 15- …… 15-END IF(34) …… 15-WEND

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-15

The following program is ALARM2.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will set up the alarm systemof the TempScan/1100.
•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the TempScan/1100 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Line 9: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range of channels
from 1 to 32 as Type T thermocouples, where levels above 18 or below 1 will cause a system alarm.

•Line 10: In addition to causing an internal system alarm state, the alarm conditions can also be
attached to any one of the 32 digital output lines. The Assign Digital Alarm Output (A) command will
be used to assign input Channels 1 and 2 to digital alarm Output 1 in an ORed fashion.

•Lines 11-12: Program for one Pre-Trigger scan via the Set Counts (Y) command. Then program the
Trigger (trigger start event) and Stop (trigger stop event) via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command to arm the acquisition.

•Lines 13-34: The Set Digital Outputs (O) command O? will be used to query the status of the digital
output lines. The alarm state can be detected since digital alarm Output 1 was mapped into input
Channels 1 and 2. This example shows alarm detection handling when two or more channels have to
be muxed into one single digital output bit.
The User Status (U) command U11 will be used to show each individual channel alarm status.

C-16

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

MultiScan/1200
Example 15j. ALARM2.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07”…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#0X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;W#32X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-24,3,1,18,0X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A1-2,1X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;Y1,0,0X”(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X"(15) …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;O?X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, O$(19) …… 15- …… 15-IF MID$(O$, 2, 3) = “001” THEN…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 1 OR 2 is in an Alarm condition.”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U11X”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, A$…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT A$(25) …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-IF MID$(A$, 5, 1) = “1” THEN…… 15- …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 1 is now in an Alarm condition.”:…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-ELSE…… 15- …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 1 is not in an Alarm condition.”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-END IF(30) …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-IF MID$(A$, 11, 1) = “1” THEN…… 15- …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 2 is now in an Alarm condition.”:…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-ELSE…… 15- …… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Channel 2 is not in an Alarm condition.”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-END IF…… 15- …… 15-END IF(36) …… 15-WEND

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-17

The following program is ALARM2.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will set up the alarm systemof the MultiScan/1200.
•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case, theMultiScan/1200 will be setup for line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode.

•

Line 11: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range of channels
from 1 to 24 as Type T thermocouples, where levels above 18 or below 1 will cause a system alarm.

•Line 12: In addition to causing an internal system alarm state, the alarm conditions can also be
attached to any one of the 32 digital output lines. The Assign Digital Alarm Output (A) command will
be used to assign input Channels 1 and 2 to digital alarm Output 1 in an ORed fashion.

•Lines 13-14: Program for one Pre-Trigger scan via the Set Counts (Y) command. Then program the
Trigger (trigger start event) and Stop (trigger stop event) via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command to arm the acquisition.

•Lines 15-36: The Set Digital Outputs (O) command O? will be used to query the status of the digital
output lines. The alarm state can be detected since digital alarm Output 1 was mapped into input
Channels 1 and 2. This example shows alarm detection handling when two or more channels have to
be muxed into one single digital output bit.
The User Status (U) command U11 will be used to show each individual channel alarm status.

C-18

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

Using the IEEE 488 SRQ with Alarms
TempScan/1100
Example 15k. ALAR2SRQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07”…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-ON PEN GOSUB AlarmHandler…… 15-PEN ON(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “ARM SRQ”
(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M1X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-32,3X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-2,3,1,25,0X”(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A1,1X”(15) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A2,2X”(16) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;Y1,0,0X”(17) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X"(18) …… 15-PRINT “The program is continuously detecting Alarms...”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to Quit..”…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND…… 15-END(22) …… 15-AlarmHandler:…… 15- …… 15-LOCATE 5, 1…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “An Alarm condition has been detected.”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%(27) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;O?X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, A$(30) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT A$…… 15- …… 15-A% = VAL(MID$(A$, 2, 3))…… 15- …… 15-IF A% = 1 THEN PRINT “Alarm on Channel 1 only”…… 15- …… 15-IF A% = 2 THEN PRINT “Alarm on Channel 2 only”…… 15- …… 15-IF A% = 3 THEN PRINT “Alarm on Channels 1 and 2”(35) …… 15-RETURN

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-19

The following program is ALAR2SRQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will set up the alarmsystem of the TempScan/1100, and then it will use the IEEE 488 Service Request signal to asynchronously
service the event.
•Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the TempScan/1100 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The PC/IEEE 488 controller interface and driver software provides a means for
QuickBASIC to asynchronously service the IEEE 488 SRQ interrupt through its ON PEN GOSUB
command. When an SRQ is detected by the controller, program control is automatically vectored to thesubroutine named in the ON PEN GOSUB command. To activate this feature in the IEEE 488 driver, thecommand ARM SRQ must be sent to the driver.

•Line 11: The Set SRQ Mask (M) command M1 instructs the TempScan/1100 unit to assert the SRQ
signal when it is in an alarm state.

•Lines 12-13: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range ofchannels from 1 to 32 as Type T thermocouples, and used again to configure Channels 1 and 2 suchthat levels above 25 or below 1 will cause a system alarm. Once the C command is issued, theTempScan/1100 will be completely armed for alarming. Since the M1 command has already been
issued, this will also result in an IEEE 488 SRQ assertion.

•Line 14-15: In addition to causing an internal system alarm state, the alarm conditions can also be
attached to any one of the 32 digital output lines. The Assign Digital Alarm Output (A) command will
be used to assign input Channel 1 to digital alarm Output 1, and Channel 2 to Output 2, individually.

•Lines 16-17: Program for one Pre-Trigger scan via the Set Counts (Y) command. Then program the
Trigger (trigger start event) and Stop (trigger stop event) via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command to arm the acquisition.

•Lines 18-35: This example now processes a loop that is waiting for a key press in order to exit. If an
SRQ is detected by the IEEE 488 driver, program control will be automatically vectored to the
AlarmHandler subroutine, then returned to the wait loop again. In the alarm service routine, theTempScan/1100 unit is first Serial Polled (SPOLLed) to clear the SRQ signal. The Set Digital Outputs(O) command O? will be used to query the status of the digital output lines. In turn, the channel

number that is in the alarm state can be identified.

C-20

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

MultiScan/1200
Example 15l. ALAR2SRQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07”…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-ON PEN GOSUB AlarmHandler…… 15-PEN ON(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “ARM SRQ”
(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M1X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#0X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;W#32X”(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-24,3X”(15) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-2,3,1,25,0X”(16) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A1,1X”(17) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A2,2X”(18) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;Y1,0,0X”(19) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X"(20) …… 15-PRINT “The program is continuously detecting Alarms...”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to Quit..”…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND…… 15-END(24) …… 15-AlarmHandler:…… 15- …… 15-LOCATE 5, 1…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “An Alarm condition has been detected.”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%(29) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;O?X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, A$(32) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT A$…… 15- …… 15-A% = VAL(MID$(A$, 2, 3))…… 15- …… 15-IF A% = 1 THEN PRINT “Alarm on Channel 1 only”…… 15- …… 15-IF A% = 2 THEN PRINT “Alarm on Channel 2 only”…… 15- …… 15-IF A% = 3 THEN PRINT “Alarm on Channels 1 and 2”(37) …… 15-RETURN

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-21

The following program is ALAR2SRQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will set up the alarmsystem of the MultiScan/1200, and then it will use the IEEE 488 Service Request signal to asynchronously
service the event.
•Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The PC/IEEE 488 controller interface and driver software provides a means for
QuickBASIC to asynchronously service the IEEE 488 SRQ interrupt through its ON PEN GOSUB
command. When an SRQ is detected by the controller, program control is automatically vectored to thesubroutine named in the ON PEN GOSUB command. To activate this feature in the IEEE 488 driver, thecommand ARM SRQ must be sent to the driver.

•Line 11: The Set SRQ Mask (M) command M1 instructs the MultiScan/1200 unit to assert the SRQ
signal when it is in an alarm state.

•Lines 12-13: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case,
the MultiScan/1200 will be setup for line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode.

•Lines 14-15: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range ofchannels from 1 to 24 as Type T thermocouples, and used again to configure Channels 1 and 2 suchthat levels above 25 or below 1 will cause a system alarm. Once the C command is issued, theMultiScan/1200 will be completely armed for alarming. Since the M1 command has already been
issued, this will also result in an IEEE 488 SRQ assertion.

•Line 16-17: In addition to causing an internal system alarm state, the alarm conditions can also be
attached to any one of the 32 digital output lines. The Assign Digital Alarm Output (A) command will
be used to assign input Channel 1 to digital alarm Output 1, and Channel 2 to Output 2, individually.

•Lines 18-19: Program for one Pre-Trigger scan via the Set Counts (Y) command. Then program the
Trigger (trigger start event) and Stop (trigger stop event) via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command to arm the acquisition.

•Lines 20-37: This example now processes a loop that is waiting for a key press in order to exit. If an
SRQ is detected by the IEEE 488 driver, program control will be automatically vectored to the
AlarmHandler subroutine, then returned to the wait loop again. In the alarm service routine, theMultiScan/1200 unit is first Serial Polled (SPOLLed) to clear the SRQ signal. The Set Digital Outputs(O) command O? will be used to query the status of the digital output lines. In turn, the channel

number that is in the alarm state can be identified.

C-22

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix CAcquiring Buffer Data in Binary Format
TempScan/1100
Example 15m. BIN_ACQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,3X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C33-48,2X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y400,100,200X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.0,00:00:00.0X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,8,0,0X"(14) …… 15-PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is collecting Pre-Trigger data and has notbeen triggered...”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to trigger the start of acquisition...”…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”(18) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 2) <> 2…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“SPOLL 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%…… 15-WEND…… 15-PRINT “The Trigger has been detected...”(23) …… 15-PRINT “Waiting for the acquisition to complete, including Post-Stop
Scans...”(24) …… 15-WHILE (E% AND 1) <> 1…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT 07;U0X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, E%…… 15-WEND(29) …… 15-PRINT “The acquisition is now complete...”(30) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;F0,1X”(31) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U6X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$…… 15-PRINT U$…… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 8, 6)…… 15-UA% = VAL(UA$)…… 15-PRINT UA%(38) …… 15-PRINT #1, “The TempScan/1100 collected”; UA%; “scans of data.”(39) …… 15-CHANNELS = 32…… 15-DIM CBUFFER%(UA% * CHANNELS)…… 15-SE% = VARSEG(BUFFER%(0))…… 15-OF% = VARPTR(BUFFER%(0))…… 15-B& = UA% * CHANNELS * 2…… 15-PRINT “Total number of bytes available : ”; B&…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R2X”…… 15-PRINT “Uploading data..”…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND(48) …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07 #”; B&; “BUFFER”; SE%; “ : ”; OF%; “DMA”(49) …… 15-BINARY DATA%/10 = °C

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-23

The following program is BIN_ACQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 32
thermocouple channels, set up the TempScan/1100 for acquisition, and then after the acquisition iscomplete, collect the buffered channel readings in a Binary format rather than the default ASCII format.
The Binary format is inherently faster than ASCII format, but the data must be deciphered after it iscollected in order to yield the temperature values.

C-24

•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the TempScan/1100 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range of channels
from 1 to 16 as Type T thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from 33 to 48
as Type K thermocouples.

•Line 11: The Set Counts (Y) command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the
different acquisition states. In this example, 400 scans will be taken while in the Pre-Trigger state,
100 while in the Post-Trigger state, and 200 while in the Post-Stop state. The Post-Trigger count isonly valid when the Stop (trigger stop event) is set to Count via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command. This example will in fact use Count, so this parameter is valid.

•Line 12: The Set Scan Interval (I) command sets the time period between scans in hours-minutesseconds format. The TempScan/1100 can have two different scan intervals, one for the Post-Trigger
state (acquisition scan interval), and one for the Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop states (normal scaninterval). This example sets up the Post-Trigger, Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop scan intervals to the samevalue of 0.0 second, which defaults the TempScan/1100 acquisition to fast mode.

•

Line 13: The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command sets up the Trigger (trigger start event ) andStop (trigger stop event) parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the Trigger is assigned the
Trigger On (@) command character as sent by the controller, while the Stop is assigned to Count. Boththe Auto Re-arm flag and the synchronization flag are disabled, as described in previous examples.
When the TempScan/1100 encounters the Execute (X) command, it will be armed and will start thecollection of the Pre-Trigger data.

•

Lines 14-23: After the last Execute (X) command has been received, the TempScan/1100 arms itself
and then waits for the Trigger (trigger start event). The IEEE 488 Serial Poll (SPOLL) command isused to query the acquisition status of the TempScan/1100. A SPOLL value of 2 signifies that the
TempScan/1100 has detected the Trigger.

•

Lines 24-29: Using the User Status (U) command U0 to query the Event Status Register (ESR), we now
wait until the Acquisition Complete event is reached.

•Line 30: Before reading the data, the Set Data Format (F) command is sent, instructing the
TempScan/1100 to return the data in Binary format where every value will be 2 bytes in length. This
command can be issued anytime after the initial reset, and stays in effect until the unit is reset again or
another F command is issued.

•

Lines 31-38: During the acquisition or after the acquisition has been completed, the buffer can bequeried for the data available for transfer. The User Status (U) command U6 can be used to query the
Buffer Status String, as described in previous examples. This example uses the last parameter in the
return string as an indicator of how much data is available to transfer to the IEEE 488 controller. The
function MID$ extracts 6 characters from the string U$ starting at character 8.

•

Lines 39-48: After calculating the number of scans, an integer-type buffer is then prepared for thedata. The offset and segment pointers are supplied to the IEEE 488 driver so that the data can betransferred using DMA (Direct Memory Access). The Read Buffered Data (R) command R2 instructs
the TempScan/1100 to supply the oldest complete Trigger Block of data that is currently available.

•

Line 49: At the completion of the DMA transfer, the integer data is now in the buffer BUFFER%. To
convert the integer data into temperatures, a simple calculation is performed.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

MultiScan/1200
Example 15n. BIN_ACQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#0X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;W#32X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-12,3X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C25-36,14X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y400,100,200X”(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.0,00:00:00.0X”(15) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,8,0,0X"(16) …… 15-PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is collecting Pre-Trigger data and has notbeen triggered...”…… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to trigger the start of acquisition...”…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”(20) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 2) <> 2…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“SPOLL 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%…… 15-WEND…… 15-PRINT “The Trigger has been detected...”(25) …… 15-PRINT “Waiting for the acquisition to complete, including Post-Stop
Scans...”(26) …… 15-WHILE (E% AND 1) <> 1…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT 07;U0X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, E%…… 15-WEND(31) …… 15-PRINT “The acquisition is now complete...”(32) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;F0,1X”(33) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U6X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$…… 15-PRINT U$…… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 9, 7)…… 15-UA% = VAL(UA$)…… 15-PRINT UA%(40) …… 15-PRINT #1, “The MultiScan/1200 collected”; UA%; “scans of data.”(41) …… 15-CHANNELS = 24…… 15-DIM CBUFFER%(UA% * CHANNELS)…… 15-SE% = VARSEG(BUFFER%(0))…… 15-OF% = VARPTR(BUFFER%(0))…… 15-B& = UA% * CHANNELS * 2…… 15-PRINT “Total number of bytes available : ”; B&…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R2X”…… 15-PRINT “Uploading data..”…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND(50) …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07 #”; B&; “BUFFER”; SE%; “ : ”; OF%; “DMA”(51) …… 15-BINARY DATA%/10 = °C(52) …… 15-BINARY DATA%/3276.7 = V (±10 V DC)

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-25

The following program is BIN_ACQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 12
thermocouple and 12 volts channels, set up the MultiScan/1200 for acquisition, and then after theacquisition is complete, collect the buffered channel readings in a Binary format rather than the default
ASCII format. The Binary format is inherently faster than ASCII format, but the data must be deciphered
after it is collected in order to yield the temperature values.

C-26

•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case, theMultiScan/1200 will be setup for line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode.

•Lines 11-12: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range ofchannels from 1 to 12 as Type T thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from25 to 36 as 10-Volt DC inputs.

•

Line 13: Using the Set Counts (Y) command, 400 scans will be taken while in the Pre-Trigger state,
100 while in the Post-Trigger state, and 200 while in the Post-Stop state. The Post-Trigger count isonly valid when the Stop (trigger stop event) is set to Count via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command. This example will in fact use Count, so this parameter is valid.

•Line 14: Using the Set Scan Interval (I) command, the Post-Trigger, Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop scanintervals are set to the same value of 0.0 second, which defaults the MultiScan/1200 acquisition to fast
mode.

•

Line 15: Using the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command, the Trigger (trigger start event) is
assigned the Trigger On (@) command character as sent by the controller, while the Stop (trigger stop
event) is assigned to Count. Both the Auto Re-arm flag and the synchronization flag are disabled, as
described in previous examples. When the MultiScan/1200 encounters the Execute (X) command, it
will be armed and will start the collection of the Pre-Trigger data.

•

Lines 16-25: After the last Execute (X) command has been received, the MultiScan/1200 arms itself
and then waits for the Trigger (trigger start event). The IEEE 488 Serial Poll (SPOLL) command isused to query the acquisition status of the MultiScan/1200. A SPOLL value of 2 signifies that theMultiScan/1200 has detected the Trigger.

•

Lines 26-31: Using the User Status (U) command U0 to query the Event Status Register (ESR), we now
wait until the Acquisition Complete event is reached.

•Line 32: Before reading the data, the Set Data Format (F) command is sent, instructing theMultiScan/1200 to return the data in Binary format where every value will be 2 bytes in length. This
command can be issued anytime after the initial reset, and stays in effect until the unit is reset again or
another F command is issued.

•

Lines 33-40: During the acquisition or after the acquisition has been completed, the Acquisition
Buffer can be queried for the data that is available for transfer. The User Status (U) command U6 canbe used to query the Buffer Status String, as described in previous examples. This example uses thelast parameter of the return string as an indicator of how much data is available to transfer to the IEEE
488 controller. The function MID$ extracts 7 characters from the string U$ starting at character 9.

•

Lines 41-50: After calculating the number of scans, an integer-type buffer is then prepared for thedata. The offset and segment pointers are supplied to the IEEE 488 driver so that the data can betransferred using DMA (Direct Memory Access). The Read Buffered Data (R) command R2 instructs
the MultiScan/1200 to supply the oldest Trigger Block of data that is currently available.

•

Lines 51-52: At the completion of the DMA transfer, the integer data is now in the buffer BUFFER%.
To convert the integer data into temperatures and into voltages, simple calculations are performed.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix CAcquiring HLL Data in Binary Format
TempScan/1100
Example 15o. BIN_HLL.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-32,1X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C33-48,14X”(11-29) …… 15-(For sample acquisition program lines, refer to the previous TempScan/1100 program example.)(30) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;F0,1X”(31) …… 15-CONST CHANNELS% = 48, BYTES = CHANNELS% * 20

DIM READS AS STRING * BYTES
S% = VARSEG(READS)
O% = VARPTR(READS)WHILE INKEY$ = “”PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U4X”
PRINT #1, “ENTER 07 #”; CHANNELS%*20; “BUFFER ”;S%; “:”;O%; “ DMA”
(38) …… 15-PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of all 48 channels :”(39) …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO BYTES STEP 20…… 15- …… 15-HIGH$ = STR$(CVI(MID$(READS, i, 2)))(41) …… 15- …… 15-HOURh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 2, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-MINh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 3, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-SECh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 4, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-TENTHh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 5, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-MONh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 6, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-DAYh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 7, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-YEARh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 8, 1)))(48) …… 15- …… 15-LOW$ = STR$(CVI(MID$(READS, i + 9, 2)))(49) …… 15- …… 15-HOURl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 11, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-MINl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 12, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-SECl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 13, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-TENTHl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 14, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-MONl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 15, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-DAYl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 16, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-YEARl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 17, 1)))(56) …… 15- …… 15-LAST$ = STR$(CVI(MID$(READS, i + 18, 2)))…… 15- …… 15-PRINT HIGH$+HOURh$+MINh$+SECh$+TENTHh$+MONh$+DAYh$+YEARh$…… 15- …… 15-PRINT LOW$+HOURl$+MINl$+SECl$+TENTHl$+MONl$+DAYl$+YEARl$(59) …… 15-NEXT i(60) …… 15-BINARY DATA%/10 = °C(61) …… 15-BINARY DATA%/3276.7 = V (±10 V DC)

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-27

The following program is BIN_HLL.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 32
thermocouple and 16 volts channels, set up the TempScan/1100 for acquisition, and then after theacquisition is complete, collect the High/Last/Low (HLL) channel readings in a Binary format rather thanthe default ASCII format. The Binary format is inherently faster than ASCII format, but the data must be
deciphered after it is collected in order to yield the temperature values.

C-28

•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the TempScan/1100 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range of channels
from 1 to 32 as Type J thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from 33 to 48
as 10-Volt DC inputs.

•

Lines 11-29: For sample acquisition program lines, refer to the previous TempScan/1100 program
example. For convenience, lines 11-29 from that example are identical to lines 11-29 in this example.

•

Line 30: Before reading the data, the Set Data Format (F) command is sent, instructing the
TempScan/1100 to return the data in Binary format where every value will be 2 bytes in length. This
command can be issued anytime after the initial reset, and stays in effect until the unit is reset again or
another F command is issued.

•

Lines 31-38: This example will now use DMA (Direct Memory Access) to transfer the HLL data into
the controller. For this purpose, an array is dimensioned, then the offset and segment pointers aresupplied to the IEEE 488 driver. After the ENTER command has completed, the Binary data will be in
the string READS.

•

Lines 39-59: To convert the data into integer form, the string must be parsed and decoded.

•

Lines 60-61: To convert the integer data into temperatures and into voltages, simple calculations are
performed.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

MultiScan/1200
Example 15p. BIN_HLL.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#0X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;W#32X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-24,1X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C25-36,14X”(13-31) …… 15-(For sample acquisition program lines, refer to the previous MultiScan/1200 program example.)(32) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;F0,1X”(33) …… 15-CONST CHANNELS% = 36, BYTES = CHANNELS% * 20

DIM READS AS STRING * BYTES
S% = VARSEG(READS)
O% = VARPTR(READS)WHILE INKEY$ = “”PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U4X”
PRINT #1, “ENTER 07 #”; CHANNELS%*20; “BUFFER ”;S%; “:”;O%; “ DMA”
(40) …… 15-PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of all 36 channels :”(41) …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO BYTES STEP 20…… 15- …… 15-HIGH$ = STR$(CVI(MID$(READS, i, 2)))(43) …… 15- …… 15-HOURh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 2, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-MINh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 3, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-SECh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 4, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-TENTHh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 5, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-MONh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 6, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-DAYh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 7, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-YEARh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 8, 1)))(50) …… 15- …… 15-LOW$ = STR$(CVI(MID$(READS, i + 9, 2)))(51) …… 15- …… 15-HOURl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 11, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-MINl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 12, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-SECl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 13, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-TENTHl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 14, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-MONl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 15, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-DAYl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 16, 1)))…… 15- …… 15-YEARl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 17, 1)))(58) …… 15- …… 15-LAST$ = STR$(CVI(MID$(READS, i + 18, 2)))…… 15- …… 15-PRINT HIGH$+HOURh$+MINh$+SECh$+TENTHh$+MONh$+DAYh$+YEARh$…… 15- …… 15-PRINT LOW$+HOURl$+MINl$+SECl$+TENTHl$+MONl$+DAYl$+YEARl$(61) …… 15-NEXT i(62) …… 15-BINARY DATA%/10 = °C(63) …… 15-BINARY DATA%/3276.7 = V (±10 V DC)

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-29

The following program is BIN_HLL.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 24
thermocouple and 12 volts channels, set up the MultiScan/1200 for acquisition, and then after theacquisition is complete, collect the High/Last/Low (HLL) channel readings in a Binary format rather thanthe default ASCII format. The Binary format is inherently faster than ASCII format, but the data must be
deciphered after it is collected in order to yield the temperature values.

C-30

•

Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case, theMultiScan/1200 will be setup for line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode.

•Lines 11-12: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range ofchannels from 1 to 24 as Type J thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from25 to 36 as 10-Volt DC inputs.

•

Lines 13-31: For sample acquisition program lines, refer to the previous MultiScan/1200 program
example. For convenience, lines 13-31 from that example are identical to lines 13-31 in this example.

•

Line 32: Before reading the data, the Set Data Format (F) command is sent, instructing theMultiScan/1200 to return the data in Binary format where every value will be 2 bytes in length. This
command can be issued anytime after the initial reset, and stays in effect until the unit is reset again or
another F command is issued.

•

Lines 33-40: This example will now use DMA (Direct Memory Access) to transfer the HLL data into
the controller. For this purpose, an array is dimensioned, then the offset and segment pointers aresupplied to the IEEE 488 driver. After the ENTER command has completed, the Binary data will be in
the string READS.

•

Lines 41-61: To convert the data into integer form, the string must be parsed and decoded.

•

Lines 62-63: To convert the integer data into temperatures and into voltages, simple calculations are
performed.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

Using Auto Re-arm to Capture Multiple Trigger Blocks
TempScan/1100
Example 15q. BLK_ACQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,1X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C33-48,2X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y1000,20,10X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.3,00:00:00.0X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,8,1,0X"(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Q0,0,8,8,0X”(15) …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO 5…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “The TempScan/1100 is collecting Pre-Trigger data for
Trigger Block ”; i; “ and has not been triggered...”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to trigger the start of acquisition...”…… 15- …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND
(19) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”(20) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Waiting for Trigger Block ”; i; “ to complete...”…… 15-B% = 0(22) …… 15- …… 15-WHILE B% <> 1…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07; U6X”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 86, 2)…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-B% = VAL(UA$)…… 15- …… 15-WEND(29) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Trigger Block ”; i; “ has completed and the
TempScan/1100 has re-armed itself...”(30) …… 15- …… 15-UAT$ = MID$(U$, 9, 7)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT UAT$…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “The TempScan/1100 has collected a total of ”; VAL(UAT$); “
scans.”(33) …… 15- …… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 18, 7)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT UA$…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Pre-Trigger scans:”; VAL(UA$)…… 15- …… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 47, 8)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Post-Trigger scans:”; VAL(UA$)…… 15- …… 15-UAS$ = MID$(U$, 77, 8)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Post-Stop scans:”; VAL(UAS$) - VAL(UA$)(40) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Uploading Trigger Block”; i; “ ...”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R2X”…… 15- …… 15-FOR c = 1 TO VAL(UAT$)…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, SCAN$…… 15- …… 15-NEXT c…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Trigger Block ”; i; “ is read.”(47) …… 15-NEXT i(48) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T0,0,0,0X”

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-31

The following program is BLK_ACQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 32
thermocouple channels, and will set up the TempScan/1100 unit for Auto Re-arm, which re-arms the unit
for another Trigger (trigger start event) as soon as the current acquisition has been completed.
•Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the TempScan/1100 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range of channels
from 1 to 16 as Type J thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from 33 to 48
as Type K thermocouples.

•Line 11: The Set Counts (Y) command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the
different acquisition states. In this example, 1000 scans will be taken while in the Pre-Trigger state,
20 while in the Post-Trigger state, and 10 while in the Post-Stop state. The Post-Trigger count is only
valid when the Stop (trigger stop event) is set to Count via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command. This example will in fact use Count, so this parameter is valid.

•Line 12: The Set Scan Interval (I) command sets the time period between scans in hours-minutesseconds format. The TempScan/1100 can have two different scan intervals, one for the Post-Trigger
state (acquisition scan interval), and one for the Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop states (normal scaninterval). This example sets up the Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop scan intervals to 0.3 seconds (3.0 Hz),and sets up the Post-Trigger scan interval to 0.0 second, which defaults the TempScan/1100
acquisition to fast mode.

•

Line 13: The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command sets up the Trigger (trigger start event ) andStop (trigger stop event) parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the Trigger is assigned the
Trigger On (@) command character as sent by the controller, while the Stop is assigned to Count.
In this example, the Auto Re-arm flag is enabled so that the TempScan/1100 will automatically re-arm
itself for another acquisition after the current acquisition is complete. Meanwhile, the synchronization
flag are disabled so that the TempScan/1100 will not re-synchronize itself to the Trigger point when
the Trigger (trigger start event) begins. When the TempScan/1100 encounters the Execute (X)command, it will be armed and will start the collection of the Pre-Trigger data.

C-32

•

Line 14: The Set Query Terminator (Q) command is used to set the buffer terminators for the data thatis transferred to the controller. Both the scan terminator and Trigger Block terminator are set to LF(line feed).

•Lines 15-19: The FOR loop will read five Trigger Blocks, each consisting of one Trigger point. These
first lines of code within the loop will ask you to trigger the TempScan/1100 unit.

•

Lines 20-39: During the acquisition or after the acquisition has been completed, the Acquisition
Buffer can be queried for the data that is available for transfer. These next lines of code within theloop use the User Status (U) command U6 to query the Buffer Status String, as described in previous
examples. This example uses the last parameter in the return string as an indicator of how much data
is available to transfer to the IEEE 488 controller. The function MID$ is used to extract charactersfrom the string U$.

•

Lines 40-47: After using the U$ string to calculate the number of scans available in the buffer, the lastlines of code within the loop use the Read Buffered Data (R) command R2 to instruct the
TempScan/1100 unit to supply the oldest complete Trigger Block of data that is currently available.
Then the NEXT command will return the unit to the start of the loop.

•

Line 48: After five loops and all five Trigger Blocks have been collected, the TempScan/1100 unit isdisarmed by sending the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

MultiScan/1200
Example 15r. BLK_ACQ.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#0X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;W#32X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-12,1X”(12) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C25-36,2X”(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y1000,20,10X”(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.3,00:00:00.0X”(15) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,8,1,0X"(16) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Q0,0,8,8,0X”(17) …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO 5…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is collecting Pre-Trigger data for
Trigger Block ”; i; “ and has not been triggered...”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to trigger the start of acquisition...”…… 15- …… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND(21) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”(22) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Waiting for Trigger Block ”; i; “ to complete...”…… 15-B% = 0(24) …… 15- …… 15-WHILE B% <> 1…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07; U6X”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 86, 2)…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-B% = VAL(UA$)…… 15- …… 15-WEND(31) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Trigger Block ”; i; “ has completed and theMultiScan/1200 has re-armed itself...”(32) …… 15- …… 15-UAT$ = MID$(U$, 9, 7)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT UAT$…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 has collected a total of ”; VAL(UAT$); “
scans.”(35) …… 15- …… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 18, 7)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT UA$…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Pre-Trigger scans:”; VAL(UA$)…… 15- …… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 47, 8)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Post-Trigger scans:”; VAL(UA$)…… 15- …… 15-UAS$ = MID$(U$, 77, 8)…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Post-Stop scans:”; VAL(UAS$) - VAL(UA$)(42) …… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Uploading Trigger Block”; i; “ ...”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R2X”…… 15- …… 15-FOR c = 1 TO VAL(UAT$)…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15- …… 15- …… 15-LINE INPUT #2, SCAN$…… 15- …… 15-NEXT c…… 15- …… 15-PRINT “Trigger Block ”; i; “ is read.”(49) …… 15-NEXT i(50) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T0,0,0,0X”

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-33

The following program is BLK_ACQ.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will configure 24
thermocouple channels, and will set up the MultiScan/1200 unit for Auto Re-arm, which re-arms the unit
for another Trigger (trigger start event) as soon as the current acquisition has been completed.
•Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case, theMultiScan/1200 will be setup for line-cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode.

•Lines 11-12: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure a range ofchannels from 1 to 12 as Type J thermocouples, and used again to configure a range of channels from25 to 36 as Type K thermocouples.

•Line 13: The Set Counts (Y) command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the
different acquisition states. In this example, 1000 scans will be taken while in the Pre-Trigger state,
20 while in the Post-Trigger state, and 10 while in the Post-Stop state. The Post-Trigger count is only
valid when the Stop (trigger stop event) is set to Count via the Set Trigger Configuration (T)command. This example will in fact use Count, so this parameter is valid.

•Line 14: The Set Scan Interval (I) command sets the time period between scans in hours-minutesseconds format. The MultiScan/1200 can have two different scan intervals, one for the Post-Trigger
state (acquisition scan interval), and one for the Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop states (normal scaninterval). This example sets up the Pre-Trigger and Post-Stop scan intervals to 0.3 seconds (3.0 Hz),and sets up the Post-Trigger scan interval to 0.0 second, which defaults the MultiScan/1200
acquisition to fast mode.

•

Line 15: The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command sets up the Trigger (trigger start event ) andStop (trigger stop event) parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the Trigger is assigned the
Trigger On (@) command character as sent by the controller, while the Stop is assigned to Count.
In this example, the Auto Re-arm flag is enabled so that the MultiScan/1200 will automatically re-arm
itself for another acquisition after the current acquisition is complete. Meanwhile, the synchronization
flag are disabled so that the MultiScan/1200 will not re-synchronize itself to the Trigger point when
the Trigger (trigger start event) begins. When the MultiScan/1200 encounters the Execute (X)command, it will be armed and will start the collection of the Pre-Trigger data.

C-34

•

Line 16: The Set Query Terminator (Q) command is used to set the buffer terminators for the data thatis transferred to the controller. Both the scan terminator and Trigger Block terminator are set to LF(line feed).

•Lines 17-21: The FOR loop will read five Trigger Blocks, each consisting of one Trigger point. These
first lines of code within the loop will ask you to trigger the MultiScan/1200 unit.

•

Lines 22-41: During the acquisition or after the acquisition has been completed, the Acquisition
Buffer can be queried for the data that is available for transfer. These next lines of code within theloop use the User Status (U) command U6 to query the Buffer Status String, as described in previous
examples. This example uses the last parameter in the return string as an indicator of how much data
is available to transfer to the IEEE 488 controller. The function MID$ is used to extract charactersfrom the string U$.

•

Lines 42-49: After using the U$ string to calculate the number of scans available in the buffer, the lastlines of code within the loop use the Read Buffered Data (R) command R2 to instruct theMultiScan/1200 unit to supply the oldest complete Trigger Block of data that is currently available.
Then the NEXT command will return the unit to the start of the loop.

•

Line 50: After five loops and all five Trigger Blocks have been collected, the MultiScan/1200 unit isdisarmed by sending the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix CAcquiring Burst Mode Data (MultiScan/1200 Only)
Example 15s. BURST.BAS Program(1) …… 15-CLS : PRINT “The MultiScan/1200 is resetting...”…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”(3) …… 15-SLEEP 10(4) …… 15-S% = 0…… 15-WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0…… 15-PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"…… 15-INPUT #2, S%(8) …… 15-WEND(9) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M#1X”(10) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;F#20000.0X”(11) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1,14X”(12) …… 15-SLEEP 1(13) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y0,8,0X”(14) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,8,0,0X"(15) …… 15-PRINT “Hit a key to trigger the burst-mode acquisition...”…… 15-WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”(18) …… 15-WHILE (S% AND 2) <> 2…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“SPOLL 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, S%…… 15-WEND…… 15-PRINT “The Trigger has been detected...”(23) …… 15-PRINT “Waiting for the acquisition to complete...”(24) …… 15-WHILE (E% AND 1) <> 1…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“OUTPUT 07;U0X”…… 15- …… 15-PRINT #1,“ENTER 07”…… 15- …… 15-INPUT #2, E%…… 15-WEND(29) …… 15-PRINT “The acquisition is now complete...”(30) …… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U6X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"…… 15-LINE INPUT #2, U$…… 15-PRINT U$…… 15-UA$ = MID$(U$, 8, 6)…… 15-UA% = VAL(UA$)…… 15-PRINT UA%(37) …… 15-PRINT #1, “The MultiScan/1200 collected”; UA%; “scans of data.”(38) …… 15-FOR i = 1 TO UA%…… 15-PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R1X”…… 15-PRINT #1, “ENTER 14"…… 15-INPUT #2, SCAN$…… 15-PRINT “Scan ”; i; “ is :”…… 15-PRINT SCAN$(44) …… 15-NEXT I

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C

879696

Program Examples in Quick Basic C-35

The following program is BURST.BAS in the \EXAMPLES\ subdirectory. It will set up the MultiScan/1200
for an acquisition in single-channel high-speed burst mode and then bring the values into the controller
after the acquisition is complete.
•Lines 1-3: Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the MultiScan/1200 at the start of yourapplication by sending the Reset Power-On (*R) command. Wait a few seconds.

•

Lines 4-8: To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, Serial Poll the device
until the proper status is returned.

•

Lines 9-10: The first thing necessary to start scanning is to setup the measuring mode. In this case, theMultiScan/1200 will be setup for single-channel high-speed burst mode, and for a sampling frequencyof 20 kHz.

•Lines 11-12: The Configure Channels (C) command will be used once to configure Channel 1 as a 10Volt DC input. Insert a brief pause.

•Line 13: Using the Set Counts (Y) command, program the burst-mode acquisition for 8 blocks of 256
scans. Note that the Trigger (trigger start event) can only be assigned with the software Trigger On(@) command while the Stop (trigger stop event) can only be assigned with Count.

•Line 14: Using the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command, the Trigger (trigger start event) is
assigned the Trigger On (@) command character as sent by the controller, while the Stop (trigger stop
event) is assigned to Count. Both the Auto Re-arm flag and the synchronization flag are disabled, as
described in previous examples. When the MultiScan/1200 encounters the Execute (X) command, it
will be armed and will start the collection of the data.

•

Lines 15-23: After the last Execute (X) command has been received, the MultiScan/1200 arms itself
and then waits for the Trigger (trigger start event). The IEEE 488 Serial Poll (SPOLL) command isused to query the acquisition status of the MultiScan/1200. A SPOLL value of 2 signifies that theMultiScan/1200 has detected the Trigger.

•

Lines 24-29: Using the User Status (U) command U0 to query the Event Status Register (ESR), we now
wait until the Acquisition Complete event is reached. After the acquisition is complete, the singlechannel burst-mode data can now be retrieved using the standard retrieval commands keeping in mind
that the acquisition will look like 8 blocks of 256 channels.

•

Lines 30-37: During the acquisition or after the acquisition has been completed, the Acquisition
Buffer can be queried for the data that is available for transfer. The User Status (U) command U6 canbe used to query the Buffer Status String, which includes the following eight fields of information: (1)Number of Trigger Blocks Available, (2) Number of Scans Available, (3) Current Position of Read
Pointer, (4) Time/Date Stamping of Trigger Event, (5) Position of Stop Event Pointer, (6) Time/Date
Stamping of Stop Event, (7) Position of End Scan Pointer, and (8) Status of Current Trigger Block.
For more information on the Acquisition Buffer, see chapter System Operation.
This example uses the last parameter in the return string as an indicator of how much data is available
to transfer to the IEEE 488 controller. The function MID$ extracts 6 characters from the string U$
starting at character 8.

•

C-36

Lines 38-44: The Read Buffered Data (R) command R1 is used to request the oldest scan from the unit.
Using the variable UA% calculated from the previous step, all of the oldest scan data is transferred tothe controller.

Program Examples in Quick Basic

879696

TempScan / MultiScan, Appendix C